'Pi ml Fi'fl! Ilf'lll Si m ill B' ■■'iiiiii] mMA ! [ mmm Ifjiji I* 'I iiiiiil Mflif ill !iiw|!. iiiii Iff! "ilAii-illiii: i! !. ill 4 I''' iJII'ill llill ■'■■■■ ijill I lll.ll ijitV i! I til Wiii to 1 1!J lllilliilP ".ll!ill.l|ll| l|j W |ill ill,! l\ |i,|j -.'i',;^i.| iSf |ii ,|/ill,fU,ri mk km'ji* ■Liiii'i" a' .' 1111 ,r, 11 jl , 'l ll 111 ^l" i]l'i!iPl'gi'"iij., In M ' I 111 I ' 'di IH I 1 1 ||J| I ,' i"iii!"'|l'i'!iN'i« r"',|i^ilV,'i|'i h'''iNM4A,i|i|li'iI" 'iii^lniJiiiMllii,,,,! i'l,".^ '^ I, , ^■^ -"i T^ , 1 '|>M.< i ipllj , ^ if , 1 d1 I, ^l \ ■ i, '', s '■" ^'' hill ii a I ' *i •' f ' ' . |,,T'r]l I 1' 1,1 ¥U ■!. iiiliilWP'liiilliiiiilig woo>s mk OCEANOG^PHIC n^STITyTJ^ BOOK CpU^CTION, m r^ J eO _D •<■ ru g □ _ j: ^ □ m ^^^^ □ 3 ' = Marine Biological Lahoraiory '] L '^" RARY JUL 5 1977 Woods Hole, Mass. Biology Code of the CHEMICAL-BIOLOGICAL COORDINATION CENTER / / .Sh Biology Code of the CHEMICAL-BIOLOGICAL COORDINATION CENTER A system for coding results, pro- cedures, and conditions of tests for biological responses to chemicals Edited by Philip G. S|;itner in cooperation with George A. Livingston and Ann S. Williams Publication 790 NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES-NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL Washington 25, D. C. 1960 Library of Congress Catalog Number 60-60056 PREFACE This book describes a system for coding biological responses to chemicals. It is published in two volumes, a Biology Code and its attendant Key. Both were developed by the Chemical- Biological Coordination Center of the National Academy of Sciences- -National Research Council in the course of its work of organizing a large mass of chemical- biological data as described hereafter in the Introduc- tion to the Code. Established in 1946, the Chemical- Biological Coordination Center set out to develop methods for coding information on chemical structures and biological responses. Its ultimate aim was to pro- vide both a repository for such information and means for machine searching of the stored data. Its founders were emboldened by the expectation that if information of this kind could be coded on a large scale, machine methods would provide an important research tool for discovering and exploring corre- lations between chemical structure and biological activity. The concept of the Center had its roots in a widely felt need for ways to deal effectively with the growing mass of chemical- biological data, both published and unpublished. Pertinent experience had been gained during World War II by the testing program of the Insect Control Committee of the Office of Scientific Research and Development. The late Dr. Milton C. Winternitz, in particular, recognized the potential of that program and its possible extension with machine aids to the general field of chemical- biological relationships. With his characteristic dynamic enthusiasm he developed the idea of the Center and guided its establishment as a broad experimental undertaking in the service of science. The first essential step was the design of coding systems, one for chemical structures and one for biological responses. Newly developed accounting machines were available, and it was decided that punched card, machine sorting techniques should be used. To devise a coding system for chemical structures was the easier of the two tasks. C. Chester Stock directed the development of the Chemical Code, which was based on an existing scheme, the Frear chemical coding system, selected as a pattern because it was designed for punched cards and was therefore adaptable to machine sorting. As developed by the Center the chemical code was ulti- mately used to record the structures of approximately 63, 000 compounds. It was published by the Academy- Research Council in 1950 under the title, "A Method of Coding Chemicals for Correlation and Classification. " Except for a few extensions it was not subsequently modified. Construction of a coding system for biological responses proved to be more difficult. In 194 6 the Center took over, as its Biological Codification Panel, the Biological Codification Committee which had been established under the chairmanship of McKeen Cattell by the OSRD Insect Control Committee. Given the task of devising a satisfactory biological coding system, this Panel carefully reviewed the suggestions of various CBCC subcommittees and in 1950, through the devoted efforts of Raimon Beard, who agreed to assume the immediate direction of the undertaking, a functioning code was established. Comprehensive studies showed that workable coding procedures had been evolved, and the pro- gram of storing chemical and biological data went ahead. The Center collected and coded published data from the periodical literature and unpublished data from screening programs of various agencies, including those participating in the Center's own screening program. A total of some 220, 000 punched cards were eventually put into the Center's files, each representing one "unit of information", that is, one biological response to one chemical. These cards were coded from more than 75, 000 "code sheets", each containing data from one source of information on the biological responses of one chemical. Those who used the Biology Code soon realized that the complexities of coding biological re- sponses were such that an explanatory guide would be necessary if the coding and interpretation were to be uniform enough to insure efficient retrieval. Thus the Key to the Biology Code was progressively developed as coding experience grew. Also, the Code itself went through a number of revisions as corrections, additions, deletions, and annotations accumulated steadily. Despite the loyalty to the Center of agencies inside and outside the Federal Government, which provided financial support through its formative stages and the beginnings of larger- scale operations, funds could not be found to permit its growth to proportions that were considered necessary for its ef- fectiveness, and the Center was regretfully terminated by the Academy- Research Council in 1957. Many scientists contributed to this experiment in scientific documentation and correlation research. To all of them the gratitude of the Academy- Research Council is due. Chemists and biolo- gists were widely consulted in the establishment of criteria for the coding systems; the names of these individuals are listed in the present book, together with the names of committee and staff members who took part. Also, besides the few to whom reference by name has already been made, special men- tion should be made of the devoted services to the Center of Walter R. Kirner, its first Director (194 6- 1952), Karl F. Heumann, its second Director (1952- 1 956), and George A. Livingston, who was Acting Director during the final year (1956-1957). After the Center was closed, George A. Livingston, Philip G. Seitner, and Ann S. Williams, all of whom had served in its staff, undertook to prepare the Biology Code and Key for publication. They critically reviewed the accumulated additions, corrections, and suggestions in the files and reconsidered comprehensively the entire biological coding system. To Dr. Seitner fell the task of preparing drafts of the several parts of the Code and Key for the many conferences among the three editors, and of putting the manuscript in its final form. For their ready acceptance and faithful performance of an exacting assignment, the National Academy of Sciences- -National Research Council here records its appreciation to Dr. Livingston, Dr. Seitner, and Mrs. Williams. They have preserved a vital portion of the experience of the Center and have insured that it will be available to scientists and documentalists who can benefit by it. S. D. CORNELL Executive Officer National Academy of Sciences- - National Research Council - iv CONTENTS Page PREFACE i INTRODUCTION The Chemical- Biological Coordination Center ^ 1 Development of the CBCC Biology Code, A Brief History 3 Mechanical Equipment Used by the CBCC for Information Handling 4 The Biology Code General Character 5 Fields of the Code Considered as Independent Codes and Indexes 6 Organization of the Code as Related to the Machines Used 8 Detailed Nature of the Code; Its Limitations and Aspirations 9 The Key: the Manual to the Use of the Biology Code Origin and Description of the Key 10 Complexity of the Key and the Complexity of Coding 10 Considerations in Publishing the Details of the Biology Code and Key 11 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 14 CBCC Committee Members 15 CBCC Staff 20 CBCC Coders 20 FOREWORD 21 FIELDS OF THE BIOLOGY CODE Field A: Physical State of the Test Compound; Dispersion or Non- dispersion of the Test Compound; Indication that In- formation on Correlation of Chemical Structure and Biological Response Occurs in the Information Source 22 Field B: Conditioning Agent; Miscellaneous Information about the Test Compound Administration; Indication that in the Data Source there is Information on the Effect of pH on the Chemical Action 23 Field C: Solvent or Vehicle for the Test Compound 24 Field D: Secondary Compound 25 Page Field E: Organism or Pathological Condition Treated; Introduction 26 Taxonomy Code (Test Organism) 27 Tumor Code List of Tumors and Tumor Types with Code Symbols Assigned 68 Special List of Symbols for Anatomical Structures, to be used only for Construction of Symbols for Tumors 78 Pathology Code Representative List of Pathologies with Code Symbols Assigned 80 Causes of Disease; Disease Etiology Code Symbols, to be used for Construction of Symbols for Non-infectious Pathologies 83 Field F: Sex and Stage of Development of the Test Organism; Miscellaneous Information Concerning Tumors 88 Fields G-1 and G-2: Pretreatment or Experimental State of the Test Organism or of the Organ, Tissue, or Cell of the Test Organism 94 Fields H-1 and H-2: Gross Anatomy; Primary Anatomical and Secondary Anatomical Structures 98 Field I: Tissues, Cells, and Fluids Ill Field J: Host Organism; Test Environment 114 Field K: Sex and Stage of Development of the Host Organism 123 Field L: Pretreatment or Experimental State of the Host Organism or of the Organ, Tissue, or Cell (of the Host Organism) which is the Site of the Parasite, Non-infectious Pathology, or Tumor 124 Field M: Concentration of the Test Compound when Applied 128 Field N: Quantity of the Test Compound Applied 130 Field O: Dosage Frequency; Sequence of Administration of the Secondary Compound and the Test Compound 132 Field P: Duration of Treatment; Time between Administration of the Test Compound and a Secondary Compound 133 Field Q: Size of Inoculum or Implant 134 Field R: Time of Treatment Relative to Inoculation, Tumor Implantation, Sensitization, or Incitation of Non-infectious Pathology 135 Field S: Route and Manner of Administration of the Inoculum or Implant (Field S-1), of the Secondary Compound (Field S-2), and of the Test Compound (Field S-3) 136 Field T-1: Action of the Test Compound on the Biological State, Quality, or Process Coded in Field T-2 141 Field T-2: Biological State, Quality, or Process Acted on or Produced by the Test Compound or Secondary Compound 144 Enzyme Code 163 Page Field T-3: Category of the Test Compound's Effect, Representing Practical Use 169 Field U: Miscellaneous Time Values: Duration of Response to the Test Compound; Alteration of the Survival Time by the Test Com- pound; Time to Any Response to the Test Compound other than Death; Killing Time of the Test Compound; and Persistence of Activity of a Residue of the Test Compound 17 3 Field V: Time to Evaluation of the Response to the Test Compound 175 Field W: Qualification of the Negative and Positive Character of Test Results; Information about Slope of the Dosage Response Curve Present in the Data Source: Introduction 176 Qualification of a Negative Evaluation in Field Y 177 Qualification of a Positive Evaluation in Field Y 178 Fields X and Y: Criteria for Evaluation of Effectiveness (Field X) and Evaluation of Effectiveness (Field Y) of the Biological Response 181 Log-Probit Grid 193 APPENDDCES 195 Appendix A The Biology IBM Punched Card 1 97 The Biology Code Sheet 199 Coding of Chemical Structures; the CBCC Chemistry Code, the Chemistry IBM Punched Card; the Chemistry Code Sheet; the Chemistry Index Card 200 CBCC Files Code Sheet Files 207 IBM Punched Card Files Biology Punched Card Files 208 Chemistry Punched Card Files 210 Miscellaneous Files 211 Procedures of the CBCC in Collecting and Organizing Information Selection of Chemical-Biological Information 211 Assignment and Coding 212 Checking and Arbitrating of Coding 213 Processing of Biology Code Sheets by Chemists 213 Transfer of Coded Information to IBM Punched Cards 214 Filing of Biology Code Sheets 214 Correction of the Files 214 Page Advantages of the CBCC System of Coding and Machine Handling of Chemical- Biological Information 214 Appendix B Specificity and Adaptability of the Biology Code 217 Coding of Physical Properties of Chemicals 217 CBCC Experience in Correlation of Chemical Structures and Biological Responses 218 Qualifications of Coders; Residence vs. Non- residence of Coders 218 Checking of Abstracting and Coding 219 Speed of Processing Information into the CBCC Files; Currency and Content of the Files 220 Use of the Center's Coded Chemical- Biological Information 221 Aspirations of the Center 221 viii INTRODUCTION The following descriptions of the Chemical- Biological Coordination Center, its mechanical equipment, and the Biology Code will introduce the reader to the objectives of the Center and the Code. However, reference should also be made to the Appendix. The sections of this Introduction and the Appendix form a unit which explains how the Center attempted to meet its objectives, some of the inherent problems, and its accomplishments. The Chemical- Biological Coordination Center The Chemical- Biological Coordination Center (CBCC) was established on the premise that corre- lations exist between molecular structures of chemicals and biological responses to those chemicals and that studies of structures of chemicals causing known biological responses and of responses caused by chemicals of known structure could be of increasing orientative significance in research. Such studies should be a guide in (1) selection, synthesis, or search for chemicals to be tested for a given biological response and in (2) selecUng appropriate responses for which a given chemical should be tested. The basis for such studies was conceived as a collection of data demonstrating the known biological actions of chemicals whose structures are known. The CBCC strived especially to collect the diverse but often meager existing information about biological responses to thousands of tested compounds, rather than to attempt an analysis of the detailed data on the biological responses to only the more well-known and exhaustively tested compounds. The latter Information is normally available from monographs, reviews, and textbooks, while the former is frequently difficult to find in the literature or is unpublished. To make practical the study of such a large collection of data, mechanical means must be used for sorting and arranging the information, procedures which involve enormous and imprac- tical expenditures of time when done manually. Thus, the CBCC required a means of converting chemical and biological information to a language of symbols which could be Inscribed on a mechanical system. At the Ume the CBCC was established, no scheme was known to exist which could satisfy the specific and broad needs of the CBCC, either for chemical structures or for biological information. It is not the purpose here to present a detailed history of the CBCC and describe all its activi- ties; it is hoped that this may eventually be possible. However, certain observations on its evolution and activities which bear particularly on the Biology Code and the CBCC collection of biological data are appropriate. (The sponsors of the Center and the names of committee members and staff members are listed following this Introduction.) Although the CBCC had collected and organized considerable information from chemical-biological tests prior to the adoption of the present Biology Code, the collecting during that earlier period had to play a subordinate and supportive role to the major objective of developing methods for coding and handling the information. That picture was altered with the adoption of the Code in essentially the form presented here. In 1951, having developed the methods to do so, the Center decided to concen- trate on assembling information from every available source to create a file of data of the broadest nature which would permit any conceivable correlation in all fields of biology and with all types of chemicals. This decision was made only by resolving to abandon sponsorship of symposia and prepa- ration of reviews, several of which had been organized prior to 1951; with the funds available, it was not possible to meet both objectives adequately. It seemed reasonable that the path for the Center should be In original directions, not in sponsoring symposia and reviews which, for the immediate future, might be accomplished by other agencies. Thus, the CBCC organized during 1951 procedures for collecting information and coding it by the previously developed coding scheme. This involved finding coding personnel with adequate biological training, designing a means of training personnel for coding, and establishing a pattern for handling the selection of data to be coded, assigning it to appropriate coders, checking the coding, recording, filing, and IBM punching. A description of each of these procedures is included in the Appendix. It should again be emphasized that the Center's activities from 1951 were concentrated on build- ing its collection of information and improving its coding (indexing) of the information. Therefore, the evaluation of the Center should be in terms of the contemporary needs for a collection of such special information and for effective methods of handling and indexing it. Correlative studies of structures - 1 of chemicals and biological responses to those chemicals, which has been described as an initial inspiration for this collection, might have been a valuable result of the collection, but the Center was by no means committed to limiting its objectives to complex or theoretical correlative studies. To a degree, the collection has represented a source of information unavailable anywhere else, partly because some of its sources are not conveniently available to other agencies. This has been a natural result of the CBCC's deliberate efforts to search for more obscure sources of data from chemical- biological tests and the inclusion of test results from the CBCC's own unique and extensive Screening Program. (The Screening Program has been described in the general booklet describing the CBCC, the last edition of which was prepared in 1954. ) For this reason, and because the information has been indexed in ways exceeding any other existing index of the information, the CBCC files are regarded as a valuable reference source of information. As the Center's collection became more widely known, the number of information requests coming to the Center increased; most of these requested that the Center report whatever information its files might have on a subject for which the requester gave specifications. The requests were seldom for the Center's performing actual correlation studies, partly because it has been generally understood that such interpretive projects by the Center were impossible in view of the limitation of the Center's staff size and time and partly because generally the actual correlation can only be accomplished, to the ultimate satisfaction of the requester, by the requester himself. The Center has always had the attitude, however, that the files could be made available, by special request, to any visitor for any broad project of data correlation; none of the information included in the file bears a security classification and no material has been included which is restricted for proprietary reasons. Thus, the Center should be regarded as having been in its first years a source of both infor- mation and reference to information, supplementary to all other sources. That this has been appreciated is attested to by the use made of the CBCC files by an impressive number of agencies and individuals. The Center has rightly been regarded, also, as pioneering in the general field of documentation of scientific information, in developing its program for converting chemical and biological data to a form that can be handled practically by mechanical equipment. The CBCC was consulted frequently for advice for establishing other specialized programs of a similar nature and the Chemistry and Biology Codes have been studied and adapted for a number of such programs. Although it has not been possible to conduct broad correlative studies as originally intended (described in the first paragraph as a primary objective), leading to publications and chemical or biological research based on such studies, the Center's files have the important potential of correlative studies. Finally, by a program of col- lecting chemicals to be distributed to selected testing programs screening chemicals for specific effects, the CBCC Screening Program provided a service to this particular field of research that is probably unique and unprecedented. It made possible the testing of chemicals in many ways for which the agencies isolating or synthesizing the chemicals had no equivalent facilities, provided a rich source of chemicals for testing programs whose sources of untested chemicals were limited, and engendered thereby much information on chemicals' capacities for affecting biological systems, which is made available in the CBCC files and by the CBCC bi-monthly publication. Summary Tables of Biological Tests sponsored by the Chemical- Biological Coordination Center. A summation of the Center's aspirations related to coding of chemical-biological information will be found at the close of the final Appendix. The announcement of the CBCC's termination was made in December 1956. Therefore, essentially all activities for collection of information and coding into the CBCC files stopped as of that date. Although the files at the date of this publication have not been discarded, they are not generally available in that no staff exists to retrieve information from them. The Screening Program was likewise discontinued. Only one vestige of the CBCC remains active, though it is no longer identified with the Center. This is a specialized project which began as a CBCC responsibility, the Cardiovascular Literature Project of the National Research Council, sponsored by the National Heart Institute, National Institutes of Health. This, however, is not a program for extensive coding and indexing cardiovascular data by CBCC methods nor can it entertain requests for information about references to the literature except through sponsoring agencies. Its objective is to build and publish a comprehensive index to the literature on cardiovascular responses to chemicals, cross-indexed by author, title, and subject, to the extent possible as a publication. The original intent was for the CBCC to incorporate into its coded files all the cardiovascular information, as the project collected it. The final gesture in closing the Center is this publication of the Biology Code and Key and a description of the Center's procedures for coding information from tests for biological responses to chem- icals. While it is possible that no center will ever again be established with precisely the objectives of the CBCC nor would the new staff of such a center be inclined to find entirely suitable the present CBCC Biology Code and procedures for coding, the complete record of the CBCC experience in collecting - 2 - and coding this particular information must be a useful guide. Further, individual sections of the Biology Code can be used for coding information other than that from chemical-biological tests; the details would require being reduced or expanded, according to the special needs of the project, but they are presented here as a basis for a beginning. A Brief History of the Development of the Biology Code While the Biology Code and coding procedures must be considered to be the products of the Center's early experiments in coding, much important assistance came initially from the several sub- committees whose members were appointed by the Chairman of the National Research Council to serve in an advisory capacity to the Center. The members and chairmen of these committees are listed in another place. One of these committees in particular, the Biological Codification Panel, the Chairman of which was Dr. McKeen Cattell (later. Dr. Raimon L. Beard), guided the first experimental coding efforts. A detailed comparative review of the coding schemes tried prior to 1951 can not be made here. It is hoped that this can be recorded eventually in a history of the CBCC. However, the following paragraphs record an outline of the events and preliminary codes leading to the present. In 1949, a code was organized whose symbols were designed for use in recording biological information on IBM punched cards, subsequent to recording the information in code written on "work sheets". This code was entitled the General Biological Code of the Biological Codification Panel, Chemical- Biological Coordination Center. As its name suggests, the items of the code represented generalizations of information from chemical-biological tests; the items of the present Code's Field T-3 illustrate the character of the items of the earlier General Biological Code. A few examples here will assist in understanding this quality of generality: "Information is available relative to viruses"; "The test compound is a plant growth stimulant"; "The test compound affects the blood and circulation"; "The test compound is an insecticide"; "The test compound is a carcinoclastic agent". The total General Biological Code consisted of approximately 225 of these items, each of which had a different code symbol. With that Code, a single IBM punched card was used for each chemical for which the CBCC had chemical-biological information; on the card, Columns 1 through 54 were designated to be used for information about the chemical, leaving only 22 columns for punching symbols for biological information. (A description of the general IBM punched card will be found in the Appendix. ) The symbols for the items of the Code each consisted of three numerical units; the first two indicated a specific IBM punched card column and the third indicated the specific code item. Thus, by using the three IBM zone punches, each column afforded space for 12 code symbols and. In the 22 columns, a total of 264 symbols were available for 264 code items of such general nature as illustrated above. On this single IBM card, all information collected about the given compound's biological effects was punched; in other words, if any additional biological information were obtained, the card was retrieved from the file and the additional information punched on it, rather than placing each piece of information on a separate IBM punched card. This General Biological Code represented the product of the meetings of the Biological Codification Panel from early 1946 to the end of 1948. That Code was used for approximately a year, resulting in a large file of work sheets. It became apparent, however, from the experimental use of the files built on the Code, that the pattern was inadequate and it was recommended, therefore, that a complete revision be made of the pattern. The original procedure described above, which used only a single IBM card for each chemical, with the card containing all biological information collected relating to the chemical, was very quickly altered because of difficulties encountered in information retrieval. A new system was established whereby a separate IBM card was punched for each piece of biological information (each card having the information about the chemical used punched in Columns 1 through 54). The CBCC refers to these two systems, historically, as its "single card system" and "multiple card system". In using a separate card for each piece of biological information, it meant that on each card only one symbol would be punched for biological Information in the entire 22 IBM punched card columns. The next development was the preparation of a special experimental code resembling more the detailed character of the present Code. This intermediate code was designed specifically for 3 - information from insecticide tests and included features of the General Biological Code as well as symbols for details of insecticide tests, utilizing the entire space allotted to biology information on the IBM punched card (Columns 55 through 76). At this point, it was resolved to test the three systems, the single card system, the multiple card system, and the code designed especially for entomological data which was a modification of the multiple card system. This test was accomplished by coding the same data by all three systems and attempting retrieval of information from each of the three sets of IBM punched cards. The results of this test led to the decision that the CBCC Biology Code should be a detailed code using multiple cards and that the coding of biological details should be expanded. Consequently, in the spring of 1950, Dr. Beard visited the CBCC for two weeks at the invitation of the National Research Council and, with the cooperation of the 1950 staff members, guided the revi- sion to provide the coding detail needed. Most of the present coding "fields" were established and, within each field, lists of items were compiled to which code symbols were assigned. A further modification was the separation of the specific information about the test compound and the information about the biological test onto separate IBM punched cards so that the card on which was punched the biological information had only a serial number reference to the chemical used, the infor- mation about the chemical being on a special IBM punched card filed separately by that reference number. Thus, many more columns were made available for punching biological information on the special biology card. This code revision was duplicated and distributed internally as the second edition of the CBCC Biology Code. The Biology Code underwent two revisions within the same year and the fifth edition appeared in 1951. The revisions consisted mostly of changing the sequence of the coding fields as they ap- peared on the IBM card, adding new fields and new items in each field. It was during 1951 that the intricate procedure was established for the actual selection, coding, punching on IBM cards, and filing of chemical-biological information. By the end of 1951, a number of coders had been trained and information was being processed into the files. It had become apparent by 1952, from the innumerable problems encountered by the coders, that the Code itself, merely as a list of items and their symbols, was insufficient and that a manual for the use of the symbols under specific situations was essential. Early in 1952, the Code was revised again and, accompanying this revision, a manual for its use was prepared. The Code was distributed as the sixth edition and the manual, entitled The Key to the Detailed Biology Code, was distributed shortly thereafter. The same edition of the Code was used until the Center was closed in 1957, though a new edition of the Key was issued in 1953. During the years following 1952, a number of supplements to both the Code and Key were prepared notifying coders of changes and additions and by 1957 a revision was actually long overdue. Mechanical Equipment Used by the CBCC Before describing and commenting on the Code itself, it is necessary to explain briefly the equipment used for handling the coded information, since only by understanding this background will the design of the Code be appreciated. It is suggested also that the reader refer to the section of the Appendix describing the special procedures used by the CBCC, including description of the special IBM punched cards, the Code Sheets, and the Center's files. In recent years, research and development of machines for storage and retrieval of information has progressed at a remarkable rate. However, it can safely be said that development of new equip- ment and methods for greater speed and capacity does not necessarily mean total obsolescence for earlier equipment of lower capacity, since documentation programs differ widely in their needs. In the case of the CBCC, it was long recognized that the mechanical equipment at its disposal was inadequate for its purposes. It must be pointed out, however, that when the Center's program began, the equipment its information collection eventually demanded did not exist and commissioning the special design and construction of equipment was beyond the Center's resources. Nevertheless, while the equipment used bears no special design, it does represent an electronic mechanization for handling information which is far superior in speed to any comparable manual method. The CBCC Biology Code and coding methods have been patterned for this mechanized handling, but they are by no means dependent on the machines used and the coding done by use of the Code could be placed - 4 on other types of storage equipment. These observations are made to avoid any possible impression that the Biology Code is designed only for the equipment hereafter described. On the other hand, it should be made clear that this equipment is not being described as obsolete nor is it being necessarily described as inadequate for use with the Biology Code, except under the situation of storing and handling an enormous quantity of data such as that of the CBCC. Although the scope of the Center's information collection surpasses the capacity of the equip- ment it used, the fact that its early development has been with this equipment must be considered as a distinct advantage. It means that the procedures developed and described here are applicable to standard business machines which are widely available. It is therefore reasonable to suggest that the special designs for Code Sheets, IBM punched cards for biology coding, and the organization of the Code can be adopted directly for coding projects of more limited scope for which the machines will be fully adequate. The electronic machines used for handling the information consisted of standard International Business Machine equipment, including IBM punches, sorters, an interpreter, a reproducing punch, and a collator. Detailed descriptions of these machines and their uses are readily available elsewhere. Sorting has two general applications. The first and more obvious is that of arranging a file of punched cards in a given sequence (for example, in ascending Chemical Serial Number order). The second is in selecting (searching for) a card with a given symbol, or a group of cards related by having a given symbol in common, from a stack of cards or a file that is not in any order or not in such an order that would allow a rapid hand selection of the desired cards to be made. Both IBM sorters, Types 075 and 082, were available for the Center's use. Collation refers essentially to a process of merging or matching two sets of cards, but the IBM collator is used to perform additional functions; the most important uses to the Center were: (1) checking the filing sequence in files; (2) merging two or more separate groups of cards into one combined file; (3) selection of some desired combination of information on certain cards without disturbing the original order of the remaining card file; and (4) matching two or more groups of cards for coincidence of a given characteristic. The matching operation is probably the most useful in answering questions. An answer that would justify the use of the collator in matching would be composed of at least two "components", ordinarily a chemical component vs. one or more biological components. Each of these may be selected by hand from one of the files and the matching operation then determines which of the cards, having the essential biology information punched on them, match the cards having the essential chemical punching. The matching occurs through any identical punching of the Chemical Serial Numbers between chemistry cards and biology cards. Automatic reproduction of all or any part of the card may be accomplished on the reproducing punch. This permits establishing at will new or specialized files from existing cards. The same machine was used by the CBCC for the purpose of checking accuracy of punching as follows. The process of punching the information on either biology cards or chemistry cards was performed in duplicate. In other words, the card for the test organism file and the card for the biology serial file were each punched independently by different operators using the same coded information source. The two cards then were matched by the reproducer for identity and accuracy of punching; if a discrepancy between the supposedly identically punched cards occurred, the machine stopped and pointed out the exact discrepancy. The interpreter is designed to read the card perforations and print the code symbols they repre- sent; it can not interpret the code symbols into the biological information they represent. In addition, there is an electronic statistical machine (referred to as Type 101) which supple- ments the sorter. The latter is limited in function by being able to sort only in a single column of the punched card. For certain large tasks, the 101 is preferred because of its capacity to sort not only in a single column, but to sort selectively in many columns simultaneously. The Biology Code The General Character of the Biology Code: While the observations of this division and the next may be regarded as obvious by those readers accustomed to thinking in tenns of coding procedures, indexing, and mechanical storage of information, they are made because it is certain that they are not always immediately or clearly appreciated by new coders. In gaining initial understanding of the Biology Code, it might be helpful to approach it, perhaps unconventionally, by regarding it as a specially devised language. Indeed, any language is a code for transmission of thought, words being symbols used in an organized fashion. The Biology Code is com- posed of special symbols which provide at least three advantages, (1) condensation of ideas and ordinary words, (2) facility, resulting from condensation, to be handled by mechanical methods, and (3) a common medium of expression in a multilingual scientific society. The first of these may be appreciated by having examined the IBM punched card (illustrated and described in the Appendix) and items of the Biology Code. Any word, such as "emulsion" (a physical state of the test compound. Field A of the Code) could be recorded literally by perforations of the IBM card, using eight IBM punched card columns for the eight letters of the word. The purpose of the Biology Code is to reduce this idea to occupy the least possible space and it does so by substituting one symbol (the number 5 in Column 9 on the IBM punched card) for the other symbol (i. e. , for the word "emulsion"). Regardless of whether information is to be placed on punched cards or merely written, the brevity represents an advantage in recording. The abbreviation usually accomplished by devising code symbols, described above as the first of the advantages, provides mechanical advantage. Mechanical selection of a given word or idea is far more simple and rapid when only one mechanical motion or electric contact (or the minimum possible number of mechanical motions or electric contacts) needs to be made to accomplish the selection. The third advantage presumes that the Biology Code and the manual for its use (i. e. , the Key) can be translated into any contemporary language. The Biology Code symbols for the ideas conveyed remain the same and, to the extent that coding itself is successful in expressing information about a test, coded biological information on IBM punched cards (or on any other medium, such as electronic tape) can be universally exchanged. The Biology Code, then, is first a collection of terms and ideas which represent pieces of information that are typical of experimental application of chemicals to biological systems; these terms and ideas of the Code are expressed in a specially devised language of symbols, each of which is defined by its equivalent in the language by which tests are described. Therefore, the Biology Code might be regarded as a foreign language dictionary in which the words of one language are defined in terms of words of the other. The original list of terms and ideas ("items") of the Biology Code were those which were recommended by the biologists of the several CBCC subcommittees and biologists of the CBCC staff to meet the objectives of the Center. Since the second edition (refer to the description of the histor- ical development of the Code), many additional items have been added by the staff of the Center, to accommodate coding of all types of biological information. The Code's organization into fields and the influence exerted by the particular mechanical equipment used on the number and character of the fields are discussed in the following paragraphs. Fields of the Code Considered as Independent Codes and Indexes: The information about chemical-biological tests will be seen to lend itself to being organized into categories or types, such as the identity of the organism used, the anatomical part affected, the dosage used, etc. As explained in the next paragraph, organization of the Code is such that each of these cate- gories of information about chemical-biological tests Is treated independently. By virtue of this, any symbol used for an item of one category can be used for another item in another category. Just as, in any language, one word symbol may have different meanings according to how it is applied (e.g. , "left", "train", "press", "bream", "crab"). Symbol A, therefore, can be used as a symbol for one state of test compounds (adsorbed gas) and can be used also as a symbol for one phylum of test organisms (Chordata), as a symbol for an anatomical organ system (skin), etc. , according to the position in which it is placed on the mechanical system. To be able to treat these categories independently, it is necessary to establish each category's identity in the mechanical system used. Using standard business machines as its basic mechanical - 6 - equipment, the CBCC has organized the columns of the IBM punched card into significant categories. (Refer to the Illustration of the IBM punched card in the Appendix. ) Thus, to cite an example, of the total 80 IBM punched card columns available, the CBCC established that one column (Column II) was to be reserved for only one category of Information, the solvent of the test compound. Since nothing else might be recorded at that position on the card, any symbol being punched in that column must refer to a solvent and can not represent a taxonomy phylum or organ system, nor have any other meaning. Each of these categories Is referred to as a coding "field", being restricted to a single desig- nated ("fixed") area or field of the IBM punched card. Each field bears a strict definition of the cate- gory of information that can be coded in it. (In a few fields, the CBCC codes two categories of information when one or both categories has so few items that no coding interference occurs. Examples are Fields A, B, F, K, O, P, and W. ) The division of the total Biology Code Into fields is discussed in the following section. The alphabetical designations of the fields has no significance except as a convenient reference. These designations were made after the various categories had been arranged in what seemed a convenient sequence for reading the information. Whether the sequence seems equally convenient to everyone is perhaps no more important than whether the position of keys on a typewriter suits everyone's fancy; the significant fact is that they are fixed and the coder and interpreter soon learn their positions. Throughout the Code and Key, the fields are referred to by their alphabetical designations except when it has seemed clearer to refer to them by naming the information category. It may be understood, then, that the total Biology Code is really a composite of many independ- ent codes. Field A represents a code for physical states of chemicals, Field H is a code for gross anatomical structures. Field T-2 is a code for biological states, qualities, or processes which can be caused or affected by chemicals, etc. Many of these codes (i. e. , independent fields of the CBCC Biology Code) could be used independently and for purposes other than indexing chemical-biological test Information. The Taxonomy Code (Field E) might be used for terms of a card index of organisms or information on organisms; the Tumor Code (also Field E), the code for organs (Field H), the code for tissues (Field I), etc. , each might be used independently. On the other hand, certain of the Biology Code fields would be of dubious value extracted from the Code; for example, the code for the action of the test compound (Field T-1) has little meaning except when used with an item of Field T-2 indicating the biological state, quality, or process acted on. The purpose of the CBCC Biology Code (to refer to the several codes or "fields" collectively again) is not cryptogrammic, but documentary; its objective is the indexing of information from chemical- biological tests, using the specially adapted language of symbols. Therefore, each of the coding fields should be regarded as an indexing criterion for storage of information ("documentation"). For example, all chemical-biological tests must involve a biological system, either an organism or a tumor or pathology of an organism; by the use of symbols of Field E, all information recorded by the CBCC is indexed according to the organism, the tumor, or the pathology. If all information related to a specified organism were wanted and if the arrangement of the file had no relationship to organisms, the only means of sorting out the information desired without dis- rupting the established order of the file (arranged according to chemicals, e. g. ) would be by examining each card for the organism name. To do this manually becomes impractical, if the file is of any size and if such a search is to be made repeatedly. Two alternatives exist, (1) duplicating the cards of the initial file and establishing a second file in which the cards are arranged according to a test organism classification or (2) marking the cards in the original file so that organisms' identities are "recognized" by a mechanical apparatus such as an IBM sorter. The second of these alternatives, made practical by speed of machines, is actually equivalent to the first alternative; in other words, both represent a file of information indexed by organisms. An advantage of the latter is that the two Indexes ([1] the index according to which the cards are arranged in the file and [2] the organism index) are contained in a single set of cards, representing conservation of storage space. In addition, in- formation might be wanted related to specified anatomical parts, biological responses, routes of administration, dose size, etc. , as well as organism and chemical identities. In the case of each of these, the information could be efficiently sorted from the information collection only by a special file indexed by that criterion (anatomical part, biological response, etc. ) and, as in the case of the organism index described above, each can be established within a single file of cards by marking the anatomical part, the biological response, etc. on each card so that it can be recognized and sorted by a mechanical apparatus. Thus, the basic advantage offered by coding chemical-biological information and placing the coded information on a medium that can recognize and sort the coded information mechanically, such as IBM punched cards or electronic tape or wire, is that many indexes can be composited in a single file, representing an economy of space in information storage. The Appendix will disclose that, in spite of using mechanical equipment and punching all information (i. e. , all the indexing criteria) in a single file, the CBCC established several separate punched card files for separate indexes (test organism, host, anatomical part, etc.). While this might seem to contradict the claims just made for conservation of storage space and advantage of machines, it is actually only evidence of a complication arising from the size of the Information collection and the limitation of machines used. The Appendix should be consulted for an explanation of this. Under the general section describing the CBCC files, see "Biology IBM Punched Card Files". A number of the fields of the Code are not expected to be used frequently, if ever, as indexes for retrieval of coded information. Fields T-1, V, and R are fields (i. e. , indexing criteria) which should probably be regarded as essentially useless as retrieval criteria (the action of the test compound [increasing, decreasing, initiating, antagonizing, etc. ], the time to evaluation of the effect, and the time of treatment with the test compound relative to the time of inoculation, respectively). Fields A, B, C, F, G, K, L, O, P, 0, S, and U (refer to the Code for their descriptions) are of more probable use as indexes, yet are of minor importance compared to the remaining fields, in terms of frequency of use. Since a number of the coding fields can be regarded as of little importance as general retrieval criteria, they must be considered from other standpoints. First, it should be pointed out that an index which may have a low incidence of use for general retrieval of information in the CBCC coded files may be of critical importance when studying and correlating a mass of chemical-biological information of a circumscribed nature, such as all anti-malarial chemotherapy tests, all rodent repellency tests, all tumor inhibiting tests, etc. , since the ability for separation of information according to this detail might be expected to become more important as the study of information becomes more specialized. Secondly, an advantage may be assumed for having available from the mechanized file of information as many details of a test as possible, in a code language, making the coded information as self- sufficient as possible; this would be especially true in the case of a system by which it was not Intended that reference would be made to the original data or to a written abstract. The CBCC has regarded coding in the light of both of these aspects and while perhaps none of the coding fields should be considered to be totally valueless as an index, some of them may be regarded as having more signif- icance as a means of expressing in code language all aspects of chemical-biological tests. The Organization of the Biology Code as Related to the Machines Used for Handling Coded Information: To return to the matter of determining the number of information categories (coding "fields") to be included in the CBCC Biology Code and the limits of each, it must be recognized that the CBCC was committed to using standard business machines. The limitations of this equipment, as well as the equipment's advantages, were impressed on the structure of the Biology Code. This can be said of every mechanical system and when coded chemical-biological information is placed on other media, such as electronic tape, the limitations and advantages of that system will likewise be impressed on the code used, influencing such decisions as that for the number of information categories. After studying the IBM equipment and methods, the CBCC decided that the IBM punched card handling of masses of coded information concerning individual chemical-biological tests was practical only by restricting the information about any given test to a single IBM punched card. Having made this decision, coding of information about the test was limited to less than 80 IBM punched card columns. Eight columns are needed for the eight units of the CBCC Chemical Serial Number identifying the chemical used in the test; nine more columns are needed for the six units of the Code Sheet Number, the two units of the Code Line Number, and the single unit of the IBM Punched Card File Number. Thus, actually only 63 columns are available for information coded by the Biology Code. The 63 available columns can not be utilized independently to permit coding of 63 types of information, since a few of the types of Information require more than one IBM column. Thus, the CBCC apportioned the available IBM columns to the various categories of information it considered most essential in order to have converted into code language as completely as possible the record of the test and, by the same token, to index the information to provide the greatest possible retrieval and correlative facility. The Key description of each of the code fields generally explains why a given type of information can be adequately coded using only a single IBM punched card column or why more columns must be - 8 - used. Therefore, as the Key Is studied, an understanding will be gained of the apportioning of the total available punched card columns to each category of information. For example, eight IBM punched card columns have been committed to coding the biological system (a test organism or a tumor or pathology of an organism) and this group of eight columns is regarded as a single coding field, representing a major category of biology information. Considering coding of test organisms only, it will be seen that test organisms might be given simple serial numbers, so that the Norway rat might have been assigned Symbol 1, a species of mosquito Symbol Z, a species of bacteria Symbol 3, the tobacco plant Symbol 4, etc. Had this been done, the few hundred (or perhaps, few thousand) organisms that may reasonably be expected to be used in chemical-biological tests might have been accommodated by considerably fewer than eight columns. Instead, the CBCC recognized not only the desirability but the necessity of indicating by code the taxonomic affinities of each organism used. Thus, the total field of eight columns was sub-divided into what might be thought of as sub-fields. As a result, only a single IBM punched card column was assigned to coding of the phyla to which organisms belong; a single column was assigned to coding of classes; a single column to coding of orders; two columns to coding of families; two columns to coding of genera; and one column to coding of species (or strains). As an illustration of the apportioning of IBM punched card columns, this particular example has been chosen with the secondary objective of preventing any initial impression that certain coding fields, such as Field E, have been assigned a number of IBM columns providing a number of code symbols far beyond the needs of the CBCC coding. This misap- prehension will be avoided by recognizing that, within the fields representing major categories of information, the IBM columns may be committed to special sub-categories of information such as phyla, classes, or orders of test organisms, the coding of each of which i£ satisfied by one or two columns. The question as to whether the 63 available IBM punched card columns are sufficient or are more than sufficient is not to be answered positively one way or the other, except in terms relative to the character of the particular coding project. This is discussed in the Appendix, in terms of the particular needs of the CBCC and of the Code's adaptability. The Detailed Nature of the Code; Its Limitations and Aspirations: While the CBCC functioned, there was always the reasonable assumption that any special Information collection elsewhere might be advantageously indexed (coded) to be coUatable with the Center's coded files. Even with the Center discontinued, it has not been unreasonable to hope that the Biology Code might be accepted as, or serve as the basis for, a standard, so that information might be freely exchanged between open collections and so that information of one collection might be collated with that of another. Many of the specialized information collections now being Initiated are private and some are even confidential for proprietary purposes. Thus, coding of chemical-biological information in these collections may be frankly as much cryptogrammic as it is documentary. Beyond this, most projects of information collection are severely subject to justifications of time and expense in coding; the additional effort of coding to a standard and more complex scheme Is, at least under the present situation, not apt to be viewed in many cases as offering foreseeable practical advantage. When an information collection is limited in scope, the variety of indexing criteria and items is correspondingly less than that needed by the CBCC to index (code) information of all types. For example, if the information collection were never to involve more than twenty or twenty-five organisms, simple sequential code symbols of a single unit might be entirely adequate for organism code iden- tification. The same would be true of categories of Information other than test organisms. Because of its broad character, the CBCC Biology Code has frequently been regarded critically as too detailed for practical considerations in indexing information collections of a limited nature. If it develops that all future collections of information about chemical-biological data are to be collections of specialized nature and that the coding of each is to be referable to none of the others or to no central and standard coding scheme, much of the effort spent on the CBCC Biology Code may prove unfortunately to have been wasted. This Code is presented with the conviction that it will prove something more than a key to the information collected and coded by the CBCC during its active period. It may be hoped that eventually this Code or a derivative will be found universally acceptable and will serve as the basis for better - 9 exchange, documentation, and correlation of Information about biological responses to chemicals than is evident at the present time. The Manual to the Use of the Biology Code: The Key to the Biology Code The Origin and Description of the Key : It has already been noted, in describing the development of the Code, that a manual for its use was discovered very quickly to be essential and that this was first prepared in 1952. The term, "Key", applied to this manual may not have been entirely appropriate in view of the fact that a key to a code is most commonly regarded as the definitions for its symbols while the code is thought of as merely the symbols (i. e. , the code language). The term has persisted, however, and the Key to the Biology Code will be understood to refer to the manual for explaining items of the Code, the Code symbols, the procedure for their use, and retrieval of coded information. A new edition of the Key in 1953 Incorporated certain changes, but no major revision was made. In preparing the Key for this published edition, every section has been re-written, attempting to clarify the organization, purpose, and use of each field (i. e. , of each "subsidiary code" of the total Biology Code). In this revision, every effort was made to use the many residual notes from coders outlining problems encountered in coding certain information and suggesting additions. It is not inappropriate to point out that many details concerning early decisions about coding procedures and arrangement and use of code items and symbols had never been recorded in an organized fashion or at all, some of the staff members making the provisions have since resigned, and memory of the complex of factors con- sidered in making decisions has been imperfect. As a result, the task of preparing the Key has been difficult and consumed time far beyond expectations. The incentive in making it as thorough as possible has been the conviction of its value, from the standpoints of explaining each field, its future use with the Biology Code per se, and of conveying to the prospective coder or agency considering coding biology Information some better idea of the nature of the task which coding represents. For each field, the Key explains first any special organization of the items in the field and the structure of the symbols for the items. This is followed by a section describing the purpose of the field and its general relationship to the other fields of the Code in coding information about a given chemical-biological test as a "code line". The final section is devoted to details of use of the symbols for specific types of information and it attempts in most cases to explain the reasons for the particular procedure rather than to present the coder or general reader with a stark set of rules and rule exceptions. The Complexity of the Key and the Complexity of Coding: Each of the CBCC resident staff members and, doubtless, each of the CBCC coders has the memory of his first reaction to the Key, the manual describing coding of chemical-biological tests using the Biology Code. An Introduction to the CBCC Biology Code and Key could hardly omit, there- fore, a few words preparing the new coder, or anyone reviewing the Code, for the Key. The Key, as It is presented here, is an expansion of the 1953 edition. The expansion has been made with the view of explaining. In turn, each coding field more thoroughly than did the earlier editions of the Key. The detailed character of the Key has met with some criticism. Paradoxically, the criticism is a wind that blows both ways. By persons who have had little experience in reducing chemical- biological test Information to code, the suggestion has been made that the present Key for coding biological data is far too detailed and that its Intelligibility is reduced by the sheer volume of minutiae. However, when the Key has been criticized by coders, it is to the effect that coding provisions have not always been adequately explained so that, when a special coding problem is encountered, the coder has no recourse but to correspond with the Center, when he might otherwise have been able to understand himself how to accomplish the solution. The initial impact of such a volume of details might understandably alarm the uninitiated, making the Code seem more Intricate than it actually is. This is possibly because coding is so fre- quently expected to be easy, mechanical, and requiring a minimum of cerebral exertion; to discover It might be otherwise can be a rude awakening. It is of course ironical that the CBCC, which had as 10 one of its objectives facilitating the handling of information, may be subject to having its own Code's description (i. e. , the Key) criticized as being abstruse because of its concern with detail. A more careful examination will reveal that the bulk of the Key is made of basic explanations, to which the coder need seldom return once the general coding pattern is well in mind, and explanations for special and sometimes rare coding problems, to which the coder will turn when a problem is encountered. One observation which may prove a common one has been made, that too little has been assumed In the text of the Key and that much explanation has been made that is unnecessary and even unflattering to the chemical or biological specialist. The CBCC conviction that this assumption is a serious error Is based on experience with persons who have proved talented as coders and who have considerable erudition in one or another special field of biology and chemistry. They do not all know, nor do any pretend familiarity with, all biology and chemistry met with in chemical-biological tests. Furthermore, none of them had, prior to their CBCC association, experience in transforming these facts to a coded state. It is unrealistic to make the assumptions that all biologists are necessarily trained in all fields of biology and chemistry or that they remember all aspects of the field in which they have concentrated their study. A professional taxonomist should not assume the taxonomy of insects, for example, to be well known by each pharmacologist. The pharmacologist should not expect antagonism and its measure- ment to be well known to the taxonomist. Neither is it realistic to assume that these scientifically trained persons will all find easy the translation of biological data into code, even if the data are completely understood. It can not even be assumed that everyone assigned as a coder to a coding project is necessarily to be trained in the biological sciences. Thus, the persons for whom the Key is intended to be a reference are highly varied in their training. However, the Key Is not actually written nor intended for the biologically untrained person. It is intended as a coding manual for persons untrained in coding, whether they are biologists, chemists, or otherwise. There must be some middle ground in presenting the explanation for coding and the present approach is to assume that principally biologists are being addressed, but emphatically biologists of all descriptions: pathologists, plant physiologists, horticulturists, animal taxonomists, bacteriologists, anatomists, pharmacologists, biology librarians, etc. Coding can be reduced to a simple procedure in some cases, but even the most simple coding demands establishing conventions which must be adhered to and the conventions must be logical. Furthermore, if the coder is trained as a scientist, it is probable that he has the curiosity to want to understand the reasoning behind the coding procedures. The reasons for a given procedure must be understood not only for establishing other procedures the character of which must depend on already existing procedures, but for intelligent retrieval of information coded by those procedures. It is difficult for persons who have not contended with coding problems to appreciate what these facts mean and how invaluable are the details explaining coding conventions that must be adhered to. To entertain the opinion that the explanatory details are superfluous can only mean a lack of appreciation of the enormous amount of time and patience (and money) wasted under circumstances in which there exists no single reference to those details that are so easily forgotten or become confused. The composition of this Key has as its objective the provision of a reference for coding pro- cedures. If a more brief Key is more practical for ordinary use in coding chemical-biological infor- mation, by all means it should be devised by the adapter, and this can be done from the information in the present Key. Considerations in Publishing the Details of the Biology Code and Key Certain questions were posed by the circumstances of the Biology Code and Key being published only after the disruption of all activities of the Center. No serious doubts have been held about the basic matter, that the Center's experience in biology coding should be made available by publication of the Biology Code, Including a record of the procedures used by the Center for handling of biological information. However, at the time the task was begun for preparing the publication, two indeterminate factors made difficult certain decisions about the form in which the Code should be published. 11 First, the disposition of the CBCC collection of coded information was uncertain. Therefore, there was no assurance that the files, as static files, would ever again be consulted on a regular basis, a factor that was irrespective of the undetermined intrinsic worth of the finite collection. How- ever, the assumption was made that the files might possibly be used and that the unaltered Biology Code might be needed for its interpretation. The second factor was the question of the extent of usefulness of a Biology Code whose design and detail had been based on the special objectives and mechanical equipment of the CBCC. The Code was recognized as being too detailed and broad in scope for use in coding and indexing information collections of very limited nature, and not sufficiently detailed in certain of its coding fields for certain other uses. It was disturbing also to recognize that the act of closing the Center had the unfortunate but unavoidable effect of creating an atmosphere of failure which the Center's Code and methods would bear with them. For these reasons, an alternative to publishing the Biology Code in its entirety had to be considered, that of publishing only an outline of the Code with examples and a very brief resume of the use of the Code. It was finally agreed that the greatest value of the CBCC experience in coding biological information actually resided in those details which would be omitted in publishing only an outline. The Code and Key, therefore, are presented here in essentially the form used by the Center. The question as to whether to make revisions for the published form was finally settled by resolving to incorporate all the suggestions made by coders and resident staff members, since it seemed senseless to present, as a publication, a code in which there were recognized deficiencies that could be corrected. This decision was made in the face of the impossibility of altering the files to bring them to conformity with any alterations in the Code and Key. Thus, there was the prospect of defeating one purpose in publication, that of preserving the Code as an interpretive tool for the CBCC files of information. The decision to incorporate changes had to be made, then, by accepting the philosophy that the balance of the argument was for a corrected version for publication, leaving the files to be interpreted by the last unpublished edition of the code lists, assisted by information in the published Key and Code. It must be made clear that most of the alterations are minor. In most fields, no changes have been made except to enlarge and, it is hoped, to clarify the definition and use of symbols. In certain of the fields, some of the items have been only slightly rearranged or redefined to make a more logical pattern and this has involved making a few changes in symbols. On the other hand, the lists of the Taxonomy Code (Field E) were all reviewed and the classification and code symbols were revised where it seemed appropriate. The published symbols for test organisms must therefore no longer be depended on for retrieval from the CBCC files, even though certain of the organism groups are essentially as they were when the information in the files was coded. It might be said that, had there been promise of resumption of coding information into the CBCC files, revisions of the Taxonomy lists might have been more conservative in view of the task it might involve to retrieve all the coded information and recode it according to the new lists. The Tumor Code and Pathology Code were both analyzed and the organization and symbols entirely replaced; neither had been used to any extent by the CBCC, because so few tumor and pathology identities had actually been needed for coding the type of information selected by the CBCC. Unfortu- nately, no explanation was prepared or survived for the original Pathology Code symbols and very little was recorded for the Tumor Code. The analysis of these sections of the Biology Code, in terms of time and effort, was an expensive lesson which strengthened the conviction that the detailed explanation of the Biology Code and its parts are more valuable than the bare lists of code items and symbols which conceivably might be compiled by anyone. In preparing this edition of the Code (as a list of symbols with their definitions), there has been some deviation from the principle of restricting the definitions of symbols to the briefest possible form. The merits of brevity are not underestimated, especially when speed is important in scanning a list to select the most appropriate item; to provide this quality to the Code, essentially all instructions and explanations are omitted from it and compiled separately as the Key. Nevertheless, there are limits to which abbreviation can be carried beyond which the definitions and efficiency in use are impaired. It has seemed certain that confusion of the coders and many errors in coding have been directly due to inadequacies of explanation and definition in the Code (regardless of the adequacy of explanations in the Key). This is also indicated from the experience of the resident staff members in using the Code. 12 Weighing the factors involved, the definitions have been expanded in some fields, including more specific directions than was typical of the mimeographed editions used previously by the CBCC coders. When a coder uses certain symbols constantly, he eventually becomes so familiar with their use and limitations that he needs no longer to refer to the Key nor even consult the definition in the Code. While this may lead to overconfidence which may in turn lead to coding errors, it is reasonable that the coder who has developed familiarity with the symbols would prefer having those symbols listed with definitions of one word or the fewest possible words. A given coder, however, never uses all of the Code's symbols with consistent frequency; some symbols are rarely used. Further, although coding has been generally assigned in accordance to coders' special biological fields of interest, this is not always possible and coders constantly must use symbols with whose definitions and use they are less familiar. It is certain that a beginning coder finds helpful having a relatively complete and distinguish- ing definition for each symbol, including basic specifications for its use, with the symbol in the Code; anyone examining the Code lists, in considering their appropriateness for other coding projects, should also find advantageous more complete definitions of the symbols. Whether a proper balance has been struck between the completeness of definitions in the Code and the explanations of the Key, can not be certain. It is probable that, from the present Code, each coder or coding project might want to extract the items used most frequently and list them with defini- tions of the desired brevity. Appendix B further discusses the published Code's character and adaptability, as well as CBCC problems and ambitions related to the Biology Code and its coding procedures. 13 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The Chemical- Biological Coordination Center was sponsored by the Department of the Army, the Office of Naval Research and the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery of the Department of the Navy, the Atomic Energy Commission, the National Cancer Institute, and the American Cancer Society. After the Center's termination in December 1956, the National Science Foundation made generous grants for cer- tain final activities, including the preparation of the Biology Code for publication. Subsequently, the National Institutes of Health gave support to the final stages of the task in preparing the Biology Code, which has taken far longer than originally estimated. It is appropriate in this publication to express special gratitude' to the two last named agencies, since without the continued interest and support of NSF and NIH, the present edition of the Code could not have been completed as the editors wanted it. The general responsibility for all terminating activities of the CBCC was placed on the NAS-NRC Division of Chemistry and Chemical Technology of which Dr. Clem O. Miller is Executive Secretary. Com- pletion of the review and amendment of the Biology Code, which have been made under irregular and often trying circumstances, has fre- quently depended on Dr. Miller's administrative efforts and his faith in the judgments of the editors. For bearing with this undertaking and its problems over the many months, the editors wish to express their gratitude to Dr. Miller. On the following pages are listed members of those CBCC committees and subcommittees which contributed particularly to the early development of CBCC methods for handling biological data, including the initial codes. The Biology Code also owes much to various members of the CBCC staff, including the coding staff. Con- sequently, in recognition of their varied contributions to the Code, the members of the resident staff, including biologists, chemists, and supervisors of the Screening Program, are listed, as well as the non-resident coders of the final years. 14 CBCC COMMITTEE MEMBERS (Dates are approximate only) Adams, Roger: Advisory Committee 1947 through 1952; Chairman of the Organic Chemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Ball, Eric G. : Member of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Barron, E. S. G. : Member of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1947 to 1949. Bauer, Walter: Member of the Medicine Subcommittee 1947 through 1949. Beard, Raimon L. : Member of the Biological Codification Panel 1947 through 1952. Chairman of the Biological Codification Panel 1951 and 1952. Member of the Executive Committee 1949 through 1950. Member of the Entomology Subcommittee from 1949 through 1952; chairman of the Entomology Subcommittee from 1950 through 1952. Member of the 1952 Steering Committee. Bernheim, Frederick: Member of the Physiology-Pharmacology Subcommittee 1947 to 1949. Bishopp, Fred C. : Member of the Entomology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Blanchard, Kenneth C. : Member of the Chemotherapy Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Bodensteln, Dietrich: Member of the Entomology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Boell, E. J. : Member of the Biological Codification Panel 1947 through 1952. Bovarnick, Max: Member of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1947 to 1949. Boyce, A. M. : Member of the Entomology Subcommittee 1947 to 1949. Brown, Thomas M. : Member of the Medicine Subcommittee 1950 through 1952; vice-chairman of the Medicine Subcommittee 1951 through 1952. Cannan, R. Keith: Alternate member of the Executive Committee (alternate for Dr. Winternitz) 1952 through 1953. Member of the Executive Committee 1953 to 1957. Cattell, McKeen: Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1952; vice-chairman of the Advisory Committee 1948 to 1949; chairman of the Advisory Committee 1949 to 1952 when Advisory Committee was discontinued. Chairman of the Physiology- Pharmacology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Chairman of the Biological Codification Panel 1947 through 1950; member of the Biological Codification Panel through 1952. Member of the Executive Committee 1948 through 1952. Member of the 1952 Steering Committee. Chambers, William H. : Member of the Physiology-Pharmacology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Cleland, Ralph E. : Member of the Executive Committee 1950. Comroe, Julius H. , Jr.: Member of the Physiology-Pharmacology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Cope, Arthur C. : Member of the Organic Chemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Cottam, Clarence: Member of the Mammology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Davis, Bernard D. : Member of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1949 through 1952. De Beer, Edwin J. : Member of the Committee on Industrial Liaison 1954. Drake, Nathan L. : Member of the Organic Chemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1952; vice-chairman of the Organic Chemistry Subcommittee late 1947 through 1952. - 15 - Dubos, Rene J. : Member of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1947 to 1948. Dunham, Lucia J. : Member of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1952. Eagle, Harry: Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1952. Chairman of the Chemotherapy Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Elderfield, Robert C. : Member of the Organic Chemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Fothergill, Leroy D. : Member of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1947 through 1949. Friend, Roger B. : Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1950. Member of the Entomology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952; chairman of the Entomology Subcommittee 1947 through 1950. Fruton, Joseph S. : Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1950. Member of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1952; chairman of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1950. Gellhorn, Alfred: Member of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1950 through 1952. Gersh, Isadore: Member of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1950 through 1952. Oilman, Alfred: Member of the Physiology-Pharmacology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Member of the Biological Codification Panel 1947 through 1952. Goddard, David R. : Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1952. Chairman of the Plant Sciences Subcommittee (originally the Plant Physiology Subcommittee) 1947 through 1952. Member of the Biological Codification Panel 1948 through 1952. Member of the 1952 Steering Committee. Griggs, Robert F. : Member of the Advisory Committee in 1947. Chairman of the Plant Ecology Sub- committee which was discontinued in 1947. Hagan, William A. : Member of the Veterinary Medicine Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Hall, Stanley A. : Member of the Committee on Coding of Chemical Reactivities 1953 to 1957. Hanson, Harry G. : Member of the Sanitary Engineering Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Harris, Stanton A. : Member of the Committee on Industrial Liaison 1954. Harvey, A. McGehee: Member of the Advisory Committee 1948 through 1952. Member of the Executive Committee 1948 through 1950. Member of the 1952 Steering Committee. Member of the Medicine Subcommittee 1947 through 1952; Chairman of the Medicine Subcommittee 1948 through 1952. Henderson, John M. : Member of the Sanitary Engineering Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Herriott, Roger M. : Member of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Hilbert, O. E. : Chairman of the Committee on Coding of Chemical Reactivities 1953 to 1957. Alternate member of the Executive Committee 1953 (alternate to Dr. W. A. Noyes). Hodge, Harold C. : Member of the Executive Committee 1953. Chairman of the Committee on Industrial Liaison 1954. Horsfall, James O. : Member of the Plant Sciences Subcommittee (originally called the Plant Physiology Subcommittee) 1947 through 1952. Chairman of the Executive Committee 1953 to 1957. Hotchklss, Rollin D. : Member of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1949 through 1952. Hueper, Wllhelm 0. : Member of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1952. Irish, Don D. : Member of the Committee on Industrial Liaison 1954. - 16 - Jellison, William L. : Member of the Subcommittee on Mammology 1947 through 1952. Johns, Iral B. : Member of the Committee on Industrial Liaison 1954. Kearns, Clyde: Member of the Committee on Coding of Chemical Reactivities 1953 to 1957. Kellog, Remington: Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1952. Chairman of the Mammalogy Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Kelser, Raymond A. : Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1952. Chairman of the Veterinary Medicine Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Kirner, Walter R. : Member of the Executive Committee 1951; Secretary of the Executive Committee and Director of the Center to 1952. Kruse, C. W. : Member of the Sanitary Engineering Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Larkey, Sanford V. : Member of the Executive Committee 1954 to 1957. Lee, Milton O. : Alternate member of the Executive Committee (alternate for Dr. P. Weiss) 1953. Longcope, Warfield T. : Member of the Advisory Committee 1947; replaced by Dr. Harvey in 1948. Chairman of the Medicine Subcommittee 1947. MacLeod, Colin M. : Member of the Chemotherapy Subcommittee 1947 through 1950. Vice-chairman of the Chemotherapy Subcommittee late 1947 through 1950. Marsh, David Fielding: Member of the Physiology- Pharmacology Subcommittee 1950 through 1952. Martin, Harry M. : Member of the Veterinary Medicine Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Maynard, L. A. : Member of the Executive Committee 1956. Metcalf, Robert L. : Member of the Entomology Subcommittee 1949 through 1952. Meyer, K. F. : Member of the Medicine Subcommittee 1947 through 1950. Meyer, Samuel L. ; Member of the Committee on Coding of Chemical Reactivities 1953 to 1957. Mitchell, John W. : Member of the Plant Sciences Subcommittee 1949 through 1952. Mosettig, Erich: Member of the Chemotherapy Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Mueller, John H. : Member of the Advisory Committee 1 947; replaced by Dr. Tatuminl948. Chairman of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1947. Niemann, Carl; Member of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1947 to 1949. Noyes, W. Albert, Jr. : Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1952. Member of the Executive Committee 1948 through 1953. Chairman of the Physical Chemistry Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Ormsbee, Richard A. : Member of the Biological Codification Panel 1947 through 1948. Patton, Robert L. : Member of the Entomology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Perry, Isabella: Member of the Malignancy Subcommittee, 1951 through 1952. Philips, Frederick S. : Member of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1951 through 1952. Plncus, Sol: Member of the Sanitary Engineering Subcommittee 1947 through 1949. Renn, Charles E. : Member of the Sanitary Engineering Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. 17 Rhoads, C. P. : Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 to 1949. Chairman of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1947 to 1949. Roeder, Kenneth D. : Member of the Biological Codification Panel 1947 through 1952. Rossini, Frederick D. : Member of the Executive Committee 1956 to 1957. Schoening, Harry W. : Member of the Veterinary Medicine Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Schwartz, Benjamin W. : Member of the Veterinary Medicine Subcommittee 1948 through 1952. Seevers, M. H. : Member of the 1952 Steering Committee. Shepard, Harold H. : Member of the Biological Codification Panel 1947 through 1952. Member of the Entomology Subcommittee 1952. Skipper, Howard E. : Member of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1951 through 1952. Smith, Paul K. : Member of the Physiology-Pharmacology Subcommittee 1948 through 1952. Snyder, John C. : Member of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1949 through 1952. Sparks, William J. : Member of the Executive Committee 1954 through 1955. Stein, William H. : Member of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1949 through 1952: chairman of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1950 through 1952. Sterner, James H. : Member of the Committee on Industrial Liaison 1954. Stock, C. Chester: Member of the Executive Committee 1949 and 1950. Chairman of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1951 through 1952. Member of the Biological Codification Panel 1947 through 1952. Tatum, E. L. : Member of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1949 through 1952. Chairman of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1948 through 1950. Member of the Advisory Committee 1948 through 1950. Taylor, John F. : Member of the Biochemistry Subcommittee 1949 through 1952. Treffers, Henry P. : Vice chairman of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1948 through 1950; chairman of the Microbiology Subcommittee 1950 through 1952. Tukey, H. B. : Member of the Plant Sciences Subcommittee {originally the Plant Physiology Subcommittee) 1947 through 1952. Weiss, Paul A. : Member of the Executive Committee 1951 through 1955. Welch, A. D. : Chairman of the Malignancy Subcommittee 1948. Weston, Arthur W. : Member of the Committee on Coding Chemical Reactivities 1953 to 1957. Whitaker, Douglas: Member of the Executive Committee 1950 and 1951. Whitman, Bradley: Member of the Committee on Coding Chemical Reactivity 1953 to 1957. Wlllaman, J. J.: Member of the Committee on Coding Chemical Reactivity 1953 to 1957. Winternitz, M. C. : Chairman of the Executive Committee 1948 through 1950. Member of the Executive Committee 1948 through 1952. Chairman of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1950. Chairman of the Pathology Subcommittee 1947. Wiselogle, Fred Y. : Member of the Committee on Coding Chemical Reactivities 1953 to 1957. Wolman, Abel: Member of the Advisory Committee 1947 through 1 952. Chairman of the Sanitary Engineering Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. - 18 - Woodard, Geoffrey: Member of the Mammalogy Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Woods, Lauren A. ; Member of the Committee on Coding of Chemical Reactivities 1953 to 1957. Yeager, J. Franklin: Member of the Entomology Subcommittee 1947 through 1952. Zapp, John A. : Member of the Committee on Industrial Liaison. 19 - CBCC Technical Staff Ballard, Delbert L. : May 1947 to 1954 Beard, Raimon L. ; July 1946 to March 1947 Blllingsley, Alice M. : Jan. 1955 to Jan. 1957 Brown, Rosamond: Sept. 1956 to Jan. 1957 Chambers, Richard: Nov. 1954 to Jan. 1957 Cicala, Lorraine: June 1951 to Jan. 1957 Dale, Estaleta: Oct. 1947 to Nov. 1956 Davison, Margaret C. : Dec. 1 949 to May 1954 Defandorf, James H. : July 1956 (Contd. in CVLP*) Filippi, Michael J. : July 1946 to May 1952 Geer, Harriett A. : July 1946 to Oct. 1954 Heumann, Karl F. : Sept. 1946 to Sept. 1947; Sept. 1952 to Sept. 1955 Huttrer, Charles P. : July 1949 to Oct. 1951 Innes, J. R. M. : Sept. 1948 to June 1949 Jeffrey, Helen L. : Aug. 1949 to July 1952 Jordan, Mary Ann: March 1949 to June 1954 Kaan, Helen W. : July 1947 to March 1952 Klrner, Walter R. : 1946 to April 1952 Kraybill, Herman P.: Feb. 1948 to March 1949 Krop, Stephen: March 1951 to July 1952 Lee, Lucy C. : July 1946 to March 1957 Livingston, George A. : June 1953 to June 1957 MacMillan, Judith T. ; June 1955 (Contd. in CVLP) Maskaleris, Chris H: July 1946 to Oct. 1954 Moser, Jean: July 1946 to Nov. 1947 Patterson, Helen: June 1 955 (Contd. in CVLP) Rich, Edgar C. : July 1955 (Contd. in CVLP) Schuyler, Patricia: Feb. 1947 to Dec. 1947 Seitner, Philip G. : June 1953 to April 1957 Smith, Paul K. : April 1947 to March 1950 Smyrniotis, Pauline: March 1947 to March 1949 Thurlow, John F. : Nov. 1950 to Nov. 1952 Thurlow, Marian P. : July 1946 to Nov. 1952 Welt. Isaac D. : July 1953 (Contd. in CVLP) White, Florence: Sept. 1956 to Jan. 1957 Williams, Ann S. : July 1947 to 1957 Wood, G. Congdon: Nov. 1952 to March 1957 Non-resident CBCC coders, 1954 through 1956 Ackerman, Lloyd Beard, Frances C. Berueffy, Robert Chambers, Jacqueline Gauch, Martha Hill, Charles Kaplan, Leo Kassell, Beatrice Leonard, Clifford 8. Love, Lois Parton, Jacqueline Simons, H. C. R. Smith, Carroll Smith, Charlotte Stone, Sanford H. Weinstein, Marianne CVLP: Cardiovascular Literature Project, National Academy of Sciences - National Research Council - 20 - FOREWORD Each division of this volume represents one of the major categories of information which may be about, or derived from, a test for biological responses to chemicals. Examples are (1) state of the chemical, (2) organism, (3) dose size, (4) path of administration, and (5) response. Information of any one category is recorded (both as a written abstract and in written code) in only one specified location (i. e. , a fixed position) on Biology Code Sheets; subsequently, it is punched (in code) in an analogous fixed position on Biology IBM Punched Cards. The fixed area of the Code Sheet or punched card used for one category may be larger or smaller, according to the nature of the category (e. g. , the area for the organism is larger than the area for the state of the chemical); the area is referred to as a coding "field" on both the punched card and Code Sheet. In CBCC parlance, the categories have come to be referred to simply as "fields"- -for example, the "dosage fields", "taxonomy field", and "anatomy field". For more convenient reference, however, these fixed coding fields have been assigned alphabetical designations. For example, Field A is concerned with states of the chemicals tested. Field E with the name of organisms, pathologies, or tumors treated. Field H with the anatomical parts affected, etc. Under each information category ("field") of this Code are classified the many specific items belonging to that category, each item being accompanied by its assigned code symbol. In the Introduction and Appendixes, the role of the Code for indexing, machine handling, and storage of chemical-biological information is discussed. Within each field, the organization is according to the numerical and alphabetical sequence of the items' code symbols. Since the symbols reflect the classification within a field, the items them- selves are listed according to their natural relationships. To find an item of a given field, it is necessary to scan the field. No index is furnished for any of the fields, since, in using the Code, positions of the items are quickly learned, after which an index to a field becomes more an impediment than an assistance. Special directions and distinctions for use of code symbols are included with the items of the Code in cases where it has seemed appropriate for expediting coding. However, these are as brief as possible and are included in the Code only when needed to delineate the idea which the code symbol is to convey. Directions for coding information about any chemical-biological test by use of the symbols, as well as explanations for the construction and arrangement of symbols, are in a separate volume desig- nated as the Key to the CBCC Biology Code. The Code and Key have been published in separate volumes, because it has been found the most practical arrangement for use of the Code. In the Code's symbols, the capital letter O and the numerical zero are distinguished by using the special symbol "0" for the letter O. (For persons using the CBCC IBM Punched Cards, it should be observed that the IBM Interpreter distinguished these two symbols in the reverse way, the zero being typed by the Interpreter as "0" and the letter O as "O". ) 21 FIELD A Column 9 (1) U) PHYSICAL STATE OF THE TEST COMPOUND INDICATION OF DIRECT, MASS APPLICATION VS. REMOTE. PARTICULATE APPLICATION (I. E. , DISPERSION VS. APPLICATION OF THE UNDISPERSED COMPOUND) (3) INDICATION THAT INFORMATION ON CORRELATION OF ACTIVITY AND CHEMICAL STRUCTURES OCCURS IN THE DATA SOURCE Note: With only one or two exceptions, coding in Field A is restricted to a description of the state and method AT THE TIME OF APPLICATION to the host or the test organism. See the Key for specific directions and explanation of exceptions. 1 Gas; vapor (a compound applied in a normal environment such as air, water, or soil; either undiluted or a per cent composition of a mixture with air, components of air, or other innocuous gas) A Adsorbed gas 2 Liquid (undiluted compound, not dispersed) B Liquid (undiluted compound) applied as a spray K Liquid (undiluted compound) applied as a mist or aerosol 3 Solid (undiluted compound, not dispersed) C Solid (undiluted compound) applied as a dust 4 Solution (not dispersed) D Solution applied as a spray M Solution applied as a mist or aerosol 5 Emulsion (not dispersed) E Emulsion applied as a spray N Emulsion applied as a mist or aerosol 6 Suspension (not dispersed) F Suspension applied as a spray 0 Suspension applied as a mist or aerosol 7 Suspension in a solid (not dispersed) (salve or powder) G Suspension in a solid, applied as a dust (dust = dispersed powder) (The solvent, if specified, should be expressed in Field C. ) (The vehicle, if specified, should be expressed in Field C. ) (The conditioning agent, if specified, should be expressed in Field B; the vehicle, if specified, would be in Field C. ) The article contains information on the correlation of activity and structure of chemical compounds. "Dispersion" is used here to mean scattering the test material by use of a sprayer, dispersion' atomizer, duster, aerosol; "dispersion" is NOT used in Field A definitions of the Code to describe mechanical spreading or smearing of the test material over the surface of- -or diffusing through the substance of- -a test organism or host. An examination of the Code terms will clarify this. 22 FIELD B Column 10 (1) CONDITIONING AGENT (2) MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION ABOUT THE TEST COMPOUND ADMINISTRATION (3) INDICATION THAT IN THE DATA SOURCE THERE IS INFORMATION ON THE EFFECT OF pH ON THE CHEMICAL ACTION 1 Presence of conditioning agents such as spreading agents, wetting agents, detergents, emulsifiers, etc. (Use this symbol when other more specific symbols cannot be used. Examples: Tween-80 and Tergitol. 2 Gelatin 3 Gums (gum arable, gum acacia, etc. ) 4 Synthetic colloids (polyvinyl alcohol, carboxymethylcellulose, etc. ) 5 Agar; alginate Test compound is not pure; it is applied as a formulation. (A formulation is defined as a product containing a given proportion of the test compound, the remaining ingredients being disregarded and presumably inert. ) Use Symbol 0 for indicating that the test compound is administered as a mixture. Test compound is administered as a precursor (from which the test compound is biologically synthesized or degraded); the action is demonstrated to be of the test compound and not of its precursor. Include the NAME AND INFORMATION ABOUT THE PRECURSOR in the written abstract portion of Field B on the Code Sheet. (Consult the Key. ) Test compound is one ingredient of a mixture of compounds administered in a test for the action in Field T-2; the remaining compounds are written on the Code Sheet in this coding field and the evaluation, dose, etc. , are based on the response to the mixture. (Consult the Key. ) Data source contains information on the effect of pH on the action coded in Field T-2. - 23 FIELD C Column 1 1 SOLVENT OR VEHICLE S Acetone T Alcohol, ethyl (ethanol), and aqueous ethyl alcohol 7 Benzene; xylene 2 Butyl succinate Q Caprylic acid M Cetane 5 Chloroform; carbon tetrachloride N Cholesterol (other than in lanolin, Symbol H) A Co- solvent; mixtures of solvents or vehicles (other than aqueous ethyl alcohol, Symbol T) 4 Ether, ethyl U Gasoline; kerosene 3 Glycerol; ethylene glycol; propylene glycol 0 Glycols, polyethylene H Lanolin 9 Lard and other animal fat or grease; wax (except lanolin, Symbol H, or petroleum wax, Symbol G); fatty acids 1 Mineral oil; paraffin oil W Miscellaneous - solvent or vehicle used and specified by the author but not assigned elsewhere to this field's symbols 6 Petroleum ether; petroleum naphtha 1 Saline solutions (e. g. , Locke's, Tyrode's, acidic, basic solutions) P Turpentine and other terpenes K Tricaprylin B Vegetable oil or wax (e. g. , sesame, peanut, cotton seed, corn, coconut, olive, soya bean, castor bean) R Water G Wax (petroleum) - 24 FIELD D Columns 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 SECONDARY COMPOUND The IBM punched card columns of this field (12 through 17) are used for coding a compound other than the "test compound", i. e. , a "secondary compound". (The test compound is always expressed in Columns 1 through 8 on each IBM biology punched card. On the Biology Code Sheet, the test compound's name and its Serial Number are written only on the chemistry side, regardless of the number of lines of data coded on the sheet; this provision eliminates the necessity of entering the name and Serial Number of the test compound for each line of biological data when several lines are coded on a single Code Sheet. ) Examples of secondary compounds that are coded in Field D are (1) compounds whose actions are antagonized or synergized by the test compound or (2) compounds whose metabolic fate (e. g. , excretion), coded in Field T-2, is affected in some way by the test compound. The secondary compound can be coded only by a person having access to a reference file of chemical names and Serial Numbers. In any case, the coder must always include in the written abstract for this field the full name and all other information given about the secondary compound. A more thorough discussion of all the uses of Field D and specific directions are given in the Key, including the uses of the following special symbols. * RADIOACTIVITY: To designate that the secondary compound is radioactive, place an asterisk in Column 16. * STANDARD OF COMPARISON: To designate that a compound is used as a standard of comparison for evaluation, place an asterisk in Column 17. * MORE THAN ONE SECONDARY COMPOUND PRESENT AND ESSENTIAL: To designate that more than one secondary compound is present and is essential to the action, place the Symbol # in Column 16. 25 FIELD E Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 ORGANISM OR PATHOLOGICAL CONDITION ACTED ON BY THE TEST COMPOUND Field E is for the entry of one of the following: I (1) TEST ORGANISM ACTED ON BY THE TEST COMPOUND (2) TUMOR ACTED ON BY THE TEST COMPOUND (3) PATHOLOGICAL CONDITION OTHER THAN TUMOR ACTED ON BY THE TEST COMPOUND II (4) TUMOR PRODUCED BY THE TEST COMPOUND The section of the Code designated as Field E is divided into three major parts. The first is the Taxonomy Code, listing all the phyla, classes, orders, families, genera, and species for which the CBCC has already assigned code symbols. Following the Taxonomy Code lists, the second part of Field E is the Tumor Code, listing all types of tumors and specific tumors for which the CBCC has already assigned code symbols. Appended at the end of this Tumor Code section is a special list of anatomical items to be used only for inter- preting the second and third units of the tumor symbols (Columns 19 and 20); the list is used by the Center for constructing unique symbols for tumors added to the existing list. Finally, the third part of Field E is the Pathology Code, listing the pathologies for which the CBCC has assigned code symbols and designated specific coding involving Fields H and T as well as Field E. Appended at the end of this list of pathologies are lists of etiologies classified and assigned code symbols to be used in interpreting the 5th and 6th units of the pathology symbol (Columns 22 and 23) and used by the Center in constructing unique symbols for pathologies added to the existing list. It will be understood that the CBCC coding procedure permits Field E to be coded with only a single entry in any one code line, an organism, a tumor of an organism, or a pathology of an organism, whichever the chemical was tested to affect. Therefore, for any one code line, only one of the three separate Field E codes will be consulted. The general use of the field is discussed in the Key, prior to the three special sections explain- ing the organization of each of the Taxonomy, Tumor, and Pathology Codes. 26 TAXONOMY CODE FIELD E; Taxonomy Code CoTumns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 1 Protozoa I Plasmodroma, subphylum of Protozoa II Sarcodina (syn. Rhizopoda), class of subphylum Plasmodroma 11 Rhizopoda (syn. Sarcodina), class of subphylum Plasmodroma 11 Rhizopoda, subclass of Sarcodina 111 Amoebozoa (syn. Lobosa), order of Sarcodina 111 Lobosa (syn. Amoebozoa) 111 Amoebina (syn. Amoebozoa) 11101 Amoebidae 11101011 Amoeba proteus 11101011 Chaos diffluens (syn. Amoeba proteus) 11101011 Amiba diffluens (syn. Amoeba proteus) 11102 Endamoebidae 1110201 Endamoeba 1110201 Entamoeba (syn. Endamoeba) 11102011 Endamoeba histolytica 11102012 Endamoeba coli 11102021 Endolimax nana 11102031 Dientamoeba fragilis 111 Proteomyxa, order of subclass Rhizopoda 11103 Vampyrellidae, family of order Amoebozoa or family of order Proteomyxa 111 Testacea, suborder of Amoebozoa or order of subclass Rhizopoda 111 Thecamoebaea (syn. Testacea), suborder of Amoebozoa 11104 Arcellidae, family of suborder Testacea 11105 Difflugidae, family of suborder Testacea 112 Foraminifera 113 Heliozoa 114 Radiolaria 115 Mycetozoa 1 Ciliophora, subphylum of Protozoa 12 Ciliata, class of subphylum Ciliophora 12 Infusoria (syn. Ciliata) 12 Euciliata, subclass of Ciliata 121 Holotricha, order of subclass Euciliata 121 Trichostomata, suborder of Holotricha 12101 Parameciidae, family of suborder Trichostomata 12101011 121 121 12102 12103 12104 121 12105 121 12106 12106011 12107 121 12108 12108011 12108021 122 122 12201 12201011 123 123 12301 12302 124 12401 13 13 131 13101 13101011 13101012 13101013 13101014 13101015 13101016 Paramecium caudatum Gymnostomata, suborder of Holotricha Pleurostomata, tribe of suborder Gymnostomata Amphileptidae, family of tribe Pleurostomata Isotrichidae, family of suborder Trichostomata Colpodidae, family of suborder Trichostomata Astomata, suborder of Holotricha Anoplophryidae, family of suborder Astomata Hymenostomata, suborder of Holotricha Frontoniidae, family of suborder Hymenostomata Tetrahymena geleii Tracheliidae, family of tribe Pleurostomata Prosostomata, tribe of suborder Gymnostomata Holophryidae, family of tribe Prosostomata Parachaenia myae Ichthyophthirius multifiliis Spirotricha, order of subclass Euciliata Heterotricha, suborder of Spirotricha Bursariidae, family of suborder Heterotricha Balantidium coli Peritricha, order of subclass Euciliata Mobilia, suborder of Peritricha Urceolariidae, family of suborder Mobilia Vorticellidae Chonotricha, order of subclass Euciliata Spirochonidae, family of Chonotricha Sporozoa, class of subphylum Plasmodroma Telosporidia, subclass of Sporozoa Haemosporidia, order of subclass Telosporidia Plasmodiidae Plasmodium malariae Plasmodium vivax Plasmodium falciparum Plasmodium gallinaceum Plasmodium lophurae Plasmodium knowlesi - 27 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 13101017 13101018 13101019 1310101A 1310101B 1310101C 1310101D 13102 13102011 13102021 132 133 133 13301 1330101 1 13301012 133 13 134 134 13401 13401011 135 135 136 13 137 14 14 14 141 14101 14101 14101011 14101012 14101013 14101021 14101022 14101023 14101024 14101025 14101026 14101027 Plasmodium cathemerium Plasmodium relictum Plasmodium circumflexum Plasmodium cynomolgi Plasmodium berghei Plasmodium praecox Plasmodium hexamerium Babesiidae Babesia bigemina Toxoplasma gondii Gregarinida, order of subclass Telosporidia Coccidia, order of subclass Telosporidia Eimeridia, suborder of Coccidia Eimeriidae, family of suborder Eimeridia Eimeria stiedae Eimeria tenella Adeleidea, suborder of Coccidia Cnidosporidia, subclass of Sporozoa Microsporidia, order of subclass Cnidosporidia Monocnidea, suborder of Microsporidia Nosematidae, family of suborder Monocnidea Nosema apis Myxosporidia, order of subclass Cnidosporidia Platysporea, suborder of Myxosporidia Actinomyxidia, order of subclass Cnidosporidia Acnidosporidia, subclass of Sporozoa Sarcosporidia, order of subclass Acnidosporidia Mastigophora, class of subphyium Plasmodroma Flagellata (syn. Mastigophora) Zoomastigina, subclass of Mastigophora Protomonadina, order of subclass Zoomastigina Trypanosoma tidae Herpetomonadidae (syn. Trypanosomatidae) Leishmania braziliensis Leishmania donovani Leishmania tropica Trypanosoma brucei Trypanosoma cruzi Trypanosoma evansi Trypanosoma gambiense Trypanosoma rhodesiense Trypanosoma equiperdum Trypanosoma hippicum 14101028 14101029 1410102A 1410102B 1410102C 1410102D 1410102E 1410103 142 142 142 14201 1420101 14201021 14201021 14201022 14201023 14201024 14201025 14201026 14201027 14201028 14201029 1420102A 1420102B 14202 14202011 14 143 143 14301 14301011 14301012 144 144 144 14401 144 14402 14403 14403011 145 146 Trypanosoma lewisi Trypanosoma theileri Trypanosoma venezuelense Trypanosoma congolense Trypanosoma vivax Trypanosoma duttoni Trypanosoma equinum Phytomonas sp. Polymastigina, order of subclass Zoomastigina Monomonadina, suborder of Polymastigina Monozoa (syn. Monomonadina) Trichomonadidae, family of suborder Monomonadina Pentatrichomonas sp. Trichomonas foetus Tritrichomonas foetus (syn. Trichomonas foetus) Trichomonas hominis Trichomonas elongata Trichomonas vaginalis Trichomonas suis Trichomonas canistomae Trichomonas ruminantium Trichomonas felistomae Trichomonas eberthi Trichomonas anseri Trichomonas gallinae Chilomastigidae, family of suborder Monomonadina Chilomastix mesneli Phytomastigina, subclass of Mastigophora Euglenoidina, order of subclass Phytomastigina Euglenida (syn. Euglenoidina) Euglenidae Euglena viridis Euglena gracilis Dinoflagellata, order of subclass Phytomastigina Peridiniinae, suborder of Dinoflagellata Peridinoidae, tribe of suborder Peridiniinae Peridinlidae, family of tribe Peridinioidae Gymnodinioidae, tribe of suborder Peridiniinae Blastodiniidae, family of tribe Gymnodinioidae Noctilucidae, family of tribe Gymnodinioidae Noctlluca scintlllans Hypermastigina, order of subclass Zoomastigina Rhizomastigina, order of subclass Zoomastigina - 28 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 146 147 14701 14701011 14701021 15 15 150 2 2 21 21 211 211 21101 2110101 212 212 21201 2120101 21202 21202011 22 22 221 Pantastomatida (syn. Rhizomastigina) Phytomonadina, order of subclass Phytomastigina Chlamydomonadldae, family of Phytomonadina Chlorogonium teragamum Chlamydomonas eugametos Suctoria, class of subphylum Ciliophora Acineta (syn. Suctoria) (Familial organization into orders unknown for Suctoria) Porifera Sponges Calcispongiae Calcarea (syn. Homocoela Asconosa (syn. Leucosolenidae Leucosolenia sp. Heterocoela Scyconosa (syn. Grantiidae Grantia sp. Sciphidae Sycon raphanus Demospongiae Monaxonlda, subclass of Demospongiae Hadromerina, order of subclass Monaxonida Calcispongiae) Homocoela) Heterocoela) 22101 Clionidae 22101011 Cliona celata 222 Haplosclerina, order c Monaxonida 22201 Spongillidae 2220101 Spongilla sp. 22 Keratosa, subclass of Demospongiae 3 Cnidaria 3 Coelenterata (syn. Cnidaria) 31 Hydrozoa 311 Hydroida 311 Gymnoblastea, suborder of Hydroida 311 Anthomedusae (syn. Gymno- blastea), suborder of Hydroida 311 Athecata (syn. Gymnoblastea), suborder of Hydroida 3 1101 Hydridae, family of suborder Gymnoblastea 3110101 Hydra sp. 31101021 Pelmatohydra oligactis 311 Calyptoblastea, suborder of Hydroida 311 Leptomedusae (syn. Calypto- blastea), suborder of Hydroida 311 Thecaphora (syn. Calyptoblastea), suborder of Hydroida 312 Trachylina 312 Trachymedusae, suborder of Trachylina 313 Milleporina 313 and 314 Hydrocorallina (order, includes Milleporina plus Stylasterina) 314 Stylasterina 315 Siphonophora 315 Physophorida, suborder of Siphonophora 32 Scyphozoa 32 Jellyfishes 321 Semaeostomeae 322 Rhizostomeae 33 Anthozoa 33 Alcyonaria, subclass of Anthozoa 3 3 Octocorallia (syn. Alcyonaria) 33 Soft corals (Alcyonaria) 331 Pennatulacea 331 Sea pens (Pennatulacea) 33 Zoantheria, subclass of Anthozoa 33 Hexacorallia (Syn. Zoantheria), subclass of Anthozoa 332 Actiniaria 332 Sea anemones 29 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 4 Platyhelminthes 4 Flat worms 41 Cestoda, class of Platyhelminthes 41 Cestoidea, class of Platyhelminthes (equiv. of Cestoda) 41 Cestodaria, subclass of Cestoda or of Cestoidea 41 Eucestoda, subclass of class Cestoda 41 Cestoda (equiv. of Eucestoda), subclass of Cestoidea 41 Tapeworms 411 Pseudophyllidea, order of subclass Eucestoda of class Cestoda 411 Bothriocephaloidea, superfamily of order Pseudophyllidea 41101 Diphyllobothriidae, family of order Pseudophyllidea (or of superfamily Bothriocephaloidea) 41101 Dibothriocephalidae (syn. Diphyllobothriidae) 41101011 Diphyllobothrium latum 41101011 Dibothriocephalus latus (syn. Diphyllobothrium latum) 41102 Ptychobothriidae, family of order Pseudophyllidea (or of superfamily Bothriocephaloidea) 412 Tetraphyllidea, order of subclass Eucestoda of class Cestoda (or order of subclass Cestoda) 41201 Phyllobothriidae 413 Cyclophyllldea, order of subclass Eucestoda of class Cestoda (or order of subclass Cestoda) 413 Taenioidea (syn. of order Cyclophyllldea) 413 Taenioidea, superfamily of order Cyclophyllldea (equiv. of Taenioidea, order of Eucestoda) 41301 Taeniidae, family of order Cyclophyllldea (or of superfamily Taenioidea) 41301011 Taenia saginata 41301011 Cysticercus bovis (larva of Taenia saginata) 41302 Davaineidae, family of order Cyclophyllldea (or of superfamily Taenioidea) 41302011 Raillietina cesticillus 41303 Dilepididae, family of order Cyclophyllldea (or of superfamily Taenioidea) 41304 Hymenolepididae, family of order Cyclophyllldea (or of superfamily Taenioidea) 41305 Anoplocephalidae, family of order Cyclophyllldea (or of superfamily Taenioidea) 414 Trypanorhyncha, order of subclass Eucestoda of class Cestoda (or order of subclass Cestoda) 414 Tetrarhynchoidea (syn. Trypanorhyncha) 415 Diphyllidea, order of subclass Eucestoda of class Cestoda (or order of subclass Cestoda) 41501 Echinobothriidae The following code symbols for Trematoda are based on a single scheme, marked by (1). Included, however, are certain other commonly encountered names of groups in which the Trematoda have been classified by other schemes, marked by (0) and (X). 42 Trematoda, class of Platyhelminthes 42 (1) (O) Digenea, subclass of class Trematoda 42 (X) Digenea, order of class Trematoda. (When Digenea is treated by the author as an order, it is equivalent to the combination of the five orders as listed here. Symbols 421, 422, 423, 424, and 425 and equivalent to Digenea as a subclass. Symbol 42. ) 42 (1) Anepitheliocystidia, superorder of subclass Digenea 42 (X) Prosostomata, a suborder of order Digenea. (The suborder was conceived to include all digenetic families except Bucephalidae. Since in this list, the Bucephalidae are not separated into a distinct suborder, but are included with the order Strigeatoidea, Prosostomata here is essentially equivalent to Digenea, Symbol 42. ) 42 (0) Prosostomata, an order of subclass Digenea. (Equivalent to Prosostomata as a suborder of order Digenea and equivalent to Digenea minus Bucephalidae. ) 30 - 42 421 421 421 (0) (0) (0) (0) FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, ZQ, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 Distomata*, a suborder of order Prosostomata. Not recognized in the scheme used here in which "distome" Digenea are in each of the five orders recognized by Symbols 421, 422, 423, 424, and 425, except that the Strigeata, Symbol 422, have ordinarily been considered separate from "Distomata". A reference to a "distome trematode" can be coded only as Symbol 42. Monostomata*, a suborder of order Prosostomata. Not recognized in the scheme used for code symbols here. Examples of "monostome" Digenea are in the superfamily Notocotyloidea, Symbol 421. Amphistomata*, a suborder of order Prosostomata. Not recognized in this scheme in which "amphistome" families are included under superfamily Paramphistomatoidea, Symbol 421. Fascioloidea, superfamily of suborder Distomata. The superfamily Fascioloidea is not recognized in this scheme in which its families are included in the superfamily Echinostamatoidea, Symbol 421. Echinostomida, order of superorder Anepitheliocystidia Echinostomata, suborder of superorder Echinostomida Echinostomatoidea, superfamily of suborder Echinostomata Echinostomatidae, family of superfamily Echinostomatoidea Fasciolidae, family of superfamily Echinostomatoidea (or of superfamily Fascioloidea) Fasciola hepatica Liver fluke Paramphistomata, suborder of order Echinostomida Paramphistomatoidea, superfamily of suborder Paramphistomata Notocotyloidea, superfamily of suborder Paramphistomata Strigeatoidea, order of superorder Anepitheliocystidia Strigeata, a suborder of order Strigeatoidea Strigeata, a suborder of order Prosostomata. (Equivalent to Strigeata as a suborder of order Strigeatoidea, Symbol 422. ) Schistosomatoidea, superfamily of suborder Strigeata Schistosomatidae, family of superfamily Schistosomatoidea Schistosoma mansoni Schistosoma japonicum Schistosoma haematobium Schistosomatium douthitti Brachylaimata, suborder of order Strigeatoidea Bucephaloidea, superfamily of suborder Brachylaimata Gasterostomata, suborder of order Digenea. The suborder accommodated the single family Bucephalidae which is considered in this scheme as a member of order Strigeatoidea, Symbol 422. Gasterostomata, order of subclass Digenea. (Equivalent to Gasterostomata as a suborder of order Digenea. ) Renicolida, order of superorder Anepitheliocystidia Epitheliocystidia, superorder of subclass Digenea Opisthorchiida, order of superorder Epitheliocystidia Opisthorchiata, suborder of order Opisthorchiida Opisthorchioidea, superfamily of suborder Opisthorchiata Opisthorchioidea, superfamily of suborder Distomata. (Distomata is not recognized in this scheme. ) (Equivalent to Opisthorchioidea, Symbol 424, superfamily of suborder Opisthorchiata. ) Opisthorchiidae, family of superfamily Opisthorchioidea Clonorchis sinensis Heterophyes heterophyes Plagiorchlida, order of superorder Epitheliocystidia The terms, monostome, amphistome, distome, holostome, echinostome, etc. , are commonly used as convenient designations of the distinctive forms of adult digenetic trematodes. However, this characteristic of the adult has long been abandoned as a major or strict taxonomic criterion and the groups designated as Monostomata, Amphistomata, and Distomata are therefore no longer generally accepted as valid. Any of these designations must be coded by the symbol for its nearest equivalent, as indicated in the list above. 421 (1) 421 (1) 421 (1) 42101 (1) 42102 (1 ) (0) 4210201 1 42102011 421 (1) 421 (1) 421 (1) 422 (1) 422 (1) 422 (0) 422 (1) 42201 (1) 42201011 42201012 42201013 42201021 422 (1) 422 (1) 422 (X) 422 423 (1) 42 (1) 424 (1) 424 (1) 424 (1) 424 (0) 42401 (1) 42401011 42401021 425 (1) - 31 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24. and 25 425 425 425 425C1 42501011 42501012 425 (1 425 (1 42502 (1 42502011 42502011 42 (1 42 (X 426 (1 426 (X 426 (1 426 (X 42601 426 (1 426 (X 42602 427 (1 427 (X 427 (1 427 (X 42701 42701 42701 428* (1 428 428 42801 4280101 42802 43 43 431 431 431 43101 (X Plagiorchiata, suborder of order Plagiorchiida Troglotrematoidea, superfamily of suborder Plagiorchiata Troglotrematoidea, superfamily of suborder Distomata. (Distomata is not recognized in this scheme. ) (Equivalent to Troglotrematoidea, Symbol 425, superfamily of suborder Plagiorchiata. ) Troglotrematidae, family of superfamily Troglotrematoidea. (In the present scheme, provisionally placed in superfamily Allocreadioidea. ) Paragonimus westermanii Paragonimus kellicotti Plagiorchioidea, superfamily of suborder Plagiorchiata Plaglorchioidea, superfamily of suborder Distomata. (Distomata is not recognized in this scheme. ) (Equivalent to Plagiorchioidea, Symbol 425, superfamily of suborder Plagiorchiata. ) Dicrocoeliidae, family of superfamily Plagiorchioidea Dicrocoelium dendriticum Lancet fluke Monogenea, subclass of class Trematoda Monogenea, order of class Trematoda (equivalent to Monogenea as a subclass of Trematoda, Symbol 42) Monopisthocotylea, order of subclass Monogenea Monopisthocotylea, suborder of order Monogenea (equivalent to Monopisthocotylea, order of subclass Monogenea) Capsaloidea, superfamily of order Monopisthocotylea Capsaloidea, superfamily of suborder Monopisthocotylea (equivalent to Capsaloidea, superfamily of order Monopisthocotylea) Capsalidae, family of superfamily Capsaloidea Gyrodactyloidea, superfamily of order Monopisthocotylea Gyrodactyloidea, superfamily of suborder Monopisthocotylea (equivalent to Gyrodactyloidea, superfamily of order Monopisthocotylea) Gyrodactylidae, family of superfamily Gyrodactyloidea Polyopisthocotylea, order of subclass Monogenea Polyopisthocotylea, suborder of order Monogenea (equivalent to Polyopisthocotylea, order of subclass Monogenea) Polystomatoidea, superfamily of order Polyopisthocotylea Polystomatoldea, superfamily of suborder Polyopisthocotylea (equivalent to Polystomatoidea, superfamily of order Polyopisthocotylea) Polystomatidae, family of superfamily Polystomatoidea Polystomatinae, subfamily of Polystomatidae Sphyranurinae, subfamily of Polystomatidae Aspidobothria*, subclass of class Trematoda (equivalent of Aspidobothria, order of class Trematoda) Aspidobothria, order of class Trematoda (equivalent to Aspidobothria, subclass of class Trematoda) Aspidogastrea, subclass (or order) of class Trematoda (synonym for Aspidobothria) Aspidogastridae, family of subclass (or order) Aspidobothria Aspidogaster sp. Stichocotylidae, family of subclass (or order) Aspidobothria Turbellaria, class of Platyhelminthes Flatworms, free living Tricladida, order of Turbellaria Paludicola, suborder of Tricladida Probursalia (syn. Paludicola) Planariidae Although code symbols follow the scheme marked by (1), the scheme would omit the division of this subclass into orders, but would divide it into families. By adhering strictly to rules for forming CBCC taxonomy symbols, the third digit would need to be 0, indicating that there were no orders, merely because the division of the class was into subclasses rather than orders. Under these circumstances, the code symbol reflects the category between the class and the family, regardless of whether it is designated as subclass or order. 32 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 4310101 Planaria sp. 51105021 4310102 Dugesia sp. 51105022 4310102 Euplanaria sp. (syn. Dugesia) 51105031 43101021 Dugesia dorotocephala 51105031 43101021 Planaria dorotocephala (syn. Dugesia dorotocephala) 432 Polycladida 51105041 432 Acotylea, suborder of Polycladida 5110505 432 Schematommata, section of 51105061 Acotylea 51106 43201 Leptoplanidae, family of section Schematommata 51106011 511 5 Nematoda (excludes Rotifera, Gastrotricha, Kinorhyncha, 511 and Nematomorpha) 5 Nemathelminthes (to include 51107 Rotifera, Gastrotricha, Kinorhyncha, Nematoda, and 51107011 Nematomorpha) 51107011 5 Aschelminthes (syn. Nemathelminthes) 51107021 5 Roundworms 51107021 51 Secernentea, class of phylum Nematoda 51107031 51 Phasmidia (syn. Secernentea) 51107041 511 Rhabditida, order of class 51108 Secernentea 511 Rhabditina, suborder of order 51108011 Rhabditida 51108011 511 Anguillulata (syn. Rhabditina) 51108021 511 Rhabditoidea, superfamily of 51108021 suborder Rhabditina 51108022 511 Anguillulinoidea (equiv. of 51108022 Rhabditida) 51108021 51101 Diplogasteridae, family of 51109 superfamily Rhabditoidea 51102 Rhabditidae, family of 51109011 superfamily Rhabditoidea 511 51103 Cephalobidae, family of superfamily Rhabditoidea 51110 51103011 Panagrolaimus subelongatus 51103021 Panagrellus redivivus 51110011 51103031 Turbatrix aceU 511 51103031 Anguillula aceti (syn. Turbatrix aceti) 51111 51103031 Vinegar eel 51104 Strongyloididae, family of 51111011 superfamily Rhabditoidea 511 51104011 Strongyloides stercoralis 51104012 Strongyloides papillosus 511 51104013 Strongyloides ratti 511 Tylenchoidea, superfamily of 51112 suborder Rhabditina 51105 Tylenchidae, family of 51112011 superfamily Tylenchoidea 51112021 51105011 Meloidogyne marioni 51112021 51105011 Heterodera radicicola (syn. Meloidogyne marioni) 51112031 51105012 Meloidogyne incognita 51112041 Heterodera schachtii Heterodera rostochiensis Pathoaphelenchoides ritzemabosi Aphelenchoides ritzemabosi (syn. Pathoaphelenchoides ritzemabosi) Pratylenchus pratensis Ditylenchus sp. Paraphelenchus pseudoparietinus Steinernematidae, family of superfamily Rhabditoidea Neoaplectana glaseri Strongylina, suborder of order Rhabditida Strongyloidea, superfamily of suborder Strongylina Strongylidae, family of superfamily Strongyloidea Ternidens deminutus Tridontophorus deminutus (syn. Ternidens deminutus) Oesophagostomum radiatum Bosicola radiatum (syn. Oesophagostomum radiatum) Chabertia ovina Strongylus equinus Ancylostomatidae, family of superfamily Strongyloidea Necator americanus Hookworm, human Ancylostoma duodenale Hookworm, human Ancylostoma caninum Hookworm, dog Bunostomum phlebotomum Syngamidae, family of superfamily Strongyloidea Syngamus laryngeus Trichostrongyloidea, superfamily of suborder Strongylina Trichostrongylidae, family of superfamily Trichostrongyloidea Haemonchus contortus Metastrongyloidea, superfamily of suborder Strongylina Metastrongylidae, family of superfamily Metastrongyloidea Metastrongylus elongatus Oxyurina, suborder of order Rhabditida Oxyuroidea, superfamily of suborder Oxyurina Oxyuridae, family of superfamily Oxyuroidea Oxyuris equi Enterobius vermicularls Oxyuris vermicularls (syn. Enterobius vermicularls) Syphacia obvelata Aspiculuris tetraptera 33 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 51112041 Pinworm, mouse 521 511 Ascaridina, suborder of order Rhabditida 52101 511 Ascaridoidea, superfamily of suborder Ascaridina 52101011 51113 Kathlaniidae, family of 52101011 superfamily Ascaridoidea 51114 Heterakidae, family of 52102 superfamily Ascaridoidea 51114011 Heterakis galllnarum 52102 51114011 Heterakis gallinae (syn. Heterakis galllnarum) 52102011 51115 Ascarididae, family of 52102011 superfamily Ascaridoidea 51115011 Ascaris lumbricoides 52102011 51115021 Parascaris equorum 52102021 51115021 Ascaris megalocephala 52102021 (syn. Parascaris equorum) 512 Spirurida 521 512 Spirurina, suborder of order Spirurida 521 512 Filarioidea, superfamily of suborder Spirurina 52103 51201 Filariidae, family of superfamily Filarioidea 51202 Acanthocheilonematidae, family of superfamily Filarioidea 51202011 Wuchereria bancrofti 51202011 Filaria bancrofti (syn. Wuchereria bancrofti) 51202021 Dirofilaria immitis 51202022 Dirofilaria repens 51202031 Litomosoides carinii 51202041 Loa loa 51202041 Eye worm 512020 51 Onchocerca volvulus 512 Spiruroidea, superfamily of suborder Spirurina 51203 Spiruridae, family of superfamily Spiruroidea 51204 Gnathostomatidae, family of superfamily Spiruroidea 512 Camallanina, suborder of order Spirurida 512 Dracunculoidea, superfamily of suborder Camallanina 51205 Dracunculidae, family of superfamily Dracunculoidea 51205011 Dracunculus medinensis 6 51205011 Guinea worm 6 52 Adenophorea, class of phylum Nematoda 61 52 Aphasmidia (syn. Adenophorea) 521 Enoplida, order of class 61 Adenophorea 611 521 Dorylaimina, suborder of 611 order Enoplida 521 Trichinelloidea, superfamily of 61101 suborder Dorylaimina Trichuroidea (syn. Trichinelloidea) Trichinellidae, family of superfamily Trichinelloidea Trichinella spiralis Trichina spiralis (syn. Trichinella spiralis) Trichuridae, family of superfamily Trichuroidea Trichocephalidae (syn. Trichuridae) Trichuris trichiura Trichocephalus trichiurus (syn. Trichuris trichiura) Whipv/orm Trichuris suis Trichocephalus suis (syn. Trichuris suis) Dioctophymatina, suborder of order Enoplida Dioctophymatoidea, superfamily of suborder Dioctophymatina Dioctophymatidae, family of superfamily Dioctophymatoidea 52103011 Dioctophyma renale B Acanthocephala Bl Metacanthocephala Bll Archiacanthocephala BllOOOll Echinorhynchus trutta C Rotatoria c Rotifera (syn. Rotatoria) CI Monogononta Cll Ploima CHOI Notommatidae C1102 Brachionidae C1102011 Brachionus calyciflorus C2 Bdelloidea C3 Seisonidea D Entoprocta E Bryozoa, phylum excluding Entoprocta E Ectoprocta (equiv. to Bryozoa, phylum excluding Entoprocta) D and E Bryozoa, phylum including Entoprocta (obs. ) Echinodermata Eleutherozoa, subphylum of Echinodermata Asteroidea, class of subphylum Eleutherozoa Starfishes Phanerozonia Cribellosa, suborder of order Phanerozonia Porcellanasteridae, family of suborder Cribellosa 34 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19. 20, El, 22, 23, 24, and 25 612 Spinulosa 714 61201 Asterinidae 61202 Echlnasteridae 7 1401 61202011 Henricla sanguinolenta 71401011 613 Forcipulata 71402 61301 Asteriidae 71402011 61301 Asteriinae 72 61301011 Asterias forbesi 72 62 Ophluroidea 621 Ophlurae 721 62101 Ophiolepididae 62101011 Ophiura robusta 722 63 Echinoidea 631 Camarodonta 72201 63101 Toxopneustidae 72201011 63101011 Lytechinus variegatus 72202 63101011 Toxopneustes variegatus 72202011 (syn. Lytechinus variegatus) 72203 63101012 Lytechinus pictus 72203011 63102 Echinometridae 723 63102011 Echinometra lacunter 63103 Strongylocentrotidae 723 63103 Sea urchins 63103011 Strongylocentrotus pulcherrimus 72301 63103012 Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis 72301011 63104 Echinidae 72301011 632 Clypeastroida 63201 Scutellidae 72 63201011 Echinarachnius parma 633 Stirodonta 724 63301 Arbaciidae 63301011 Arbacia punctulata 725 634 Spatangoida 64 Holothuroidea 726 641 Dendrochirota 64101 Cucumariidae 727 64101 Sea cucumber 642 Apoda 728 6 Pelmatozoa, subphylum of Echinodermata 72 65 Crinoidea 729 7 Mollusca 71 Amphineura 72901 71 Aplacophora, subclass of class 7290101 Amphineura 72901021 711 Caudofoveata, order of subclass 72901031 Aplacophora 72901041 711 Chaetodermatina (syn. 72902 Caudofoveata, order of 72902011 subclass Aplacophora) 72902021 712 Ventroplicida, order of subclass Aplacophora 72902021 712 Neomeniina (syn. Ventroplicida, 72902022 order of subclass Aplacophora) 72902022 71 Polyplacophora, subclass of class Amphineura 7290203 713 Lepidopleurina, order of 72902041 subclass Polyplacophora 72902051 Chitonina, order of subclass Polyplacophora Ischnochitonidae Chaetopleura opiculata Chitonidae Chiton tuberculatus Gastropoda Prosobranchia, subclass of class Gastropoda Archaeogastropoda, order of subclass Prosobranchia Mesogastropoda, order of subclass Prosobranchia Calyptraeidae Crepidula plana Littorinidae Littorina litorea Hydrobiidae Oncomelania quadrasi Neogastropoda, order of subclass Prosobranchia Stenoglossa (syn. Neogastropoda, order of subclass Prosobranchia) Buccinidae Busycon canaliculatum Fulgar canaliculatum (syn. Busycon canaliculatum) Opisthobranchia, subclass of Gastropoda Tectibranchia, order of subclass Opisthobranchia Pteropoda, order of subclass Opisthobranchia Sacoglossa, order of subclass Opisthobranchia Acoela, order of subclass Opisthobranchia Ditremata, order of subclass Opisthobranchia Pulmonata, subclass of class Gastropoda Basommatophora, order of subclass Pulmonata Planorbidae Planorbis sp. Australorbis glabratus Bulinus sp. Biomphalaria boissyi Lymnaeidae Lymnaea stagnalis Stagnicola bulimoides Lymnaea bulimoides (syn. Stagnicola bulimoides) Stagnicola cubensis Fossaria cubensis (syn. Stagnicola cubensis) Galba sp. Fossaria ollula Pseudosuccinea columella 35 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 72903 Physidae 73304 Unionidae, family of suborder 7290301 Physa sp. Schizodonta 72A Stylommatophora, order of 73304011 Lamellidens marginalis subclass Pulmonata 73304021 Anodonta cataracta 72A01 Helicidae 73304022 Anodonta fluvialis 72A01011 Helix aspersa 73305 Solenidae, family of suborder 72A01012 Helix pomatia Adapedonta 72A01021 Cepea nemoralis 73305011 Ensis directus 72A01021 Helix nemoralis (syn. Cepea 74 Cephalopoda nemoralis) 74 Tetrabranchiata, subclass of 72A02 Limacidae Cephalopoda 72A02011 Limax maximus 741 Nautiloidea, order of subclass 72A02021 Deroceras reticulatum Tetrabranchiata 72A02031 Milax gagates 741 Nautilida, suborder of order 72A03 Testacellidae Nautiloidea 72A03011 Testacella haliotidea 74101 Nautilidae, family of suborder 73 Pelecypoda Nautilida 731 Protobranchia, order of class 74101011 Nautilus pompilius Pelecypoda 74 Dibranchiata, subclass of 732 Filibranchia, order of class Cephalopoda Pelecypoda 743 Teuthoidea, order of subclass 732 Taxodonta, suborder of order Dibranchiata Filibranchia 743 Myopsida, suborder of order 732 Anisomyaria, suborder of order Teuthoidea Filibranchia 743 Oegopsida, suborder of order 73201 Ostreidae, family of suborder Teuthoidea Anisomyaria 74301 Loliginidae, family of suborder 73201011 Crassostrea virginica Myopsida 73201011 Ostrea virginica 74301011 Loligo pealii (syn. Crassostrea virginica) 74301012 Loligo opalescens 73201021 Ostrea lurida 74301013 Loligo vulgaris 73202 Mytilidae, family of suborder 744 Octopoda, order of subclass Anisomyaria Dibranchiata 73202011 Mytilus edulis 744 Cirromorpha, suborder of order 73203 Pectinidae, family of suborder Octopoda Anisomyaria 744 Incirrata, suborder of order 7320301 Pecten sp. Octopoda 733 Eulamellibranchia, order of 74401 Octopodidae, family of suborder class Pelecypoda Incirrata 733 Schizodonta, suborder of order 7440101 Octopus sp. Eulamellibranchia 742 Sepioidea, order of subclass 733 Heterodonta, suborder of order Dibranchiata Eulamellibranchia 74201 Sepiidae 733 Adapedonta, suborder of order 74201011 Sepia officinalis Eulamellibranchia 74201012 Sepia cultrata 733 Anomalodesmacea, suborder of order Eulamellibranchia 8 Annelida 73301 Veneridae, family of suborder 8 Annulata (syn. Annelida) Heterodonta 81, 83, Chaetopoda, class of Annelida 73301011 Mercenaria mercenaria and 84 (equals Archiannelida plus 73301011 Venus mercenaria Oligochaeta and Polychaeta, (syn. Mercenaria mercenaria) classes of Annelida) 73302 Myidae, family of suborder 81 and 82 Clitellata, class of Annelida Adapedonta (equals classes Oligochaeta 73302011 Mya arenaria and Hirudinea) 73303 Teredinidae, family of suborder 81 Oligochaeta, class of Annelida Adapedonta 81 Oligochaeta, subclass of class 7330301 Teredo sp. Clitellata 7330302 Bankia sp. 36 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19. 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 811, 812, Oligochaeta, order of Chaetopoda 834 and 813 (equals orders Opisthopora, Plesiopara, and Prosopora) 811 Opisthopora, order of class 834 Oligochaeta 811 Opisthopora, suborder of order Oligochaeta 834 81101 Lumbricidae, family of order Opisthopora 83401 81101 Earthworms 81101011 Lumbricus terrestris 835 812 Plesiopora, order of class Oligochaeta or suborder of order Oligochaeta 83 5 81201 Tubificidae 81201011 Tubif ex tubi f ex 813 Prosopora, order of class 835 Oligochaeta or suborder of order Oligochaeta 836 82 Hirudinea, class of phylum Annelida or subclass of class Chaetopoda 836 82 Leeches 821 Arhynchobdellida (syn. Gnathobdellida) 836 821 Gnathobdellida (syn. Arhynchobdellida) 83601 82101 Hirudidae 82101 Gnathobdellidae 84 (syn. Hirudidae) 840 82101011 Hirudo medicinalis 822 Rhynchobdellida, order of class 84001 Hirudinea 83 Polychaeta, class of Annelida F 83 Errantia, subclass of class Fl Polychaeta Fll 831 to 836 Polychaeta, order of Chaetopoda FllOl (equals all other orders listed FllOlOll of class Polychaeta) F1101021 831 Amphinomorpha, order of subclass F1102 Errantia G 83101 Amphinomidae H 832 Nereimorpha (syn. Nereidiformia), order of subclass Errantia 9 832 Nereidiformia (syn. Nereimorpha), 91 order of subclass Errantia 91 832 Nereidiformia, suborder of order Polychaeta 91 83201 Aphroditidae, family of order Nereimorpha 911 83 Sedentaria, subclass of class Polychaeta 833 Spiomorpha (syn. Spioniformia), 91 order of subclass Sedentaria 833 Spioniformia (syn. Spiomorpha), 912 order of subclass Sedentaria 833 Spioniformia, suborder of order Polychaeta 91201 83301 Ariciidae, family of order 91201011 Spioniformia Drilomorpha (syn. Capitelliformia), order of subclass Sedentaria Capitelliformia (syn. Drilomorpha), order of subclass Sedentaria Capitelliformia, suborder of order Polychaeta Cirratulidae, family of order Drilomorpha Terebellomorpha (syn. Terebelliformia), order of subclass Sedentaria Terebelliformia (syn. Terebellomorpha), order of subclass Sedentaria Terebelliformia, suborder of order Polychaeta Serpulimorpha (syn. Sabelliformia), order of subclass Sedentaria Sabelliformia (syn. Serpulimorpha), order of Sedentaria Sabelliformia, suborder of order Polychaeta Sabellariidae, family of order Serpulimorpha Archiannelida, class of Annelida Archiannellda (no acceptable organization into orders in 1957) Polygordiidae Echiuroidea Echiurida Echiuroinea Echiuridae Echiurus pallasii Urechis caupo Bonelliidae Sipunculidoidea Priapulidoidea Arthropoda Crustacea Branchiopoda, subclass of class Crustacea Eubranchiopoda, superorder of subclass Branchiopoda Anostraca, order of subclass Branchiopoda (or order of Eubranchiopoda) Oligobranchiopoda, superorder of subclass Branchiopoda Cladocera, order of subclass Branchiopoda (or order of Oligobranchiopoda) Daphnidae Daphnia pulex - 37 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 91 Phyllopoda (syn. Branchiopoda or syn. Eubranchiopoda) 91 Cirripedia, subclass of class Crustacea 913 Thoraclca, order of subclass Cirripedia 91301 Balanidae 9130101! Balanus tintinnabulum 91 Malacostraca, subclass of class Crustacea 91 Eumalacostraca, series of subclass Malacostraca 91 Eucarida, superorder of subclass Malacostraca (and superorder of series Eumalacostraca) 914 Decapoda, order of subclass Malacostraca (and order of superorder Eucarida) 91401 Homaridae 91402 Hippidae 91403 Cancridae 91404 Portunidae 91405 Ocypodidae 91406 Majidae 91407 Palaemonidae 91408 Palinuridae 91409 Astacidae 9140901 Cambarus sp. 91 Peracarida, superorder of subclass Malacostraca (and superorder of series Eumalacostraca) 915 Isopoda, order of subclass Malacostraca (and order of superorder Peracarida of series Eumalacostraca) 915 Asellota, suborder of order Isopoda 91501 Asellidae, family of suborder Asellota of order Isopoda 916 Amphipoda, order of subclass Malacostraca (and order of superorder Peracarida of series Eumalacostraca) 916 Gammaridea, suborder of order Amphipoda 91601 Gammaridae, family of suborder Gammaridea of order Amphipoda 9160101 Gammarus sp. 92 Arachnida 92 Arachnoidea (syn. Arachnida) 921 Xiphosura, order of class Arachnida 922 Araneida, order of class Arachnida 922 Araneae (syn. Araneida) 92201 Theridiidae 92201011 Latrodectus mactans 923 Acarina, order of class Arachnida 923 Ixodoidea, superfamily of order Acarina 92301 Ixodidae, family of superfamily Ixodoidea 92301011 Dermacentor variabilis 92301021 Rhipicephalus sanguineus 9230103 1 Amblyomma americanum 92301041 Boophilus annalatus 92301042 Boophilus australis 92301043 Boophilus decoloratus 92302 Tetranychidae 92302011 Tetranychus telarius 92302011 Tetranychus althaeae (syn. of T. telarius) 92302012 Tetranychus pacificus 92302013 Tetranychus bimaculatus (92302014) (Available for Tetranychus sp. ) (92302015) (Available for Tetranychus sp. ) 92302016 Tetranychus cinnabarinus 92302016 Tetranychus multisetis (syn. Tetranychus cinnabarinus) 92302017 Tetranychus atlanticus 92302021 Metatetranychus pilosus 92302021 Paratetranychus pilosus (syn. Metatetranychus pilosus) 92302022 Metatetranychus citri 92302022 Paratetranychus citri (syn. Metatetranychus citri) 92302031 Eotetranychus sexmaculatus 923 Trombidioidea, superfamily of order Acarina 92303 Trombidiidae, family of superfamily Trombidioidea Eutrombicula alfreddugesi Hannemania sp. Trombicula acuscutellaris Acariscus masoni Argasidae, family of superfamily Ixodoidea Argas persicus Sarcoptoidea, superfamily of order Acarina 92305 Sarcoptidae, family of superfamily Sarcoptoidea 9230501 Knemidokoptes sp. 923 Parasitoidea, superfamily of order Acarina 92306 Dermanyssidae, family of superfamily Parasitoidea 92306011 Dermanyssus gallinae 92306021 Ornithonyssus bacoti 923 Acaroidea, superfamily of order Acarina 92307 Acaridae, family of superfamily Acaroidea 923 Tarsonemoidea, superfamily of order Acarina 92308 Tarsonemidae, family of superfamily Tarsonemoidea 92303011 9230302 92303031 92303041 92304 92304011 923 38 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20. 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 923 Laelaptoidea, superfamily of 930 order Acarina 93D 92309 Laelaptidae, family of 93E superfamily Laelaptoidea 93E 92309011 Echinolaelaps echidninus 923 Analgesoidea, superfamily of order Acarina 93E01 92310 Analgesidae, family of 93E01011 superfamily Analgesoidea 93E01021 923 Hydrachnae, superfamily of 93E01031 order Acarina 93E01041 92311 Hydrachnidae, family of 93F superfamily Hydrachnae 93F01 923 Eriophyoidea, superfamily of 93F01011 order Acarina 93G 92312 Eriophyidae, family of 93G01 superfamily Eriophyoidea 93G01 9231201 Eriophyes sp. 93G01011 9231202 Phyllocoptes sp. 93G01011 92312031 Aceria sheldoni 93 Insecta 93G01012 931 •^ Protura 93G01021 932 Thysanura 93G01031 933 Collembola 93G01041 934 Orthoptera 93G01051 93401 Blattidae 93G02 93401011 Periplaneta americana 93G02011 93401021 Blattella germanica 93G02012 93402 Locustidae (not in current valid 93G02021 use) 93G02022 93402 Acrididae (syn. Locustidae) 93G02023 93402 Cyrtacanthacridinae, subfamily 93G02024 of Acrididae 93G02025 9340201 Melanoplus, genus of subfamily 93G02026 Cyrtacanthacridinae 93G02031 93402011 Melanoplus femur- rubrum 93G03 93402012 Melanoplus bivittatus 93G03O11 93402013 Melanoplus mexicanus 93G03012 93402014 Melanoplus differentialis 93G03013 9340202 Locusta, genus of subfamily 93G03014 Oedipodinae 93G0302 93402021 Locusta migratoria 93G03031 93402 Oedipodinae, subfamily of 93G03041 Locustidae 93G04 9340203 Camnula, genus of subfamily 93G04011 Oedipodinae 93G04021 93402031 Camnula pellucida 93G04031 93 5 Zoraptera 93G05 936 Isoptera 93G06 93601 Mastotermitidae 93G07 93602 Kalotermitidae 93G08 93603 Hodotermitidae 93G08011 93603011 Zootermopsis nevadensis 93G08021 93604 Rhinotermitidae 93H 9360402 Reticulitermes sp. 93H01 937 Neuroptera 93H02 938 Ephemeroptera 93H02011 939 Odonata 93H03 93A Plecoptera 93H04 93 B Psocoptera 93H04011 Maiiophaga Embioptera Thysanoptera Terebrantia, suborder of order Thysanoptera Thripidae, family of suborder Terebrantia Heliothrips haemorrhoidalis Thrips tabaci Anaphothrips obscurus Frankliniella fusca Anoplura Pediculidae Pediculus humanus humanus Homoptera Cicadellidae Jassidae (syn. Cicadellidae) Empoasca fabae Potato leaf hopper, Apple leaf hopper Empoasca abrupta Erythroneura elegantula Circulifer tenellus Macrosteles divisus Idiocerus pistacioe Aphidae Aphis gossypii Aphis spiraecola Macrosiphum solanifolii Macrosiphum pisi Macrosiphum gei Macrosiphum onobrychidis Macrosiphum rosae Macrosiphum ambrosiae Brevicoryne brassicae Coccidae Pseudococcus citri Pseudococcus maritimus Pseudococcus comstocki Pseudococcus njalensis Myzodes sp. Lecanium corni Aonidiella aurantii Cercopidae Aphrophora saratogensis Philaenus leucophthalmus Clastoptera achatina Membracidae Aleyrodidae Cicadidae Psyllidae Psylla pyricola Paratrioza cockerelli Hemiptera Miridae Cimicidae Cimex lectularius Reduviidae Coreidae Anasa tristis - 39 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 93H05 Tingidae 93J0410 93H06 Lygaeidae 93J04111 93H06011 Blissus leucopterus 93J04121 93H06021 Nysius ericae 93J04131 93H06031 Oncopeltus fasciatus 93J04141 93H07 Nabidae 93J04141 93H07011 Nabls alternatus 93H07012 Nabis ferus 93J05 93H0702 Pagasa 93J0501 1 93H0703 Prostemma 93J05021 93H07041 Geocoris punctlpes 93J05031 93H08 Pentatomidae 93J06 93H09 Pyrrhocoridae 93J06011 93H10 Anthocoridae 93J06021 93H10011 Orius insidiosus 93J06031 93J Coleoptera 93J07 93J01 Chrysomelidae 93J07011 93J01011 Chrysomela lapponica 93J0702 93J01021 Diabrotica vittata 93J07031 93J01031 Leptinotarsa decemlineata 93J07041 93J01041 Galerucella xanthomelaena 93J08 93J01051 Altica chalybea 93J09 93J01052 Altica ambiens 93J10 93J01061 Crioceris asparagi 93J11 93J01071 Lema melanopa 93J11011 93J01081 Phyllotreta vittata 93J12 93J01091 Epitrix cucumeris 93J13 93J01092 Epitrix fuscula 93J14 93J01093 Epitrix hirtipennis 93JI5011 93J01094 Epitrix parvula 93J15021 93J01095 Epitrix subcrinita 93K 93J01096 Epitrix tuberis 93L 93J01101 Paria canella 93M 93J01111 Phaedon cochleariae 93N 93J01121 Gastrophysa cyanea 93N01 93J02 Tenebrionidae 93N010ir 93J0201I Tribolium madens 93N01021 93J02012 Tribolium castaneum 93N01031 (syn. Tribolium ferrugineum) 93N01031 93J02013 Tribolium confusum 93J02021 Tenebrio molitor 93N01041 93J03 Coccinellidae 93N01051 93J03011 Epilachna varivestis 93N01051 93J03021 Adalia bipunctata 93J03031 Hippodamia convergens 93N01061 93J03041 Ceratomegilla fuscilabris 93N01061 93J0305 Scymnus sp. 93J04 Curculionidae 93N01062 93J04011 Anthonomus grandis 93N02 93J04021 Rhynchites bicolor 93N03 93J04031 Cylas formicarius elegantulus 93N03011 93J04041 Hypera postica 93N03021 93J04051 Conotrachelus nenuphar 93N04 93J04061 Sitona cylindricollis 93N05 93J04071 Sitophilus granarius 93N05 93J0407 1 Calandra granaria 93N05O11 (syn. Sitophilus granarius) 93N05011 93J04072 Sitophilus oryza 93J04081 Brachyrhinus ovatus 93N05021 93104091 Pissodes strobl 93N05022 Calendra sp. Ceutorhynchus assimilis Sciobius granosus Listroderes costirostris obliquus Graphognathus leucoloma Pantomorus leucoloma (syn. Graphognathus leucoloma) Bruchidae Acanthoscelides obtectus Bruchus brachialis Callosobruchus maculatus Anobiidae Anobium punctatum Stegobium peniceum Lasioderma serricorne Scarabaeidae Anomala orientalis Phyllophaga sp. Macrodactylus subspinosus Popillia japonica Dermestidae Byturidae Scolytidae Meloidae Epicauta lemniscata Cucujidae Elateridae Lyctidae Rhizopertha dominica Dinoderus minutus Strepsipera Mecoptera Trichoptera Lepidoptera Olethreutidae Carpocapsa pomonella Evetria comstockiana Lobesia viteana Polychrosis viteana (syn. Lobesia viteana) Spilonota ocellana Cydia pomonella Carpocapsa pomonella (syn. Cydia pomonella) Grapholitha molesta Laspeyresia molesta (syn. Grapholitha molesta) Grapholitha packardi Pieridae Arctiidae Hyphantria cunea Estigmene acrea Pyralidae Noctuidae Phalaenidae (syn. Noctuidae) Pseudaletia unipuncta Cirphis unipuncta (syn. Pseudaletia unipuncta) Heliothis armigera Heliothis zea - 40 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code 19, 20, 21, and 2 5 Columns 18, 22, 23, 24, 93N05031 Alabama arglllacea 9300104 93N05041 Feltia subterranea 93001051 93N05051 Prodenia litura 93001061 93N05062 Prodenia erldania 93002 93N05053 Prodenia ornithogalli 93002011 93N05061 Ceramica picta 93002012 93N0507 Caenurgina erechtea 93002013 93N05081 Laphygma exigua 93002014 93N05082 Laphygma frugiperda 93002015 93N05091 Mamestra brassicae 93002016 93N05101 Peridroma margaritosa 93002017 93N05111 Trichoplusia ni 93002021 93N05121 Agrotis orthogonia 93002031 93N05131 Anticarsia gemmatalis 93002032 93N05141 Crymodes devastator 93002033 93N0515 Aramisa sp. 93002034 93N05161 Euxoa messoria 93002035 93N05171 Hypena humuli 93002036 93N05181 Pseudoplusia rogationis 93002037 93N05I81 Pseudoplusia includens 93002041 (syn. Pseudoplusia rogationis) 93002042 93N06 Bombycidae 93002042 93N07 Tineidae 93N08 Plutellidae 93002043 93N08011 Plutella maculipennis 93002044 93N09 Gelechiidae 93002045 93N10 Tortricidae 93003 93N11 Citheroniidae 93003011 93N12 Notodontidae 93003021 93N13 Gracilariidae 9300303 93N14 Lymantriidae 93003041 93N14 Liparidae (syn. Lymantriidae) 9300305 93N15 Hyponemeutidae 9300305 93N16 Lasiocampidae 93N17 Aegeriidae 9300306 93N18 Sphingldae 93003071 93N19 Psychidae 93003072 93N20 Geometridae 93004 93N21 Hesperiidae 93004 93N21011 Urbenus proteus 93004011 93N22 Saturniidae 93004021 93N23 Dioptidae 93004022 93N23011 Phryganidia californica 93004023 93N24 Pyraustidae 93005 93N24011 Pyrausta nubilalis 93005011 93N24021 Hymenia recurvalis 93006 93N24031 Pachyzancla bipunctalis 93007 93N24041 Udea rubigalis 93008 93N24041 Phlyctaenia rubigalis 93009 (syn. Udea rubigalis) 93010 93N24051 Hellula undalis 93011 93N24061 Loxostege similalis 93011 93N24071 Diaphania hyalinata 93012 93N24072 Diaphania nitidalis 93012 93N24081 Evergestis rimosalis 9301201 930 Diptera 9301201 93001 Calliphoridae 93012021 93001011 Phormia regina 93012021 93001021 Calliphora augur 93001031 Chrysomyia macellaria Rhinia sp. Lucilia caesar Callitroga americana Culicidae Aedes aegypti Aedes sollicitans Aedes taeniorhynchus Aedes communis Aedes excrucians Aedes pionips Aedes trivittatus Mansonia fasciolata Anopheles quadrimaculatus Anopheles gambiae Anopheles pseudopunctipennis Anopheles albimanus Anopheles aztecus Anopheles claviger Anopheles farauti Culex pipiens Culex quinquefasciatus Culex fatigans (syn. Culex quinquefasciatus) Culex apicalis Culex bitaeniorhynchus Culex erraticus Muscidae Stomoxys calcitrans Musca domestica Anthomya sp. Chrysomyia megacephala Haematobia irritans Siphona irritans (syn. Haematobia irritans) Muscina stabulans Glossina morsitans Glossina palpalis Tephritidae Trypetidae (syn. Tephritidae) Rhagoletis pomonella Dacus oleae Dacus ferrugineus Dacus dorsalis Drosophilidae Drosophlla melanogaster Tabanidae Agromyzidae Acroceridae Asilidae Hippoboscidae Itonididae Cecidomyiidae (syn. Itonididae) Tendipedidae Chironomidae (syn. Tendipedidae) Tendipes sp. Chironomus (syn. Tendipes) Hydrobaenus stercorarius Smittia stercorarius (syn. Hydrobaenus stercorarius) 41 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 93012021 Camptocladius byssinus (syn. Hydrobaenus stercorarius) 9301203 Cricotopus trifasciatus 93012041 Procladius pusillus 93012042 Procladius culiciformis 93012042 Protenthes culiciformis (syn. Procladius culiciformis) 93012051 Pentaneura carnea 93012051 Tanypus carneus (syn. Pentaneura carnea) 93012061 Tanytarsus obediens 93013 Chaoboridae 93014 Heleidae 93014 Ceratogonidae (syn. Heleidae) 93014 Ceratopogonidae (syn. Heleidae) 9301401 Dasyhelea 93014021 Bezzia setulosa 93014022 Bezzia glabra 93014022 Probezzia glaber (syn. Bezzia glabra) 9301403 Atrichopogon 9301404 Palpomyia 93014051 Forcipomyia cilipes 93014061 Dicrohelea argentata 93014061 Johannesenomyia argentata (syn. Dicrohelea argentata) 9301407 1 Sphaeromias longipennis 93014071 Palpomyia longipennis (syn. Sphaeromias longipennis) 9301408 Leptoconops sp. 9301409 Lasiohelea sp. 9301410 Stilobezzia 9301411 Macropeza 9301412 Monohelea 93014131 Culicoides nubeculosus 93014132 Culicoides tristriatulus 93015 Chloropidae 93016 Gasterophilidae 93017 Fungivoridae 93017 Mycetophilidae (syn. Fungivoridae) 93018 Oestridae 93019 Piophilidae 93020 Psilidae 93021 Psychodidae 93022 Sarcophagidae 93023 Simuliidae 93023011 Austrosimulium bancrofti 93023021 Cnephia dacotensis 93023021 Eusimulium lascivum (syn. Cnephia dacotensis) 9302303 Prosimulium hirtipes 93023041 Simulium damnosum 93023042 Simulium metallicum 93023043 Simulium ochraceum 93023044 Simulium ornatum 93023045 Simulium venustum 93023046 Simulium vittatum 93023047 Simulium downsi 93P Siphonaptera 93P01 Pulicidae 93P01011 Ctenocephalides canis 93P01012 Ctenocephalides fells 93P01021 Xenopsylla cheopis 93Q Hymenoptera 93Q01 Apidae 93O01011 Apis mellifera 93O02 Tenthredinidae 93Q03 Braconidae 93Q0303 Habrobracon sp. 93Q04 Formicidae 93Q05 Vespidae 93Q06 Ichneumonidae 93Q07 Cephidae 93Q08 Chalcididae 93Q08011 Eurytoma pistaciae 94 Symphyla 95 Chilopoda 96 Diplopoda 42 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 PROTOCHORDATA AND VERTEBRATA THROUGH PISCES The list of lower Chordata has presented a particular difficulty. It has been decided finally to arrange a selected number of group and intergroup names, each accompanied with a note of its taxonomic status relative to the superior group of which it is a member. The thread of more than one taxonomic scheme can be traced through the list, therefore, by examination of the definitions of the items. Regardless of the multiplicity of schemes that are represented by the many taxonomic names, the basic scheme that has been followed in assigning code symbols (for fishes) is that of Berg. The others are more or less "obsolete" schemes, yet they include names and organizations encountered frequently enough to justify their inclusion. A supplemental guide to the taxonomic relationships is provided by the parenthetical numbers and letters immediately preceding the name: all those items designated by the same parenthetical figure represent a single classification scheme. (In general, the scheme according to Berg is marked bTW- ) In the following list, any group name which does not represent a category assigned it in the taxonomic scheme of Berg has been assigned a symbol- -as far as possible- -on the basis of that group's equivalent in Berg's scheme; for example, Hyperoartia, which has been described as an order of a class, Marsipobranchii, (in a scheme now probably considered "obsolete", designated as the "X" series), has been assigned Code Symbol Al on the basis of the fact that its equivalent (as recognized in this list) is a class, Petromyzones. A (1, 0, T, X A (1 A (1 A A A A A A (0 A (1 or 0 A (0 A (T (T A (1 and T A (1 and T A (0 A (0 A (2 A (2 A (2 A (2 A (X Chordata, phylum (equals phylum Vertebrata plus Hemichordata and Tunicata) Protochordata (syn. Prochordata), division of phylum Chordata (equals Tunicata plus Leptocardii and Hemichordata) Prochordata (syn. Protochordata), division of phylum Chordata (equals Tunicata plus Leptocardii and Hemichordata) Tunicata, sub-division of division Protochordata Leptocardii, sub-division of division Protochordata Hemichordata, sub-division of division Protochordata Enteropneusta (syn. Hemichordata) Adelochorda (syn. Hemichordata) Tunicata, subphylum of phylum Chordata Urochordata (syn. Tunicata, subdivision or subphylum) Leptocardii, subphylum of phylum Chordata (equals division Acrania) Acrania (syn. Cephalochordata), (excluding Hemichordata and Tunicata) division of phylum Chordata Cephalochordata (syn. division Acrania excluding Hemichordata and Tunicata), division of phylum Chordata Vertebrata (syn. division Craniata), division of phylum Chordata Craniata (syn. division Vertebrata), division of phylum Chordata Vertebrata (syn. subphylum Craniata), subphylum of phylum Chordata Craniata (syn. subphylum Vertebrata), subphylum of phylum Chordata Vertebrata, phylum Acrania, subphylum of phylum Vertebrata Cephalochordata (syn. Acrania, subphylum of phylum Vertebrata) Leptocardii (syn. Acrania, subphylum of phylum Vertebrata) Leptocardii, class of phylum Chordata (equals Leptocardii, subphylum of phylum Vertebrata) Classification of Fishes Both Recent and Fossil; 1947, J. W. Edwards, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Leo S. Berg; 1940: English and Russian Edition, 43 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 (X) A (2 A U A A A U A Al and A2 Al and A2 Al and A2 U Al and A2 (2 Al and A2 (X Al and A2 AA (X Al U Al (2 Al (X A12 (2 A12 (1 A1201 (2 A1201 (X A1201011 A2 (2 A2 (2 A21 (2 A2 (X A21 (1 A21 (1 A (2 A (1 (1 A (2 AA (2 AA (1 (X AA (2 or X AA (1 AA (2 AA (2 AA (2 AA (2 Myelozoa (syn. Leptocardil, class of phylum Chordata) (equals Leptocardii, subphylum of phylum Vertebrata) Craniata, subphylum of phylum Vertebrata Anamnia, sub- subphylum of subphylum Craniata Anamnia, subdivision of division Craniata (equals Anamnia, sub- subphylum of subphylum Craniata) Pisces, superclass of subdivision Anamnia Agnatha, superclass of sub- subphylum Anamnia Agnatha, class of superclass Pisces (equals Agnatha, superclass of sub- subphylum Anamnia) Cephalaspidomorphi, subclass of superclass Pisces Cyclostomata, order of subclass Cephalaspidomorphi (equals Cyclostomata, class of superclass Agnatha) Cyclostomata (syn. Marsipobranchii), class of superclass Agnatha Marsipobranchii (syn. Cyclostomata, class of superclass Agnatha) Marsipobranchii, class of phylum Chordata (equals Marsipobranchii, class of superclass Agnatha) (equals Petromyzones plus Myxini, classes of superclass Agnatha) Cyclostomi (syn. Marsipobranchii, class of Chordata) (equals Marsipobranchii, class of superclass Agnatha) (equals Petromyzones plus Myxini, classes of superclass Agnatha) Petromyzones, class of superclass Agnatha Hyperoartii (syn. Petromyzones, class of superclass Agnatha) Hyperoartia, order of Marsipobranchii, class of Chordata (equals Petromyzones, class of superclass Agnatha) Petromyzoniformes, order of class Petromyzones Petromyzontia, suborder of order Cyclostomata (equals Petromyzoniformes, order of class Petromyzones) Petromyzonidae, family of Petromyzoniformes, order of Petromyzones Petromyzonidae, family of Hyperoartia, order of Marsipobranchii (equals family Petromyzonidae, family of Petromyzoniformes) Petromyzon marinus Myxini, class of superclass Agnatha Hyperotreti (syn. Myxini, class of superclass Agnatha) Myxiniformes, order of class Myxini Hyperotreta, order of Marsipobranchii, class of Chordata (equals Myxini, class of superclass Agnatha) Myxinoidea, suborder of order Cyclostomata (equals Myxiniformes, order of class Myxini) Hyperotreti (syn. Myxinoidea, suborder of order Cyclostomata) (equals Myxiniformes, order of class Myxini) Gnathostomata, superclass of sub- subphylum Anamnia Chondrichthyes, class of superclass Pisces (is included in Gnathostomata, superclass of sub- subphylum Anamnia) Gnathostomata, class of superclass Pisces (equals class Chondrichthyes plus class Osteichthyes of superclass Pisces) (equals Gnathostomata, superclass of sub- subphylum Anamnia) Pisces, series of Gnathostomata Elasmobranchii, class of series Pisces Elasmobranchii, subclass of class Chondrichthyes (equals Elasmobranchii, class of series Pisces) Elasmobranchii, class of phylum Chordata (equals Elasmobranchii, class of series Pisces) Selachii, subclass of class Elasmobranchii Selachii, order of subclass Elasmobranchii (equals Selachii, subclass of class Elasmobranchii) Euselachii (syn. Selachii, subclass of class Elasmobranchii) Plagiostomi (syn. Selachii, subclass of class Elasmobranchii) Selachoidei, superorder of subclass Selachii Pleurotremata (syn. Selachoidei, superorder of subclass Selachii) - 44 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 AAl (2 AAl (X AAl (1 AAl (2 AAl (X AAlOl (2 or 1 AAlOl (X AA2 (2 AA201 (2 AA2 (2 AA2 (1 AA2 (X AA2 (X AA201 (X AA3 (2 AA3 (2 AA3 (2 AA301 (2 AA3 (1 AA3 (X AA3 (X AA3 (X AA301 (X AA4 (2 AA4 (1 AA4 AA502 (X AA4 (2 AA4 (X AA4 (2 AA4 (X AA (2 AA (2 AA (X AA (X AA (1 AA5 (2 AA501 (2 AA5 (X AA501 (X AA5 (X (X AA6 (2 AA601 (2 AA6 (1 Heterodontiformes, order of superorder Selachoidei Cestraciontes, order of subclass Selachii Heterodontojdea, suborder of order Selachii (equals Heterodontiformes, order of superorder Selachoidei) Heterodontoldei, suborder of order Heterodontiformes Prosarthri, suborder of order Cestraciontes Heterodontidae, family of suborder Heterodontoldei or of suborder Heterodontoidea Heterodontidae, family of suborder Prosarthri (equals Heterodontidae, family of suborder Heterodontoldei) Hexanchiformes, order of superorder Selachoidei Hexanchidae, family of order Hexanchiformes Notidanoidei (syn. Hexanchiformes, order of superorder Selachoidei) Notidantoidea, suborder of order Selachii (equals Hexanchiformes, order of superorder Selachoidei) Notidani, order of subclass Selachii Opistharthri, suborder of order Notidani Hexanchidae, family of suborder Opistharthri (equals Hexanchidae, family of order Hexanchiformes) Lamniformes, order of superorder Selachoidei Galeoidei (syn. Lamniformes, order of superorder Selacnoidei) Lamnoidei, suborder of order Lamniformes Lamnidae, family of suborder Lamnoidei Galeoidea, suborder of order Selachii (equals Lamniformes, order of superorder Selachoidei) Euselachii, order of subclass Selachii Galei, suborder of order Euselachii Lamnoidei, series of suborder Galei Lamnidae, family of series Lamnoidei (equals family Lamnidae of suborder Lamnoidei) Squaliformes, order of superorder Selachoidei Squaloidea, suborder of order Selachii (equals Squaliformes, order of superorder Selachoidei) Tectospondyli, order of subclass Selachii (syn. Squaliformes, order of superorder Selachoidei) Squaloidei, suborder of order Squaliformes Squaloidei, suborder of order Tectospondyli (equals Squaloidei, suborder of order Squaliformes) Squatinoidei, suborder of order Squaliformes Squatinoidei, suborder of order Tectospondyli (equals Squatinoidei, suborder of order Squaliformes) Batoidei, superorder of subclass Selachii Hypotremata (syn. Batoidei, superorder of subclass Selachii) Batoidei, order of subclass Selachii (equals Batoidei, superorder of subclass Selachii) Hypotremata (syn. Batoidea, order of subclass Selachii) (equals Batoidei, superorder of subclass Selachii) Batoidea, order of subclass Elasmobranchil (equals superorder of subclass Selachii) Rajiformes, order of superorder Batoidei Pristidae, family of order Rajiformes Sarcura, suborder of order Batoidea (plus suborder Masticura equals order Rajiformes) Pristidae, family of suborder Sarcura (equals Pristidae, family of order Rajiformes) Masticura, suborder of order Batoidea (plus suborder Sarcura equals order Rajiformes) Dasyatidae, family of suborder Masticura (equals Trygonidae, family of order Rajiformes) Torpediniformes, order of superorder Batoidei Torpedinidae, family of order Torpediniformes Narcaciontes, suborder of order Batoidea (equals order Torpediniformes) 45 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 AA601 AB AB AB A3 A31 (1) (2 (X AB (2 ABl (2 AB (1 ABl (X A {X AC (2 AC (2 A {1 A (1 AC (1 AC (2 AC (2 ACl (2 (X ACl (X A3 (2 A3 (2 A3 (X (1 A3 (2 A31 (2 A31 (2 A3 I (X (X A31 (2 A3 (1 A3 (2 A3 (1 A3 (1 A3 (X A3 2 (2 A3 2 (2 A32 (2 A3 2 (X A3201 (X A3 2 (1 A3 3 (2 Torpedinidae, family of suborder Narcaciontes (equals Torpedinidae, family of order Torpediniformes) Holocephali, class of series Pisces Holocephali, subclass of class Chondrichthyes (equals Holocephali, class of series Pisces) Holocephali, subclass of class Elasmobranchii (equals Holocephali, class of series Pisces) Chimaerae, subclass of class Holocephali Chimaeriformes, order of subclass Chimaerae Chimaerae, order of subclass Holocephali (equals Chimaerae, subclass of class Holocephali) Chimaeroidei, order of subclass Holocephali (equals Chimaeriformes, order of subclass Chimaerae) Pisces, class of phylum Chordata (equals Pisces, series of superclass Gnathostomata) Dipnoni, class of series Pisces Dipneusta (syn. Dipnoi, class of series Pisces) Osteichthyes, class of superclass Pisces (is included in superclass Gnathostomata, of sub-subphylum Anamnia) Amphibioidei, subclass of class Osteichthyes (see Osteichthyes) Dipnoi, order of subclass Amphibioidei (equals Dipnoi, class of series Pisces) Dipneusta, subclass of class Pisces (equals Dipnoi, class of series Pisces) Ceratodi, superorder of class Dipnoi Ceratodiformes, order of superorder Ceratodi Crossopterygii, subclass of class Pisces (Symbol A3) Sirenoidei, order of subclass Crossopterygii (equals Ceratodiformes, order of superorder Ceratodi) Teleostomi, class of series Pisces Crossopterygii, subclass of class Teleostomi Crossopterygii, subclass of class Pisces (equals Crossopterygii, subclass of class Teleostomi) Crossopterygii, order of subclass Amphibioidei (equals Crossopterygii, subclass of class Teleostomi) Coelancanthi, superorder of subclass Crossopterygii Coelacanthiformes, order of superorder Coelacanthi Actinistia (syn. Coelacanthiformes, order of superorder Coelacanthi) Actinistia, order of subclass Crossopterygii (equals Coelacanthiformes, order of superorder Coelacanthi) Coelacanthini (syn. Actinistia, order of subclass Crossopterygii) (equals Coelacanthiformes, order of superorder Coelacanthi) Coelacanthoidei, suborder of order Coelacanthiformes Coelacanthini, suborder of order Crossopterygii (equals Coelacanthi, superorder of subclass Crossopterygii) Actinopterygii, subclass of class Teleostomi Actinopterygii, subclass of class Osteichthyes (equals Actinoperygii, subclass of class Teleostomi) Chondrostei, superorder of subclass Actinopterygii Actinopteri, subclass of class Pisces (plus Cladistia equals Teleostomi, class of series Pisces) Polypteriformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Cladistia (syn. Polypteriformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii) Brachiopterygli (syn. Polypteriformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii) Cladistia, order of subclass Crossopterygii (equals Polypteriformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii) Polypteridae, family of order Cladistia (equals Polypteridae, family of order Polypteriformes) Polypterini, order of superorder Chondrostei (equals Polypteriformes order of subclass Actinopterygii) Acipenseriformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii (equals order Glaniostomi plus order Selachostomi) 46 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 A3 3 (1). A33, A34, and A35 (X A330I (2 A3 3 (X A3301 A3 3 02 A3 3 A3302 A3 A3B A3B A3B A3B (x: (2. (X (X (1 (2: (1 (X (X A3B01 (X) A3C (2) A3C01 (2) A3 (1 andX) A3 4 (2) A3 4 (2) A34 (2) A34 (1 and X) A3 4 (2) A3 4 (X) A34 (1) A34 (2) A3401 (2) A3401 (X) A3 4 (2) A3 4 (X) A3 4 (1) A3402 (2) A3402011 A340201I A3402012 A3402012 A3402013 A3402013 A3402021 A3402021 A35 (2) A35 (X) A36 (2) A3 6 (2) A36 (X) A37 (2) Acipenseroidei, order of superorder Chondrostei (equals Acipenseriformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Ganoidei, superorder of subclass Actinopteri Acipenseridae, family of order Acipenseriformes Glaniostomi, order of superorder Ganoidei (plus order Selachostomi equals order Acipenseriformes) Acipenseridae, family of order Glaniostomi (equals Acipenseridae, family of order Acipenseriformes) Polyodontidae, family of order Acipenseriformes Selachostomi, order of superorder Ganoidei (plus order Glaniostomi equals order Acipenseriformes) Polyodontidae, family of order Selachostomi (equals Polyodontidae, family or order Acipenseriformes) Holostei, superorder of subclass Actinopterygli Amiiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli Amioidea, order of superorder Holostei (equals Amiiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Halecomorphi, order of superorder Ganoidei (equals Amiiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Amioidei (syn. Halecomorphi, order of superorder Ganoidei) (equals Amiiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Amiidae, family of order Halecomorphi (equals Amiidae, family of order Amiiformes) Lepidosteiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli Lepidosteidae, family of order Lepidosteiformes Teleostei, superorder of subclass Actinopterygli Clupeiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli Isospondyli (syn. Clupeiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Thrissomorphi (syn. Clupeiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Isospondyli, order of superorder Teleostei (equals Clupeiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Clupeoidei, suborder of order Clupeiformes Clupeoidei, suborder of order Isospondyli Clupeoidea, suborder of order Isospondyli (equals Clupeoidei, suborder of order Clupeiformes) Clupeoidae, superfamily of suborder Clupeoidei Clupeidae, family of superfamily Clupeoidae Clupeldae, family of suborder Clupeoidei (equals Clupeidae, family of superfamily Clupeoidae) Salmonoidei, suborder of order Clupeiformes Salmonoidei, suborder of order Isospondyli (equals Salmonoidei, suborder of order Clupeiformes) Salmonoldea, suborder of order Isospondyli (equals Salmonoidei, suborder of order Clupeiformes) Salmonidae, family of suborder Salmonoidei Salmo salar Atlantic salmon Salmo irideus Rainbow trout Salmo trutta Brown trout Oncorhynchus nerka Blue-back salmon Anguilliformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli Apodes, order of superorder Teleostei (equals Anguilliformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Mormyriformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli Scyphophori (syn. Mormyriformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli) Scyphophori, suborder of order Isospondyli Cyprinodontiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygli 47 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 A3 7 U) A3 7 (X) A37 01 (2) A37 01 (X) A3702 (2) A3702 (X) A3702011 A3 8 (2) A3 9 (2) A3A (2) A3A (2) A3A (2) A3 (X) A3A (X) A3A (2) A3A (1) A3A01 (i. or 1) A3A01 (X) A3A01011 A3A01021 A3A01021 A3A01021 A3A01022 A3A02 (2 or 1) A3A02 A3A02011 A3A02011 A3A03 (2 or 1) A3A (X) A3A03 (X) A3A03011 A3D (2) A3E (2) A3F (2) A3G (2) A3H (2) A3H (2) A3H (2) A3H A3H (X) (i: A3H01 (2) A3H01 (X) A3H01 A3H01011 A3H01011 A3H (1) A3H (1) A3H (2) A3H (2) A3H (X) Cyprinodontes (syn. Cyprinodontlformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii) Cyprinodontes, order of superorder Teleostel Cyprinodontidae, family of order Cyprinodontlformes Cyprinodontidae, family of order Cyprinodontes Poeciliidae, family of order Cyprinodontlformes Poeciliidae, family of order Cyprinodontes Gambusia affinis Gasterosteiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Syngnathiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Perciformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Acanthopterygii (syn. Perciformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii) Percomorphi (syn. Perciformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii) Acanthopterygii, superorder of subclass Actinopterygii Percomorphi, order of superorder Acanthopterygii Percoidei, suborder of order Perciformes Percoidea, suborder of order Acanthopterygii Centrarchidae, family of suborder Percoidei or of suborder Percoidea Centrarchidae, family of order Percomorphi Chaenobryttus gulosus Lepomis macrochirus Helioperca incisor (syn. Lepomis macrochirus) Bluegill sunfish Lepomis cyanellus Percidae. family of suborder Percoidei or of suborder Percoidea Percidae, family of order Percoidei Perca flavescens Yellow perch Cichlidae, family of suborder Percoidei or of suborder Percoidea Chromides, order of superorder Teleostei (included in the suborder Percoidei of the order Perciformes) Cichlidae, family of order Chromides (equals Cichlidae, family of suborder Percoidei) Tilapia kafuensis Ophiocephaliformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Symbranchiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Pleuronectiformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Mastacembeliformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Cypriniformes, order of subclass Actinopterygii Cyprinoidei, suborder of order Cypriniformes Eventognathi, suborder of order Cypriniformes (syn. Cyprinoidei, suborder of order Cypriniformes) Eventognathi, order of superorder Teleostei (equals Eventognathi, suborder of order Cypriniformes) Ostariophysi, order of superorder Teleostei (included in order Cypriniformes) (Symbol A3H) Cyprinoidea, suborder of order Ostariophysi (equals Cyprinoidei, suborder of order Cypriniformes) Cyprinidae, family of suborder Cyprinoidei Cyprinidae, family of order Eventognathi (equals Cyprinidae, family of suborder Cyprinoidei) Cyprinidae, family of suborder Cyprinoidea Carassius auratus Goldfish Ostariophysi, order of superorder Teleostei (included in order Cypriniformes) Siluroidea, suborder of order Ostariophysi Siluroidei, suborder of order Cypriniformes Nematognathi, suborder of order Cypriniformes (syn. Siluroidei, suborder of order Cypriniformes) Nematognathi, order of superorder Teleostei (equals Nematognathi, suborder of order Cypriniformes) - 48 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 A3H02 (2) A3H02 (X) A3H02 (1) A3H02011 A3H02021 A3H (2) ASH (X) A3H03 (2) A3H03 (X) A3H03011 A3H03011 A4 A4 A41 A41 A41 A4101 A4101011 A4101021 A41 A4102 A410201 A41 A4103 A4103011 A41 A4104 A4 1040 11 A4 104021 A4104022 A4 104022 A41 04022 A42 A42 A42 Ameiuridae, family of suborder A4201 Siluroidei Ameiuridae, family of order A42 Nematognathii Ameiuridae, family of suborder A4202 Siluroidea Ameiurus nebulosus A4202011 Ictalurus punctatus A4203 Gymnotoidei, suborder of order Cypriniformes A4203011 Gymnonoti, order of superorder A42 Teleostei (equals Gynotoidei, suborder of order Cypriniformes) A4204 Electrophoridae, family of suborder Gymnotoidei A42 Electrophoridae, family of order A4205 Gymnonoti (equals Electrophoridae, family of A4205011 suborder Gymnotoidei) A4205012 Electrophorus electricus A420 5013 Electric eel A4205014 Amphibia, class of division A4205015 Craniata A4206 Amphibia, class of phylum Chordata A4206011 Caudata, order of class A4206011 Amphibia Urodela (syn. Caudata) A4206012 Proteidea, suborder of order A4206013 Caudata A42 Proteidae, family of suborder Proteidea A4207 Necturus maculosus Proteus anguinus A4207011 Cryptobranchoidea, suborder of A4207012 order Caudata A4207013 Cryptobranchidae, family of A4207014 suborder Cryptobranchoidea A4207015 Cryptobranchus sp. A4207016 Ambystomoidea, suborder of A4207017 order Caudata A4208 Ambystomidae, family of suborder Ambystomoidea Ambystoma tigrinum A4209 Salamandroidea, suborder of order Caudata A4209011 Salamandridae, family of A5 suborder Salamandroidea A5 Salamandra salamandra A5 Triton cristatus A51 Triton taeniatus (syn. Triturus taeniatus) A51 Triturus taeniatus (syn. Triton A51 taeniatus) European salamander A5101 Salientia Anura (syn. Salientia) A5101011 Amphicoela, suborder of order A5101021 Anura A5 Liopelmidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Amphicoela Opisthocoela, suborder of order Anura Discoglossidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Opisthocoela Alytes obstetricans Pipidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Opisthocoela Xenopus laevis Anomocoela, suborder of order Anura Pelobatidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Anomocoela Procoela, suborder of order Anura Bufonidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Procoela Bufo americanus Bufo fowleri Bufo cognatus Bufo marinus Bufo bufo Hylidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Procoela Hyla crucifer Hyla pickeringii (syn. Hyla crucifer) Hyla versicolor Hyla aborea Diplasiocoela, suborder of order Anura Ranidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Diplasiocoela Rana pipiens Rana esculenta Rana aurora Rana catesbeiana Rana clamitans Rana temporaria Rana sylvatica Brevicipitidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Diplasiocoela Leptodactylidae, family of order Anura or of suborder Procoela Leptodactylus ocellatus Reptilia, class of division Craniata Reptilia, class of phylum Chordata Archosauria, subclass Crocodilia, order of subclass Archosauria Loricata (syn. Crocodilia) Eusuchia, suborder of order Crocodilia Crocodilidae, family of suborder Eusuchia Crocodylus acutus Alligator mississipiensis Subclass Lepidosauria - 49 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 A52 Squamata, order of subclass A5215011 Lepidosauria A5215011 A52 Lacertilia, suborder of order Squamata A5216 A52 Sauria (syn. Lacertilia), suborder of order Squamata A5216 A5201 Helodermatidae, family of A52160I1 suborder Lacertilia A5216021 A5201011 Heloderma suspectum A5217 A5201011 Gila monster A5202 Chamaeleontidae, family of A5217011 suborder Lacertilia A521702 A520201 Chamaeleon sp. A5217031 A5203 Iguanidae, family of suborder A5217041 Lacertilia A5217051 A5203011 Anolis carolinensis ASS A5203021 Sceloporus undulatus A53 A520303 Phrynosoma sp. A520304 Iguana sp. A53 A5204 Gekkonidae, family of suborder Lacertilia A53 A5204011 Tarentola mauritanica A5301 A520402 Phyllodactylus sp. A520403 Hemidactylus sp. A5204041 Coleonyx variegatus A530101 A5205 Scincidae, family of suborder A530102 Lacertilia A530103 A5206 Lacertidae, family of suborder A530104 Lacertilia A5302 A5207 Teiidae, family of suborder Lacertilia A5207011 Cnemidophorus tessellatus A5302011 A5208 Varanidae, family of suborder Lacertilia A5303 A5209 Agamidae, family of suborder LacerUUa A530301 A5210 Xantusidae, family of suborder A5303021 Lacertilia A5303022 A5211 Amphisbaenidae, family of A5303023 suborder Lacertilia A5303023 A5212 Anguidae, family of suborder A5303031 Lacertilia A5304 A52 Serpentes, suborder of order Squamata A5213 Viperidae, family of suborder A530401 Serpentes (no division into A5305 subfamilies) A521301 Vlpera sp. A521302 Cerastes sp. A5305011 A521303 Bills sp. A5306 A5214 Crotalldae, family of suborder Serpentes A5214011 Bothrops jararaca A530601 A52 14021 Crotalus horrldus A530602 A5214022 Crotalus viridls A54 A52 14023 Crotalus atrox A5214024 Crotalus cerastes A5401 A5214031 Agkistrodon mokeson A5401011 A5215 Elapidae, family of suborder A6 Serpentes A6 Naja tripudians Cobra Boidae, family of suborder Serpentes Pythoninae, subfamily of family Boidae Python reticulatus Eunectes murinus Colubridae, family of suborder Serpentes Natrix sipedon Thamnophis sp. Coluber constrictor Pituophis catenifer Lampropeltis zonata Chelonia, order of class Reptllia Testudinata (syn. Chelonia) (obsolete) Turtles Thecophora, suborder of order Chelonia Testudinidae, family of order Chelonia (or of suborder Thecophora) Testudo sp. Terrapene sp. Graptemys sp. Gopherus sp. Chelydridae, family of order Chelonia (or of suborder Thecophora) Chelydra serpentina Emydidae, family of order Chelonia (or of suborder Thecophora) Emys sp. Chrysemys picta Chrysemys picta marginata Chrysemys picta picta Eastern painted turtle Pseudemys elegans Chelonidae, family of order Chelonia (or of suborder Thecophora) Chelonia sp. Trionychidae, family of order Chelonia (or of suborder Thecophora) Trionyx ferox Kinosternidae, family of order Chelonia (or of suborder Thecophora) Kinosternon sp. Sternotherus sp. Rhynchocephalia, order of class Reptllia Sphenodontidae Sphenodon punctatum Aves, class of Phylum Chordata Aves, class of division Craniata 50 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 A6 Neornithes, subclass of class Aves A6 Neognathae, superorder of subclass Neornithes A61 Galliformes, order of superorder Neognathae A6101 Meleagrididae A6101011 Meleagris gallopavo A61 01011 Wild turkey A6102 Phasianidae A6102011 Gallus domesticus A6 102021 Phasianus torquatus A6103 Tetraonidae A610301 Tympanuchus sp. A6104 Perdicidae A6104011 Lophortyx gambelii A6 Palaeognathae, superorder of subclass Neornithes A62 Struthioniformes, order of superorder Palaeognathae A6201 Struthionidae A6201 Ostriches A6201011 Struthio camelus A63 Anseriformes, order of superorder Neognathae A6301 Anatidae A6301 Ducks A6301011 Anas platyrhynchos A6301011 Anas boschas A6301011 Domestic duck A6301011 Mallard duck A64 Columblformes, order of superorder Neognathae A6401 Columbidae A6401011 Columba llvia A6401011 Pigeon A6401012 Columba fasciata A6401012 Pigeon A6401021 Zenaidura macroura A6401021 Mourning dove A65 Passeriformes, order of superorder Neognathae A65 Oscines, suborder of order Passeriformes A6501 Fringillidae, family of suborder Oscines A6501011 Serinus canarius A6501011 Canary A6502 Ploceidae, family of suborder Oscines A6502011 Passer domesticus A6502011 House sparrow A6502011 English sparrow A6503 Corvidae, family of suborder Oscines A6504 Sturnidae, Oscines A6505 Icteridae, Oscines family of suborder family of suborder A66 Falconiformes, order of superorder Neognathae A6601 Cathartidae A6601011 Cathartes aura A6601011 Turkey vulture A6601012 Cathartes urubu A6601012 Vulture A6602 Accipitridae A6602011 Buteo regalis A67 Strigiformes, order of superorder Neognathae A6701 Strigidae A6701011 Bubo virginianus pallescens A68 Charadriiformes, order of superorder Neognathae A6801 Laridae A6801011 Larus argentatus AT Mammalia, class of phylum Chordata AT Mammalia, class of division Craniata AT Theria, subclass of class Mammalia AT Eutheria, infraclass of subclass Theria AT Ferungulata, cohort of infraclass Eutheria AT Paraxonia, superorder of cohort Ferungulata ATI Artiodactyla, order of superorder Paraxonia ATI Ruminantia, suborder of order Artiodactyla ATI Pecora, infraorder of suborder Ruminantia ATI Bovoidea, superfamily of infraorder Pecora A7101 Bovidae, family of superfamily Bovoidea A7101 Bovinae, subfamily of family Bovidae A7101 Bovini, tribe of subfamily Bovinae A7101011 Bos taurus (subfamily Bovinae) A7101011 Domestic cow A7101012 Bos sondaicus (subfamily Bovinae) A7101013 Bos indicus (subfamily Bovinae) A7101 Caprinae, subfamily of family Bovidae A7101 Caprini, tribe of subfamily Caprinae A7101021 Ovis musimon (tribe Caprini) A7101022 Ovis aries (tribe Caprini) A7101031 Capra hircus (tribe Caprini) A71 Suiformes, suborder of order Artiodactyla A71 Sulna, infraorder of suborder Suiformes 51 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21. 22, 23, 24, and 25 A71 Suoidea, superfamlly of A7204011 infraorder Suina A7204011 A7102 Suidae, family of superfamlly A72 Suoidea A7102 Suinae, subfamily of family A7 201 Suidae A7102011 Sua scrofa (subfamily Suinae) A7201 A7 1020 11 Pigs A7 Ferae, superorder of cohort A72010I1 Ferungulata A72 Carnivora, order of superorder A7 Ferae A72 Fissipedia, suborder of order A73 Carnivora A7 3 plus A77 A72 Canoidea, superfamlly of suborder Fissipedia A7201 Canidae, family of superfamlly A73 Canoidea A7201 Caninae, subfamily of family A73 Canidae A7201011 Canis familiaris (subfamily Caninae) A7 3 A7201011 Domestic dog A7201012 Canis latrans (subfamily A7301 Caninae) A7201013 Canis nubilis (subfamily A7301 Caninae) A7201021 Urocyon cinereoargenteus A7301011 (subfamily Caninae) A7201021 Urocyon cinereoargenteus scotti A7301 (subfamily Caninae) A7201021 Gray fox A7301021 A720103 Alopex sp. A7201041 Vulpes fulva (subfamily Caninae) A7301022 A7202 Felidae, family of superfamlly Canoidea A73 A7202 Felinae, subfamily of family Felidae A7 3 A7202011 Felis catus (subfamily Felinae) A7202021 Lynx rufus baileyl (subfamily A7302 Felinae) A7202022 Lynx canadensis (subfamily A7302 Felinae) A7203 Mustelidae, family of A7302011 superfamlly Canoidea A7302012 A7203 Mustelinae, subfamily of family Mustelidae A7302021 A7203011 Mustela vison (subfamily A7302022 Mustelinae) A7203011 Mink A7302022 A7203 Mephitinae, subfamily of A73 family Mustelidae A720302 Mephitis sp. A7303 A7203 Melinae, subfamily of family Mustelidae A7303 A7203031 Taxidea taxus berlandieri (subfamily Melinae) A7303 A7204 Ursidae, family of superfamlly Canoidea A730301 A7204 Bears Ursus horribilis Grizzly bear Pinnipedia, suborder of order Carnivora Phocidae, family of suborder Pinnipedia Phocinae, subfamily of family Phocidae Phoca vitulina (subfamily Phocinae) Glires, cohort of infraclass Eutheria Rodentia, order of cohort Glires Rodentia, order of cohort Glires (inc. suborder Duplicidentata) (obs. ) Sciuromorpha, suborder of order RodenUa A7 3 Simplicidentata, suborder of Rodentia A73 plus A77 (obs. ) (equals Rodentia A7 3) Geomyoidea, superfamlly of suborder Sciuromorpha Heteromyidae, family of superfamlly Geomyoidea Perognathinae, subfamily of family Heteromyidae Perognathus inornatus (subfamily Perognathinae) Dipodomyinae, subfamily of family Heteromyidae Dipodomys spectabilis (subfamily Dipodomyinae) Dipodomys merriami (subfamily Dipodominae) Myomorpha, suborder of order Rodentia A73 Muroidea, superfamlly of suborder Myomorpha Muridae, family of superfamlly Muroidea Murinae, subfamily of family Muridae Mus musculus (subfamily Murinae) Micromys minutus (subfamily Murinae) Rattus rattus (subfamily Murinae) Rattus norvegicus (subfamily Murinae) Norway rat Sciuroidea, superfamlly of suborder Sciuromorpha Sciuridae, family of superfamlly Sciuroidea Sciurinae, subfamily of family Sciuridae Marmotini, tribe of subfamily Sciurinae Citellus richardsoni (tribe Marmotini) - 52 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 A73 Hystricomorpha, suborder of A7401011 order Rodentia A7 3 A7401011 A73 Cavioidea, superfamily of A74 suborder Histricomorpha A7304 Caviidae, family of superfamily Cavioidea A7402 A7304 Caviinae, subfamily of family Caviidae A7402 A7304011 Cavia porcellus (subfamily A740201 Caviinae) A740201 A7304011 Guinea pig A7403 A73 Geomyoidea, superfamily of suborder Sciuromorpha A7403 A7305 Geomyidae, family of superfamily Geomyoidea A740301 A7306 Cricetidae, family of superfamily A7403 Muroidea A7306 Cricetinae, subfamily of family A7403021 Cricetidae A74 A7306 Crlcetini, tribe of subfamily Cricetinae A7306011 Cricetus cricetus (tribe Cricetiru) A74 A7306011 Hamster (large European) A73 06 Hesperomyini, tribe of subfamily Cricetinae A7404 A7306021 Neotoma lepida intermedia (tribe Hesperomyini) A7404 A7306 Microtinae, subfamily of family Cricetidae A7404012 A7306 Microtinl, tribe of subfamily Microtinae A7306031 Microtus ochrogaster haydeni A7404013 (tribe Microtinl) A630604 Peromyscus sp. (tribe A7405 Hesperomyini) A7306051 Sigmodon hispidus (tribe A7405 Hesperomyini) A7306051 Cotton rat A7405011 A7306061 Mesocricetus auratus (tribe Cricetinl) A7 405011 A7306061 Golden hamster A73 Erethizontoidea, superfamily of A7 suborder Hystricomorpha A7307 Erethizontidae, family of A75 superfamily Erethizontoidea A7 3 Chinchilloidea, superfamily of A75 suborder Hystricomorpha A7308 Chinchillidae, family of A75 superfamily Chinchilloidea A730801 Chinchilla sp. ATS A7 Unguiculata, cohort of infraclass Eutheria A7501 A74 Primates, order of cohort Unguiculata A7501011 A74 Anthropoidea, suborder of order A7501011 Primates A7 A74 Hominoidea, superfamily of suborder Anthropoidea A76 A7401 Hominidae, family of superfamily Hominoidea Homo sapiens Man Ceboidea (syn. Platyrhini), superfamily of suborder Anthropoidea Callithricidae, family of superfamily Ceboidea Hapalidae (syn. Callithricidae) Callithrix sp. Hapale sp. (syn. Callithrix sp. ) Cebidae, family of superfamily Ceboidea Cebinae, subfamily of family Cebidae Cebus sp. (subfamily Cebinae) Atelinae, subfamily of family Cebidae Ateles ater (subfamily Atelinae) Cercopithecoidea (eyn. Catarrhini), superfamily of suborder Anthropoidea Catarrhini (equ. Cercopithecoidea plus Hominoidea), superfamily of suborder Anthropoidea Cercopithecidae, family of superfamily Cercopithecoidea Cercoplthecinae, subfamily of family Cercopithecidae Macaca mulatta (syn. Macaca rhesus) (subfamily Cercoplthecinae) Macaca philippinensis (subfamily Cercoplthecinae) Pongidae, family of superfamily Hominoidea Ponginae, subfamily of family Pongidae Pan troglodytes (subfamily Ponginae) Anthropopithecus troglodytes (syn. Pan troglodytes) Mesaxonia, superorder of cohort Ferungulata Perissodactyla, order of superorder Mesaxonia Hippomorpha, suborder of order Perissodactyla Ceratomorpha, suborder of order Perissodactyla Equoidea, superfamily of suborder Hippomorpha Equidae, family of superfamily Equidae Equus caballus Horse Metatheria, infraclass of subclass Theria Marsupialia, order of infraclass Metatheria 53 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 A76 A7601 A7601 A7601011 A7601011 A77 Ml A77 01 A7701 A7701011 A7701011 A7701012 A7701012 A7701021 A7701021 A7701031 A78 A78 A7801 A7801 A7801011 A7801011 B Bl BU BllOOOll C c CI on CHOI C1102 C1102011 C2 C3 D E Didelphoidea, superfamily of order Marsuplalia Didelphidae, family of superfamily Didelphoidea Didelphinae, subfamily of family Didelphidae Didelphls virginianus (subfamily Didelphinae) Opossum Lagomorpha, order of cohort Glires Duplicidentata, suborder of order Rodentia A73 plus A77 (obs. ) (equals order Lagomorpha A77) Leporidae, family of order Lagomorpha Leporinae, subfamily of family Leporidae Lepus americanus (subfamily Leporinae) Snowshoe hare Lepus campestris (subfamily Leporinae) Jack rabbit, white- tailed Oryctolagus cuniculus (subfamily Leporinae) Domestic rabbit Sylvilagus auduboni (subfamily Leporinae) Insectivora, order of cohort Unguiculata Soricoidea, superfamily of order Insectivora Talpidae, family of superfamily Soricoidea Talpinae, subfamily of family Talpidae Talpa europaea (subfamily Talpinae) Mole, European Acanthocephala Metacanthocephala Archiacanthocephala Echinorhynchus trutta Rotatoria Rotifera (syn. Rotatoria) Monogononta Ploima Notommatidae Brachionidae Brachionus calyciflorus Bdelloidea Seisonidea Entoprocta Bryozoa, phylum excluding Entoprocta E Ectoprocta (equiv. to Bryozoa, phylum excluding Entoprocta) D and E Bryozoa, phylum including Entoprocta (obsolete) F Echiuroidea Fl Echiurida Fll Echiuroinea FllOl Echiuridae FUOlOll Echiurus pallasii F1101021 Urechis caupo F1102 Bonelliidae G Sipunculidoidea H Priapulidoidea J Thallophyta (Fungi, Algae and Bacteria) J9 Fungi (otherwise unspecified) Jl Myxo thallophyta Jll Acrasiales J 1 1 0 1 Dictyosteliaceae Jl 10101 Dictyostelium JllOlOll Dictyostelium discoideum J12 Labyrinthulales J13 Hydromyxales J14 Myxomycetes J3 Phycomycetes J31 Hyphochytriales J32 Chytridiales J33 Blastocladiales J34 Monoblepharidales J3 5 Saprolegniales J3 501 Saprolegniaceae J3 50101 Aphanomyces J3501011 Aphanomyces cochlioides J3 6 Leptomitales J37 Lagenldiales J38 Peronosporales J3801 Peronosporaceae J380101 Pythium J3801011 Pythium ultimum J3801012 Pythium debaryanum J3801013 Pythium aphanidermatum J380102 Phytophthora J3801021 Phytophthora infestans J3801022 Phytophthora cinnamomi J39 Mucorales J3 901 Endogonaceae J3 902 Mucoraceae J390201 Rhizopus J3902011 Rhizopus nigricans J390202 Phycomyces J3902021 Phycomyces blakesleeanus J390203 Mucor J3902031 Mucor mucedo J3902032 Mucor piriformis J390204 Absidia J3902041 Absidia glauca J3903 Choanephoraceae 54 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21. 22, 23, 24, and 25 J390301 Cunninghamella J3903011 Cunninghamella elegans J3904 Thamnidiaceae J390401 Thamnidium J3904011 Thamnidium elegans J3A Entomophthorales J3B Phycomycetes Incertae Sedis J4 Ascomycetes J41 Endomycetales J4101 Endomycetaceae J410I0I Piedraia J4101011 Piedraia sarmontoi J410102 Endomyces J4101021 Endomyces magnusii J410103 Eremothecium J4101031 Eremothecium ashbyii J4102 Coccidioideaceae J410201 Coccidioides J4102011 Coccidioides immitis J4103 Saccharomycetaceae J4I0301 Debaryomyces J4103011 Debaryomyces matruchoti J4103012 Debaryomyces neoformans J410302 Hansenula J4103021 Hansenula anomala J41 03022 Hansenula saturnus J410303 Nematospora J4103031 Nematospora phaseoli J410304 Pichia J4103041 Pichia membranaefaciens J410305 Saccharomyces J4103051 Saccharomyces chodati J41 03052 Saccharomyces carlsbergensis J4103053 Saccharomyces cerevisiae J4103054 Saccharomyces ellipsoideus J41 03055 Saccharomyces fragilis J4103056 Saccharomyces lactis J4103057 Saccharomyces pastorianus J410306 Schizosaccharomyces J41 03061 Schizosaccharomyces pombe J410307 Torulaspora J4103071 Torulaspora rosei J410308 Zygosaccharomyces J4103081 Zygosaccharomyces marxianus J41 03082 Zygosaccharomyces mandshuricus J41 03083 Zygosaccharomyces lactis J4103084 Zygosaccharomyces barkeri J4 10309 Saccharomycodes J4103091 Saccharomycodes ludwigii J410310 Endomycopsis J4103101 Endomycopsis javanensis J42 Taphrinales J43 EuroUales J4301 Eurotiaceae 1430101 Thielavia J44 Myriangiales J45 Dothideales J46 Microthyriales (syn. Hemisphaeriales) J47 Meliolales J48 Erysiphales J4801 Erysiphaceae J480101 Erysiphe J4801011 Erysiphe polygon! J49 Hypocreales J4901 Nectriaceae J490101 Nectria J4901011 Nectria galligena J4902 Hypocreaceae J490201 Claviceps J4902011 Claviceps purpurea J4A Laboulbeniales J4B Sphaeriales J4B01 Chaetomiaceae J4B0101 Chaetomium J4B01011 Chaetomium globosum J4B01012 Chaetomium convolutum J4B02 Xylariaceae J4B0201 Xylaria J4B02011 Xylaria hypoxylon J4B03 Sphaeriaceae J4B0301 Neurospora J4B03011 Neurospora crassa J4B03012 Neurospora sitophila J4B03013 Neurospora tetrasperma J4B04 Ceratostomataceae J4B0401 Ceratocystis (syn. Ceratostomella) J4B04011 Ceratocystis ulmi (syn. Ceratostomella ulmi) J4B04012 Ceratocystis fimbriata (syn. Ceratostomella fimbriata) J4B04013 Ceratocystis multiannulata (syn. Ophiostoma multiannulatum) J4B05 Mycosphaerellaceae J4B0501 Venturia J4B05011 Venturia inaequalis J4B0502 Mycosphaerella J4B05021 Mycosphaerella tulasni J4C Hysteriales J4D Phacidiales J4E Helotiales J4E01 Sclerotiniaceae J4E0101 Monilinia J4E01011 Monilinia fructicola (syn. Sclerotinia fructicola) J4E01012 Monilinia fructigena (syn. Sclerotinia fructigena) J4E01013 Monilinia laxa (syn. Sclerotinia laxa) J4E0102 Sclerotinia J4E01021 Sclerotinia sclerotiorum J4E01022 Sclerotinia homeocarpa J4F Pezizales J4G Tuberales J4H Ascomycetes Incertae Sedis J5 Basidiomycetes 151 Tremellales J52 Uredinales J5201 Pucciniaceae - 55 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 J520101 Gymnosporangium J6301014 J5201011 Gymnosporangium clavipes J6301015 J520102 Puccinia J6301016 J5201021 Puccinia coronata J6301017 J5201022 Puccinia graminis J6301018 J53 Ustilaginales J6301019 J54 Exobasidiales J630102 155 Agaricales J6301021 J5501 Polyporaceae J630103 J550I01 Poria J6301031 J5501011 Poria monticola J6301032 J5501012 Poria microspora 16301033 J550102 Fomes J630104 J5501021 Fomes pini J6301041 J5501022 Fomes pomaceus J6301042 J550103 Polyporus J6301043 J5501031 Polyporus squamosus J630105 J5501032 Polyporus circinatus J6301051 J5501033 Polyporus croceus J630106 J5501034 Polyporus obtusus J6301061 J5501035 Polyporus schweinitzii J6301062 J5501036 Polyporus alboluteus J630107 J5501037 Polyporus tulipiferus J6301071 J5502 Agaricaceae J6302 J550201 Agaricus J630201 J5502011 Agaricus campestris J6302011 J550202 Coprinus J6303 J5502021 Coprinus fimetarius J630301 J550203 Schizophyllum J6303011 J5502031 Schizophyllum commune J6303012 J5503 Thelephoraceae J6303013 J550301 Stereum J6303014 J5503011 Stereum murrayi J6303015 J550302 Pellicularis J630302 J5503021 Pellicularis filamentosa J6303021 (imperfect stage known as: J630303 Rhizoctonia solani or obs. J6303031 Corticium solani) J6303032 156 Hymenogastrales J630304 157 Phallales J6303041 158 Lycoperdales J6303042 J59 Sclerodermatales J630305 J5A Nidulariales J630306 J6 Fungi Imperfecti J630307 J61 Sphaeropsidales J630308 J6101 Sphaerioidaceae J6303081 J610101 Ascochyta J6303082 J6101011 Ascochyta chrysanthemi J6303083 J610102 Diplodia J630309 16101021 Diplodia natalensis J630310 J610103 Phomopsis J63031O1 J6101031 Phomopsis citri J630311 J62 Melanconiales J6303111 163 Moniliales J630312 J6301 Cryptococcaceae (syn. J6303121 Pseudosaccharomycetaceae) J6303122 1630101 Candida J6303123 J63010I1 Candida albicans J6303124 J6301012 Candida crusei J6303125 J6301013 Candida pulcherrima J6303126 Candida lipolytica Candida tropicalis Candida guilliermondii Candida flareri Candida monosa Candida pseudotropicalis Kloeckeria Kloeckeria brevis Rhodotorula Rhodotorula aurantiaca Rhodotorula mucilaginosa Rhodotorula sanniei Torulopsis Torulopsis neoformans Torulopsis hominis Torulopsis utilis PuUularia PuUularia puUulans Mycoderma Mycoderma cerevisiae Mycoderma vini Brettanomyces Brettanomyces anomolus Sporobolomycetaceae Sporobolomyces Sporobolomyces salmonicolor Moniliaceae Aspergillus Aspergillus candidus Aspergillus niger Aspergillus tamarii Aspergillus terreus Aspergillus wentii Monosporium Monosporium apiospermum Sporotrichum Sporotrichum schenckii Sporotrichum floccosum Botrytis Botrytis cinerea Botrytis allii Paecilomyces Scopulariopsis Gliocladium Trichoderma Trichoderma lignorum Trichoderma viride Trichoderma koeningi Trichothecium Oidium Gidium lactis Monilia Monilia albicans Penicillium Penicillium digltatum Penicillium chrysogenum Penicillium citrinum Penicillium patulum Penicillium brevicompactum Penicillium expansum 56 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 16303127 Penicillium notatum J6306032 J6303128 PenlcUlium gladioli J6306033 J6303129 Penicillium cyclopium J6306034 J630312A Penicillium italicum J6306035 J6304 Dematiaceae J6306036 J630401 Hormodendron J6306037 J6304011 Hormodendron compactum J6306038 J6304012 Hormodendron pedrosoi J6306039 J6304013 Hormodendron cladosporoides J630604 J630402 Phlalophora 16306041 J6304021 Phialophora verrucosa J64 J6304022 Phlalophora braziliensis J9 J630403 Memnoniella JF J630404 Alternaria JA J6304041 Alternaria oleracea JAl J6304042 Alternaria solani JAlOl J6304043 Alternaria tenuis JAl 0101 J6304044 Alternaria brassicae JAl 01011 J630405 Cercospora JAl 01 02 J6304051 Cercospora nicotianae JAl 01 021 J630406 Cladosporium JA2 J6304061 Cladosporium herbarum JA3 J630407 Margarinomyces JA4 J6304071 Margarinomyces atrovirens JA5 J630408 Helminthosporium JA6 J6304081 Helminthosporium sativum JA7 J6304082 Helminthosporium avenae JA8 J630409 Torula JA9 J6304091 Torula utilis JAA J6304092 Torula lactosa JAB J6304093 Torula cremoris JAC J630410 Stemphylium JB J6304101 Stemphylium sarcinaeforme JBl J630411 Curvularia JB2 J6305 Tuberculariaceae JC J630501 Fusarlum ICI J6305011 Fusarium coeruleum JC2 J6305012 Fusarium oxysporum JC3 J6305013 Fusarium nivale JC4 J6305014 Fusarium culmorum JC5 J6305015 Fusarium lycopersici JC6 J6305016 Fusarium graminearum JC7 J6305017 Fusarium avenaceum JD J6305018 Fusarium dianthi J6305019 Fusarium lini JDl J630502 Myrothecium JD2 J6305021 Myrothecium verrucaria JD3 16306 Dermatophytes (not a true family JD4 designation but is term listed JD5 in Ainsworth and Bisby. ) JD6 J630601 Blastomyces JD7 J6306011 Blastomyces dermatitidis JE J6306012 Blastomyces brasiliensis JEl J630602 Microsporum JElOl J6306021 Microsporum audouini JEIOIOI J6306022 Microsporum canis JElOlOll J6306023 Microsporum lanosum JE102 J6306024 Microsporum gypseum JE10201 J630603 Trichophyton JE102011 J6306031 Trichophyton floccosum JE2 Trichophyton gypseum Trichophyton interdigitale Trichophyton mentagrophytes Trichophyton purpureum Trichophyton rubrum Trichophyton schoenleine Trichophyton rosaceum Trichophyton crateriforme Histoplasma Histoplasma capsulatum Mycelia Sterilia Fungi otherwise unspecified Algae (otherwise unspecified) Phaeophyceae (Brown Algae) Fucales Fucaceae Fucus Fucus evanescens Ascophyllum Ascophyllum nodosum Chordariales Sporochnales Desmaristiales Punctariales Dictyosiphonales Laminariales Dictyotales Tilopteridales Cutleriales Sphacelariales Ectocarpales Cyanophyceae (Blue-Green Algae) Coccogonales Hormogonales Rhodophyceae (Red Algae) Ceramiales Rhodymeniales Gigartinales Cryptonemiales Gelidiales Nemalionales Bangiales Chrysophyceae (Yellow -Green Algae) Tribonemeae (subclass) Diatomeae (subclass) Chrysomonadineae (subclass) Peridineae (subclass) Cryptomonadineae (subclass) Chloromonadineae (subclass) Euglenineae (subclass) Chlorophyceae (Green Algae) Chlorococcales Scenedesmaceae Scenedesmus Scenedesmus quadrlcauda Oocystaceae Chlorella Chlorella pyrenoidosa Ulotrichales - 57 FIELD E: Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 JE201 JE20101 JE201011 JE3 IE4 JE5 JE6 JE7 JE8 IF IS IS IS ISl ISl ISl JSlOl JS102 JS103 IS 104 JS 10401 JS10402 JS10403 IS105 JS106 JS107 JS10701 JS107011 JS107011 JS107012 JS107013 JS10702 JS107021 JS107022 JS10703 JSI07031 JS10704 JS107041 JS10705 JS108 JS 10801 JS10802 IS10803 Ulotrichaceae JS109 Stichococcus Stichococcus subtilis JSllO Ulvales Conjugales JSllOOl Chaetophorales JS 11 00 11 Siphonales JS 110012 Charales JS 11002 Siphonocladales JS11003 Algae, not otherwise specified JS2 Schizophyceae, class of division Protophyta JS201 (Thallophyta) Schizomycetes, class of JS202 division Protophyta (Thallophyta) JS203 Microtatobiotes, (addendum to class JS3 Schizomycetes) Pseudomonadales, order of JS301 class Schizomycetes Rhodobacteriineae, suborder of JS302 order Pseudomonadales Pseudomonadineae, suborder of JS4 order Pseudomonadales Thiorhodaceae, family of JS401 suborder Rhodobacteriineae Athiorhodaceae, family of JS40101 suborder Rhodobacteriineae JS401011 Chlorobacteriaceae, family of JS402 suborder Rhodobacteriineae Nitrobacteraceae, family of JS40201 suborder Pseudomonadineae JS402011 Nitrosomonas JS402012 Nitrosococcus JS40202 Nitrobacter JS402021 Methanomonadaceae, family of JS40203 suborder Pseudomonadineae JS402031 Thiobacteriaceae, family of JS403 suborder Pseudomonadineae Pseudomonadaceae, family of JS40301 suborder Pseudomonadineae JS403011 Pseudomonas JS403012 Pseudomonas aeruginosa JS40302 Pseudomonas pyocyaneus JS404 Pseudomonas fluorescens Pseudomonas putida JS404 Xanthomonas Xanthomonas vitians JS404 Xanthomonas phaseoli Acetobacter JS404 Acetobacter suboxydans Photobacterium JS404 Photobacterium fischeri Azotomonas JS404 Caulobacteraceae, family of suborder Pseudomonadineae JS40401 Caulobacter JS404011 Gallionella JS40402 Nevskia JS404021 Siderocapsaceae, family of suborder Pseudomonadineae Spirillaceae, family of suborder Pseudomonadineae Vibrio Vibrio comma Vibrio metschnikovii Methanobacterium Spirillum Chlamydobacteriales, order of class Schizomycetes Chlamydobacteriaceae, family of order Chlamydobacteriales Peloplocaceae, family of order Chlamydobacteriales Crenotrichaceae, family of order Chlamydobacteriales Hyphomicrobiales, order of class Schizomycetes Hyphomicrobiaceae, family of order Hyphomicrobiales Pasteuriaceae, family of order Hyphomicrobiales Eubacteriales, order of class Schizomycetes Azotobacteraceae, family of order Eubacteriales Azotobacter Azotobacter chroococcum Rhizobiaceae, family of order Eubacteriales Rhizobium Rhizobium leguminosarum Rhizobium meliloti Agrobacterium Agrobacterium tumefaciens Chromobacterium Chromobacterium amethystinum Achromobacteraceae, family of order Eubacteriales Alcaligenes Alcaligenes faecalis Alcaligenes metalcaligenes Achromobacter Enterobacteriaceae, family of order Eubacteriales Escherichieae, tribe of family Enterobacteriaceae Erwinieae, tribe of family Enterobacteriaceae Serratieae, tribe of family Enterobacteriaceae Proteae, tribe of family Enterobacteriaceae Salmonelleae, tribe of family Enterobacteriaceae Escherichia Escherichia coli Aerobacter Aerobacter aerogenes 58 JS40403 Klebsiella JS404031 Klebsiella pneumoniae JS40404 Paracolobactrum JS404041 Paracolobactrum colifonne JS40405 Erwinia JS40406 Serratia JS404061 Serratia marcescens JS40407 Proteus JS404071 Proteus vulgaris JS404072 Proteus morganii JS404073 Proteus mirabilis The distinct species of Salmonella have not been given separate code numbers as de- cided by the NRC-CBCC Microbiology Subcom- mittee, since the serological types do not always refer to separate species and the rules of bino- mial nomenclature have not always been followed. The code numbers refer to the various serological groups themselves but may be altered without difficulty to provide a uniform pattern throughout the code. JS40408 JS404081 JS404082 JS404083 JS404084 JS404085 JS404086 JS40409 JS404091 JS404092 JS404092 JS404093 IS404094 IS405 JS40501 S. S. S. S. Salmonella Salmonella: A group S. paratyphi Salmonella: B group S. schottmuelleri S. typhimurium S. abortivoequina S. abortusovis Salmonella: C group S. hirschfeldii choleraesuis typhisuis tennessee „. bovismorbificans Salmonella: D group S. typhosa S. enteritidis S. gallinarum S. puUorum Salmonella: E group Salmonella: F group Shigella Shigella dysenteriae Shigella flexneri Shigella paradysenteriae Shigella boydii Shigella sonnei Brucellaceae, family of order Eubacteriales Pasteurella FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 JS40501I Pasteurella pestis JS405012 Pasteurella multocida JS405013 Pasteurella pseudotuberculosis JS405014 Pasteurella tularensis JS40502 Bordetella JS405021 Bordetella pertussis JS405022 Bordetella bronchiseptica JS40503 Brucella JS405031 Brucella abortus JS405032 Brucella melitensis JS405033 Brucella suis JS40504 Haemophilus JS405041 Haemophilus influenzae JS405042 Haemophilus ducreyi JS40505 AcUnobacillus JS40506 Calymmatobacterium JS405061 Calymmatobacterium granulomatis JS40507 Moraxella JS406 Bacteroidaceae, family of order Eubacteriales JS40601 Bacteroides JS40602 Fusobacterium JS407 Micrococcaceae, family of order Eubacteriales JS40701 Micrococcus JS407011 Micrococcus flavus JS40702 Staphylococcus JS407021 Staphylococcus aureus IS407022 Staphylococcus aureus var. aureus JS407 023 Staphylococcus aureus var. albus JS407024 Staphylococcus aureus var. citreus JS40703 Gaffkya JS407031 Gaffkya tetragena JS40704 Sarcina JS40704 Zymosarcina, subgenus of genus Sarcina JS40704 Methanosarcina, subgenus of genus Sarcina JS40704 Sarcinococcus, subgenus of genus Sarcina JS40704 Urosarcina, subgenus of genus Sarcina JS407041 Sarcina lutea JS408 Neisseriaceae, family of order Eubacteriales JS40801 Neisseria JS408011 Neisseria catarrhalis JS408012 Neisseria gonorrhoeae JS408013 Neisseria meningitidis JS409 Brevibacteriaceae, family of order Eubacteriales JS410 Lactobacillaceae, family of order Eubacteriales - 59 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 JS4I0 Streptococceae, tribe of family JS410048 Lactobacillaceae JS410049 JS410 Lactobacilleae, tribe of family JS41004A Lactobacillaceae JS41004B JS41001 Diplococcus JS411 JS410011 Diplococcus pneumoniae JS41101 The distinct species of Streptococcus JS41102 have not been assigned individual code numbers JS412 but rather s eparated into the groups listed in Bergey's Manual of Determinative Bacteriology, JS41201 7th edition. This decision was made by the JS412011 NRC-CBCC Microbiology Subcommittee on the JS412012 basic assumption that any questioner interested JS412013 in a specific c Streptococcus would also want the JS412014 data on other species in a given group. Since JS41202 the numberi ng system may be expanded there is JS412021 no hindrance to disregarding this grouping and JS41203 giving each species an individual code desig- JS412031 nation. JS41204 JS413 JS41002 Streptococcus JS4 10021 Streptococcus: pyogenic group JS41301 S. pyogenes JS413011 S. zooepidemicus JS413012 S. equi JS413013 S. equlsimilis JS413014 S. agalactiae JS413015 JS410022 Streptococcus: viridans group JS413016 S. salivarius JS413017 S. mitis JS413018 S. bovis JS413019 S. thermophilus JS41301A S. equinus JS41301B JS410023 Streptococcus: lactic group JS41302 S. lactis JS41302I S. cremoris JS4 1302.2 JS410024 Streptococcus: enterococcus group JS413023 S. faecalis JS413024 S. durans JS413025 JS41003 Leuconostoc JS413026 JS4 10031 Leuconostoc mesenteroides JS413027 JS410032 Leuconostoc dextranicum JS413028 JS410033 Leuconostoc citrovorum IS5 JS41004 Lactobacillus IS41004 Lactobacillus, subgenus of genus Lactobacillus JS501 JS41004 Saccharobacillus, subgenus of JS50101 genus Lactobacillus JS501011 JS410041 Lactobacillus acidophilus IS501012 JS4 10042 Lactobacillus casei JS501O13 JS4 10043 Lactobacillus fermenti JS501014 JS410044 Lactobacillus plantarum JS501015 JS4 10044 Lactobacillus pentosus JS501015 JS410045 Lactobacillus lactis JS502 JS4 10046 Lactobacillus delbrueckii JS410047 Lactobacillus brevis Lactobacillus leichmannii Lactobacillus helveticus Lactobacillus bulgaricus Lactobacillus bifidus Propionibacteriaceae, family of order Eubacteriales Propioni bacterium Butyribacterium Corynebacteriaceae, family of order Eubacteriales Corynebacterium Corynebacterium diphtherias Corynebacterium michiganense Corynebacterium pyogenes Corynebacterium xerose Listeria Listeria monocytogenes Erysipelothrix Erysipelothrix insidiosa Microbacterium Bacillaceae, family of order Eubacteriales Bacillus Bacillus anthracis Bacillus brevis Bacillus cereus Bacillus pumilus Bacillus polymyxa Bacillus subtilis Bacillus subtilis var. niger Bacillus coagulans Bacillus megaterium Bacillus alvei Bacillus circulans Clostridium Clostridium botulinum Clostridium butyricum Clostridium perfringens Clostridium tetani Clostridium novyi Clostridium histolyticum Clostridium septicum Clostridium acetobutylicum Actinomycetales, order of class Schizomycetes Mycobacteriaceae, family of order Actinomycetales Mycobacterium Mycobacterium avium Mycobacterium leprae Mycobacterium phlei Mycobacterium tuberculosis Mycobacterium smegmatis Mycobacterium lacticola Actinomycetaceae, family of order Actinomycetales 60 JS50201 Nocardla JSA JS502011 Nocardla farcinica JS502012 Nocardla globerula JSAOl JS502013 Nocardla asteroides JS50202 Actinomyces JSB JS502021 Actinomyces bovls JS503 Streptomycetaceae, family of JSBOI order Actinomycetales JS50301 Streptomyces JSBOI JS5030I1 Streptomyces griseus JS503012 Streptomyces fradiae JSBOI JS5030I3 Streptomyces aureofaclens JS50302 Micromonospora JSBOI 01 JS504 Actlnoplanaceae, family of JSBOlOl order Actinomycetales JS6 Caryophanales, order of class JSBOlOl Schlzomycetes JS601 Caryophanaceae, family of JSBOlOl order Caryophanales JS602 Osclllosplraceae, family of JSBOlOl order Caryophanales JS603 Arthromltaceae, family of order JSBOlOll Osclllosplraceae JSBOI 012 JS7 Begglatoales, order of class JSB010I2 Schlzomycetes JSB01013 JS701 Beggiatoaceae, family of order JSB01014 Begglatoales JSB0102 JS702 VltreoscUlaceae, family of JSB01021 order Begglatoales JSBOI 03 JS703 Leucotrlchaceae, family of JSB02 order Begglatoales JS704 Achromatlaceae, family of order JSB0201 Begglatoales JSB0202 JS8 Myxobacterales, order of class JSB02021 Schlzomycetes JS801 Cytophagaceae, family of JSB02022 order Myxobacterales JSB02023 JS802 Archangiaceae, family of order JSB02024 Myxobacterales JSB02025 JS803 Soranglaceae, family of order Myxobacterales JSB02026 JS804 Polyanglaceae, family of order JSB03 Myxobacterales JS805 Myxococcaceae, family of JSB0301 order Myxobacterales JSB03011 JS80501 Myxococcus JSB04 JS80502 Chondrococcus JS805021 Chondrococcus columnarls JSC JS9 Splrochaetales, order of class Schlzomycetes JSC JS901 Spirochaetaceae, family of order Splrochaetales JSC JS902 Treponemataceae, family of order Splrochaetales JSC JS90201 Borrelia JS902011 Borrelia novyi JSCOl JS90202 Treponema JS902021 Treponema pallidum JS90203 Leptospira FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 Mycoplasmatales, order of class Schlzomycetes Mycoplasmataceae, family of order Mycoplasmatales Rickettsiales, order of class Microtatabiotes Rickettslaceae, family of order Rickettsiales Rlckettsleae, tribe of family Rickettslaceae Ehrlichieae, tribe of family Rickettslaceae Rickettsia Rickettsia, subgenus of genus Rickettsia Zinssera, subgenus of genus Rickettsia Dermacentroxenus, subgenus of genus Rickettsia Rochalimaea, subgenus of genus Rickettsia Rickettsia prowazekli Rickettsia typhi Rickettsia mooseri Rickettsia akari Rickettsia rickettsii Coxlella Coxlella burnetii Cowdrla Chlamydiaceae, family of order Rickettsiales Chlamydia Miyagawanella Mlyagawanella lymphogranulomatosis Mlyagawanella ornithosis Miyagawanella psittaci Miyagawanella fells Mlyagawanella bronchopneumoniae Miyagawanella pneumoniae Bartonellaceae, family of order Rickettsiales Haemobartonella Haemobartonella muris Anaplasmataceae, family of order Rickettsiales Vlrales, order of class Microtatabiotes Phagineae, suborder of order Virales Phytophaglneae, suborder of order Vlrales Zoophaglneae, suborder of order Virales Phagaceae, family of suborder Phagineae Note: All phages of the genus Phagus, Holmes, Bergey's 61 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 JSCOlOl thru JSC0104 JSCOlOl 1 JSC01012 JSC01013 JSC0105 thru JSC0106 JSC0107 JSC0108 JSC0109 thru JSCOllO JSC01091 JSC01092 JSC01093 JSC01094 JSC01095 JSC01096 JSC01097 JSC01098 JSCOIU JSCOl 12 JSC01121 JSCOIU thru JSCOl 16 JSC01131 JSC01132 Manual, 6th edition, are coded under the family designation Phagaceae. The specific phages are further identified by using the last three places of Field E to designate a single phage strain. Thus, number space is provided for all genera known to be bacterial hosts of phages and code symbols are assigned to each bacterial genus accord- ing to the number of phage species within a given bacterial genus; for example, Pseudo- monas is assigned 01, 02, 03 and 04 in the 6th and 7th places of Field E since this genus has about 150 recognized species. A specific symbol in the 8th place identifies the specific phage strain; the associated host is designated in Field J. Pseudomonas phage strains Pseudomonas aeruginosa, phage strain Pa Pseudomonas aeruginosa, phage strain Pb Pseudomonas aeruginosa, phage strain Pc Xanthomonas phage strains Vibrio phage strains Azotobacter, Rhizobium and Agrobacterium phage strains Escherichia phage strains Escherichia coli, phage strain Tl Escherichia coli, phage strain T2 Escherichia coli, phage strain T3 Escherichia coli, phage strain T4 Escherichia coli, phage strain T5 Escherichia coli, phage strain 2 Escherichia coli, phage strain 4 Escherichia coli, phage strain 5 Erwinia phage strains Serratia phage strains Serratia marcescens, phage strain IV Salmonella phage strains Salmonella Type Poona, phage strain 1 Salmonella Type Poona, phage strain 2 JSC0117 JSC01171 JSCOl 18 JSCOl 19 thru JSC0121 JSC01191 JSCOl 192 JSCOl 193 JSC01194 JSC01195 JSC0122 thru JSC0124 JSC01221 JSC01222 JSC01223 JSC01224 JSC01225 JSC01226 JSC0125 thru JSCOl 26 JSC01251 JSC0127 thru JSC0128 JSC0129 JSC0130 JSC02 JSC02 JSC0201 JSC0202 JSC0203 JSC0204 JSC0205 JSC0206 JSC03 JSC03 JSC0301 JSC03011 JSC03012 JSC03O13 JSC0302 Shigella phage strains Shigella dysenteriae, phage strain P2 Pasteurella phage strains Staphylococcus phage strains Staphylococcus aureus, phage strain PI Staphylococcus aureus, phage strain P14 Staphylococcus sp. , phage strain 6 Staphylococcus sp. , phage strain 13 Staphylococcus sp. , phage strain 9 Streptococcus phage strains Streptococcus cremoris, phage strain hp Streptococcus cremoris, phage strain w Streptococcus pyogenes, phage strain A-25 Streptococcus pyogenes, phage strain A- 27 Streptococcus sp. , phage strain 2A Streptococcus sp. , phage strain 2B Corynebacterium phage strains Corynebacterium sp. , phage strain DLC, 2921/49 Bacillus phage strains Mycobacterium phage strains Streptomyces phage strains Chlorogenaceae, family of suborder Phytophagineae Viruses inducing yellow-type diseases Chlorogenus Carpophthora Morsus Aureogenus Galla Fractilinea Marmoraceae, family of suborder Phytophagineae Viruses inducing mosaic diseases Marmor Marmor tabaci Marmor cucumeris Marmor solani Acrogenus 62 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 JSC0303 Corium JSC0304 Nanus JSC03041 Nanus mirabilis JSC0305 Rimocortius JSC0306 Adelonosus ISC04 Annulaceae, family of suborder Phytophaglneae JSC04 Viruses inducing ringspot diseases JSC0401 Annulus JSC05 Rugaceae, family of suborder Phytophaglneae JSC05 Viruses inducing leaf curl diseases JSC0501 Ruga JSC06 Savoiaceae, family of suborder Phytophaglneae JSC06 Viruses inducing leaf-savoying diseases JSC0601 Savoia JSC07 Lethaceae, family of suborder Phytophaglneae JSC07 Viruses inducing spotted wilt disease JSC07 01 Lethum JSC08 Borellinaceae, family of suborder Zoophagineae JSC08 Viruses inducing diseases of insects as exclusive hosts JSC0801 Borrelina JSC0802 Morator JSC09 Borreliotaceae, family of suborder Zoophagineae JSC09 Viruses inducing diseases of the pox group JSC0901 Borreliota JSC09011 Borreliota avium JSC09012 Borreliota variolae var. bovis JSC0902 Brlareus JSC0903 Scelus JSC09031 Scelus recurrens JSC0904 Hostis JSC0905 Molitor JSCIO Erronaceae, family of suborder Zoophagineae JSCIO Viruses inducing diseases of the encephalitis group JSClOOl Erro JSClOOll Erro nil! JSClOOl 2 Erro equinus JSC1002 Legio JSC 10021 Legio debilitans JSC1003 Formido JSC10031 Formido inexorabilis JSC 11 Charonaceae, family of suborder Zoophagineae JSC 11 Viruses inducing diseases of the yellow- fever group JSC 1101 Charon JSCllOU Charon vallis JSC 11 02 Tarpeia JSC 11 021 Tarpeia alpha JSC 1 1 022 Tarpeia'premens JSC 1103 Tortor JSCI2 Trifuraceae, family of suborder Zoophagineae JSC12 Viruses inducing diseases of the infectious anemia group JSC 120 1 Trifur JSC12011 Trifur gallinarum JSC 13 Rabulaceae, family of suborder Zoophagineae JSC13 Viruses inducing diseases of the mumps group JSC 1301 Rabula JSC13011 Rabula inflans JSC 14 Borrelomycetaceae JSC14 Pleuropneumonia and Pleuropneumonia- like organisms JSC 1401 Asterococcus K Bryophyta Kl Hepaticae Kll Marchantiales K12 Sphaerocarpales K13 Jungermanniales K14 Calobryales K2 Anthocerotae K21 Anthocerotales K3 Musci K31 Sphagnales K32 Andreaeales K33 Fissidentales K34 Dicranales K35 Pottiales K36 Grimmiales K37 Funariales K38 Schizostegiales K3 9 Tetraphidales K3A Eubryales K3B Isobryales K3C Hookeriales K3D Buxbaumiales K3E Polytrichinales K3F Dawsoniales L Pteridophyta LI Psilophytinae LU Psilotales L2 Lycopodinae L21 Lycopodiales L22 Selaginellales L23 Isoetales L3 Equisetinae L31 Equisetales L4 Filicinae L41 Ophioglossales L42 Marattiales L43 Filicales 63 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 M Spermatophyta MA402011 Cyperus rotundus MA Monocotyledoneae MA5 Principes MAI Pandanales MA6 Synanthae MA2 Helobiae MA7 Spathiflorae MA201 Potamogetonaceae MA7 01 Araceae MA202 Najadaceae MA7 02 Lemnaceae MA203 Aponogetonaceae MA8 Farinosae MA204 Juncaginaceae MAS 01 Flagellariaceae MA205 Alismaceae MA802 Restionaceae MA206 Butomaceae MA803 Centrolepidaceae MA207 Hydrocharitaceae MA804 Mayacaceae MA2 07 01 Elodea MA805 Xyridaceae MA207011 Elodea canadensis MA806 Eriocaulaceae MA3 Triuridales MAS 07 Rapateaceae MA4 Glumiflorae MA808 Bromeliaceae MA401 Gramineae MA80801 Ananas MA40101 Agropyron MAS 09 Commelinaceae MA40102 Agrostls MA80901 Rhoeo MA401021 Agrostis tenuis MA809011 Rhoeo discolor MA40103 Andropogon MAS 10 Pontederiaceae MA40104 Avena MA9 Liliflorae MA401041 Avena sativa MA901 Juncaceae MA40I05 Bouteloua MA902 Stemonaceae MA40106 Bromus MA903 Liliaceae MA40107 Buchloe MA90301 Allium MA40108 Cynodon MA903011 Allium cepa MA401081 Cynodon dactylon MA90302 Asparagus MA40109 Dactylis MA90303 Li Hum MA40110 Digitaria MA903031 Lilium regale MA40 1 1 1 Echinochloa MA903032 Lilium longiflorum MA40112 Festuca MA90304 Sansevieria MA401121 Festuca rubra var. commutata MA90305 Smilax MA40113 Holcus MA90306 Tulipa MA40 1 1 4 Hordeum MA90307 Yucca MA401 141 Hordeum vulgare MA90308 Scilla MA40115 Lolium MA903081 Scilla sibirica MA401151 Lolium multiflorum MA90309 Aloe MA40116 Oryza MA903091 Aloe vulgaris MA401161 Oryza sativa MA904 Haemodoraceae MA401 17 Panlcum MA905 Amaryllidaceae MA40118 Pennlsetum MA90501 Agave MA40119 Phalarls MA9050n Agave toumeyana MA40120 Phleum MAA Scitamineae MA40121 Poa MAB Microspermae MA4012I1 Poa pratensis MB Dicotyledoneae MA40122 Saccharum MBl Verticillatae MA40123 Secale MB2 Piperales MA401231 Secale cereale MB201 Saururaceae MA40124 Setarla MB202 Piperaceae MA40125 Sorghum MB3 Salicaies MA40I26 Triticum MB301 Salicaceae MA401261 Triticum aestivum MB30101 Salix MA401262 Triticum dicoccum MB4 Myricales MA40127 Zea MBS Balanopsidales MA40I271 Zea mays MB6 Leitneriales MA40128 Bambusa MB7 Juglandales MA401281 Bambusa vulgaris MBS Fagales MA40129 Agropyron- Triticum hybrid MB801 Betulaceae MA402 Cyperaceae MB802 Fagaceae MA40201 Cyperus MB80201 Castanea 64 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 MB80202 Fagus MBG0203 1 MB80203 Quercus MBG0204 MB9 Urtlcales MBG02041 MB901 Ulmaceae MBG03 MB902 Moraceae MBG04 MB90201 Artocarpus MBH MB90202 Cannabis MBI MB90203 Ficus MBIOl MB903 Urticaceae MBI02 MBA Proteales MBI03 MBB Santalales MBI04 MBC Arlstolochiales MBI05 MBD Polygonales MBI0501 MBDOl Polygonaceae MBI06 MBDOlOl Fagopyrum MBI07 MBDOIOU Fagopyrum esculentum MBI08 MBDOl 02 Polygonum MBI09 MBDOl 03 Rheum MBIIO MBDOl 04 Rumex MBI 11 MBDOl 041 Rumex acetosa MBI 12 MBE Centrospermae MBI 13 MBEOl Chenopodlaceae MBI 14 MBEOlOl Beta MBI1401 MBEOlOll Beta vulgaris MBI1402 MBE02 Amarantaceae MBI1403 MBE0201 Amarantus MBI1404 MBE02011 Amarantus retroflexus MBI1405 MBE03 Nyctaginaceae MBI1406 MBE04 Batidaceae MBI 1407 MBE05 Cynocrambaceae MBI1407I MBE06 Phytolaccaceae MBI14072 MBE07 Aizoaceae MBI14073 MBE08 Portulacaceae MBI14074 MBE09 Basellaceae MBI14075 MBEIO Carophyllaceae MBI14076 MBElOOl Dianthus MBI14077 MBElOOll Dianthus caryophyllus MBI1408 MBE1002 Saponaria MBI1409 MBE1003 Stellaria MBI1410 MBE10031 Stellaria media MBI1411 MBF Ranales MBI1412 MBFOl Nymphaeaceae MBI1413 MBFOlOl Cabomba MBI14131 MBG Rhoeadales MBI15 MBGOl Papaveraceae MBI16 MBG02 Cruciferae MBI 1601 MBG0201 Brassica MBI1602 MBG02011 Brassica kaber MBI1603 MBG02012 Brassica nigra MBI1604 MBG02013 Brassica rapa MBI1605 MBG02014 Brassica campestris MBI1606 MBG02015 Brassica napus MBI1607 MBG02016 Brassica oleracea var. MBI16071 gemmifera MBI 1608 MBG02017 Brassica oleracea var. capitata MBI1609 MBG02018 Brassica oleracea var. botrytis MBI1610 MBG02019 Brassica oleracea var. italica MBI1611 MBG0201A Brassica napobrassica MBI16111 MBG0202 Armoracia MBI1612 MBG0203 Raphanus MBI1613 Raphanus sativus Lepidium Lepidium sativum Tovariaceae Capparidaceae Sarraceniales Resales Podostemonaceae Hydros tachyaceae Crassulaceae Cephalotaceae Saxifragaceae Rlbes Pittosporaceae Brunelliaceae Cunoniaceae Myrothamnaceae Bruniaceae Hamamelidaceae Platanaceae Crossosomataceae Rosaceae Amelanchier Crataegus Cydonia Eriobotrya Fragaria Potentilla Prunus Prunus amygdalus Prunus armeniaca Prunus avium Prunus cerasus Prunus domestica Prunus salicina Prunus persica Pyrus Rosa Rubus Sorbus Spiraea Malus Malus sylvestris Connaraceae Leguminosae Acacia Arachis Astragalus Ceratonia Crotalaria Gleditschia Glycine Glycine max Lathyrus Lens Lespedeza Lupinus Lupinus albus Medicago Melilotus 65 - FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 MBI1614 Phaseolus MBI16141 Phaseolus vulgaris MBI16142 Phaseolus limensis MBI16143 Phaseolus coccineus MBI1615 Pisum MBI16151 Pisum sativum MBI1616 Trifolium MBI16161 Trifolium incarnatum MBI16162 Trifolium repens MBI16163 Trifolium pra tense MBI1617 Vicia MBI16171 Vicia faba MBI1618 Vigna MBI16181 Vigna sinensis MBI1619 Canavalia MBI16191 Canavalia ensiformis MBJ Geraniales MBJOl Geraniaceae MBJ02 Oxalidaceae MBJ03 Tropaeolaceae MBJ04 Linaceae MBJ0401 Linum MBJ04011 Linum usitatissimum MBJ05 Humiriaceae MBJ06 Erythroxylaceae MBJ07 Zygophyllaceae MBJ08 Cneoraceae MBJ09 Rutaceae MBJ0901 Citrus MBJ09011 Citrus aurantifolia MBJ09012 Citrus aurantium MBJ09013 Citrus paradisl MBJ09014 Citrus limon MBJ09015 Citrus medica MBJ09016 Citrus sinensis MBJIO Simarubaceae MBJll Burseraceae MBJ12 Meliaceae MBJ13 Malpighiaceae MBJ14 Trigoniaceae MBJ15 Vochysiaceae MBJ16 Tremandraceae MBJ17 Polygalaceae MBJ18 Dichapetalaceae MBJ19 Euphorbiaceae MBJ1901 Aleurites MBJ1902 Croton MBJ1903 Euphorbia MBJ19031 Euphorbia pulcherrima MBJ1904 Hevea MBJ1905 Codiaeum MBJ1906 Ricinus MBK Sapindales MBKOl Buxaceae MBK02 Coriariaceae IV1BK03 Empetraceae MBK04 Limnanthaceae MBK05 Anacardiaceae MBK06 Cyrillaceae MBK07 Pentaphylacaceae MBK08 Corynocarpaceae MBK09 Aquifoliaceae MBKIO Celastraceae MBKll Hippocrateaceae MBK12 Stackhousiaceae MBK13 Staphyleaceae MBK14 Icacinaceae MBK15 Aceraceae MBK1501 Acer MBK15011 Acer saccharum MBL Rhamnales MBLOl Rhamnaceae MBL02 Vitaceae MBL0201 Vitis MBL02011 Vitis vinif era MBM Malvales MBMOl Elaeocarpaceae MBM02 Chlaenaceae MBM03 Gonystylaceae MBM04 Tiliaceae MBM05 Malvaceae MBM0501 Abutilon MBM0502 Althae MBM0503 Gossypium MBM06 Triplochitonaceae MBM07 Bombacaceae MBM08 Sterculiaceae MBM0801 Theobroma MBM08011 Theobroma cacao MBN Parietales MB0 Opuntiales MBP Myrtiflorae MBPOl Geissolomaceae MBP02 Penaeaceae MBP03 Oliniaceae MBP04 Thymelaeaceae MBP05 Elaeagnaceae MBP06 Lythraceae MBP07 Sonneratiaceae MBP08 Crypteroniaceae IV1BP09 Punicaceae MBPIO Lecythidaceae MBPII Rhizophoraceae MBP12 Combretaceae MBP13 Myrtaceae MBP14 Melastomataceae MBP15 Onagraceae MBQ Umbelliflorae MBQOl Araliaceae MBQ02 Umbelliferae MBQ0201 Apium MBO0202 Conium MBO0203 Daucus MBQ02031 Daucus carota var. sativa MBO03 Cornaceae MBQ0301 Cornus MBR Ericales MBROl Clethraceae MBR02 Pirolaceae MBR03 Lennoaceae 66 FIELD E; Taxonomy Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 MBR04 Ericaceae MBR0401 Calluna MBR0402 Erica MBR0403 Kalmia MBR0404 Rhododendron MBR0405 Vaccinium MBS Primulales MET Ebenales MBU Contortae MBUOl Oleaceae MBUOIOl Fraxinus MBUOl 02 Jasminum MBUOl 03 Ligustrum MBUOl 031 Ligustrum ovalifolium MBU02 Salvadoraceae MBU03 Loganiaceae MBU04 Gentianaceae MBU05 Apocynaceae MBU0 501 Apocynum MBU0502 Carissa MBU0503 Nerium MBU0504 Vinca MBV Tubiflorae MBVOl Convolvulaceae MBVOlOl Convolvulus MBVOl 02 Cuscuta MBVOl 03 Ipomoea MBVOl 031 Ipomoea tricolor MBVOl 032 Ipomoea batatas MBV02 Polemoniaceae MBV03 Hydrophyllaceae MBV04 Borraginaceae MBV05 Verbenaceae MBV06 Labiatae MBV0601 Mentha MBV0602 Nepeta MBV0603 Salvia MBV0604 Thymus MBV0605 Coleus MBV06051 Coleus blumei MBV07 Nolanaceae MBV08 Solanaceae MBV0801 Atropa MBV0802 Capsicum MBV0803 Datura MBV08031 Datura stramonium MBV0804 Hyoscyamus MBV0805 Lycopersicon MBV08051 Lycopersicon esculentum MBV0806 Nicotiana MBV08061 Nicotiana tabacum MBV08062 Nicotiana gluUnosa MBV0807 Petunia MBV0808 Solanum MBV08081 Solanum tuberosum MBV09 Scrophulariaceae MBVIO Bignoniaceae MBVl 1 Pedaliaceae MBW Plantaginales MBWOl Plantaginaceae MBWOlOl Plantago MBX Rubiales MBY Campanulatae MBYOl Cucurbitaceae MBYOlOl Citrullus MBYOlOll Citrullus vulgaris MBYOl 02 Cucumis MBYOl 021 Cucumis sativus MBYOl 022 Cucumis melo MBYOl 03 Cucurbita MBYOl 031 Cucurbita maxima MBYOl 032 Cucurbita pepo var. torticollis MBY02 Campanulaceae MBY03 Goodeniaceae MBY04 Stylidiaceae MBY05 Calyceraceae MBY06 Compositae MBY0601 Achillea MBY0602 Ambrosia MBY0603 Artemisia MBY0604 Aster MBY0605 Carduus MBY0606 Chrysanthemum MBY0607 Cichorium MBY0608 Cirsium MBY0609 Cosmos MBY0610 Dahlia MBY0611 Helianthus MBY06111 Helianthus annuus MBY0612 Lactuca MBY06121 Lactuca sativa MBY0613 Parthenium MBY0614 Solidago MBY0615 Sonchus MBY0616 Taraxacum MBY0617 Tragopogon MBY0618 Xanthium MBY06181 Xanthium canadense MBY06182 Xanthium echinatum MBY0619 Crepis MBY0620 Piqueria MBY06201 Piqueria trinervia MBY0621 Carthamus MBY06211 Carthamus tinctarius MN Gymnospermae MNl Coniferales MNlOl Pinaceae MNIOIOI Pinus MNIOIOU Pinus taeda MN2 Gnetales MN201 Gnetaceae MN20101 Ephedra MN3 Cycadales MN4 Ginkgoales Z Organism, general Zl Plant (including bacteria, vim; Z2 rickettsia), not otherwise specified Animal, not otherwise specified 67 FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 TUMOR CODE This catalogue of tumors and tumor types is arranged in an order corresponding to tumor classification based on the tissues from which they originated. Therefore, to recognize the continuity and to follow the sequence of this particular list of tissue types of tumors, the eye must learn to inspect the 4th, 5th, and 6th units of the symbols (Columns 21, 22, and 23), ignoring the other units. The spaces left between units 3 and 4 and between uruts 6 and 7 have no other significance than to make the part of the symbol designating tissue origins more easily distinguishable. The meaning of the 2nd and 3rd units (Columns 19 and 20) will be found by reference to the special list of anatomical items immediately following this list of tumors. The 7th and 8th units (Columns 24 and 25) are explained in the Key. Tumor, unspecified • Tumor of epithelial tissue, unspecified Tumor of skin, unspecified Carcinoma (tumor of epithelium) of skin, unspecified as to whether the origin is of glandular or non-glandular epithelium Carcinoma DCS Carcinoma Krebs 2 Carcinoma 1025 Furth (of cutaneous or subcutaneous tissue) Carcinoma, otherwise unspecified (no organ origin known and epithelial type unknown) Papilloma, unspecified as to squamous (non-glandular) or mucous (glandular) epithelium Tumors of glandular epithelium, unspecified Adenocarcinoma of unspecified glandular origin, unspecified Pancreatic tumor, glandular, unspecified Pancreatic tumor SB4 Adenocarcinoma JS2 Adenoma, otherwise unspecified (no organ origin known) Papilloma of mucous epithelium, unspecified Endocrine tumor, unspecified Testicular tumor, unspecified Tumor of testicular interstitial (endocrine) cells, unspecified Testicular interstitial cell tumor 3ACiSS Testicular interstitial cell tumor 2OAB2T Testicular interstitial cell tumor Bonser Leydig cell tumor Furth Ovarian tumor, unspecified Ovarian glandular epithelium tumor, unspecified Ovarian carcinoma XDC Granulosa cell tumor, unspecified Granulosa cell tumor, 18C57 Granulosa cell tumor, OL Granulosa cell tumor E4478 Granulosa cell tumor Eschenbrenner Granulosa cell tumor V Granulosa cell tumor XIV Granulosa cell tumor C57bl 10 Granulosa cell tumor NIH Luteoma, unspecified Luteoma DC Theca cell tumor, unspecified 68 - s SOD 1 SBl SBl 1 SBl 100 01 SBl 100 02 SBl 100 03 SOO 100 1 SOO 100 2 SOO 11 SOO 110 1 S92 11 S92 110 01 SOO 110 11 SOO 110 2 SOO 110 3 SOO 111 S51 S51 111 S51 111 01 S51 111 02 S51 111 03 S51 111 04 S5A S5A HI S5A 1 1 1 01 S5A 1 1 1 1 S5A 111 11 S5A 1 1 1 12 S5A 1 1 1 13 S5A 111 14 S5A 1 1 1 15 S5A 111 16 S5A 1 1 1 17 S5A 1 1 1 18 S5A 1 1 1 2 S5A 111 21 S5A 111 3 FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 S5A 1114 Ovarian pseudomucinous cystadenoma; mucinous adenocarcinoma; mucinous papillary cystadenoma; etc. , unspecified S5A 111 41 Ovarian tumor Symeonidis SA5 111 01 Adrenal cortical tumor Illinois SA5 1 1 1 02 Adrenal cortical carclno.ma W35 SA5 111 03 Adrenal cortical carcinoma W92 SA4 11101 Adrenal tumor Lorenz SA7 HI 01 Thyroid tumor #180 (colloid adenoma) SAl 11101 Chromophobe pituitary tumor Furth dependent on absence of thyroid SAl 111 02 Chromophobe pituitary tumor Furth independent of absence of thyroid S92 1 1 1 Pancreatic endocrine tumor (Islets of Langerhans tumor), unspecified SOO 112 Exocrine gland tumor, unspecified SIA Tumor of fundic stomach, unspecified; rodent glandular stomach tumor, unspecified SIA 112 01 Carcinoma 303 SIA 112 02 Carcinoma 328 SIA 112 03 Carcinoma 342 S21 112 Glandular epithelial tumors of the lung, unspecified S21 112 1 Pulmonary adenomatosis, unspecifiedl S21 112 11 Jaagsiektel S21 112 2 Pulmonary adenocarcinoma S21 112 21 Pulmonary adenocarcinoma C4461 S21 112 3 Pulmonary carcinoma S21 112 31 Pulmonary carcinoma MT8 S21 112 4 Pulmonary adenoma, unspecified S21 112 41 Pulmonary adenoma, Cohen S31 112 Kidney carcinoma, unspecified S31 112 01 Kidney carcinoma Lucke S41 112 Liver tumor, unspecified (assuming glandular origin), hepatoma S41 112 01 Hepatoma #10 Andervont S41 112 02 Hepatoma 112/B S41 112 03 Hepatoma 98/15 341 112 04 Hepatoma C954 S41 112 05 Hepatoma 3683 341 112 06 Hepatoma 3924A 341 112 07 Hepatoma 3930 341 112 08 Hepatoma N (Hepatoma NK Novikoff) 341 112 09 Hepatoma LC18 343 Carcinoma of the bile duct (= cholangioma) S43 Tumors of the bile duct, unspecified 343 112 Cholangioma, unspecified (typically adenocarcinoma) S43 112 01 Hepatoma 3924C (cholangioma) S91 112 1 Adenocarcinoma of the mammary gland, unspecified 391 112 11 Adenocarcinoma C3HBA (= C3Hba) 391 112 12 Adenocarcinoma C3H-HC S91 112 13 Adenocarcinoma C3HB S91 112 14 Adenocarcinoma H2712 391 112 15 Adenocarcinoma, Indiana University Tumor I 391 112 16 Adenocarcinoma L1221 391 112 17 Adenocarcinoma MT-8 391 112 18 Adenocarcinoma S (L.E.O.) 391 112 19 Adenocarcinoma 3663 S91 112 lA Adenocarcinoma Ca-Z 391 112 IB Adenocarcinoma Cal49 These pulmonary epithelial tumors have been placed with glandular epithelial tissue tumors only because it seemed reasonable. The tissue-designating part of the pulmonary section can be altered. If the glandular association does not prove congenial to the concepts of any coding project adopting the coding scheme. 69 FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 S91 112 IC S91 112 ID S91 112 IE S91 112 IF S91 112 IG S91 112 IH S91 112 11 S91 112 IJ S91 112 IK S91 112 IL S91 112 IM S91 112 IN S91 112 10 S91 112 IP S91 112 IQ S91 112 IR S91 112 IS S91 112 IT S91 112 lU S91 112 IV S91 112 IW S91 112 IX S91 112 lY S91 112 IZ S91 112 Al S91 112 A2 S91 112 A3 S91 112 A4 S91 112 A5 S91 112 2 S91 112 21 S91 112 22 S91 112 23 S91 112 24 S91 112 25 S91 112 26 S91 112 27 S91 112 28 S91 112 29 S92 112 S93 112 S93 112 01 S94 112 S94 112 01 S97 112 S9A 112 S9A 112 01 S98 112 3 SOO 12 SOO 121 SOO 122 SOO 123 S34 S34 123 01 S34 123 02 SOO 124 SOO 124 1 SOO 125 SIS 125 01 Adenocarcinoma Ca-15 Adenocarcinoma SPC3H Adenocarcinoma DC4 Adenocarcinoma E0771 (=Eo771) Adenocarcinoma 755 Bagg, Jacksen Adenocarcinoma Bl Adenocarcinoma BW1898 Adenocarcinoma 7-SBT Adenocarcinoma 41-SBT Adenocarcinoma 21-SBT Adenocarcinoma 49-SBT Adenocarcinoma 71-SBT Adenocarcinoma C57X Adenocarcinoma dbaH Adenocarcinoma Cal69 Adenocarcinoma Mijono Adenocarcinoma Cal Adenocarcinoma ITj Adenocarcinoma dbrB ( = dBrB) Adenocarcinoma RC Adenocarcinoma DC2 Adenocarcinoma DC3 Adenocarcinoma SPAH Adenocarcinoma TA3 Adenocarcinoma R2426 Adenocarcinoma R2857 Adenocarcinoma IRC741 Adenocarcinoma Webster Adenocarcinoma Shay ("Duct cell type") Mammary carcinoma, unspecified Carcinoma TC3H (mixed cell) Carcinoma, Tumor #1 Youngner Carcinoma, Tumor #2 Youngner Carcinoma D1905 Heston Carcinoma 63 Bashford (English) Carcinoma 15091a Carcinoma 10 Lewis Carcinoma, Ehrlich tumor (ascitic form) Carcinoma S674 Pancreatic tumor, exocrine, unspecified Tumors of sebaceous glands, unspecified Hamartoma-malignum BSj (sebaceous gland origin?), gluteal region of rat Tumors of harderian glands, unspecified Harderian gland carcinoma 2226 Tumor of glandular tissue of submaxillary gland, unspecified Tumor of glandular epithelium of seminal vesicles, unspecified Carcinoma Flexner-Jobling Pleomorphic cell parotid gland tumor, unspecified Tumors of non-glandular epithelium, unspecified Tumors of columnar, non-glandular epithelium, unspecified Tumors of stratified, non-glandular epithelium, unspecified Tumors of transitional, non-glandular epithelium, unspecified Tumors of urinary bladder, unspecified Bladder tumor C3H Bladder tumor A Tumors of squamous, non-glandular epithelium, unspecified Papilloma of squamous, non-glandular epithelium, unspecified Tumors of squamous stratified, non- glandular epithelium, unspecified Gastric carcinoma line A (squamous-cell type) - 70 - FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 S18 125 02 Carcinoma G8755 (squamous-cell type) SIA 125 01 Carcinoma #338 (squamous-cell type) S52 125 01 Carcinoma Brown-Pearce (Epithelioma Brown-Pearce) S5D 125 01 Cervical carcinoma T145 SBl 125 01 Tumor 1 Cowdry (Tumor I) SBl 12 5 02 Tumor D Cowdry SBl 125 1 Tumor of basal cells of squamous stratified epithelium (basal-cell carcinoma [variety of squamous-cell carcinoma]), unspecified S77 125 11 Carcinoma HCl (basal-cell type) SOO 125 2 Papilloma tumor of squamous stratified non-glandular epithelium, unspecified SBl 125 21 Papilloma Shope (squamous-cell type) SOO 126 Tumors of myoepithelial (non-glandular) epithelium, unspecified S96 126 11 Myoepithelial salivary gland tumors of dogs and mice, general 596 126 12 Myoepithelioma 243C 896 126 13 Pleomorphic carcinoma BW 1081 597 126 11 Submaxillary tumor C-CBA SOO 120 1 Cystadenoma (assumed to be of non-glandular epithelial origin), unspecified SOO 13 Tumors of mixed glandular and non-glandular epithella, unspecified SOO 131 Tumors of mixed endocrine and unspecified non-glandular epithelia, unspecified SOO 13A Tumors of mixed exocrine and unspecified non-glandular epithelia, unspecified SOO 13B Tumors of mixed exocrine glandular tissue and myoepithelial tissue, unspecified S9C 13 B 1 Myoepithelial sweat gland tumor, unspecified SOO 2 Tumors of blood and lymph and blood- and lymph-forming tissues SOO 21 Tumors of the specific leukoblastic tissues of the lymphatic organ system; leukemia. (This symbol is not used to code tumors of the lymph organs, lymphomas [S0022]. ) SOO 211 Lymphocytic leukemia (leukemia in which the involved leukocytes are lymphocytes and lymphoblasts). (Synonyms: lymphoid leukemia, lymphatic leukemia, lymphoblastic leukemia, lymphogenous leukemia, lymphocythemic leukemia, leukocytic leukemia) SOO 211 1 Lymphocytic leukemia, leukemic, unspecified S8B 211 1 Leukemic lymphocytic leukemia with origin In the spleen, unspecified S8B211 11 Lymphoid leukemia AK4 S8B211 12 Lymphoid leukemia 100 S8B 211 13 Lymphoid leukemia 868 S8B 211 14 Lymphoid leukemia 87 6 S8B 21115 Lymphoid leukemia 926R S8B 21116 Lymphatic leukemia 926F S8B211 17 Lymphatic leukemia Shay S8B 211 18 Leukemia Line 1 MacDowell (lymphocytic) S8D 21 ! 1 Leukemic lymphatic leukemia with origin in the spleen and lymph nodes, unspecified S8D 21111 Lymphoid leukemia HE8186 S8D 211 12 Lymphoid leukemia L1210 S8D211 13 Lymphatic leukemia L46 16 S8D211 14 Lymphatic leukemia L3054 S8D 211 15 Leukemia L3660 (lymphocytic) S8D 211 16 Lymphatic leukemia Ak S8D 211 17 Lymphoid leukemia Furth SA8 211 1 Leukemic lymphatic leukemia with origin in the thymus, unspecified SA8 21111 LymphaUc leukemia 1016F SA8 21112 Lymphatic leukemia PI 534 SA8 211 13 Lymphatic leukemia Leu 3 SA8 211 14 Lymphoid leukemia VII SOO 211 2 Lymphatic leukemia, aleukemic, unspecified SOO 212 Granulocytic leukemia (leukemia in which the involved leukocytes are myelocytic and polymorphonuclear; i.e., granulocytes). (This symbol's definition includes chloroma [= chlorosarcoma], since it is a type of myelogenous leukemia. ) 71 - FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18. 19, 20, 21. 22, 23. 24, and 25 SOO 212 1 Myelogenous leukemia, leukemic, unspecified S8B 212 1 Leukemic myelogenous leukemia with origin in the spleen, unspecified S8B 212 11 Myeloid leukemia 1 5F S8B 212 12 Myeloid leukemia A S8B 212 13 Myeloid leukemia 274 S8B 212 14 Myeloid leukemia 686 S8B 212 15 Myeloid leukemia 765 S8B 212 16 Myeloid leukemia 1 5A S8B 212 17 Myeloid leukemia C1498 S8A 212 1 Leukemic myelogenous leukemia with origin described as being "blood", unspecified S8A 212 11 Myelogenous leukemia Shay (chloroma type) SOO 212 2 Myelogenous leukemia, aleukemic, unspecified SOO 213 Monocytic leukemia (leukemias in which the involved leukocytes are mostly monocytes). (Synonym: aleukemic reticulosis. ) (This is possibly an atypical myelogenous leukemia. ) SOO 213 1 Monocytic leukemia, leukemic, unspecified SOO 213 2 Monocytic leukemia, aleukemic, unspecified SOO 22 Tumor of lymphoid tissue, as distinct from tissues of the strictly leukoblastic tissues of the lymphatic organ system. Tumors of the lymph nodes, spleen, thymus, tonsils, lymphoid tissue elements of bone marrow, and diffuse lymphatic tissue of the respiratory organs, the gastro-intestinal tract, liver, etc. ; lymphoma, unspecified. Includes the common experimental lymphoid tumors of chickens, distinguished by Symbol 1 as the seventh digit in a symbol for a specified chicken lymphoid tumor. Note: In constructing symbols for tumors of lymphoid tissue (S0022 ), when these tumors arise in lymph nodes or diffuse lymphatic tissues associated with only a body area or cavity, the structural (anatomical) origin will be indicated merely as lymph node or lymph tissue (Symbol 81) rather than to attempt to code the body region or organ in or near which was the lymph node or tissue in which the tumor originated. (It is recognized that this makes the anatomical and tissue units of the tumor symbol somewhat redundant, but this occurs because of the situation of the organs involved being of almost a single tissue type so that having identified the organs, the tissue is also identified. ) If the lymphatic tissue tumor arises in the spleen, thymus, tonsil, liver, intestine, lungs, or in any other definite organ (rather than in a lymph node or "near" or "in the region" of an organ or at a general body area), that organ is specified in the anatomical unit of the symbol. SOO 220 1 Lymphoid tumor of fowls (a group of experimental transplantable tumors), unspecified S21 220 1 ■ Lymphoid tumor of fowls with origin in the lung, unspecified S21 220 11 Lymphoid tumor RPL14 S41 220 1 Lymphoid tumor of fowls with origin in the liver, unspecified S41 220 11 Lymphoid tumor RPL12 (Olson lymphoid tumor) S41 220 12 Lymphoid tumor RPL16 S41 220 13 Lymphoid tumor RPL17 S41 220 14 Lymphoid tumor RPL21 S5A 220 1 Lymphoid tumor of fowls with origin in the ovary, unspecified S5A 220 11 Lymphoid tumor RPL18 S8B 220 1 Lymphoid tumor of fowls with origin in the spleen, unspecified S8B 220 11 Lymphoid tumor RPL15 S8B 220 12 Lymphoid tumor RPL20 SOO 221 Lymphosarcoma, unspecified S8B 221 Lymphosarcoma with origin in the spleen, unspecified S8B221 01 Lymphosarcoma 1527 S8C 221 Lymphosarcoma with origin in a lymph node (any body region), unspecified S8C 221 01 Lymphosarcoma Patterson S8C 221 02 Lymphosarcoma Mecca S8C 221 03 Lymphosarcoma DS9 72 FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 S8C 221 04 Lymphosarcoma TT15 S8C 221 05 Lymphosarcoma TT8 S8C 221 06 Lymphosarcoma TTIO SBC 221 07 Lymphosarcoma Krebs, Rask-Nielsen, Wagner S8C 221 08 Lymphosarcoma Murphy- Sturm S8C 221 09 Lymphoid Sarcoma 15BL S8C 221 OA Lymphoma #1 (L-1) (L#l) SAB 221 Lymphosarcoma with origin in the thymus SA8 221 01 Lymphosarcoma 6C3HED Gardner, solid form SAB 221 02 Lymphosarcoma 6C3HED Gardner, ascitic form SAB 221 03 Thymoma Dalton (Lymphosarcoma)(Thymoma dba) SAB 221 04 Lymphosarcoma C43 Kaplan SOO 222 Lymphocytic lymphoma, unspecified SBC 222 Lymphocytic lymphoma with origin in a lymph node (any body region), unspecified SBC 222 01 Lymphoma #2 (L#2) (lymphocytic) S8C 222 02 Lymphoma A40 (lymphocytic) SOO 223 Reticulum cell sarcoma; reticulum- cell- like tumor S41 223 Reticulum cell sarcoma with origin in the liver, unspecified S41 223 01 Reticulum cell sarcoma 488 14 S5A 223 Reticulum cell sarcoma with origin in the ovary, unspecified S5A 223 01 Reticulum cell sarcoma F8469 SBC 223 Reticulum cell type sarcoma with origin in lymph node SBC 223 01 Sarcoma R39, reticulum-cell type S8C 223 02 Lymphosarcoma R27B8, reticulum-cell type SBC 223 03 Lymphosarcoma Bagg, reticulum-cell type SBC 223 04 Reticuloendothelioma #9 SBC 223 05 Reticuloendothelioma #19 SBC 223 06 Reticulum-cell-like sarcoma, Yoshida S91 223 Reticulum cell sarcoma or reticulum-cell-like tumor with origin in the mammary gland, unspecified S91 223 01 Reticulum-cell-like tumor Copeland SAB 223 Reticulum cell sarcoma or reticulum-cell-like tumor with origin in the thymus gland, unspecified SA8 223 01 B-leukemia Bichel; reticulum-cell type SOO 224 Plasma cell tumor, unspecified S41 224 Plasma cell tumor with origin in the liver, unspecified S41 224 01 Plasmoma IRS 6820 SBC 224 Plasma cell tumor with origin in a lymph node, unspecified SBC 224 01 Plasma cell leukemia Bichel SOO 23 Erythremia and related erythrocytic tumors SOO 24 Tumors of combined erythroblastic and leukoblastic elements. Also, tumors described as "hemocytoblastic" and not otherwise defined. SOO 240 1 Tumors as defined by S0024 (--of fowls, unspecified) S5A 240 11 Lymphoid tumor RPL19 SBA 240 11 Erythrogranuloblastosis RPL3 S8A 240 12 Erythrogranuloblastosis RPL4 SOO 3 Tumors of connective tissue, unspecified. (Excluded from the definition of this symbol are tumors of the connective tissues making up sheaths and membranes enclosing peripheral and central parts of the nervous system: endoneurium [sheath of Henle], perineurium, epineurium, and meninges. Also excluded are tumors of the interstitial tissues of the nervous system: neurilemma [sheath of Schwann], satellite cells, astroglia, oligodendroglia, mesoglia, and ependyma. Tumors of these tissues are coded with tumors of nerve tissue, regardless of differences in embryonic origin and function, by Symbol S007 . ) SOO 300 1 Benign or innocent connective tissue tumor, unspecified SOO 300 2 Sarcoma, unspecified SOO 31 Tumors of fibroblastic origin, unspecified; fibroma or fibrosarcoma SOO 310 1 Fibroma, unspecified SOO 310 2 Fibrosarcoma, unspecified 73 FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21. 22, 23, 24, and 25 S91 310 1 Fibroma with origin in the mammary gland, unspecified S91 310 11 Fibroma Emge SBC 310 1 Fibroma with origin in skin, unspecified SBO 310 11 Infectious fibroma Shope SOO 310 2 Fibrosarcoma, unspecified S91 310 2 Fibrosarcoma with origin in the mammary gland, unspecified S91 310 21 Sarcoma dba G (fibrosarcoma) S91 310 22 Fibrosarcoma R 2572 S91 310 23 Fibrosarcoma Noble SC3 310 2 Fibrosarcoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified SC3 310 21 Fibrosarcoma S 620 SC3 310 22 Fibrosarcoma S 621 SC3 310 23 Fibrosarcoma S 629 SC3 310 24 Fibrosarcoma Sa89 SC3 310 25 Fibrosarcoma S 636 SC3 310 26 Fibrosarcoma HE 8971 SC3 310 27 Sarcoma Earle L (L Sarcoma), fibrosarcoma SC3 310 28 Fibrosarcoma Sa 87 SC3 310 29 Fibrosarcoma DS7 SC3 310 2A Sarcoma DS 8 (fibrosarcoma) SC3 310 2B Fibrosarcoma BP 839 SC3 310 2C Fibrosarcoma ACMCA 2 SC3 310 2D Fibrosarcoma King A #231 SC3 310 2E Fibrosarcoma #7 SC3 310 2F Fibrosarcoma #8 SC3 310 2G Fibrosarcoma JS 1 SC3 310 2H Fibrosarcoma Friedewald SD3 310 2 Fibrosarcoma of the thoracic region, unspecified SD3 310 21 Tumor C, fibrosarcoma of chicken SD5 310 2 Fibrosarcoma of the forelimb, unspecified SD5 310 21 Fibrosarcoma Sa 27 SCI 300 2 Sarcoma with origin in bone region, but not of osteoblastic origin, unspecified SCI 300 21 Sarcoma R 92 SCA 300 2 Sarcoma with origin in muscle region, but not of muscle tissue origin, unspecified SCA 3 00 21 Sarcoma MCIM SOO 300 3 Myxoma, unspecified SOO 300 31 Infectious myxoma SOO 300 4 Myxosarcoma, unspecified SOO 300 41 Sarcoma HS 5 (No. 5), myxosarcoma SOO 300 5 Myxoma mixed with a benign connective tissue tumor, unspecified SOO 300 6 Myxoma mixed with a malignant connective tissue tumor, unspecified SOO 310 6 Fibrosarcoma mixed with a myxoma SC3 310 6 Fibrosarcoma mixed with a myxoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified SC3 310 61 Chicken tumor I (Rous Sarcoma), fibrosarcoma and myxoma SOO 300 7 Myxosarcoma mixed with a benign connective tissue tumor, unspecified SOO 300 8 Myxosarcoma mixed with a malignant connective tissue tumor, unspecified SOO 310 8 Fibrosarcoma mixed with a myxosarcoma SC3 3 10 8 Fibrosarcoma mixed with a myxosarcoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified SC3 310 81 Myxosarcoma 14(d) 7, fibrosarcoma SOO 300 9 Rhabdosarcoma (a sarcoma mixed with striated muscle fibers), unspecified SOO 32 Tumors of osteoblastic origin; osteoma or osteosarcoma, unspecified SD6 32 Osteoblastic tumor (unspecified as to being osteoma or osteosarcoma) with origin in a bone of the hind limb, non-specific SD6 320 01 Bone tumor #4 NCI SOO 320 1 Osteoma, unspecified SOO 320 2 Osteosarcoma, unspecified S18 320 2 Osteosarcoma with origin in the stomach, unspecified S18 320 21 Osteogenic Sarcoma #344 74 - FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 SCI 320 2 Osteosarcoma with origin in an unspecified bone, non-specific SCI 320 21 Sarcoma #4 Argonne SD3 320 2 Osteosarcoma with origin in (an unspecified bone of) the thoracic region, non- specific SD3 320 21 Osteogenic Sarcoma Wagner (WA Sarcoma) SD3 320 22 Osteogenic Sarcoma T 491 SD8 320 2 Osteosarcoma with origin in (an unspecified bone of) the inguinal region, unspecified SD8 320 21 Osteogenic Sarcoma Ridgway 300 33 Tumors of cartilaginous origin; chondroblastoma, unspecified SOO 330 1 Chondroma, unspecified SOO 330 2 Chondrosarcoma, unspecified SOO 34 Tumors of lipoid origin; lipoblastoma, unspecified SOO 340 1 Lipoma, unspecified SOO 340 2 Liposarcoma, unspecified SC3 340 2 Liposarcoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified SC3 340 21 Liposarcoma D4888 SOO 4 Tumors designated only as "round cell sarcoma", "spindle cell sarcoma", "mixed cell sarcoma", "pleomorphic cell sarcoma", "anaplastic cell sarcoma", or "sarcoma undifferentiated" SOO 400 01 Sarcoma M 4 SC3 4 Sarcoma presumably of connective tissue origin, but the cell types not designated; with origin in subcutaneous tissue SC3 400 01 Sarcoma E 27 30 SC3 400 02 Sarcoma #3 Lewis SD4 4 Sarcoma presumably of connective tissue origin, but the cell types not designated; with origin in the perineal region SD4 400 01 Sarcoma 319 Walker SOO 41 "Round cell sarcoma", unspecified S91 41 Round cell sarcoma with origin in the mammary gland, unspecified S91 410 01 Sarcoma C 3H (#2), round cell SOO 42 "Spindle cell sarcoma", unspecified S41 42 Spindle cell sarcoma with origin in the liver, unspecified S41 420 01 Sarcoma IRS 4337, spindle cell S91 42 Spindle cell sarcoma with origin in the mammary gland, unspecified 891 420 01 Sarcoma RIII (#4), spindle cell S91 420 02 Sarcoma Emge, spindle cell SC3 42 Spindle cell sarcoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified SC3 420 01 Sarcoma B 12 (L. E. O. ), spindle cell SC3 420 02 Sarcoma I (SI), spindle cell SC3 420 03 Sarcoma DS 2, spindle cell SC3 420 04 Sarcoma DS 3, spindle cell SC3 420 05 Sarcoma DS 5, spindle cell SD4 42 Spindle cell sarcoma with origin in the abdominal region, unspecified SD4 420 01 Sarcoma Jensen, spindle cell SOO 43 "Mixed cell sarcoma", unspecified SOO 44 "Fusiform cell sarcoma", unspecified S21 44 Fusiform cell sarcoma with origin in the lung, unspecified S21 440 01 Sarcoma Ma 387, fusiform cell SD4 44 Fusiform sarcoma with origin in the abdominal region, unspecified SD4 440 01 Sarcoma 1643, fusiform SOO 45 "Pleomorphic cell sarcoma", unspecified S9I 45 Pleomorphic cell sarcoma with origin in the mammary gland, unspecified S91 450 01 Sarcoma A19E, pleomorphic cell S91 450 02 Sarcoma 37, pleomorphic cell SC3 45 Pleomorphic cell sarcoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified SC3 450 01 Sarcoma T 241 Lewis, pleomorphic cell SC3 450 02 Sarcoma DS 4, pleomorphic cell SC3 450 03 Sarcoma IRS 1548, pleomorphic cell - 75 FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 SC3 450 04 Sarcoma HS 6, pleomorphic cell SD3 45 Pleomorphic cell sarcoma with origin in the thoracic region, unspecified SD3 450 01 Sarcoma 180 Crocker, pleomorphic cell 800 46 "Anaplastic cell sarcoma", unspecified SC3 46 Anaplastic cell sarcoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified SC3 460 01 Sarcoma S 637, anaplastic cell 800 47 "Undifferentiated cell sarcoma", unspecified 800 470 01 Sarcoma A 274, undifferentiated SC3 47 Undifferentiated cell sarcoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified 8C3 470 01 Sarcoma MCI, undifferentiated 800 5 Tumors of muscle tissue, unspecified 800 51 Tumors of striated muscle, unspecified SOO 510 1 Rhabdomyoma; benign tumor of striated muscle; unspecified 800 510 2 Rhabdomyosarcoma; a sarcoma mixed with a rhabdomyoma; unspecified SC3 510 2 Rhabdomyosarcoma with origin in subcutaneous tissue, unspecified SC3 510 21 Rhabdomyosarcoma S 653 8C3 510 22 Rhabdomyosarcoma HS 4 8CA 510 2 Rhabdomyosarcoma with origin in an unspecified muscle, non-specific SCA 510 21 Rhabdomyosarcoma H 6668 SCA 510 22 Rhabdomyosarcoma MCIA (800 300 9) Rhabdosarcoma (a sarcoma mixed with striated muscle fibers), unspecified SOO 52 Tumors of smooth muscle, unspecified 800 520 1 Leiomyoma, innocent or benign tumor of smooth muscle, unspecified 800 520 2 Leiomyosarcoma; malignant tumor of smooth muscle, unspecified 800 6 Tumors of vascular tissue; endothelial tumors; angiomas; unspecified 800 61 Capillary angioma 800 611 Hemangioendothelioma, unspecified 854 611 Hemangioendothelioma with origin in the epididymis, unspecified S54 611 01 Hemangioendothelioma H 6221 SOO 62 Cavernous angioma, unspecified 800 7 Tumor of nervous tissue or of tissues of the nerve sheath, the meninges, and the mesoglia; unspecified 800 7 1 Tumors of nerve cells and fibers or derivatives, unspecified SOO 711 Tumors of the adrenal medulla and sympathetic nerves (including neuroblastoma), unspecified 800 711 1 Neuroblastoma, unspecified 86A 7111 Neuroblastoma with origin in the region of the spinal cord, unspecified S6A711 11 Neuroblastoma C 1300 SOO 712 Tumors of nerve cells of the ganglia, unspecified 800 712 1 Ganglioneuroma, unspecified 800 713 Tumors of sensory receptor nerve cells or their modifications and derivatives, unspecified S72 713 1 Retinoblastoma, unspecified SOO 72 Tumors of neuroglia, nerve sheaths, or other nerve interstitial tissue, unspecified 800 721 Tumors of tissues of the nerve sheath and the meninges, unspecified SOO 721 1 Neurofibroma, unspecified. This tumor type has an obscure or controversial tissue origin; it is from either the perineurium or neurilemma. (Synonyms: neurinoma, perineurial fibroma, fibroblastoma, Schwannoma) SOO 721 2 Neurofibromatosis (Recklinghausen's disease, neuromatosis, multiple neuroma), unspecified SOO 721 3 Neurogenic sarcoma; neurosarcoma (origin in the nerve sheath and usually located in the subcutaneous tissue or in a muscle of the arm or leg); unspecified as to organ SOO 721 4 Meningioma, unspecified 800 722 Tumors of the interstitial tissues of the brain; glioma; unspecified SOO 722 1 Tumors of spongioblasts; glioblastoma; glioblastoma multiforme; spongioblastoma multiforme; gliosarcoma; unspecified 861 722 11 Glioblastoma 8100 Moore 76 - SOO 722 2 S61 722 21 SOO 722 3 S67 722 3 SOO 722 4 SOO 722 4 867 722 4 S61 722 4 S61 722 41 SOO 8 SOO 800 1 SOO 800 2 S7A 800 2 S7A 800 21 SD7 800 2 SD7 800 21 SD7 800 22 SB2 800 2 SB2 800 21 SOO 9 SOO 91 S91 91 S91 910 01 SOO 92 S91 92 S91 920 01 S91 920 02 SOO 93 S91 930 01 SOO 94 S5A 940 01 S5A 940 02 SOO A FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 Tumors of astrocytes; astrocytoma; unspecified Astrocytoma C3H (18) Tumor of undifferentiated preneurogliar cells, unspecified MeduUoblastoma of the cerebellum Tumor of ependymal cells, unspecified Ependymoma, unspecified Ependymoma of the cerebellum, unspecified Ependymoma of the brain, unspecified Ependymoma A(22) Tumors of melanin- forming tissues, unspecified Benign or innocent melarioma; naevus; mole; unspecified Malignant melanoma; melanotic sarcoma; unspecified Malignant melanoma with origin in the ear, unspecified Melanoma Harding Passey Malignant melanoma with origin in the tail, unspecified Melanoma S91 Cloudman (dba melanoma) Amelanotic melanoma S91A (C91AA) Malignant melanoma with origin in the corium, unspecified Melanotic tumor Brunst (Chromatophoroma malignum) Tumors of mixed tissues (epithelial and connective tissues) Tumors of connective tissue containing glandular structures (adenofibroma), unspecified Mammary adenofibroma, unspecified Adenofibroma Emge Tumors of glandular epithelial tissue with fibrous connective tissue; fibroadenoma Mammary gland fibroadenoma, unspecified Fibroadenoma R2737 Fibroadenoma Tumor #6 Tumors of epithelial and connective tissue origin; carcinosarcoma; unspecified Carcinosarcoma 2 56 Walker (Walker rat tumor) Teratomas Embryoma Brues- Jack son Teratoma E6496 Tumors of embryonal tissues, unspecified 77 - FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 SYMBOLS FOR ANATOMICAL ITEMS, INCORPORATED AS THE SECOND AND THIRD UNITS OF TUMOR SYMBOLS These items (for the second and third units of the tumor symbols, Columns 19 and 20) represent gross structures only. (Tissue types are indicated by the fourth, fifth, and sixth units and are not a part of this list. ) For example, smooth muscle, striated muscle, bone marrow, etc. , are not included here, since they are types of tissue; however, organs containing smooth muscle, organs and body areas containing striated muscle (or specific skeletal muscles [organs], such as the gastrocnemius, trapezius, etc. ), and specific bones (organs) are in the list. The list may be expanded as necessary for specific organs. 1 Alimentary tract 11 Lip and inner cheek 12 Mandible 13 Palate 14 Gums 15 Tongue 16 Throat 17 Esophagus 18 Stomach; fetal stomach 19 Cardiac region of stomach; rodent forestomach or cardiac sac lA Fundic region of stomach; rodent glandular stomach IB Pyloric region of stomach 10 Duodenum ID Small intestine IE Large intestine IF Rectum IG Appendix and caecum IH Anus 11 Mesentery 2 Respiratory system 21 Lung 3 Excretory system 31 Kidney 32 Kidney pelvic region 33 Urethra 34 Urinary bladder 35 Ureter 4 Liver and associated structures 41 Liver 42 Gall bladder 43 Bile duct 5 Reproductive system 51 Testicle 52 Scrotum 53 Seminiferous tubule 54 Epididymis 55 Vas deferens 56 Penis 5A Ovary 5B Oviduct 50 Uterus, in toto, or not otherwise specified 5D Cervix 5E Body of uterus 5F Vagina 6 Nervous system, exclusive of sensory organs 61 Brain 62 Cerebrum 63 Mid-brain 64 Thalamus 65 Hypothalamus 66 Pons 67 Cerebellum 68 Medulla 69 Meninges 6A Spinal cord 7 Sensory organs 71 Eye 72 Retina 73 Iris, choroid coat, intrinsic muscles 74 Lens 75 Cornea 76 Sclera 77 Eyelid, conjunctiva 78 Nictitating membrane 7A Ear 8 Circulatory system; heart, vessels. and fluids 81 Heart 8A Blood and lymph 8B Spleen 80 Lymph node 8D Spleen and lymph nodes (combination) 9 Exocrine glands (exclusive of the liver) 91 Mammary gland 92 Pancreas 93 Sebaceous gland 94 Harderian gland 95 Gastric gland 96 Salivary gland, unspecified 97 Sub-maxillary gland 98 Parotid gland 99 Sub- lingual gland 9A Seminal vesicle 9B Prostate 90 Sudoriparous (sudoriferous) gland A Endocrine glands 78 - FIELD E; Tumor Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 Al Pituitary gland A2 Anterior pituitary A3 Posterior pituitary A4 Adrenal gland A5 Adrenal cortex A6 Adrenal medulla A7 Thyroid A8 Thymus B Skin; integument; including specialized structures producing hair, nails. feathers, etc. Bl Epidermis B2 Dermis B3 Hair follicle 0 Supportive or skeletal system and muscles 01 Specific bone (e. g. , the femur) C2 Cartilagenous organ C3 Subcutaneous connective tissue layer considered as an organ; subpannicular region CA Specific muscle of striated muscle tissue (e. g. , gastrocnemius) Smooth muscle organs. (Code specific organs containing smooth muscle) D External body regions Dl Head D2 Neck D3 Thorax; supraclavicular region. pectoral region, axillary region, eh D4 Abdomen: perineal region, etc. D5 Forelimb D6 Hindlimb D7 Tail D8 Inguinal region D9 Gluteal region E Body cavities: Internal regions El Abdominal cavity; peritoneal cavity E2 Thoracic cavity S Organs of higher plants. Spermatophyta SI Stem bud, stem tip, immature stem S2 Mature stem S3 Root, of the primary root system (exclusive of adventitious roots) S4 Adventitious root S5 Vascular bundles (any plant vascular organic unit) S6 Leaf S7 Leaf blade S8 Leaf petiole S9 Flower SA Flower, exclusive of stalk and receptacle SB Flower, stalk and receptacle SC Ovary, fruit SD Seed SE Plant embryonic organs - 79 - FIELD E; Pathology Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 PATHOLOGY CODE REPRESENTATIVE LIST OF DISEASES AND IDENTIFYING CODE SYMBOLS Other pathologies may be added to this list and symbols constructed according to the procedures and policies outlined in the Key discussion of the Pathology Code. The spaces between the fourth and fifth and between the sixth and seventh units of the symbols have no significance in the list except to facilitate analysis of the second and third (anatomical and etiological) parts of the symbol. The information coded into these symbols assigned to pathologies is, or can be, supplemented by coding in Fields H and T-2, as described in the Key. In a few instances, to describe a pathology adequately, it is necessary to use Field H and, for these pathologies, the definition of each includes specification of that Field H code entry. This is generally the case with infectious diseases entered in the list and with certain others such as dermatomyositis, sprue, arthritis due to rheumatic fever, jaundice, etc. The anatomy list of Field H should be consulted for the definitions of the second part of the symbol (Columns 19, 20, and 21); the etiology list (following this list of pathologies) should be con- sulted for the definitions of the third part (Columns 22 and 23). A supplementary list of general pathological manifestations, indicated by letter symbols in Column 2 5, follows the etiology list. T110 81 00 Epilepsy, Grand mal TUG 82 00 Petit mal TlIO 83 00 Psychomotor seizure JSC 10021 Poliomyelitis (Legio debilitans); Field H: nervous system (1) JSC10031 Rabies (Formida inexorabilis); Field H: nervous system (1) T213 00 01 Glaucoma (aqueous humour), cause unspecified T21E 00 OA Conjunctivitis, cause unspecified T310 00 01 Anginal syndrome T311 00 01 Auricular flutter, cause unspecified T311 00 02 Auricular fibrillation, cause unspecified T312 00 01 Ventricular paroxysmal tachycardia T317 00 OF Myocardial infarction T31C 81 00 Sinus arrhythmia T320 00 01 Thrombosis, unspecified as to whether arterial or venous, cause unspecified T320 Gl 02 Thromboangiitis obliterans T325 00 01 Arterial thrombosis, cause unspecified T325 43 00 Hypertensive vascular disease T325 P2 00 Arteriosclerosis T325 X2 00 Periarteritis nodosa T325 X3 00 Atherosclerosis T325 81 00 Hypertension, essenUal T329 00 01 Purpura, non-thrombopenic; capillary purpura, cause not specified T32D P2 00 Coronary sclerosis T333 00 01 Anemia, unspecified as to cause or type T333 00 02 Anemia, macrocytic, unspecified as to cause T333 00 03 Anemia, hemolytic, unspecified as to cause T333 00 04 Jaundice, cause unspecified; hyperbilirubinemia. (For all hepatogenous jaundices, code liver. Symbol E, in Field H. ) T333 F9 02 Anemia due to Vitamin B12 deficiency T333 FE 02 Anemia due to deficiency of folic acid and intrinsic factor; pernicious anemia T333 74 03 Anemia, sickle cell T339 WS 00 Purpura, idiopathic thrombocytopenic 80 - FIELD E; Pathology Code Columns 18, 19, 20, El, 22, 23, 24, and 25 T339 XJ 00 Hemophilia T342 00 OH Splenomegaly, cause unspecified. Splenomegaly due to Gaucher's Disease: Code Gaucher's Disease in Field E and splenomegaly in Fields T-2 and H (T-2: 281; H-1: 342) and the chemical effect by one of Symbols J-R in Field T-1. T342 43 OH Splenic anemia. Note: Code the actual anemia of this condition, if specifically treated or affected by treatment, in Field T-2 (853). T346 63 00 Gaucher's Disease JS410021 Tonsilitis due to Streptococcus pyogenes; Field H: tonsil (345); Field T-2: inflammation (1132) T500 00 01 Cough, cause unspecified T500 LI 01 Cough due to tobacco smoke or other foreign irritant (smoker's cough) T500 00 02 Dyspnea, cause unspecified T514 00 OA Sinusitis (paranasal) T519 00 IB Bronchiectasis, cause unspecified 15 19 S2 00 Asthma, allergic JS501014 Tuberculosis; Field H: lungs (52) T61A 00 OA Gingivitis, cause unspecified T660 00 01 Achlorhydia, cause unspecified T660 00 02 Hypochlorhydria, cause unspecified T660 00 03 Hyperchlorhydria, cause unspecified T660X1 00 Ulcer, gastric T670 00 01 Diarrhea, cause unspecified J6301011 Thrush (Candida albicans): Field H: mouth (61) 42101011 Fasciolopsiasis (Fasciolopsis buski); Field H: intestine (67) or gall bladder (E2) T700 00 01 Hematuria, cause not specified T710 00 02 Hemaglobinuria, cause not specified 17 15 00 OA Nephritis, cause unspecified T715 00 OG Nephrosis, cause unspecified T818 00 OA Cervicitis, cause not specified T930 00 OA Inflammation of joints; arthritis, cause unspecified. For arthritis due to rheumatic fever, code rheumatic fever in Field E, inflammation (1132) in Field T-2, joint (930) in Field H-1, and the response in Field T-1. T930 61 OA Arthritis due to gout T930 71 OA Osteoarthritis T93 0 90 OA Rheumatoid arthritis T970 Gl 00 Dermatomyosltis; Field H: skin (Al). If an identifiable infective agent is named, this should be coded in lieu of T970G100. T970 Gl 01 FlbrosiUs T970 Nl OE Myasthenia gravis T9J0 00 OA Bursitis, cause unspecified TAIO 00 OA Dermatitis, cause unspecified TAIO LI OA Dermatitis, contact TBOO 00 01 Fever (pyrexia), cause unspecified. Note: It is usually a greater advantage to code fever in Field T-2 (Symbol FD) as a symptom of a pathology coded in Field E or as an abnormal state of the test organism in Field E. TBOO Gl 02 Rheumatic fever. Code the organ affected by the disease and the organ specifically affected by chemical treatment in Field H. TBOO 00 03 Burn. Specify the site of the burn in Field H and any effect of the burn specifically treated by the test compound in Field T-2. TBOO 00 OA Inflammation, cause unspecified. Code the site of inflammation in Field H, or, if the inflammation is a specific recognized disease entity, construct a new symbol, substituting the symbol for the organ inflamed for the non-specific anatomical part BOO. TBOO 00 OB Shock, not otherwise distinguished TBOO 00 OF Infarction, not otherwise distinguished TBOO 00 OG Gangrene, cause and site not specified TBOO 21 00 Lead poisoning TBOO 25 00 Snake venom poisoning. Note; If the specific snake venom is known, the taxonomic symbol for the snake species should be coded in Field E, the victim animal in Field J, and the organ system affected (blood or nervous, e. g. ) in Field H. TBOO 26 00 Chloroform poisoning - 81 - FIELD E; Pathology Code Columns 18, 19. 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 TBOO SI 00 TBOO CI 00 TBOO 32 OB TBOO C2 OB TBOO C4 OD TBOO 44 OF TBOO 61 00 TBOO Fl 00 TBOO F2 00 TBOO F3 00 TBOO F7 00 TBOO F8 00 TBOO F9 00 TBOO FA 00 TBOO FC 00 TBOO FE 00 TBOO FK 00 TBOO FL 00 TBOO Wl 00 TBOO W4 : 00 TBOO W5 i 00 TBOO 81 00 TB71 00 IC TEIO 00 01 TEIO 00 02 TEIO 00 OA TEIO 42 02 TEIO 62 OG 42103011 JS90202: I Anaphylaxis, cause unspecified Frost bite, site unspecified. If the site is specified, code it in Field H. Shock, surgical Shock due to burn Radiation sickness Infarction due to thrombosis. Code the site of infarction in Field H. Gout Avitaminosis, not otherwise distinguished Vitamin A deficiency, not otherwise distinguished Vitamin B deficiency, not otherwise distinguished Vitamin B6 pyridoxine deficiency, not otherwise distinguished Pantothenic acid deficiency Vitamin B12 deficiency Vitamin C deficiency, not otherwise distinguished Vitamin E deficiency, not otherwise distinguished Sprue. Note: Identify in Field H the structures affected by sprue and the structure responding to chemical treatment. Boron deficiency, not otherwise distinguished Calcium deficiency, not otherwise distinguished Addison's Disease, adrenal insufficiency, adrenal cortical hypofunction Diabetes mellitus Hyperthyroidism Alcoholism Ascites, cause unspecified Fatty liver, cause unspecified Cirrhosis, cause unspecified Hepatitis, cause unspecified Cirrhosis, due to congestion Yellow atrophy of the liver Clonorchiasis (Clonorchis sinensis); Field H: liver (E) Cirrhosis, syphilitic (Treponema pallidum); Field H: liver (E); Field T-2: Cirrhosis (4189) 82 - FIELD E; Pathology Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 CAUSES OF DISEASE Disease etiologies, classified under several categories and assigned code symbols, to be used in constructing Field E code symbols for specific pathologies. The following catalog of etiologies is divided into eight basic groups to which Symbols 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 have been assigned, to be coded in Column 22 as part of the total eight-unit symbol identifying pathologies. To provide an adequate number of symbols for specific etiologies within each category, the numerical symbols are combined with IBM zone punches, giving three letter symbols, in addition to the numerical symbol, in each category. Therefore, the first category is represented by any of Symbols 2, B, K, or S, the second category by any of Symbols 3, C, L, or T, the third by Symbols 4, D, M, or U, etc. A general sub-classification has been made within some of the categories. For ex- ample, within the first category. Symbols 2, B, and K have been reserved for specific extraneous poi- sons and intoxicants, while Symbol S has been reserved for those materials to which individuals are peculiarly sensitive (hypersensitive responses). Within each sub-category, however, each specific etiology is distinguished simply by assigning it a sequential number for Column 23. Thus, lead was the first of the specific poisonous materials as a cause of pathology listed in the category of poisons and was assigned Symbol 21; subsequently, the next poisonous material added, carbon monoxide, was assigned Symbol 22, etc. The seventh major category (Symbols 8, H, Q, and Y in Column 22) differs somewhat from the pattern of other categories for designating specific etiologies. This is a category for those diseases for which causes have not been discovered or are highly conjectural (resembling in this respect the sixth category. Symbols 7, G, P, and X) and which result less in morphological change than in physio- logical disorders. The ciiterion for distinguishing diseases of this category lies, therefore, in the physiological process affected by the disease and is not actually an etiological classification at all. Here, it has seemed most practical to assign no specific meanings to symbols in Column 23, but rather to allow the symbol in Column 22 to refer generally to functions of the anatomical part coded in Columns 19, 20, and 21. The normal physiological process of the anatomical part which is disrupted by the path- ology is merely assigned a sequential number in Column 23. Thus, for each anatomical part coded dis- tinctly in Columns 19, 20, and 21, a very large number of diseases (whose causes are unknown) can be distinguished on the basis of the functional disturbance brought about by the disease. The alternative to this would have been the assignment of specific functional disturbances to the 140 available symbols within this category, only one or a few of which would be applicable to any one anatomical part coded in Columns 19, 20, and 21. Symbols 2, B, K, and S Extraneous poisons, intoxicants, and materials to which individuals are sensitive, as causes of pathology. Poisons and intoxicants Substances producing hypersensitive reactions 21 Lead SI Anaphylactic response, substances producing, 22 Carbon monoxide unspecified 23 Arsenic S2 Allergic, hypersensitive reaction, substances 24 Mercury producing, unspecified 25 Snake venom, unspecified 26 Chloroform - 83 FIELD E; Pathology Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 Symbols 3, C, L, and T Trauma and physical agents as causes of disease. 3 Traumas C Heat, cold, radiation, etc. L Substances which cause physical injury rather than damage by chemical interaction 31 Trauma, unspecified 32 Operative wound CI Cold, freezing, frostbite C2 Contact burn C3 Sunburn, ultraviolet ray burn C4 X-rays, radium, other radio- active substances, unspecified LI Foreign substances, irritants, etc. Symbols 4, D, M, and U Disturbances of circulation as causes of pathology, regardless of the primary cause of the circulatory disturbance. 4 Blood supply and blood pressure D Abnormality of blood components, character 41 Increased blood supply, due to dilation of vascular bed 42 Stasis 43 Increased blood pressure 44 Thrombosis, disruption of circulation to the part Symbols 5, E, N, and V Disturbances of the nervous system as causes of disease, regardless of the primary cause of the nervous disorder. 5 Psychic disturbances E Reflex disturbances Nl- Efferent nerve disorders NI NJ- Sensory nerve disorders NZ V Sympathetic or parasympathetic disturbances NI Disturbance of myoneural junction 84 FIELD E; Pathology Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 Symbols 6, F, 0, and W Disturbances of metabolism, growth, and nutrition as causes of disease, regardless of the primary cause of the metabolic disorder. F 0 Wl- WR Metabolic disorders; toxins of metabolic origin Deficiencies Endocrine functional abnormalities WS- Growth and development disorders WZ 61 Disturbances of Fl General vitamin Wl Adrenal cortex purine metabolism deficiency hyperfunction 62 Toxic products of F2 Vitamin A deficiency W2 aberrant metabo- lism, unspecified F3 Vitamin B deficiency. 63 Lipoid metabolism n. o. s. F4 Vitamin Bj defi- ciency F5 Vitamin B^, ribo- flavin, deficiency F6 Nicotinic acid deficiency F7 Vitamin B^, defi- ciency Wi W4 Adrenal cortex hypofunction Islets of Langer- hans, hyper- function Islets of Langer- hans, hypo- function W5 Thyroid gland, hyperfunction W6 Thyroid gland, hypofunction WS Arrested or retarded development F8 Pantothenic acid deficiency F9 Vitamin Bj2 defi- ciency FA Vitamin C defi- ciency FB Vitamin D defi- ciency FC Vitamin E defi- ciency FD Vitamin K defi- ciency FE Folic Acid defi- ciency FF- (Reserved for FI other vitamin deficiencies) 85 FIELD E; Pathology Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 Symbols 6, F, 0, and W (Continued) FJ Iodine deficiency FK Boron deficiency FL Calcium deficiency FM Copper deficiency FN- (Reserved for FZ other mineral and elemental deficiencies) Symbols 7, G, P, and X Diseases due to unknown causes, with the structural change manifest in the affected part (which may result in a functional disorder). 71- Degenerative 71 7J- Infiltrative or permeative 7Z G P XI- XI Inflammatory structural changes Proliferative and sclerotic changes Combined anatomical changes XJ- Heredity diseases with structural XZ abnormalities manifest 71 Degenerative, unspecified 72 Atrophy 73 Necrosis 74 Abnormal form, abnormal development Gl Inflammatory changes PI Proliferative, unspecified P2 Connective tissue proliferation P3 Sclerotic change XI Necrosis and inflammation X2 Inflammation followed by necrosis X3 Degeneration and infiltration XJ Inheritable diseases, unspecified Symbols 8, H, Q, and Y Diseases of unknown cause with a physiological disorder being the principal manifestation. (See the explanation in the introduction to this etiology list. ) Symbols 9, I, R, and Z Chronic conditions or permanent impairment due to previous infection. 86 FIELD E; Pathology Code Columns 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 List of General Pathological States which may be Associated with any Anatomical Structure Affected Pathologically (Columns 24 and 25) These conditions are general states, each of which may be associated with many specifically recognized and named pathologies. They can be used as the final part of pathology symbols in Field E (Columns 24 and 25), serving to distinguish certain pathologies not otherwise adequately described or distinguished by the anatomical and etiological coding in Columns 19-23. It is planned to use only a single IBM zone punch in Column 25 to distinguish this category of entries having fixed definitions from the other category coded in Columns 24 and 25, with numerical entries in Column 2 5 and without fixed definitions. (Refer to Division 6 of the discussion of the Pathology Code in the Key. ) Thus, only the letter symbols A through I are used in Column 25 combined with numerical symbols in Column 24 (OA-OI, lA-lI, 2A-2I, etc. ). This will permit 90 such general states which is predicted to be adequate for distinguishing all pathological states for which the CBCC will need symbols. OA Inflammation lA Constriction OB Shock IB Dilatation OC Congestion (blood); for congestion of IC Accumulation of body fluids; other fluids (dropsy), use Symbol IC dropsy; ascites CD General malaise or acute general symptoms due to the specific etiology coded OE Reduction of normal physiological function; disturbance of action OF Infarction OG Necrosis, degeneration OH Hypertrophy 01 Atrophy 87 FIELD F Column 26 SEX AND STAGE OF DEVELOPMENT OF THE TEST ORGANISM; MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION CONCERNING TUMORS (See final page of Field F) # Male Female Use both symbols (* and #) when use of a mixture of sexes is specified. Use neither if it is not known whether the organism is male or female or whether a group of organisms is of all male, all female, or a mixture of individuals. Consult the Key. Vertebra ta (Symbol A in Column 18 of Field E) Invertebrate (cont'd on next page) (Any of Symbols 1 through 9 and E through G in Column 18 of Field E) Symbol Sporozoa (Symbol 13 in Columns 18 and 19 of Field E) 1 Spermatocyte and ovum; gametes; haploid stages Sporont, gametocyte 2 Zygote; fertilized egg Zygote 3 Early embryo; first cleavages; morula, blastula, and gastrula. (For subsequent stages of differentiation, beginning with the neurula, use Symbol 4. ) Ookinete 4 Stages of differentiation after gastrulation: neurula; fetus; all stages from gastrula to hatching or birth, regardless of the state of maturity at release from the egg membranes or uterus Oocyst 5 Infant: early stages beginning with hatching or birth; stages in which the animal is often relatively helpless or to some degree dependent; first period of growth. (Symbol 5 includes all developmental stages of tadpoles of Amphibia. ) Sporozoite 6 Young animal: the stages between infancy and sexual maturity. (Includes young Amphibians from the stage of emergence from a tadpole- -in general, from the time all four legs have appeared and assumed functions. ) Trophozoite 7 Young sexually mature animal: any stages between sexual maturity and assumption of characteristic adult size, appearance, and behavior; adolescence of humans Schizont 8 Adult animal Merozoite 9 Senile animal: stages of somatic degeneration to death If necessary to code a distinction between sperm and egg, it can be accomplished by the IBM zone punches, if the test compound is administered to that particular stage, and/or by Field H-1, when that is the stage (structure) responding to the test compound. - 88 FIELD F Column Z6 * Male # Female Symbol Invertebrata (continued from the previous page) (Any of Symbols 1 through 9 and E through G in Column 18 of Field E) Nematoda (Symbol 51 in Columns 18 and 19 of Field E) Insecta (Symbol 93 in Columns 18 and 19 of Field E) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Sperm and egg Zygote; fertilized egg Embryo (including microfilaria) First stage postembryonic juvenile; rhabditoid larva Second stage juvenile; filariform larva; juvenile after first molt Third stage juvenile (after second molt) Fourth stage juvenile (after third molt) Immature adult (after fourth molt) Mature adult producing eggs /spermatozoa Gametes Zygote Embryo Larva or nymph at the first or second instar stage^ Larva or nymph at the third instar stage^ Larva or nymph at the fourth or later instar stage^ Prepupal stage Pupa Adult (See the footnote with the vertebrate list. ) If a distinction is desired between the early and late pupa, it can only 2. ,, ^ r ^, , . . -r- J be made in the written abstract. If the stage of the larva is in no way specified, use Symbol 6, but if there is adequate reason for believing it is an "early" or "late" larva, use Symbol t, 5, or b, according to best judgment. SPECIAL EMBRYONIC AND LARVAL STAGES OF INVERTEBRATE ANIMALS; BACTERIA SPORE Bacteria spore. ... 1 Bipinnaria 4 Branchiolaria 5 Caterpillar 6 Cercaria 6 Chigger 6 Cypris 5 Cysticercus 7 Ephyra 6 Glochidium 6 Grub 6 Maggot 6 Medusa 2 Megalops 7 Metacercaria .... 7 Microfilaria 6 Miracidium 3 Mysis 7 Naiad 6 Nauplius 4 Pilidium 4 Planula 4 Pluteus 4 Polyp 7 Protozoea 5 Redia 5 Scyphistoma 5 Seed tick 6 Sporocyst 4 Trochophore 4 Veliger 4 Zoea 6 - 89 - FIELD F Column 26 Male Female Symbol Spermatophytes {Symbol M in Columns 18 and 19 of Field E) Basidiomycetes (Symbol J5 in Columns 18 and 19 of Field E) 1 Spore Basidiospore (a haploid, uninucleate spore, formed by meiotic division of the diploid basidium)^ 2 Zygote Young mycelium (haploid, uninucleate ["haplophasic"]), not yet producing haploid, uninucleate spores (oidia; conidia; spermatid of wheat rust, e. g. ). (For a binucleate mycelium producing binucleate spores [diplophasic], use Symbols 5 and 6. ) 3 Embryo Mycelium as in Symbol 2, but producing haploid spores (spermatia, e. g. ); a haplophasic mycelium reproducing asexually. ^ 4 Seed Spore, haploid, uninucleate and not formed by meiotic division; spore of haplophasic mycelium; spore that will produce a mycelium as in Symbol 2; oidia; conidia; spermatia. 1 (For haploid, binucleate spores, use Symbol 7. ) 5 Seedling Young mycelium (haploid, binucleate ["diplophasic"]){from the union of two sexes of uninucleate mycelia, or from a union of spermatia [or of spermatium with a hypha] of opposite sexes, or from binucleate haploid spores--e.g. , aecidiospore or uredospore) --which is not yet producing basidia (or teleutospores). (If at a reproductive stage, use Symbol 6. ) 6 Non-flowering vegetative plant Mycelium as in Symbol 5, but mature and producing binucleate, haploid spores (aecidiospores or uredospores or teleutospores) or producing basidia. (Use Symbol 6 also for young basidia still in the haploid binucleate stage before nuclear fusion. Use Symbol 8 for the diploid uninucleate stage. ) 7 Flowering plant Spore, haploid, binucleate; aecidiospore or uredospore. Includes young teleutospore (but not basidium) prior to nuclear fusion. (Use Symbol 6 for a basidium prior to nuclear fusion. Use Symbol 8 for any diploid uninucleate stage of a basidium or germinating teleutospore. ) 8 Fruiting plant Basidium or teleutospore, at diploid, uninucleate stage 9 Senescent plant Basidium at the haploid (2 or 4 nuclei) stage--or germinating teleutospore at the haploid stage (or epibasidium [haploid] stage of germinating teleutospore). Forms basidiospores (Symbol 1). If necessary to code a distinction between sexes of haploid spores and mycelia, it can be accomplished by the IBM zone punches, if the test compound is administered to that particular stage and/or by Field H-1, when that is the stage responding to the test compound. (When an author does not specify the stage of the life cycle other than "mycelium", use the symbol for "mature vegetative mycelium producing asexual spores". If spores are not specified beyond "spores", use the symbol for "haploid spores" [i. e. , ascospores, basidiospores, or conidia]. ) - 90 FIELD F Column 26 * Male # Female Symbol Ascomycetes and Fungi imperfect! {Symbols J4 or Jb, respectively, in Columns 18 and 19 in Field E) Ascospore (a haploid, uninucleate spore, formed by a meiotic division of the diploid ascus) Young mycelium (haploid, uninucleate) not yet producing conidia nor reproducing sexually^ IVIycelium as in Symbol 2, but producing conidiospores and conidia and /or sex organs' Conidium (haploid, uninucleate spore, formed from a haploid, uninucleate mycelium. Will form a mycelium as in Symbol 2. )' "Zygote": a binucleate haploid cell resulting from the fusion of protoplasts of two uninucleate sex cells, the ascogonium and the antheridium. Symbol 5 represents the stage prior to nuclear fusion. Included is any mycelium (binucleate, haploid ascogenous hyphae) resulting from this gamete union prior to ascus formation. Ascus-forming stage of a post- zygotic mycelium or of the "zygote". (Use Symbol 7 for ascus. ) Ascus at the binucleate, haploid stage, prior to nuclear fusion Ascus after nuclear fusion (uninucleate diploid) Ascus after reduction division (haploid and with 2 or 4 nuclei) (See the footnote under the Basidiomycetes) 91 FIELD F Column 26 « Male # Female Symbol Phycomycetes (Symbol J3 in Columns 18 and 19 of Field E) Gametes, uninucleate or multinucleate, haploid, either isogametes or heterogametes; antherozoid and egg^ Zygote, diploid, uninucleate or multinucleate (if multinucleate, the diploid condition may be uninucleate or multinucleate according to the number of nuclei contributed by the antherozoid) Germinating zygote, haploid (i. e. , after meiosis), multinucleate, forming either spores (Symbol 4) immediately from its protoplast (ordinarily zoospores) or a mycelium (Symbol 5) Spore formed directly from a germinating zygote, haploid. Includes spores which are formed from a special, limited mycelium (not comparable to vegetative mycelium) produced by the germinating zygote. (Use Symbol 7 for a spore from a vegetative mycelium. ) Young vegetative (haploid) mycelium (either nonseptate or, if septate, usually having multinucleate cells), not yet producing asexual spores nor gametes. ^ Formed from a zygote or a spore or a mycelial fragment. (If the mycelium is producing spores or gametes, use Symbol 6 or 8, respectively. ) Vegetative mycelium as in Symbol 5, but mature and producing haploid spores (If the mycelium is producing gametes, use Symbol 8. ) Spore, haploid, uninucleate (either a motile zoospore or a nonmotile, resting aplanospore), formed from a vegetative mycelium. Includes conidiosporangia (= Phycomycete "conidia") and chlamydospores. (Use Symbol 4 for a spore from a germinating zygote. ) Vegetative mycelium as in Symbol 5, but in a stage of producing sex organs, antheridla and/or oogonia, instead of, or in addition to, asexual spores 2 Stages of maturation of gametes within the oogonium or antheridium Except those Phycomycetes which apparently include an alternation of generations in which the diploid condition is retained from the zygote through a vegetative mycelial stage which reproduces only asexually--to return to the haploid stage by producing haploid spores. In the scheme above, this diploid generation could be represented only by Symbol 2; if finer distinctions are needed, it will be necessary to devise a special list of life cycle stages for Phycomycete members like Allomyces sp. '(See the footnote under the Basidiomycetes. ) - 92 - FIELD F Column Zb * Male # Female Symbol Alqae (Symbols JA through JE in Columns 18 and 19 of Field E) 1 2 3 Gametes (haplold); antherozold and egg Zygote Germinating zygote (haploid after reduction) to produce haploid thallus (Symbol 8) or to produce immediately zoospores (or carpospores of Rhodophyta)(Symbol 7). If the germinating zygote remains diploid (as in Phaeophyta and certain Rhodophyta), use Symbol 4. 4 5 6 Germinating zygote (diploid) to produce diploid thallus (sporophyte) Mature diploid sporophyte producing sporangia (diploid) which are either "neutral" sporangia (producing "neutral" diploid spores. Symbol 6) or "unilocular" sporangia (producing haploid zoospores. Symbol 7). Includes diploid sporophytes producing diploid "unilocular sporangia" that functionally are "macrosporangia" or "microsporangia" which produce eggs and antherozoids, respectively, by reduction division (Symbol 1). "Neutral" spore, diploid; will form a diploid thallus as in Symbol 5 7 8 9 Spore (haploid), from a haploid thallus (Symbol 8); spore (haploid), from a diploid thallus (Symbol 5); spore (haploid), from a zygote (Symbol 3). The distinction of this spore according to its origin can only be made, if necessary, by the written abstract. Haploid thallus, from a haploid spore, producing only haploid spores (Symbol 7), or producing haploid spores and sex organs, or producing only haploid sex organs (oogonia and antheridia, Symbol 9) Maturation of egg and antherozold in the oogonia and antheridia SYMBOI5 FOR DESCRIPTION OF TUMORS BEING TREATED S - Ascitic form of tumor T - Induced tumor (e. g. , carcinogenic effects) U - Spontaneous tumor V - Transplanted tumor W - Malignant tumor X - Benign tumor Y - Metastatic tumor Z - Dependent tumor (dependent on a specific condition or factor of the host coded in Field J). Describe the dependency in the written abstract. (See the footnote under the Basidiomycetes. ) 93 FIELD G (Field G-1) (Field G-2) Column 27 Column 28 PRETREATMENT OR EXPERIMENTAL STATE OF THE TEST ORGANISM OR OF THE ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL OF THE TEST ORGANISM Symbol Z only: EXPERIMENTAL TREATMENT OF THE TEST ORGANISM OTHER THAN TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND AND COMPOUND CODED IN FIELD D ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS EXPERIMENTALLY ADAPTED OR CONDITIONED to a particular environment or situation (Pavlov dog, light-adapted cockroach, etc. ). Any exposures to particular environments which do not result in specific adaptations are coded by Symbol 3 or 4. ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS PRETREATED SURGICALLY (as in the states of Symbols P, Q, and R), OR CHEMICALLY, OR BY ELECTRIC SHOCK, but (in contrast to Symbols P, Q, and R) FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN ISOLATION OF THE ORGANISM AND AN ANATOMICAL COMPONENT. Includes staining with dyes, surgical exposure of an organ for observation, treatment for rendering an animal or muscular organ quiet or otherwise receptive to treatment by the test compound, etc. (See the Key for a description of Symbols 2, P, Q, R, and B. ) ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS EXPOSED TO AN ABNORMAL PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL ENVIRONMENT to which adaptation is not intended, preparatory for or during the test (high atmospheric pressures, changes in 0^:002 ratio, temperature changes, changes in gravitational pull, anaerobic culture conditions, etc. ). For radiation exposure, use Symbol 4. When the test organism has become adapted to such an environment (prior to the test), Symbol 1 must be used rather than Symbol 3. ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS EXPOSED TO RADIATION which is not responsible for the action coded in Field T-2. If radiation is administered as part of the treatment instead of a pretreatment (i. e. , administered with the test compound so that both the chemical and radiation factors are expected to be responsible for the response coded in Field T), Symbol Z must be used. ORGANISM IS EXPERIMENTALLY OR NATURALLY INFECTED. (For non-infectious pathological states of the test organism, use Symbol 7, B, C, D, or E. ) If the organism responding as a whole to the test compound has an infection that is restricted to a single organ, use Symbol 0 and code the organ in Field H-2; however, if the infection is restricted to a single tissue and Symbol 0 is used, the tissue can not be coded (neither in Field H-2 or I). (If the organism does not respond as a unit to the test compound, but an organ [In Field H-I] or a tissue [in Field I] is the unit responding to the test compound and having an infection, use Symbol N rather than Symbol 5 or 0. ) If the organism has an organ or tissue implant, either normal or pathological, use Symbol S. ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL HAS BEEN MADE SENSITIVE OR HYPERSENSITIVE to the test compound. (For a sensitive strain, use Symbol H. Use Symbol J for the state of induced resistance to the test compound. ) ORGANISM IS IN AN EXPERIMENTAL PATHOLOGICAL STATE not otherwise specified by special symbols- -5 (infectious disease), B (hormone deficiency), C (hormone excess), D and E (dietary deficiencies), P (loss of an anatomical part), and S (bearing an implant). Symbol 7 includes all other non- infectious pathologies, including spontaneous tumors (but not implanted tumors). Also, it includes general experimental stress either brought about by administration of excesses of a specific material (e. g. , H^O, salt, CO^, etc. ), removal of an organ (to be described in the written abstract and not coded in Field H-2), or a natural or unspecified 94 FIELDS G-1 and G-2 Columns 27 and 28 physiological stress. {If the test organism has had removed from it an organ for any purpose other than to produce stress, the condition is coded by Symbol P. ) If the organism has an organ or tissue, other than an organ or tissue responding specifically to the test compound (therefore not coded in Field H- 1 or I), which is in a pathological state different from the state of the test organism as a whole, use Symbol 0 and, if it is an organ in this pathological state, code it in Field H-2 (if it is a tissue, it can not be coded in Field I). If, instead of the organism as a whole, an organ or tissue is the structure responding specifically to the test compound and is therefore coded in Field H-1 or I, and it is in a pathological state, use Symbol N or S. 8 ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS IN AN INACTIVE STATE; e. g. , hypnosis, estivation, diapause, dormancy, bacterial resting stage, hibernation. 9 PARABIOTIC A PARTHENOGENETIC B ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS HORMONE DEFICIENT (the deficiency not being the condition treated). Symbol B has priority over Symbol P in Field G and is used for any experi- mental hormone deficiency. When an endocrine gland is extirpated to produce the experimental hormone deficiency, code the gland removed or modified in Field H-2. This includes situations in which the hormone deficiency is relative only to the developmental stage of the test organism being treated with the test compound; e. g. , the removal of the endocrine gland and juvenile hormone of larval insect stages. C ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL HAS A HORMONE EXCESS (this excess not being the condition treated). This includes situations in which the excess is relative only to the develop- mental stage of the test organism being treated with the test compound; e. g. , the application of the juvenile hormone to insect stages in which the hormone is normally virtually absent. D ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS DEFICIENT IN ONE OR MORE VITAMINS, ONE OR MORE MINERALS, ONE OR MORE SPECIFIC NUTRIENTS (E.G. , A SPECffIC AMINO ACID), OR WATER. Symbol D is not used for general deficiency in nourishment- -see Symbol E. Symbol D is used to code incidental dietary deficiencies of normal organisms; it is not a device for indicating that the organism is a special strain or breed which can not synthesize the nutrient or vitamin. Any special strain, such as one dependent on exogenous nutrient or vitamin sources, is indicated by Symbol F. E ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE. OR CELL IS UNDERNOURISHED; generally deficient in nutrients; fasted; deficient in caloric intake. For the deficiency of a specific essential dietary component, use Symbol D. F ORGANISM IS OF A SPECIAL STRAIN: selected, adapted, derived, mutant. (This excludes those special strains for which are provided the specific symbols, G, H, and I, below. Neither is Symbol F used to distinguish a taxonomic strain which is either given special designation in the Taxonomy Code of Field E or is not indicated at all by code. ) (See the Key section on Specific Directions and Explanations, Division 9, for the CBCC's exceptional use of Symbol F. ) ORGANISM IS OF A STRAIN RESISTANT TO THE TEST COMPOUND. (Use Symbol J for an individual organism, of a non-resistant strain, made resistant by a prior exposure to the test compound. ) ORGANISM IS OF A STRAIN SENSITIVE TO THE TEST COMPOUND. (Use Symbol 6 for an individual, of a non-sensitive strain, sensitized to the test compound by prior exposure. ) ORGANISM IS OF A STRAIN DEPENDENT ON THE TEST COMPOUND. Use Symbol F for strains resistant to, sensitive > to, or dependent on compounds other than the test compound ORGANISM IS OF A NON-RESISTANT STRAIN, OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS OF SUCH AN ORGANISM, AND IS MADE RESISTANT TO (L E. , TOLERANT OF) THE TEST COMPOUND. (Use Symbol 6 for the state of sensitization to the test compound. For a resistant strain, use Symbol G. ) 95 - FIELDS G-1 and G-2 Columns 27 and 28 K PREGNANT L VIRGIN M ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS CONGENITALLY ABNORMAL. N ORGAN OR TISSUE (SPECIFIED IN FIELD H-1 OR FIELD I) IS IN A PATHOLOGICAL STATE (including infectious and non-infectious pathological states and spontaneous tumors, but not implanted tumors; if a tumor is implanted, use Symbol S). Use of this symbol includes indica- tion of physiological stress on the organ; e. g. , the removal of one of a pair of organs, or part of an organ, or an entire organ, or any other special pretreatment to produce the exaggerated condition of in situ experimental stress on the organ specified in Field H-1 or the tissue specified in Field I. The description of the specific pretreatment employed to produce stress is not coded (e. g. , the organ removed to produce stress is not coded), but it is included in the written abstract. (Any stress other than in situ is also eligible for being indicated by Symbol N. ) The symbol is used when the organ in Field H- 1 or the tissue in Field I is infected, but only if that infection is restricted to that organ or tissue or if the organ or tissue is excised (indicated by Symbol R in Field G-1, placing Symbol N in Field G-2); if the infection is more general and the organ or tissue is in situ, use Symbol 5. Similarly, Symbol N is used if the organ in Field H-1 or the tissue in Field I has a non- infectious disease that is restricted to that organ or tissue, but if the disease is more general and the organ or tissue is in situ, use Symbol 7. 0 ORGAN (TO BE SPECIFIED IN FIELD H-2) IS IN A PATHOLOGICAL STATE DIFFERENT FROM THE STATE (NORMAL OR OTHERWISE) OF THE ORGAN CODED IN FIELD H-1. This organ may be an organ to which the test compound is administered and which is not the specific organ responding (a frequent use of Field H-2), but if Symbol 0 is coded in Field G, it may be ANY pathological organ, treated or not, which is not the organ coded in Field H-1. Use of Symbol 0 includes indicating any pretreatment to produce stress in an organ other than the organ in Field H-1. Symbol 0 is used when an organ other than the organ in Field H-1 is infected or has a non- infectious disease or a spontaneous or implanted tumor. P ORGANISM (RESPONDING AS A WHOLE TO THE TEST COMPOUND) PREPARED FOR EXPERIMENTAL STUDY BY EXTIRPATING, CUTTING, A^lPUTATING. OR DESTROYING AN ORGAN, TISSUE, OR FLUID (or by blocking or anesthetizing in situ a specific organ or tissue). The organ removed or blocked in the organism is coded in Field H-2, though if the structure is a tissue, it can not be coded either in Field H-2 or I. Use Symbol B when an endocrine gland is removed or treated to produce a hormone deficiency. Use of Symbol P does not include removal of one of a pair of organs or part of an organ to produce the exaggerated experimental condition of stress In the organism, for which Symbol 7 is used. Consult the Key for a discussion of Symbols 2, P, Q, R, and B. 0 ORGAN OR TISSUE, IN SITU, (SPECIFIED IN FIELD H- 1 AS THE ORGAN, OR IN FIELD I AS THE TISSUE RESPONDING TO THE TEST COMPOUND) IS ISOLATED in some specific way from the organism (denervation, circulatory obstruction, etc. ), isolated from a material it normally processes (gastric or intestinal pouch), surgically isolated from one of its tissue components, etc. This includes any in situ nerve-organ preparations. To code the fact that this organ coded by Symbol Q is isolated from another organ or tissue by excision or destruction of that second organ or tissue, code Field G-2 with Symbol P (assuming Symbol 0 is in Field G-1) and, if the structure is an organ, code it in Field H-2. Consult the Key for a discussion of Symbols 2, P, Q, R, and B. R ORGAN, TISSUE, CELL, OR FLUID IS EXCISED (specified in Field H-1 or Field I as the organ or tissue responding to the test compound) for the purpose of isolating it from influences of all other factors of the organism. Includes excised nerve-organ preparations. S ORGANISM, ORGAN, OR TISSUE RESPONDING TO THE TEST COMPOUND HAS AN ORGAN OR TISSUE (EITHER NORMAL OR PATHOLOGICAL) IMPLANTED IN IT. (E. g. , an organism with a tumor implant is treated with a test compound for its analgesic action or its toxicity. ) Ex- cluded are situations when the implant is an endocrine gland implanted to create a hormone excess (Symbol C) or an organ implanted to produce a special stress (Symbol 7, N, or 0). If an implanted organ is identified, it can be coded in Field H-2, but if the implant is a tissue, 96 - J FIELDS G-1 and G-2 Columns 27 and 28 it can not be coded. In other words, Field H-2 is used for coding the implanted structure (which differs from the structure in Field H-1) rather than for coding an organ, other than the organ in Field H-1, which is a site of such a transplant. The latter should always be recorded in the written abstract when the situation exists. If an organ or tissue is implanted as a part of the treatment of the test organism and shares with the test compound responsibility for the action coded in Field T-2, Symbol S can not be used; only Symbol Z indicates this situation. NORMAL ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL IS IMPLANTED IN ANOTHER INDIVIDUAL ORGANISM, ORGAN. OR TISSUE. The implanted structure is specified in Field H-1 or I as the structure responding to the test compound. {The organism, into which these normal organs, tissues, or cells are transplanted, is not coded in Field J as a host, since it is not a host-parasite or host-pathology relationship that is given treatment. ) If the structure into which the implant is made is an organ, it can be coded in Field H-2, but if it is a tissue, it can not be coded in Field H-2 or I. U HOMOGENATE, BREI, OR CELL SUSPENSION OF AN ORGAN OR TISSUE OF THE TEST ORGANISM V EXTRACT OF A TISSUE OR ORGAN OF THE TEST ORGANISM W CULTURE OF A TISSUE OR ORGAN OF THE TEST ORGANISM X SLICE OF A TISSUE OR ORGAN OF THE TEST ORGANISM The organ or tissue of the definitions of these symbols is the organ or tissue speci- fically responding to the test compound and therefore coded in Field H-1 or Field I. Second use of Field G (one symbol only): EXPERIMENTAL TREATMENT OTHER THAN WITH THE TEST COMPOUND OR SECONDARY COMPOUND ANY TREATMENT (NOT PRETREATMENT) OF THE TEST ORGANISM, ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL, OTHER THAN TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND (OR OTHER THAN TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND AND SECONDARY COMPOUND) AND ACCOMPANYING THE TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND (OR ACCOMPANYING THE TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND AND SECONDARY COMPOUND). Examples are radiation, thermal, and mechanical treatments. To qualify for being coded by Symbol Z, such treatment must be considered as being in part responsible for the action coded in Field T to the degree indicated in Field Y. Symbol Z is coded in Field G-2 only. - 97 FIELD H-1 Columns 29, 30, and 31 FIELD H-2 Columns 32, 33, and 34 GROSS ANATOMICAL STRUCTURE:' ORGAN, SYSTEM, BODY AREA Field H-1: Primary anatomical structure Field H-2: Secondary anatomical structure (Consult the Key for distinctions and uses for Fields H-1 and H-2) Animal Structures; Symbols 1-- through 9-- and A- - through G- Plant Structures: Symbols H through Q. (Column 30 only)- -The organ coded in Field H-1 is the organ whose specific response to the test compound is being coded and is an organ affected by the pathology coded in Field E, but THE ORGAN which is actually IN THE PATHOLOGICAL STATE INDICATED BY FIELD E (i. e. , the organ infected by a pathogen, the organ in atrophy, the organ that is the focus of the Field E pathology, etc. ) IS CODED IN FIELD H-2. Consult the Key about Symbol * I Nervous system, in toto; neuromotor system (fibrillar system) of Ciliata; nerve net of Coelenterata 15 Central nervous system, in toto I I Brain, in toto; suprapharyngeal ganglion of Annelida; supraesophageal ganglion of Arthropoda III Cerebrum, in toto 112 Cerebral cortex 113 Corpus striatum 114 Rhinencephalon; olfactory lobe 115 Corpus callosum 116 Epithalamus 117 Thalamus 118 Hypothalamus 119 Midbrain, in toto 1 lA Cerebral peduncles (crura cerebri) IIB Corpora quadrigemina lie Hindbrain, in toto IID Cerebellum HE Pons 1 IF Medulla oblongata 1 IG Brain stem, in toto (includes the tubular portions of the hindbrain and midbrain, as well as the median portion of the forebrain) IIH Ventricles of the brain 12 Nerve cord (spinal cord); ventral nerve cord of Annelida and Arthropoda; longitudinal nerve cord of helminths 121 Spinal canal (vertebral canal) 122 Spinal fluid (For cerebrospinal fluid in toto, use Symbol 155. ) 123 Connective (e. g. , circumesophageal connective) of invertebrate systems 124 Segmental ganglion; annelid and arthropod subesophageal ganglion and other ventral ganglia 13 Peripheral nervous system (somatic nervous system), in toto (excludes autonomic nervous system. Symbol 14) 131 Cranial nerves, in toto 132 Olfactory nerve 133 Optic nerve Microanatomical structures (tissues, cells, fluids) constitute Field I. - 98 FIELDS H-1 and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 15 Central nervous system, In toto. (For parts of the central nervous system, see Symbols 11- and 12-. ) 134 Oculomotor nerve 135 Trochlear nerve 136 Trigeminal nerve 137 Abducens nerve 138 Facialis nerve (facial nerve) 139 Auditory nerve (acoustic nerve) 13A Glossopharyngeal nerve 13B Vagus nerve 13C Accessorius nerve (accessory nerve) 13D Hypoglossal nerve 13E Spinal nerves, in toto 14 Autonomic nervous system, in toto 141 Sympathetic nervous system, in toto 142 Parasympathetic nervous system, in toto 15 Central nervous sj and 12-. ) 151 Meninges, in toto 152 Dura mater, in toto 153 Arachnoid membrane, in toto 154 Pia mater, in toto 155 Cerebrospinal fluid (cephalorachidian fluid or subarachnoid fluid) 16 Specific peripheral nerve, unnamed 161 Sciatic nerve 162 Phrenic nerve 163 Femoral nerve 164 Radial nerve (17) Common nerve-organ preparations. (Use only one of the specific symbols, 17-, below.) 171 Vagus- heart preparation 172 Vagus- stomach preparation 173 Sciatic-gastrocnemius preparation 174 Phrenic-diaphragm preparation 18 Sensory nerve, unspecified 19 Motor nerve, unspecified IJ Ganglion, unspecified IJl Spinal ganglion, unspecified (1J2 through (Reserved for specific spinal ganglia) IJI) IJJ Autonomic ganglion, unspecified (IJK through (Reserved for specific autonomic ganglia) IJZ) IK Nerve plexus, unspecified XL Preganglionic fiber, unspecified IM Postganglionic fiber, unspecified 2 Sense organs 21 Eye; light receptor; eyespot; photoreceptor; stigma (exclusive of light receptors given unique symbols below, such as ocellus, 21G, and compound eye, 21H, etc.) 211 Retina; nervous tunic of eye 212 Vitreous humor 213 Aqueous humor 214 Middle (vascular) tunic of eye, in toto 215 Ciliary body, in toto 216 Ciliary muscle 217 Ciliary process 218 Iris 219 Choroid coat 21A Lens 2 1 B Cornea 21C Sclera 99 FIELDS H-1 and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 2 ID Eyelid 2 IE Conjunctiva 2 IF Nictitating membrane 133 Optic nerve 971 Extrinsic muscles of the eye, in to to 21G Ocellus 21H Compound eye 22 Ear; tympanal organ 221 External ear, in toto; pinna (auricle) and external auditory canal 222 Tympanic membrane (ear drum) 223 Middle ear, in toto 224 Eustachian tube 923 Auditory ossicles, in toto 225 Inner ear (internal ear or labyrinth) 226 Cochlea 227 Semicircular canals 228 Posterior semicircular canal 229 Superior semicircular canal 22A Lateral semicircular canal 22B Ampulla 22C Utricle 22D Saccule 22E Cochlear duct 139 Auditory nerve 23 Organ of equilibrium (balancing organ). (Use one of the specific symbols, 23-, below. ) 231 Statocyst (Crustacea) 227 Semicircular canals 256 Proprioceptor sensory nerve end organs; kinesthetic nerve end organs 24 Chemoreceptor organs. (Use one of the specific symbols, 24-, below. ) 241 Gustatory receptor; tastebuds 242 Olfactory receptors (nasal receptors of vertebrates; invertebrate receptors such as antennal olfactory receptors) 25 Mechanoreceptors (specific touch receptors, temperature receptors, pain receptors, and proprioceptors) 251 Specific touch receptor (Meissner's corpuscle) 252 Specific cold receptor (Krause's end bulb) 253 Specific heat receptor (Ruffini's end organ) 254 Specific pressure receptor (Pacinian corpuscle) 255 Pain receptor 2 56 Proprioceptors, in toto 26 Specific tactile organs (particularly of invertebrate animals) 261 Specific tactile tentacles 262 Antennae, antennule 3 Cardiovascular system 31 Heart; pulsating vessel (both vertebrate and invertebrate vascular circulatory pumps) 311 Atrium, auricle 3 ID Right auricle 3 IE Left auricle 312 Ventricle 3 IF Right ventricle 3 IG Left ventricle 31L Sinus venosus (more primitive vertebrates) 313 System of tissues conducting impulses across the heart; Bundle of His 31A Pace maker. (For a single specifically named pace maker, use Symbols 31B or 31C. Note also the structures 32M and 32N which affect cardiac pace. ) 314 Cardiac valve, including the cardiac ostial valves (pulmonary and aortic). (For a specific valve, use Symbols 3 IH, 311, 31J, or31K. ) 31H Left auriculoventricular valve (mitral valve or bicuspid valve) 311 Right auriculoventricular valve (tricuspid valve) 31J Aortic valve (semilunar aortic valve) - 100 < FIELDS H-1 and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 3 IK Pulmonary valve 315 Septum 316 Endocardium 317 Myocardium 318 Pericardium 319 Associated structures of the heart: alary muscles, suspensory ligaments; lateral vessels; diverticula of insect hearts, etc. 31A Pacemaker. (For a single specifically named pace maker, use Symbols 3 1 B or 3 IC. Note also the structures 32M and 32N which affect cardiac pace. ) 31B Atrioventricular node (= auriculoventricular node; AV node) 31C Sinus node {= sinal node; sino-atrial node; sino-auricular node) 3 ID Right auricle 3 IE Left auricle 3 IF Right ventricle 31G Left ventricle 31H Left auriculoventricular valve {= bicuspid valve or mitral valve) 311 Right auriculoventricular valve (= tricuspid valve) 31J Aortic valve (semilunar aortic valve) 3 IK Pulmonary valve 31 L Sinus venosus (more primitive vertebrates) 32 Circulatory vessel, not otherwise specified. (For specific vessels or specific vessel types, use one of the symbols below. ) 321 Aorta 322 Pulmonary vessel, not otherwise specified. (For pulmonary artery or pulmonary vein, use Symbols 32F or 32G. ) 32F Pulmonary artery 32G Pulmonary vein 323 Hepatic portal vein; hepatic portal system 321 Renal portal vein; renal portal system 324 Systemic vessel (= circulatory vessels other than the heart). (For specific vessels or specific vessel types, use one of the symbols below. ) 325 Artery; efferent blood vessel. (For specific arteries, use one of the arterial symbols below. ) 32F Pulmonary artery 32D Coronary artery 321 Aorta 327 Arteriole 326 Vein; afferent blood vessel. (For specific veins, use one of the symbols below. ) 32E Coronary vein 32G Pulmonary vein 32H Vena cava 323 Hepatic portal vein 321 Renal portal vein 327 Arteriole 328 Venule 329 Capillary 32A Lymphatic system. (For specific parts of the lymphatic system, use the symbols below. ) 32B Lymphatic vessel 344 Lymph node 32C Coronary vessel 32D Coronary artery 32E Coronary vein 32F Pulmonary artery 32G Pulmonary vein 32H Vena cava 321 Renal portal vein 32J Peripheral blood vessels (as opposed to visceral vascular bed) 32K Visceral blood vessels (as opposed to peripheral vascular bed) 32L Vessels of the extremities 32M Carotid sinus 32N Carotid body (= Carotid gland, intercarotid body, glomus caroticum) - 101 - FIELDS H-1 and H-Z Columns 29, 30, 31, 32. 33, and 34 33 Blood 331 Plasma 332 Serum 333 Erythrocyte 334 Reticulocyte 335 Leukocyte, not otherwise specified. (For specific leukocytes, use Symbols 336, 337, 338, 33B, 33C, or 33D. ) 336 Lymphocyte (of blood). (For lymphocyte of the lymph, use Symbol 3 51. ) 337 Monocyte 338 Granular leukocyte (= granulocyte). (See Symbols 33B - 33D for specific granulocytes. ) 333 Eosinophilic granulocyte 33C Basophilic granulocyte 33D Neutrophilic granulocyte 339 Platelet 33A Formed elements other than those given unique symbols 33B Eosinophilic granulocyte 33C Basophilic granulocyte 33D Neutrophilic granulocyte 34 Hematopoietic system 341 Bone marrow 342 Spleen 343 Adenoid tissue of nasopharynx (adenoids) 344 Lymph node 345 Tonsil 346 Reticulo- endothelial system 35 Lymph 351 Lymphocyte of the lymph 4 (Available for any special organ systems not already in this list) 5 Respiratory system 51 Air passage of vertebrates. (For specific parts of the respiratory tract, use the appropriate symbol below. ) 511 Nose 512 Anterior nares, nostril, respiratory pore, spiracle 513 Nasal fossa (nasal cavity); nasal air passage. (For the anterior olfactory region of the nasal fossa, use Symbol 242. ) 514 Paranasal sinus, not otherwise specified 515 Nasopharynx 62 Pharynx 343 Adenoid tissue of the nasopharynx (adenoids) 345 Tonsil 516 Larynx 517 Trachea (includes trachea of insect systems) 518 Tracheole (division of insect trachea) 519 Bronchus 51A Bronchiole 51B Alveolus (air sac) 52 Lung, in toto 53 Pleura 531 Parietal pleura 532 Visceral pleura 533 Interlobular pleura 551 Diaphragmatic pleura 54 Gill 541 External gill 542 Internal gill 543 Book gill; book lung 55 Diaphragm 551 Diaphragmatic pleura 6 Alimentary tract. (For associated glands, use symbols of series D2-. ) 102 - FIELDS H-1 and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 61 Buccal cavity (oral cavity; ostium; mouth [cavity]; osculum; cytostome; stomodeum). (This symbol is not used for oral orifices, but describes oral cavities and the walls and structures thereof. ) 611 Ups 612 Palate 613 Tongue 614 Membranelle; manubrium; velum; oral lobe; hypostome; labium 615 Proboscis; prostomium 616 Mandible; jaw (describing a mount or head area). (Do not use this symbol for the vertebrate mandibular bone, Symbol 924. ) 617 Labrum; chelicera 618 Maxilla; maxilliped; pedipalp. (Do not use this symbol for vertebrate maxillary bone. Symbol 925. ) 922 Teeth 619 Cheek (lateral wall of buccal cavity) 61A Gums 61B Salivary pump 62 Pharynx 621 Mastax (rotifers) 622 Endostyle (tunicates) 63 Esophagus (= gullet) 64 Crop; honey stomach 65 Gizzard; proventriculus 66 Stomach; ventriculus; enteron of coelenterates 661 Cardiac sphincter 662 Cardia (including cardiac sac of the rat) 663 Fundus 664 Pylorus 665 Pyloric sphincter 666 Gastric mill 67 Intestine 671 Small intestine 672 Duodenum 673 Jejunum 674 Ileum 675 Anterior intestine 676 Posterior intestine 677 Large intestine; colon 678 Cecum 679 Appendix 67A Rectum; proctodeum 67 B Anus 67C Anal sphincter 67D Cloaca 68 Peritoneum. (Use Symbol B7 1 for peritoneal cavity. ) 681 Mesentery (visceral peritoneum) 682 Parietal peritoneum 7 Excretory system 71 Kidney. (For invertebrate excretory structures, use other symbols of the 7-- series.) 711 Cortex of kidney 712 Medulla of kidney 713 Pelvis of kidney 714 Malpighian corpuscle (Bowman's capsule and glomerulus) 321 Renal portal vessel or system 715 Renal tubule 716 Proximal convoluted tubule 717 Loop of Henle 718 Distal convoluted tubule 719 Collecting tubule and duct of Bellini 72 Ureter 103 FIELDS H-1 and H-Z Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 73 Bladder (urinary) 731 Bladder sphincter 74 Urethra 75 Contractile vacuole (Protozoa) 76 Flame cell (helminths) 77 Nephridium (annelid) 78 Malpighian tubule (insects) 79 Green gland (Crustacea) 67D Cloaca 8 Reproductive system 81 Female reproductive system, in toto 811 Ovary, in toto; ovariole (egg tube) of insects CJ Graafian follicle CK Corpus luteum 814 Oviduct; fallopian tube D31 Shell gland D32 Yolk gland of helminths (= vitellaria) 815 Seminal receptacle 816 Uterus (of man); uterus (of flatworms). (For the divided uterus [cornua] of the rat, e. g. , use Symbol 817. ) 817 Uterine horn (= cornua [of the rat, e. g. ]) 818 Cervix 819 Placenta 81A Vagina 81B Vulva, external genitalia, ovipositor 67D Cloaca 810 Egg (unfertilized) 82 Male reproductive system, in toto 821 Testis; spermary; in toto 822 Interstitial cells of the testis; cells of Leydig. (Use this symbol only when this part of the testis is affected in size or form by the test compound or when it is the site of a pathology or a tumor. When the test compound specifically affects endocrine function of the interstitial cells, use Symbol CL. ) 823 Seminiferous tubule 824 Vasa efferentia (= vas efferens) 825 Epididymis 826 Vasa deferentia (= vas deferens) D41 Prostate gland 827 Seminal vesicle; male sperm storage sac. (For seminal vesicles which are totally secretory in function, as in man, use Symbol D42. ) D43 Bulbo- urethral gland D44 Para-urethral gland (= Glands of Littre) 828 Ejaculatory duct 829 Scrotum 82A Penis; cirrus (of flatworms) 82B Sperm; spermatogonium, spermatocyte, spermatid, spermatozoon 83 Ovotestis (of snails, e. g. ) 84 Accessory structures 841 Brood chamber 842 Clitellum (of earthworms) 843 Cirrus sac (of flatworms) 85 Asexual reproductive structure of animals. (Excluded are the asexually-produced bud or other immature stage itself. ) 851 Blastostyle (of the coelenterate gonangium) 86 Special structures of embryonic stages (either sexually- -or asexually--produced stages) not elsewhere in the list with other organ systems 861 Spore wall (Sporozoa) 862 Gemmule wall (Porifera) 863 Statoblast wall (Bryozoa) 864 Brood pouch of sporocysts (Trematoda) 104 FIELDS H-1 and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 9 Musculo- skeletal system (locomotor system) 91 Notochord 92 Internal skeleton (Chordata), in toto 96 External skeleton (Invertebrata), in toto 921 Skull, in toto 922 Teeth, in toto (vertebrate) 923 Auditory ossicles, in toto 924 Mandible, vertebrate 925 Maxilla, vertebrate 926 Antler; horn; in toto 927 Beak, in toto (928-92E)(Reserved for addition to the Code of bones of the skull) 92F Vertebra (92G-92I)(Reserved for vertebral parts) 92J Clavicle 92K Scapula 92L Rib 92M Sternum 93 Skeletal joint (of internal, chordate skeleton) 9K Skeletal joint of invertebrate external skeletal structures 931 Joint capsule. (For a specific ligament, use a symbol of the 95- series. ) 94 Tendon, unspecified 95 Ligament, unspecified 96 External skeleton (invertebrate supportive structure) 97 Skeletal muscle, unspecified; striated muscle, unspecified. (To be used for specific skeletal muscle organ only. The tissue defined as skeletal muscle tissue is coded in Field I. 971 Optic muscles, in toto 972 Gluteus muscle 973 Subscapularis 974 Intercostal muscles, in toto 98 Cartilage, unspecified. (To be used for specific cartilaginous organs only. The tissue defined as cartilage is coded in Field I. ) 981 Nasal cartilages, in toto 982 Costal cartilages, in toto 983 Thyroid cartilage 99 Periosteum (considered as an organ associated with a specific bone) 991 Dental periosteum (= periodontal membrane) 9J Bursa 9J1 Plantar bursa 9J2 Prepatellar bursa 9J3 Olecranon bursa 9K Skeletal joints (of invertebrate external skeletal structures) A Skin (integument) and derivatives, in toto. (This excludes actual hard, completely enveloping exoskeletal structures of arthropods, coelenterates [corals], and Protozoa [Foraminifera], e. g. , though integument tissues secreting these supportive coats are included. For the exoskeletal structures, use a symbol of the 9-- series. ) Use Symbol A to code the organism's surface, in toto. Al Skin; integument (includes simple cuticular layers and local horny skin derivatives) A2 Hair; feather; scale; spicules and spines formed of or by skin A21 Hair follicle; feather follicle D14 Sebaceous gland 922 Teeth A3 Wattle, comb (birds) A4 Nail; claw; hoof A5 Horn covering of skull appendages, beaks and horns. (For horn, in toto, use Symbol 926; for beak, in toto, use Symbol 927. ) D16 Sudoriferous gland (= sudoriparous or sweat gland) (B) Body regions. (Use Symbol A to code the organism's surface, in toto. Symbol B is used to refer to the organism's mass and surface. For example, Symbol Bl refers to the entire mass [and surface] of the head, etc. ) - 105 FIELDS H-1 and H-Z Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 Bl Head Bll Face 812 Scalp B13 Temporal region B2 Neck B21 Throat (anterior part of neck) B22 Thyroid region of neck B3 Cephalothorax (arthropods) B4 Thorax; chest B41 Supraclavicular region of thorax B42 Suprasternal region of thorax B43 Clavicular region of thorax B44 Sternal region of thorax B45 Mammary region of thorax B46 Inframammary region of thorax B47 Scapular region of thorax B5 Abdomen B51 Subcortical region; epigastric region of abdomen B52 Hypochondriac region of abdomen B6 Appendage, unspecified B61 Vertebrate fore limb; wing (vertebrate); arm; pectoral fin; fore paw; hand B62 Vertebrate hind limb; leg (vertebrate); pelvic fin; hind paw; foot B63 Tail; caudal fin B64 Arthropod leg B65 Arthropod wing B66 Parapodium (annelid) B67 Pleopod; swimmeret; arthropod abdominal appendage exclusive of tail 262 Antenna, antennule 616 Mandible in invertebrates (arthropod) 617 Labrum of invertebrates (arthropod) 618 Maxilla, maxilliped, pedipalp (arthropod) 262 Tentacle B68 Foot of molluscs B69 Arm of echinoderms B7 Body cavity, unspecified; coelom; invertebrate body cavity B71 Peritoneal cavity. Abdominal cavity. (For peritoneal membranes, use Symbol series 68-. ) B72 Pleural cavity; thoracic cavity 6 1 Buccal cavity B7 3 Pericardial cavity B8 Visceral region, unspecified (as opposed to peripheral, parietal regions) B81 Visceral region of the thorax, in to to B82 Visceral region of the abdomen, in toto B9 Parietal region of the body (as opposed to inner, visceral regions) C Endocrine gland, unspecified CI Pituitary gland (= hypophysis) Cll Anterior pituitary gland (= pars anterior) C12 Posterior pituitary gland (= pars nervosa, neurohypophysis, infundibular body) C13 Intermedia pituitary gland (= pars intermedia) C2 Adrenal gland C21 Cortical (external) adrenal gland; adrenal cortex C22 Medullary (internal) adrenal gland; adrenal medulla C3 Island of Langerhans (endocrine body of the pancreas). (For pancreas, as an exocrine gland, use Symbol D23. ) C4 Thyroid gland C5 Parathyroid gland C6 Thymus gland C7 Pineal gland; pineal body C8 Corpus allatum (insects) C9 Prothoracic gland (insects) CJ Graafian follicle 106 FIELDS H-1 and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 CK Corpus luteum CL Testicular interstitial cells; cells of Leydig. (If the test compound does not affect specifically the endocrine activity of the testicular tissue, but its size or form, code with Symbol 822. ) D Exocrine gland, unspecified DI Exocrine gland whose product is released directly to the external surface (i. e. , as opposed to an exocrine gland of the alimentary or reproductive systems) Dl 1 Mammary gland D12 Lacrimal gland; Harderian gland D13 Meibomian gland D14 Sebaceous gland D15 Ceruminous gland D16 Sudoriparous gland (= sudoriferous gland, sweat gland) D17 Poison gland (including venom glands of reptiles, even when secreted through oral fangs and orifices) D18 Silk gland; labial gland D2 Exocrine gland whose product is released into the alimentary tract D21 Salivary gland, unspecified D28 Parotid gland D22 Gastrointestinal gland D23 Pancreas (exclusive of the Islands of Langerhans) D24 Gastric cecum glands D25 Calcareus, calciferous gland D26 Digestive gland of invertebrates; "liver" of invertebrates. (Use Symbol E for vertebrate liver. ) D27 Anal gland D28 Parotid gland D3 Exocrine gland of the female reproductive system, unspecified D31 Shell gland D32 Yolk gland of helminths (vitellaria) D4 Exocrine gland of the male reproductive system, unspecified D41 Prostate gland D42 Seminal vesicle (in the case of animals such as man in which this structure is glandular rather than a sperm reservoir) D43 Bulbo-urethral gland D44 Para-urethral gland £ Liver of vertebrates El Parenchymal portion of liver 323 Hepatic portal system or vessel E2 Gall bladder E3 Bile duct E4 Sphincter of Oddi F Specialized organs; miscellaneous organs not fitting conveniently into one of the other systems Fl Luminescent organ F2 Electric organ G Embryonic structures Gl Amnion; amnionic sac G2 Chorion; chorionic sac G3 Placenta G4 Allantoic sac H Root HI Root hair H2 Adventitious root H21 Haustorium H3 Primary root; tap root H4 Secondary root; lateral root H5 Root tip H51 Root cap H52 Meristematic zone of root tip H53 Elongation zone of root tip H54 Maturation zone of root tip 107 FIELDS H-1 and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 H6 Root prlmordium I Stem; shoot (unspecified as to whether it is a main stem, branch, aerial, subterranean, or otherwise specially modified). (Use this symbol also for plants having only one of the two stem types, aerial or subterranean. See Symbols 17 and 18. ) II Node K Leaf Jl Axillary bud (or J2 or J3) 12 Internode, otherwise unspecified 121 (To be used in Field H-1 only. ) Internode below a site of local application of the test compound. (Code the plant part to which application is made [e. g. , internode, node, leaf, or branch] in Field H-2. ) 122 (To be used in Field H-1 only. ) Internode above a site of local application of the test compound; internode developed after the test compound is applied locally to a plant part or after general application (e. g. , spraying). (Code the plant part to which application is made [e. g. , internode, node, leaf, or branch] in Field H-2. ) 13 Main stem (as opposed to secondary stems branching from the main stem) 14 Secondary stem; branch 15 Terminal portion of stem (including stem tip or stem bud and young nodes and internodes) 16 Inflorescence stem (only stem structures of the flower), in toto; pedicel and receptacle, in to to 161 Pedicel (exclusive of receptacle) 162 Receptacle 17 Underground stem. (To be used only for plants which normally have both specific aerial and specific subterranean stems- -to distinguish which of these responds or is treated. See also Symbol I. ) 18 Aerial stem. (To be used only for plants which normally have both specific subterranean and specific aerial stems- -to distinguish which of these responds or is treated. See also Symbol I. ) 19 Lenticel of stem J Bud (an organization of meristematic tissue which, by formation of typical plant tissues and organs, is the focus of formation of new stems or modified stems with associated appendages)- -dormant or actively developing Jl Axillary, lateral stem bud with only leaf primordia (axillary leaf bud) J2 Axillary, lateral stem bud with only flower primordia (axillary flower bud) J3 Axillary, lateral stem bud with both leaf and flower primordia (axillary mixed bud) 14 Terminal stem bud with only leaf primordia (terminal leaf bud) 15 Terminal stem bud with only flower primordia (terminal flower bud) 16 Terminal stem bud with both leaf and flower primordia (terminal mixed bud) K Bud scale J7 Adventitious bud (a bud other than a terminal bud and other than a bud arising from a node) 171 Adventitious stem bud arising from the root J72 Adventitious stem bud arising from the leaf petiole or leaf blade 173 Adventitious stem bud arising from a stem site other than a node (e. g. , a bud arising from the tissues of old stems in which nodal and internodal distinctions have been submerged by secondary thickenings). (For an adventitious "flower bud", use Symbol J74. ) J74 Adventitious stem bud, having only one or more flower primordia, arising from a stem site other than a node K Leaf; mature, typical leaf. (Use Symbols K4 and K5 for typical seedling leaves. ) Kl Stoma and guard cell K2 Petiole; leaf stalk (exclusive of stipules); sheath (of grass leaf) K3 Leaf blade K31 Leaf tip; leaflet tip K32 Leaf margin; leaflet margin N34 Cotyledon K4 Primary leaf (= first true leaf of a seedling; first leaf above cotyledon; leaf at the first node above the cotyledon) K Typical leaf, after the primary leaf, unspecified as to whether it is second, third, etc. K5 Second true leaf of a seedling (= leaf at the second node above the cotyledon) K6 Third true leaf of a seedling (= leaf at the third node above the cotyledon) K7 Fourth true leaf of a seedling (= leaf at the fourth node above the cotyledon) - 108 - FIELDS H-1 and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 K8 Stipule K9 Bract KJ Leaf primordium KK Bud scale KL Leaf base forming a segment of a bulb (e. g. , a segment of an onion bulb). (For use with plants whose bulbs are formed of leaves whose upper parts are aerial. ) KM Leaf, in toto, forming a segment of a bulb (e. g. , a segment of a lily bulb). (For use with plants whose bulbs are formed of modified leaves [scales] that are totally subterranean and which form aerial stems usually with typical aerial leaves. ) KN (To be used in Field H-1 only. ) Leaf other than the treated leaf and unspecified as to whether it is above or below the treated leaf. (The treated leaf, Symbol K, K4, or K5, will always be coded in Field H-2 when Symbol KN is in Field H-1. ) KNl (To be used in Field H-1 only. ) Leaf below (older than) the site of local application of the test compound. (Code the plant part to which application is made [e. g. , internode, node, leaf, or branch] in Field H-2 when Symbol KNl is in Field H- 1. ) KN2 (To be used in Field H-1 only. ) Leaf above (distal to and younger than) the site of local application of the test compound. (Code the plant part to which application is made [e. g. , internode, node, leaf, or branch] in Field H-2 when Symbol KN2 is in Field H-1. ) L Flower LI Sepal U Petal L3 Stamen L3 1 Anther L32 Pollen L33 Filament L4 Pistil L41 Carpel; carpel wall; ovary L42 Ovule and placental tissue Nl Integument (also. Nil and N12) L43 Style L44 Stigma L45 Nucellus L46 Embryo sac 162 Receptacle 161 Pedicel 16 Receptacle and pedicel, in toto M Fruit 161 Pedicel Ml Pericarp Mil Exocarp M12 Mesocarp Ml 3 Endocarp N Seed Nl Integument; testa; seed coat Nl 1 Outer integument N12 Inner integument N13 Hilum N14 Mlcropyle N2 Endosperm N3 Embryo N31 Plumule N3 2 Hypocotyl N33 Radicle N34 Cotyledon; scutellum N3 5 Coleoptile (The symbols beginning with 0 are not to be used with plants of the phylum Spermatophyta. They represent structures of the gametophyte generation of more primitive plant groups. ) (0) (Structure of a gametophytic generation plant) 109 - FIELDS H-I and H-2 Columns 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34 01 Antheridium; microgametangium 011 Microgamete 02 Archegonium; oogonium; megagametangium 021 Megagamete (The symbols beginning with P are not to be used with plants of the phylum Spermatophyta. They represent structures of the sporophyte generation of more primitive plant groups. ) (P) (Structure of a sporophyte generation plant) PI Sporangium P2 Spore (of the sporophyte generation of plants) P3 Sporangiophore P4 Sporophore (Q) (Special plant structures) Ql Thallus Q2 Mycelium S Organ (plant or animal) unspecified. (This symbol is to be used in Field H-2 only, when the test compound is applied to an unspecified organ which is not the primary organ in Field H-1 and the coding in Field S-3 does not adequately indicate that the organ to which the test compound was administered is not the organ in Field H-1. ) 110 FIELD I Columns 35 and 36 TISSUES. CELLS, AND FLUIDS 1 Epithelium 11 Simple squamous epithelium 12 Endothelium {of blood vessels and heart) 13 Mesothelium (of peritoneal, pericardial, and pleural cavities) 14 Columnar epithelium 15 Cuboidal epithelium (= low columnar epithelium) 16 Glandular epithelium (= a modified columnar [or cuboidal] epithelium) 17 Pseudostratified epithelium 18 Ciliated epithelium (usually a type of pseudostratified epithelium) 19 Stratified squamous epithelium Epidermis (= stratified squamous epithelium of the skin) (19). (For plant epidermis, use Symbol 74. ) lA Stratified columnar epithelium IB Transitional epithelium IC Basement membrane of epithelial tissue ID Epithelial duct of the gland coded in Field H-1 (as contrasted to the "glandular" epithelium of the gland. Symbol 16) 2 Connective tissue, unspecified as to type 21 Fibrillar connective tissue 22 Areolar fibrillar connective tissue (= fibro-elastic) 23 White fibrous connective tissue 24 Elastic connective tissue (fibrillar connective tissue with preponderance of elastic fibers) 25 Reticular connective tissue 26 Adipose connective tissue (= fat tissue) 27 Pulp of teeth (dental pulp) 2A Fibroblast (cells forming connective tissue fibers) 2B Histiocyte (= macrophage) 20 Pigment cells of connective tissue 3 Muscle tissue, unspecified; contractile tissue 31 Skeletal muscle; striated muscle 32 Smooth muscle; visceral muscle, unspecified as to whether the fibers are arranged as oblique, longitudinal, or circular muscle 33 Longitudinal smooth muscle (fibers parallel to the longitudinal axis of the organ) 34 Circular smooth muscle (fibers encircling the long axis of the organ) 35 Oblique smooth muscle (fibers oblique to the long axis of the organ) 36 Cardiac muscle 4 Nervous tissue 41 Sensory nerve fiber; afferent nerve fiber (supplying the organ coded in Field H-1) 42 Motor nerve fiber; efferent nerve fiber (supplying the organ coded in Field H-1) 43 Preganglionic fiber (of the nerve coded in Field H-1) 44 Postganglionic fiber (of the nerve coded in Field H-1) 45 Ganglion (of the nerve coded in Field H-1) 46 White matter (= myelinated nervous tissue) of the central nervous system part coded in Field H-1 47 Grey matter (= non-myelinated nervous tissue) of the central nervous system part coded in Field H-1 48 Neuron; nerve cell 49 Nerve cell body 4A Axon (defined as a nerve cell process conducting impulses from the nerve cell body, regardless of the physical structure of the process. By this definition, all motor nerve fibers are axons. ) 4B Dendrite (defined as nerve cell process conducting impulses to the nerve cell body, regardless of the physical structure of the process. By this definition, all sensory nerve fibers are dendrites. ) 4C Nerve fiber (= nerve cell process including any sheaths) 4D Motor end plate 4E Sensory ending 4F Neuroglia 111 FIELD I Columns 3 5 and 36 4G Myelin sheath (= medullary sheath) 4H Neurilemma (= sheath of Schwann) 5 Supportive tissue, unspecified 51 Cartilage, unspecified 52 Hyaline cartilage 53 Elastic cartilage 54 Fibrous cartilage 55 Bone tissue, unspecified 56 Intramembranous bone tissue (to be used when a test compound affects this bone tissue type differently than it affects intracartilaginous bone) 57 Intracartilaginous bone tissue (to be used when a test compound affects this bone tissue type differently than it affects intramembranous bone) 58 Dentine of teeth 59 Enamel of teeth 27 Pulp of teeth 6 Body fluid, unspecified; plant fluid, unspecified 61 Extracellular fluid (= intercellular fluid; intercellular lymph); tissue juice. (Lymph: This liquid tissue, contained in lymphatic vessels, is not coded in Field I, but always in Field H as an organ. See Field H, symbol series 35-. ) (Blood: This liquid tissue and its components [plasma and cells], contained in circulatory vessels, are not coded in Field I, but always in Field H as an organ and its parts. See Field H, symbol series 33-. ) 62 Synovial fluid (= synovia) 63 Cerebrospinal fluid (to be used when the cerebrospinal fluid of a particular part of the central nervous system [coded in Field H-l] is affected. When the cerebrospinal fluid, as a whole, is affected, it is coded in Field H- 1 [Symbol 1 55]. ) 64 Secretion (product of a gland) (to be used only when a test compound affects the composition of a gland's secretion. When only the volume of secretion is affected, the effect is adequately coded by indicating increase or decrease of secretion in Field T and the gland affected in Field H-l. ) 65 Thyroid gland colloid substance 7 Plant tissues, in toto 71 Meristem 72 Sclerenchyma 73 Cortex; cortical parenchyma; collenchyma; cortical sclerenchyma 74 Epidermis; cuticle (--in leaves, unspecified as to whether it is upper or lower epidermis or cuticle or both upper and lower). (For upper or lower epidermis specifically, use Symbols 7R or 7S.) 75 "Bark". (This term is defined to include all tissues outside the cambium layer. ) 76 Pith; pith parenchyma 77 Endodermis 78 Cambium; vascular cambium. (For cork cambium, use Symbol 7E. ) 79 Pericycle 7A Xylem. (For specific xylem elements, use Symbols 7F, 7G, 71, 7M, and 7N. ) 7B Phloem. (For specific phloem elements, use Symbols 7J, 7K, 7L, 70, and 7P. ) 7C Mesophyll of leaves 7D Cork 7E Cork cambium 7F Xylem vessel 7G Xylem tracheid 7H Resin duct; latex vessel (= lactiferous duct) 71 Wood parenchyma; xylem parenchyma 7J Phloem sieve tube 7K Phloem companion cell 7L Phloem parenchyma cell 7M Primary xylem 7N Secondary xylem 70 Primary phloem 7? Secondary phloem 7Q Vascular bundle, in toto 7R Upper epidermis of leaf - 112 FIELD I Columns 3 5 and 36 7S Lower epidermis of leaf 7T Parenchyma (tissue of origin unspecified) 8 and Reserved for additional specific tissues 9 (A) Cells. The items of this symbol series (A-) are to be used to distinguish between cells differing in the characteristic specified (e. g. , dye affinity) or to distinguish particular unique cells of an organ coded in Field H. Symbol A, alone, is not intended for coding use. Al Acidophile; eosinophile A2 Basophiie A3 Neutrophile; chromophobic cell; heterophile (including "polymorphs" of blood) A4 Reticule- endothelial cell; Kupffer cell of the liver (B) Cell components and cell inclusions. Symbol B, alone, is not intended for coding use. 81 Nucleus, in toto B2 Nucleolus B3 Nucleoplasm; karyoplasm B4 Nuclear membrane B5 Cytoplasm B6 Cell membrane (protoplasmic membrane) B7 Cell wall of plants (of cellulose, lignin, etc. ) B8 Middle lamella (of plant cell wall) B9 Primary wall (of plant cell wall) BA Secondary wall (of plant cell wall) BB Plasmodesma BG Mitochondria; chondriosome BD Golgi body; Golgi apparatus BE Fibril (including neurofibril and myofibril) BE Basophiie granule; Nissl granule BG Cilium; flagellum BH Vacuole BI Intracellular fluid; cell sap BJ Secretion granule; zymogen BK Plastid (including chloroplast, leukoplast, chromoplast, and pyrenoid) C Structures (other than specific tissue types) which are components of an organ coded in Field H. CI Blood vessel C2 Capillary; capillary bed; capillary plexus C3 Artery C4 Vein C5 Lymph vessel C6 Lymphoid nodule (of a specific body area) 07 Lymphoid tissue CS Venous sinus C9 Mucous membrane CA Acinus (of the gland coded in Field H-1) CB Dermis, in toto (of the body part coded in Field H-1) D Embryonic tissue Dl Ectoderm D2 Endoderm D3 Mesoderm D4 Mesenchyme D5 Embryonic membrane, unspecified D6 Allantoic sac D7 Yolk sac D8 Amnion D9 Chorion - 113 FIELD J Columns 37, 38, 3 9. 40, 41, and 42 HOST ORGANISM OR TEST ENVIRONMENT LIVING HOSTS A64 A641 I Protozoa A64101 11 Sarcodina 111 Amoebozoa A64102 112 Foraminifera A65 113 Heliozoa A651 114 Radiolaria A65101 115 Mycetozoa 12 Ciliata 13 Sporozoa A? 14 Mastigophora A71 15 Suctoria A711 2 Porifera A7 1 1 0 1 3 Coelenterata 4 Platyhelminthes (A71102 5 Nemathelminthes through 6 Echinodermata A7 110Z) B Acanthocephala A7 1 1 1 1 C Entoprocta D Ectoprocta 7 Mollusca (A7 1 1 1 2 8 Annelida through E Echluroidea A7 1 1 IZ) F Sipunculidoldea A7U21 G Priapulidoidea 9 Arthropoda A Chordata {A7 1122 Al Petromyzones through A2 Myxini A7112Z) A3 Fish A72 A4 Amphibians A721 A5 Reptiles A72101 A6 Birds A61 Galliformes {A72102 A611 Meleagrididae through A61101 Turkey, unspecified as to variety A7211Z) (Meleagris gallopavo, breed A72121 unspecified) A612 Phasianidae (A72122 A61201 Chicken, unspecified as to variety through (Gallus domesticus, variety A72125) unspecified) A72126 A61202 White Leghorn chicken A61203 White Plymouth Rock chicken (A72127 A61204 Rhode Island Red chicken through A61205 White Wyandotte chicken A7212A) A61206 Jersey Black Giant chicken A7212B A61207 Barred Rock chicken A62 Struthioni formes A7212C A63 An seri formes A631 Anatidae A722 A63101 Duck, unspecified as to species or variety A72201 A63102 Domestic duck, unspecified as to (A72202 variety (Anas boschas, variety through unspecified) A7220Z) Columbiformes Columbidae Pigeon, unspecified as to species or variety Columba livid; pigeon Passeriformes Fringellidae Canary, unspecified as to strain (Serinus canarius, strain unspecified) Mammals Artiodactyla Bovidae Domestic cow, breed unspecified (Bostaurus, breed unspecified) (Reserved for domestic cow breeds) Domestic goat, breed unspecified (Capra hircus, breed unspecified) (Reserved for domestic goat breeds) Domestic sheep, species or breed unspecified (Ovis species, unspecified) (Reserved for domestic sheep species or breeds) Carnivora Canidae Dog (Canis domesticus, breed unspecified) (Reserved for dog breeds) Wolf, Canis nubilis, variety unspecified (Reserved for Canis nubilis varieties) Coyote, Canis latrans, variety unspecified (Reserved for Canis latrans varieties) Fox, variety and species unspecified (Urocyon species) Gray fox (Urocyon cenereoargenteus scotti) Felidae Domestic cat, breed unspecified (Fells catus, breed unspecified) (Reserved for cat breeds) - 114 FIELD J Columns 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, and 42 A73 Rodentia A7311B Osborn-Mendel A731 Muridae, unspecified A7311C Sherman A73101 Rat, unspecified as to species or A7311D Slonaker breed A7311E Sprague- Dawley A73102 Black rat, variety unspecified A7311F White (Rattus rattus, variety A731IG Wistar albino ("Wistarat") unspecified) A7311H Spotted Wistar (A73103 (Reserved for Rattus rattus A7311I Yale through varieties) A7311J Zimmerman A73109) (A7311K (Reserved for additional A7310A Norway rat, strain unspecified through varieties, strains, lines. (Mus norvegicus, variety and A7317Z} etc. , of the Norway rat) strain unspecified) A73181 Mouse, Mus musculus, strain (A7310B (Reserved for varieties and strains unspecified through of the Norway rat, Mus (A7 3182 (Reserved for varieties. A7317Z) norvegicus) through strains, and lines of Mus A7310B Norway rat, variety Albino A7 31KZ) musculus) (Mus norvegicus albinus, A73182 85 strain unspecified) A73183 89 A7310C Albino; P. Aptekman inbred A73184 101 strain (King Albino) A73I85 129 A7310D Albino mutant strain (no A73186 1194 further specification) A73187 1394 A7310E August variety (line A73188 3 CAMG unspecified) A73189 A A7310F August variety, line 990 A7318A AB (Albino- Bluhm) A7310G August variety, line 7322 A7318B ADW A7310H August variety, line 28807 A7318C AfB A7310I August variety, line 35322 A7318D A/He A7310J AxC variety (strain or line A7318E A/L (A subline Lilly) unspecified) A7318F A/x A7310K AxC variety, 9935 Hooded A7318G AK/Gl strain A7318H AK/Jax A7310L AxC variety, 9935 Irish A7318I A/Jax strain A7318J AK/M A7310M Bagg A7318K AK/N (AK-n) A7310N Buffalo A7318L AKA A731O0 Copenhagen A7318M AKR (AK, AKM, AfB, R. I. L. , A7310P Fischer variety, strain RIL) unspecified A7318N AK4 A7310Q Fischer variety, line 230 A73180 AKR/Du A7310R Fischer variety, line 344 A7318P ANOPH B A7310S Gray Norway A73180 AKR/Fu A7310T Albino waltzer A7318R AKR/Jax A7310U Black A7318S AKR/LW A7310V Blue A7318T AKR/M A7310W Chocolate A7318U BL (Bagg L) A7310X Chocolate shaggy A7318V BALB (Bagg, Bagg Albino) A7310Y Cinnamon A7318W BALB/c (B alb c, c inbred) A7310Z Curly- coated A7318X BALB/GW (Ba. inbred) A73111 Fawn A7318Y BALB/ci (BALB/Lafayette) A73112 Tawny A7318Z BCHP A73113 White shaggy A73191 BUC A73114 Yellow black eye A73192 BDP A73115 Yellow red eye A73193 BLCP (BLcp, Blcp) A73116 Heston A73194 BRS (BR-S, BR-s) A73117 Holtzman A73195 BRSUNT (Br Sunt) A73118 Hooded A73196 BTRU A73119 Long- Evans A73197 BTWB (BTwb) A7311A Marshall A73198 BUA - 115 FIELD J Columns 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, and 42 A73199 BUB A731AY A7319A BUD A731AZ A7319B C A731B1 A7319C CAF A731B2 A7319D CBA (XXXIX) A731B3 A7319E CBAf (ABC, CBAfC3H) A731B4 A7319F CBAN A731B5 A7319G CBAN-pf A731B6 A7319H CDE (cdE, DE) A731B7 A7319I CE (ce) A731B8 A7319J CFl A731B9 A7319K CFCW A731BA A7319L CFW A731BB A7319M CHI A731BC A7319N CHI-s A731BD A73190 CHI-ps A731BE A7319P C3H (Z) A731BF A73190 C3H/Andervont A7 3 1 BG A7319R C3H/KS A731BH A7319S C3H/He A731BI A7319T C3H/jFe (C3Hb) A731BJ A7319U C12I (He) A731BK A7319V C57BL (057 black) A731BL A7319W C57BL-a* A731BM A7319X C57BL-b A731BN A7319Y C57BlA A731B0 A7319Z C57BL/6KS A731BP A731A1 C57BL/10 A731BO A731A2 C57BR A731BR A731A3 C57BR/a A731BS A7 31A4 C57BR/cd A731BT A73IA5 C57L (M, L, LN) A731BU A731A6 C58 A73IBV A731A7 C58-at A731BW A7 31A8 da-ab A731BX A7 31A9 DBA (dba, dbr, D) A731BY A7 31AA DBAf A731BZ A731AB DBA/1 A731C1 A731AC DBA/2 (= DBA/21) A731C2 A7 31AD DBA/2 f A731C3 A731AE DBA/Wa A731C4 A7 31AF DBA/2 bWy A731C5 A731AG E A731C6 A731AH Edinburgh A731C7 A731AI F A731C8 A7 31AJ Flex A731C9 A7 31AK FUCFW A731CA A7 31AL G A73ICB A731AM GFF A731CC A731AN H A731CD A7 31A0 HD A731CE A731AP I A731CF A7 31AQ I-c=h A731CG A731AR IF A731CH A731AS IFS A731CI A731AT IVB A731CJ A731AU JK A731CK A731AV K A731CL A7 31AW Kink A731CM A731AX KICF A731CN KL L (LCW) Line 11 (LP) Longacre MA N NB NBT ND (MA/My) NH NIH General purpose 0 020 Leewenhoek-Huis P PBR (pBr) PK PL (PL[B]) PLA PMG RI RIET RIII RIIIfB (RIIIX) Rlll/Jax RIIl/La Rlll/Wy RF Rl S SEA/Gn-se SEA/se (Sese-Ab) SEC/dse (Sese-C) SEC/Gn-dse SEC/l-se (Sese-Cl) SEC/lOn-se SEC/2-d (Sese-C2) SEC/2 gn-d Short- tailed Snowy ST (Street) STOLI STR Strong A SWR (Swiss) TO WHL/Br (White Label) WG WHL/Kr (Kreyberg) WR XVII XXXV XLII XLV XLVIII XLIX Y YBL YBL/Rr YBL/Wi 116 - A731C0 A731CP (A73ICQ through A731KZ) A732 A73201 (A73202 through A7321Z) A733 A73301 A73302 (A73303 through A73309) A7330A A74 A741 A74101 A742 A74201 A75 A751 A75101 (A7 5102 through A7511Z) A76 A77 A771 A77101 (A77102 through A7711Z) A78 A781 A78101 B C D E F G I Jl 12 13 J4 ZR (Zr/Chase) ZRD (Reserved for additional varieties, lines, strains, etc. , of Mus musculus) Caviidae Guinea pig, variety unspecified (Cavia porcellus, variety unspecified) (Reserved for varieties and strains of Cavia porcellus) Geomyidae Hamster (Large European), variety unspecified (Cricetus cricetus, variety unspecified) Golden hamster, variety unspecified (Mesocricetus auratus, variety unspecified) (Reserved for Mesocricetus auratus varieties) Cotton rat, unspecified variety (Sigmodon hispidus, variety unspecified) Primates Hominidae Man Cercopithecidae Macaca (species unspecified) Perissodactyla Equidae Domestic horse (Equus caballus, breed unspecified) (Reserved for breeds of domestic horses) Marsupalia Lagomorpha Leporidae Domestic rabbit, breed unspecified (Oryctolagus cuniculus, unspecified) (Reserved for breeds of domestic rabbits) Insectlvora Talpidae Mole, European (Talca europaea) Acanthocephala Entoprocta Ectoprocta Echiuroidea Spiunculidoidea Priapulidoidea Thallophyta Myxothallophyta Lichens Phycomycetes Ascomycetes J5 J6 J7 JF JA IB JC ID JE JF FIELD J Columns 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, and 42 Basidiomycetes Fungi Imperfect! Fungi (otherwise unspecified) Algae (otherwise unspecified) Brown Algae (Phaeophyceae) Blue- Green Algae (Cyanophyceae) Red Algae (Rhodophyceae) Yellow -Green Algae (Chrysophyceae) Green Algae (Chlorophyceae) Algae (otherwise unspecified) (The bacteriophage hosts in this list are taken from the CBCC data sheet files and from the American Type Culture Collection, Catalog of Bacteriophages, 1957. For the ATCC numbered entries, the following items are given in sequence for each entry: the name of the host organism, its ATCC accession number, name and address of the donor, donor's designator for the host strain, his designator [in parentheses] of the phage strain, and the year deposited in the ATCC. ) IS JSl JSIl JS 1 1 0 1 JSl 102 JS1103 JS12 JSI201 JS1202 JS1203 JS2 JS3 JS4 JS41 JS4101 JS4102 JS4103 JS42 JS4201 JS4202 (JS4203 through JS4209) JS420A JS420B JS43 IS4301 Schizomycetes Pseudomonadales Pseudomonadaceae Pseudomonas, unspecified Pseudomonas aeruginosa, unspecified Pseudomonas aeruginosa, strain ClO Spirillaceae Vibrio, unspecified Vibrio comma, unspecified Vibrio sp. ATCC #11985. A. P. Krueger, U. Cal. , 1954 Chlamydobacteriales Hyphomicrobiales Eubacteriales Azotobacteraceae Azotobacter, unspecified Azotobacter vinelandii, unspecified Azotobacter vinelandii, ATCC #12518. O. Vl'yss, U. Texas. (Strain 0) 1956 Rhizobiaceae Rhizobium, unspecified Rhizobium leguminosarum, unspecified (Reserved for Rhizobium species and strains) Agrobacterium, unspecified Agrobacterium tumefaciens, unspecified Enterobacteriaceae Escherichia, unspecified - 117 - FIELD J Columns 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, and 42 JS4302 JS43 03 JS4304 JS4305 JS4306 (JS4307 through JS431F) IS431G JS431H JS431I JS431J (JS431K through JS432B) JS432C JS432D (JS432E through JS432L) IS432M JS432N JS4320 IS432P JS432Q (JS432R through JS4362) JS4371 JS4372 JS437 3 JS44 JS4401 JS4402 JS45 JS4501 JS4502 Escherichia coli, unspecified Escherichia coli, B/URBANA Escherichia coli, ATCC #11303. S. E. Luria, U. III. , Strain B (complete t phage series). 1952 Escherichia coli, ATCC #12404. I. N. Asheshov Collection, N. Y. Botanical Garden. Strain alpha (phage strain 2 and 4). 1955 Escherichia coli, ATCC #12141. I. N. Asheshov Collection, N. Y. Botanical Garden. Strain C (phage strain 5) (from J. Ward McNeal Collection). 1955 (Reserved for Escherichia coli strains) Erwinia, unspecified Erwirua amylovora, unspecified Erwinia cartovora, unspecified Erwinia aroideae, unspecified (Reserved for Erwinia species and strains) Serratia, unspecified Serratia marcescens, unspecified (Reserved for Serratia species and strains) Salmonella, unspecified Salmonella paratyphi, unspecified Salmonella Type Poona, ATCC #12177. I. N. Asheshov Collection, N. Y. Botanical Garden. (From J. Ward McNeal Collection) (2 phage strains, 1 and 2) 1955 Salmonella schottmuelleri, ATCC #12178. Same sources as above. Strain 2, 1955 Salmonella schottmuelleri, ATCC #12410. Same source as above. Strain 1, 1955 (Reserved for Salmonella species strains) Shigella, unspecified Shigella dysenteriae, unspecified Shigella dysenteriae, ATCC # 11456a. G. Bertani, U. 111. , URBANA Strain Sh (phage strain P2). 1953 Brucellaceae Pasteurella, unspecified Pasteurella pestis, unspecified Micrococcaceae Staphylococcus, unspecified Staphylococcus aureus var. aureus, unspecified JS4503 JS4504 JS46 JS4601 JS4602 JS4603 JS4604 JS4605 JS47 JS4701 JS4702 JS4703 JS48 JS4801 JS4802 JS4803 JS4804 JS5 JS51 JS5101 JS5102 JS5103 JS52 JS5201 JS5202 JS5203 Staphylococcus aureus var. aureus, Oxford H strain, #6571A Staphylococcus sp. ATCC #12145. I. N. Asheshov, N. Y. Botanical Garden. (D'Herelle Labs. , Paris). 1955 Lactobacillaceae Streptococcus, unspecified Streptococcus cremoris, unspecified Streptococcus cremoris, ATCC #11602. C. C. Prouty, Wash. State College, Pullman, Washington. Strain HP (phage strain hp). 1954 Streptococcus sp. ATCC #12164. I. N. Asheshov Collection, N. Y. Botanical Garden. (From D'Herelle Labs. , Paris) Strain 3. 1955 Streptococcus sp. ATCC #12168. Same source as above. Enterococcus strain 5/7 S. 1955 Corynebacteriaceae Corynebacterium, unspecified Corynebacterium diphtheriae, unspecified Corynebacterium sp. ATCC #12052. D. H. Howard, U. Cal. Strain DLC 842/50 (phage strain DLC 2921/49). 1954 Bacillaceae Bacillus, unspecified Bacillus megaterium, unspecified Bacillus cereus var. mycoides, ATCC #11986. A. P. Krueger, U. Cal. Strain N. 1954 Bacillus subtilis ATCC #12139. I. N. Asheshov Collection, N. Y. Botanical Garden. Strain CSC (from Commercial Solvents Corp.). 1955 Ac tinomyce tales Mycobacteriaceae Mycobacterium, unspecified Mycobacterium phlei, unspecified Mycobacterium phlei, ATCC #11728. J. M. Desranleau, Ministry of Health, Montreal, Canada. 1954 Strep tomycetaceae Streptomyces, unspecified Streptomyces griseus, unspecified Streptomyces griseus, ATCC #11984. F. Carvajal, Schenley Labs. , Laurenceburg, Ind. (Strain SL-842) 1954 118 K Bryophyta MBDl L Pteridophyta MBDIOI M Spermatophyta MA Monocotyledonae MBE MAI Pandales MBEl MA2 Helobia^ MBElOl MA3 Trluridales MBE2 MA4 Glumiflorae MBE201 MA41 Gramineae MA4 1 0 1 Zea mays (corn) MBF MA4102 Lolium perenne MBFl MA4103 Lolium multiflorum M BF 1 0 1 (MA4104 (Reserved for additional Lolium MBG through species) MBGl MA4109) MBGlOl MA410A Hordeum vulgare (barley) MBG102 (MA410B (Reserved for additional Hordeum through species) MBG103 MA410I) MA410J Avena sativa (oat) MBG104 (MA410K (Reserved for additional Avena through species) MBGIOS MA410R) MA410S Triticum aestivum (wheat) (MBG106 (MA410T (Reserved for additional Triticum through through species) MBG109) MA410Z) MBGIOA MAS Principes MBH MA6 Synanthe MBI MA7 Spathiflorae MBIl MAS Farinosae MBIlOl MA9 Liliflorae MA91 Liliaceae MBI2 MA9 1 0 1 Asparagus officinalis var. altilis (garden asparagus) MBI201 MB Dicotyledonae MB13 MBl Verticillatae MBI301 MB2 Piperales (MBI302 MB3 Salicales through MB4 Myricales MBI309) MBS Balanopsidales MBI3 0A MB6 Leitneriales (MBI30B MB7 Juglandales through MB71 Juglandaceae MBI30I) MB7101 Juglans (walnut) (species MBI3 0J unspecified) (MBI30K MBS Fagales through MB81 Fagaceae MBD OR) MB8101 Quercus (oak) (species unspecified) MBI30S MB82 Betulaceae MB8201 Alnus (alder) (species unspecified) (MBI30T MB9 Urticales through MB91 Ulmaceae MBI30Z) MB9101 Ulmus (elm) (species unspecified) MBJ MB92 Moraceae MBJl MB9201 Humulus (hop) (species unspecified) MBJIOI MBA Proteales MBJ2 MBB Santalales MBJ201 MBC Aristolochiales MBJ3 MBD Polygonales FIELD J Columns 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, and 42 Polygonaceae Rumex (dock, sorrel) (species unspecified) Centrospermae Chenopodiaceae Beta vulgaris (beet) Amarantaceae Amarantus (Amaranthus, amaranth) (species unspecified) Ranales Lauraceae Persea americana (avocado) Rhoeadales Cruciferae Brassica (species unspecified) Brassica oleracea var. gemmifera (brussels sprouts) Brassica oleracea var. capitata (cabbage) Brassica oleracea var. botrytis (cauliflower) Brassica oleracea var. italica (broccoli) (Reserved for additional species and varieties of Brassica) Raphanus sativus (radish) Sarraceniales Resales Crassulaceae Bryophyllum (Kalanchoe) (species unspecified) Saxifragaceae Ribes (currants, gooseberries) (species unspecified) Rosaceae Rubus (species unspecified) (Reserved for species of Rubus) Prunus (species unspecified) (Reserved for species of Prunus) Rosa (rose) (species unspecified) (Reserved for species of Rosa) Fragaria (strawberry) (species unspecified) (Reserved for species of Fragaria) Geraniales Geraniaceae Pelargonium (species unspecified) Linaceae Linum usitatissimum (flax) Tropaeolaceae 119 FIELD J Columns 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, and 42 MBJ301 Tropaeolum major (garden (MBYIOB nasturtium) through MBJ4 Rutaceae MBYIOI) MBJ401 Citrus (species unspecified) MBYIOJ MBJ402 Citrus limon (lemon) MBYIOK MBJ403 Citrus aurantifolia (lime) (MBYIOL MBJ404 Citrus paradisi (grapefruit) through MBJ405 Citrus sinensis (sweet orange) MBYIOS) MBJ5 Euphorbiaceae MBY2 MBJ501 Ricinus communis (castor bean) MBY201 MBK Sapindales MBKl Aceraceae (MBY202 MBKlOl Acer (maple) (species unspecified) through MBL Rhamnales MBY209) MBLl Vitaceae MBY20A MBLlOl Vitis (grape) (species unspecified) (MBY20B MBM Malvales through MBMl Malvaceae MBY20I) MBM 101 Gossypium hirsutum (cotton) MBY20J MBN Parietales (MBY20K MB0 Opuntiales through MBP Myrtiflorae MBY20R) MBQ Umbelliflorae MBY20S MBQl Umbelliferae MBOlOl Daucus carota var. sativa (carrot) MN MB0102 Apium graveolens var. dulce MNl (celery) MNU MBR Ericales MNl 101 MBS Primulales (MN1102 MBT Ebenales through MBU Contortae MNU 09) MBUl Apocynaceae MNllOA MBUlOl Vinca (perwinkle) (species (MNUOB unspecified) through MBU2 Asclepladaceae MNl 101) MBU201 Asclepias (milkweed) (species MNllOJ unspecified) MBV Tublflorae (MNl 1 OK MBVl Convolvulaceae through MBVlOl Ipomoea batatas (sweet potato) MNllOR) MBV2 Solanaceae MBV201 Lycopersicon esculentum (tomato) MBV202 Nicotiana tabacum (tobacco) (MBV203 (Reserved for species and strains through of Nicotiana) S MBV209) SI MBV20A Solanum tuberosum (potato) T MBV20B Solanum melongena var. esculentum Tl (eggplant) T2 MBW Plantaginales T3 MBX Rubiales T4 MBY Campanulatae T41 MBYl Cucurbitaceae T42 MBYlOl Cucurbita mixima (autumn squash, T43 winter squash) T44 MBY 102 Cucurbita pepo (pumpkin) T5 (MBYl 03 (Reserved for species and strains T51 through of Cucurbita) T511 MBYl 09) T52 MBYIOA Citrullus vulgaris (watermelon) T521 (Reserved for species and strains of Citrullus vulgaris) Cucumis sativus (cucumber) Cucumis melo (muskmelon) (Reserved for additional species and strains of Cucumis) Compositae Chrysanthemum frutescens (marguerite, Paris daisy) (Reserved for species and strains of Chrysanthemum) Helianthus annuus (sunflower) (Reserved for species and strains of Helianthus) Lactuca sativa (lettuce) (Reserved for species and strains of Lactuca) Xanthium (cocklebur) (species unspecified) Gymnospermae Coniferales Pinaceae Pinus (pine) (species unspecified) (Reserved for species and strains of Pinus) Abies (fir) (species unspecified) (Reserved for species and strains of Abies) Picea (spruce) (species unspecified) (Reserved for species and strains of Picea) NON-LIVING HOSTS Gaseous mixture Air Water Fresh water Sea water Brackish or Tidal water Saline solution Ringer's solution Locke's solution Tyrode's solution Ringer- Locke solution Buffer solution (unspecified) Bicarbonate buffer solutions Kreb's bicarbonate buffer solution Phosphate buffer solution Kreb's phosphate buffer solution - 120 FIELD J Columns 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, and 42 T6 T61 U Ul Ull UI2 U2 U21 U22 U3 U31 U32 U33 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 U9 V VI VI 1 VI 2 VI 3 V2 V3 V4 V5 V51 V52 V6 V61 V62 V63 V64 V65 V66 V67 W Wl W2 W4 W5 W51 W52 W53 V^'54 X Sugar solution XI Glucose solution Soil, potting media, etc. (unspecified as to composition) Gravel Washed gravel (washed with dilute acid to remove mineral nutrients) Unwashed gravel (not washed with dilute acid) XI 1 Sand Washed sand (washed with dilute acid to remove mineral nutrients) Unwashed sand (not washed with dilute acid) Loam soil Sandy loam soil Sandy soil Clay loam soil Clay soil XUl Vermiculite Perlite XI 12 Humus Compost or compost soil mixture X12 Manure Plant products Wood (timber, lumber) Bark XI 21 Heartwood Sapwood Paper Straw Latex Dried seeds (as in storage) Grains (wheat, corn, barley, rice, etc. ) Legumes (beans, peas, peanuts, XI 22 etc. ) Processed plant products X123 Rolled or cracked grain Flour or meal X2 Macaroni products Chocolate and cocoa products Tobacco products Dried fruits (raisins, prunes, etc. ) Yeast concentrates Animal products Meat and meat products X21 Eggs Animal fiber (raw hides, fur, feathers, silk) Honeycomb Processed animal products Cheese Dried milk products Egg powder X2 1 1 Leather Medium (culture medium, nutrient X212 medium) Medium prepared chiefly from natural products; includes com- plex, or ill-defined media, or media described only as "minimal" (e. g. , meat extract, broth). If the natural product is a body fluid, such as blood, use Symbol X12. Medium as in XI (exclusive of specific body fluids), but In- cluding organisms whose as- sociation (other than as a host) is essential for successful maintenance of the test organism. Use XI 1 only if the associated organism is not identified spe- cifically--as a bacterium, protozoan, or other form. Medium as in XI, with Bacteria as the associated organism Medium as in XI, with Protozoa as the associated organism Medium containing blood, serum, plasma, albumin, etc. (body or plant cavity fluids or fractions of the same) Medium as in X12, but including organisms whose association (other than as a host) is essen- tial for successful maintenance of the test organism. Use X121 only if the associated organism is not identified specifically- - as a bacterium, protozoan, or other form. Medium as inX12, with Bacteria as the associated organism Medium as in X12, with Protozoa as the associated organism Medium consisting chiefly of a mixture of essential inor- ganic compounds in water (or other non-nutritive medium); mineral nutrient solutions (plant sciences, including bacteriology) Medium as in X2, but including organisms whose association is essential for successful maintenance of the test organism. Use X21 only if the associated organism is not identified spe- cifically--as a bacterium, protozoan, or other form. Medium as in X2, with Bacteria as the associated organism Medium as in X2, with Protozoa as the associated organism 121 FIELD J Columns 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, and 42 Y Fabricated products Yl Plant, animal, or mixed origin YU Cloth Y12 Clothing (includes shoes) Y13 Upholstery Y14 Rubber goods Y2 Synthetics Y21 Plastics Y22 Film or sheet plastic Y23 Fiber or woven plastic Y3 Paint Y4 Masonry Y5 Metal Y6 Glass Z Buildings Zl Storage houses Z2 Shower rooms - 122 - FIELD K Column 43 SEX AND STAGE OF DEVELOPMENT OF THE HOST ORGANISM The code symbols for Field K (the sex and stage of development of the host in Field J) can be found by consulting Field F (pp. 88-93), since the items for the two fields are the same. Note that the Symbols S through Z are never used in Field K. 123 - FIELD L Column 44 PRETREATMENT OR EXPERIMENTAL STATE OF THE HOST ORGANISM OR OF THE ORGAN, TISSUE. OR CELL (OF THE HOST ORGANISM) WHICH IS THE SITE OF THE PARASITE, NON-INFECTIOUS PATHOLOGY, OR TUMOR CODED IN FIELD E Symbol Z only: EXPERIMENTAL TREATMENT OF THE HOST OTHER THAN TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND AND COMPOUND CODED IN FIELD D HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS EXPERIMENTALLY ADAPTED (i. e. , conditioned) to a particular environment or situation (to facilitate its acceptance of the test organism or test compound, e. g. ). Any exposure to particular environments which do not result in specific adaptations, are coded by Symbols 3 or 4. HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS PRETREATED SURGICALLY (as in the states of Symbols P, Q, and R), CHEMICALLY, BY ELECTRIC SHOCK, ETC. , but (in contrast to Symbols P, 0, and R) for any purpose other than isolation of the host and an anatomical unit. Includes staining with dyes, surgical exposure of an organ only to facilitate observation, treatment for rendering an animal host quiet or otherwise receptive to treatment with the test compound. Also, special pretreatment for making the host more receptive to introduction of an infectious organism or the chemical treatment, such as special diet, removal of hair, feathers, or scales, skin laceration, etc. HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS EXPOSED TO AN ABNORMAL PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL ENVIRONMENT, preparatory for or during the test, to which adaptation is not intended. (Included are high atmospheric pressures, changes in 0^:002 ratio, temperature changes, changes in gravitational pull, anaerobic culture conditions, etc. ) For radiation exposure, use special Symbol 4. When the host has become adapted to such an environment (prior to the test), Symbol 1 must be used rather than Symbol 3. HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS EXPOSED TO RADIATION which is not intended as treatment or part of the treatment for the parasite or pathology or tumor coded in Field E. If radiation is administered as part of the treatment of the host instead of a pretreat- ment (i. e. , administered with the test compound so that both the chemical and radiation factors are expected to be responsible for the response coded in Field T), Symbol Z must be used. HOST IS EXPERIMENTALLY OR NATURALLY INFECTED or parasitized with an organism other than the parasitic or infectious organism specifically treated by the test compound, or in addition to the non-infectious pathology or tumor being specifically treated. (For non-infectious pathological states of the host, other than the pathology or tumor coded in Field E, use Symbol 7, B, C, D, or E). If this incidental infection is restricted to a single organ, use Symbols N or 0. HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) HAS BEEN MADE SENSITIVE OR HYPERSENSITIVE to the test compound. (For a host strain sensitive to the test compound, use Symbol H. Use Symbol J for the state of induced resistance to the test compound. ) HOST IS IN AN EXPERIMENTAL PATHOLOGICAL STATE other than the pathology coded in Field E and not otherwise specified by special symbols--5 (infectious disease), B (hormone deficiency), C (hormone excess), D and E (dietary deficiencies), P (loss of an anatomical part), and S (bearing an implant). Symbol 7 is used for all other non-infectious pathologies (other than the pathology in Field E), including spontaneous tumors (but not implanted tumors). Also, it includes general experimental stress either brought about by administration of excesses of a specific material (e. g. , H2O, salt, CO^, etc. ), or removal of an organ (to be described in the written 124 FIELD L Column 44 D abstract and not coded in Field H-2), etc. , or a natural or unspecified physiological stress. (If the host has had removed from it an organ for any purpose other than to produc ; stress, the condition is coded by Symbol P. ) If the pathology of Field E is specifically of an organ or tissue (coded in Field H-1 or I) and that structure has a second pathological state, use Symbol N or S. If the host has an organ or tissue, other than the organ or tissue site of the pathology (therefore, not coded in Field H-1 or I) which is in a pathological state different from the path- ological state coded in Field E, use Symbol 0 and, if the structure in this secondary pathological state is an organ, code It in Field H-2 (if it is a tissue, it can not be coded In Field I). HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS IN AN INACTIVE STATE; e. g. , hypnosis, estivation, diapause, dormancy, bacterial resting stage, hibernation. PARABIOTIC PARTHENOGENETIC HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS HORMONE DEFICIENT (the deficiency not being the condition treated). Symbol B has priority over Symbol P in Field L and is used for any experimental hormone deficiency. When an endocrine gland is extirpated to produce the hormone deficient state (when the deficiency is not a condition being treated), code the gland removed or modified in Field H-2. This includes situations in which the hormone deficiency is relative only to the developmental state of the host being treated with the test compound. HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) HAS A HORMONE EXCESS (the excess not being the condition treated). This includes situations in which the excess is rela- tive only to the developmental stage of the host being treated with the test compound, HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS DEFICIENT IN ONE OR MORE VITAMINS, ONE OR MORE MINERALS, ONE OR MORE SPECIFIC NUTRIENTS, OR WATER. (The symbol is not used for general deficiency in nourishment. See Symbol E. ) Symbol D is used to code incidental dietary deficiencies of normal host organisms. It is not a device for indicating that the host is a special strain which can not synthesize the nutrient, vitamin, or inorganic compound. Any special strain, such as one dependent on exogenous nutrient or vitamin sources, is indicated by Symbol F. HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS UNDERNOURISHED; generally deficient in nutrients; fasted, deficient in caloric intake. For the deficiency of a specific essential dietary component, use Symbol D. HOST IS OF A SPECIAL STRAIN, selected, adapted, derived, mutant. (This excludes those special strains for which are provided the specific symbols, G, H, I, or Y below. It also excludes designation of taxonomic strains which have been adequately distinguished by special host symbols in Field J. Symbol F (and Symbols G, H, I and Y) are used only to designate physio- logical strains not distinguished by a unique strain name in Field J. (See also the Key, Specific Directions and Explanations, Division 9. ) H HOST IS OF A STRAIN RESISTANT TO THE TEST COMPOUND, (Use Symbol J for an individual host organism, of a non-resistant strain, made resistant by prior exposure to the test compound. ) A strain resistant to the test organism is indicated by Symbol Y. HOST IS OF A STRAIN SENSITIVE TO THE TEST COMPOUND. (Use Symbol 6 for an individual host organism, of a non-resistant strain, sensitized to the test compound by previous exposure. ) HOST IS OF A STRAIN DEPENDENT ON THE TEST COMPOUND. Use Symbol F for an organism of a strain > resistant to, sensitive to, or dependent on compounds other than the test compound HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY), IS OF A NON-RESISTANT STRAIN AND IS MADE RESISTANT TO (I. E. , TOLERANT OF) THE TEST COMPOUND. (Use Symbol 6 for the state of sensitization to the test compound. For a resistant strain, use Symbol G). A host made resistant to the test organism is indicated by Symbol Y. 125 FIELD L Column 44 K PREGNANT L VIRGIN M HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) IS CONGENITALLY ABNORMAL. N ORGAN OR TISSUE OF THE HOST (SPECIFIED IN FIELD H-1 OR I AS THE SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY OR TUMOR BEING TREATED) IS IN A PATHOLOGICAL STATE other than the pathological state being treated (specified in Field E). Use of this symbol includes indication of physiological stress on the organ when this stress is not a condition being treated by the test compound; e. g. , the removal of one of a pair of organs of the host, or part of an organ, or an entire organ, or any other special pretreatment to produce the exaggerated condition of in situ experimental stress of an organ specified in Field H-1 or of the tissue specified in Field I. The description of the specific treatment to produce stress is not coded (e. g. , the organ removed to produce stress is not coded in Field H-2, but it is included in the written abstract). The symbol is used only if that secondary pathology or infectious organism which is not being specifically treated is restricted to that organ or tissue or if the organ or tissue is excised (indicated by Symbol R in Field G-1, placing Symbol N in Field G-2); if the secondary pathology is more general and the organ or tissue is in situ, use Symbol 5 or 7. 0 ORGAN OF THE HOST (TO BE SPECIFIED IN FIELD H-2 AS AN ORGAN OTHER THAN THE SPECIFIC SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY BEING TREATED, IN FIELD H-1) IS IN A PATHOLOGICAL STATE OTHER THAN THE PATHOLOGICAL STATE BEING TREATED (SPECIFIED IN FIELD E). This includes the state of experimental physiological stress on an organ (Field H-2) other than the site of the pathology being treated (Field H-1), when this stress is not a condition being treated by the test compound. (Symbol N indicates stress on the organ in Field H-1. ) This symbol is used only if the secondary pathology is confined to an organ; if the secondary pathology is more general, Symbol 5 or 7 will be used and nothing will be coded in Field H-2. P HOST (CONSIDERED AS A WHOLE) HAS HAD REMOVED- -PRIOR TO INFECTION OR PRIOR TO THE TEST- -AN ORGAN, TISSUE. OR FLUID, FOR ANY REASON OTHER THAN SERVING AS A PART OF THE TREATMENT FOR THE PATHOLOGY CODED IN FIELD E. (The organ removed from the host is not a specific site of the pathology and is therefore coded in Field H-2. ) Symbol B is used if an endocrine gland is removed to produce a hormone deficiency. Symbol P is not used to indicate removal of an organ to produce experimental stress on the organism; this can be indi- cated only by Symbol 7. If the removal of an organ is part of the treatment of the pathology in Field E, of which the test compound treatment represents the other part, never use Symbol P, but only Symbol Z. Q ORGAN OR TISSUE OF THE HOST, IN SITU (SPECIFIED IN FIELD H-1 AS THE ORGAN OR IN FIELD I AS THE TISSUE WITH THE INFECTION OR PATHOLOGY TREATED WITH THE TEST COMPOUND) ISOLATED IN SOME SPECIFIC WAY FROM THE HOST ORGANISM (denervation, circulatory obstruction, etc. ), isolated from the material it normally processes, surgically altered solely for the facility of observation, or isolated from one of its tissue components, etc. See the Key for a discussion of uses of Symbols 2, P, Q, R, and B. R ORGAN, TISSUE, OR FLUID OF THE HOST, EXCISED (specified in Field H- 1 or I as the organ or tissue in the pathological condition coded in Field E), isolating it from influences of all other factors of the host organism, and maintained in a "secondary, non-living host" (saline bath, nutrient medium, perfusate, etc. ) described in the written abstract. S HOST (OR ORGAN OR TISSUE SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) HAS AN ORGAN OR TISSUE (EITHER NORMAL OR PATHOLOGICAL) INCIDENTALLY IMPLANTED IN IT, but this implant is not the pathology being treated nor is it part of the treatment for the pathology coded in Field E. (E. g. , rats with a tumor implant are treated with a candidate anthelmintic [coded as the test compound] for tapeworm prophylaxis. The tumor implant would be indicated better by Symbol S than by Symbol 7. ) Excluded are situations when the implant is an endocrine gland implanted in the host to produce a hormone excess (Symbol C) or an organ implanted to produce special stress (Symbol 7, N, or 0). Such an implant can be coded in Field H-2, if it is an organ; if It is a tissue or a tumor, it can not be coded, but should be included in the written abstract. The site of implant can not be coded, but should also be included in the written abstract. 126 FIELD L Column 44 THE HOST ORGANISM IS IN A SECONDARY HOST ORGANISM OR NON-UVING SECONDARY HOST, described in the written abstract. If a plant is the host and is maintained in an artificial medium or water, e. g. , instead of its usual soil, indicate it by use of Symbol T rather than by Symbol 3. (Symbol T is never used to indicate that a specific organ or tissue [site of the pathology] has been transplanted to a secondary host. ) U HOMOGENATE, BREI, OR CELL SUSPENSION OF AN ORGAN OR TISSUE OF THE HOST. V EXTRACT OF A TISSUE OR ORGAN OF THE HOST. W CULTURE OF A TISSUE OR ORGAN OF THE HOST. X SLICE OF A TISSUE OR ORGAN OF THE HOST. The organ or tissue of the definitions of these symbols is the organ or tissue speci- fically the site of the parasite, non-infectious pathology, or tumor and therefore is coded in Field H-1 or I. HOST HAS PARTIAL RESISTANCE TO THE TEST ORGANISM due to previous exposure or due to being a strain that has more resistance than other strains of the species. (Use Symbol G for strains resistant to the test compound and Symbol J for individual host organisms made resistant to the test compound. ) Second use of Field L (one symbol only): EXPERIMENTAL TREATMENT OF THE HOST OTHER THAN WITH THE TEST COMPOUND OR SECONDARY COMPOUNDS ANY TREATMENT OF THE HOST (OR ORGAN, TISSUE, OR CELL SITE OF THE PATHOLOGY) AGAINST THE PARASITE, NON-INFECTIOUS PATHOLOGY, OR TUMOR CODED IN FIELD E, OTHER THAN TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND (OR OTHER THAN TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND AND SECONDARY COMPOUND) AND ACCOMPANYING THE TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND (OR ACCOMPANYING THE TREATMENT WITH THE TEST COMPOUND AND SECONDARY COMPOUND). Examples are radiation, thermal, and mechanical treatments and administration of anti-toxins specific for the test organism, etc. To qualify for being coded by Symbol Z, such treatment must be considered as in part responsible for the action coded in Field T to the degree coded in Field Y. 127 FIELD M Columns 45 and 46 DOSAGE (CONCENTRATION COMPONENT) UNIT OF UNIT OF m: EASURE QUANTITATIVE VALUE MEASURE QUANTITATIVE VALUE Column 45 Column 4b Column 45 Column 46 1 Parts per 1 < . 04 7 % satura- 1 <10 million 2 . 04 thru . 2 tion 2 10 thru 20 (ppm = 3 >. 2 thru 1 3 >20 thru 30 (Do not mg /liter, 4 > 1 thru 5 4 >30 thru 40 use grid y/cc. 5 >5 thru 25 5 >40 thru 50 with this g/1000 liter, 6 >25 thru 125 6 > 50 thru 60 seal e) M-g/ml, , 1 X 10- , 7 >125 thru 625 7 >60 thru 70 8 >625 thru 2 , 525 8 >70 thru 80 v/g) 9 >2, 525 9 0 >80 thru >90 thru 90 100 2 Molar Con- 1 < 10-"? centration 2 lO-'? thru 10-6 8 Milli- 1 < 1. 56 (M)--or-- 3 >10-6 thru 10-5 grams 2 1. 56 thru 3. 12 Milli- 4 >10-5 thru 10-4 per 3 >3. 12 thru 6. 25 moles/cubic 5 >10-4 thru 10-3 liter 4 >6. 25 thru 12. 5 centimeter 6 >10-3 thru 10-2 of air 5 > 12. 5 thru 25 (mM/cc) 7 >10-2 thru 10-1 (mg/1) 6 >25 thru 50 --or-- 8 >10-1 thru 1 7 >50 thru 100 3 Molal con- centration 9 > 1 8 9 >100 >200 thru 200 4 Per cent 1 <. 1 300001% 9 Nor- 1 < lO-'^ weight or 2 >. 000001 thru 30001 mality 2 10-'^ th ru 10-6 volume; 3 >. 00001 thru 3001 (N) 3 >10-6 thru 10-5 also 4 >. 0001 thru 001 4 >10-5 th ru 10-4 g/100 cc 5 >. 001 thru 01 5 >10-4 thru 10-3 6 >. 01 thru 1 6 >10-3 thru 10-2 7 >. 1 thru 1 7 >10-2 thru 10-1 8 > 1 thru 10 8 >10-1 th ru 1 9 >10 thru 100 9 > 1 5 Pounds/100 1 < . 39 A Micro 1 <. 001 gallons 2 . 39 thru 65 curies 2 001 thru . 01 (lbs/100 3 >. 65 thru 1. 09 per 3 > . 01 thru . 1 gal.) 4 >1.09 thru 1. 81 milliliter 4 > . 1 thru 1 5 >1.81 thru 3. 02 (n curies/ 5 >1 thru 10 6 >3.02 thru 5. 04 ml) 6 > 10 thru 100 7 >5. 04 thru 8. 4 7 > 100 thru 1, , 000 8 >8. 4 thru 12 8 > 1, 000 thru 10, , 000 9 >12 9 >!0, 000 6 Units/milli- 1 <.01 B mg/ml 1 <. 00001 liter 2 . 01 thru . 1 2 .00001 thru . 0001 (units/ml) 3 >. 1 thru 1 3 >.0001 thru . 001 4 > 1 thru 10 4 >. 001 thru . 01 5 >10 thru 100 5 >. 01 thru . 1 6 > 100 thru 1, 000 6 >. 1 thru 1 7 > 1, 000 thru 10, 000 7 > I thru 10 8 > 10, 000 thru 100, 000 8 > 10 thru 100 9 > 100, 000 9 >I00 thru 1, 1 300 128 I FIELD M Columns 45 and 46 Column 46: Symbol (= 12 zone punch) The dosage is in terms of the biologically active portion of the molecule. (= 1 1 zone punch) (a) When Field J is coded: The dosage coded is not the dosage administered to the host, but is the dose to which the test organism is exposed. (b) When Field J is not coded: The dosage coded is not the dosage administered to the test organism, but is the dosage to which the organ or tissue of the test organism is exposed. (= 0 zone punch) Only when Field J i_s coded (with symbols other than S through Z in Column 37): The dosage coded is not the dosage administered to the host but is the dose to which the organ or tissue of the test organism is exposed. 129 FIELD N Columns 47 and 48 DOSAGE (QUANTITY COMPONENT) UNIT OF UNIT OF MEASURE QUANTITATIVE VALUE MEASURE QUANTITATIVE VALUE Column 47 Column 48 Column 47 Column 48 1 Micro- 1 <0. 012 9 Microliters 1 <1 grams 2 0. 012 ; thru 0. 036 per square 2 1 thru 1 2 (tig) 3 >0. 036 > thru 0. 11 centimeter 3 >2 thru 1 4 (y) 4 >0. 11 thru 0.33 (|al/sq cm) 4 >4 thru 1 8 5 >0. 33 thru 1 5 >8 thru 1 16 6 > 1 thru 3 6 > 16 thru 1 32 7 >3 thru 9 7 >32 thru 1 64 8 >9 thru 27 8 >64 thru 1 128 9 >27 thru 81 9 >128 2 Milli- 1 > 0.081 thru 0.243 A Micro- 1 <0. 04 grams 2 >0. 243 thru 1 liters 2 0. 04 thru 0. 2 (mg) 3 >1 thru 3 per 3 >0.2 thru 1 --or-- 4 >3 thru 9 kilogram 4 > 1 thru 5 3 Micro- 5 >9 thru 27 (fil/kg) 5 >5 thru 25 liters 6 >27 thru 81 6 >25 thru 125 (ill) 7 >81 thru 243 7 >125 thru 62 5 8 >243 thru 729 8 >625 thru 2 , 525 9 >729 thru 2, 187 9 >2, 525 4 Grams 1 2 thru 4 B cc/ft^ 1 < . , 03 (g) 2 >4 thru 8 (soil. 2 . 03 thru , 087 --or-- 3 >8 thru 1 6 etc. ) 3 >. 087 thru , 261 5 Milli- 4 >16 thru 32 g/ft^ 4 >. 261 thru , 782 liters 5 >32 thru 64 5 >. 782 thru 2, , 35 (ml) 6 >64 thru 128 6 >2. 35 thru 7, , 04 7 >128 thru 2 56 7 >7. 04 thru 21, . 12 8 >256 thru 512 8 >21. 12 thru 63, . 34 9 >512 9 >63. 34 6 Milligrams 1 <0. 04 C Pounds 1 CO. 036 per kilo- 2 0. 04 thru 0. 2 per acre 2 . 036 thru 0. 11 gram 3 >0. 2 thru 1 (lbs/acre) 3 >. 11 thru 0. 33 (mg/kg) 4 >1 thru 5 4 >. 33 thru 1 (= Micro- 5 >5 thru 25 5 >1 thru 3 grams 6 >25 thru 125 6 >3 thru 9 per gram 7 >125 thru 62 5 7 >9 thru 27 [(xg/gj) 8 9 >625 >2, 525 thru 2, 52 5 8 9 >27 >81 thru 81 7 Micrograms 1 <0. 06 D Gallons 1 <0. 33 per square 2 0. 06 thru 0. 25 per acre 2 . 33 thru 1 centimeter 3 >0. 2 5 thru 1 (gal/acre) 3 >1 thru 3 (|ig/sq cm) 4 > 1 thru 4 4 >3 thru 9 --or-- 5 >4 thru 16 5 >9 thru 27 8 Milligrams 6 > 16 thru 64 6 >27 thru 81 per square 7 >64 thru 256 7 >81 thru 243 foot (mg/sq ft) 8 9 >256 > 1,024 thru 1,024 8 9 >243 >729 thru 7 '29 130 FIELD N Columns 47 and 48 UNIT OF UNIT OF MEASURE QUANTITATIVE VALUE MEASURE QUANTITATIVE VALUE Column 47 Column 45 i Column 47 Column 48 E Units 1 < . 01 I Mols 1 <. 000001 2 01 thru 1 2 . 000001 thru . 00001 3 > . 1 thru 1 3 >. 00001 thru . 0001 4 > 1 thru 10 4 >. 0001 thru . 001 5 > 10 thru 100 5 >. 001 thru . 01 6 > 100 thru 1, 000 6 >. 01 thru . 1 7 > 1, 000 thru 10, 000 7 >. 1 thru 1 8 > 10, 000 thru 100, 000 8 > 1 thru : 10 9 >100, 000 9 > 10 F Units/gram 1 <. ( 301 J Micro- 1 <. 001 (units/g) 2 . 001 thru . ( Dl curies 2 .001 thru . 01 --or-- 3 >. 01 thru 1 (ji curies) 3 >. 01 thru . 1 G Units per 4 > . : 1 thru 1 4 >. 1 thru 1 kilogram 5 >i thru 10 5 >1 thru 10 (units/kg) 6 > 10 thru 100 6 >10 thru 100 7 > 100 thru 1, 000 7 > 100 thru 1, 000 8 > 1, 000 thru 10, 000 8 > 1, 000 thru 10, 000 9 >10, 000 9 > 10, 000 H Millimols 1 <. 04 per 2 . 04 th ru . 2 kilogram 3 >. 2 th ru 1 (mM/kg) 4 5 6 7 >1 >5 >25 > 125 th th th th ru ru ru ru 5 25 125 62 5 8 >625 thru 2, 52 5 9 >2. 525 Column 48: Symbol (= 12 zone punch) The dosage is in terms of the biologically active portion of the molecule. (= 1 1 zone punch) (a) When Field J i_s coded: The dosage coded is not the dosage administered to the host, but is the dose to which the test organism is exposed. (b) When Field J is not coded: The dosage coded is not the dosage administered to the test organism, but is the dosage to which the organ or tissue of the test organism is exposed. (= 0 zone punch) Only when Field I is coded (with symbols other than S through Z in Column 37): The dosage coded is not the dosage administered to the host but is the dose to which the organ or tissue of the test organism is exposed. 131 FIELD O Column 49 (1) DOSAGE FREQUENCY (2) SEQUENCE OF ADMINISTRATION OF THE SECONDARY COMPOUND AND THE TEST COMPOUND 1 Single administration, when a continuous supply to the test organism is not insured. (No entry in Field P. ) 2 Single administration, when a continuous supply to the test organism is insured. (Duration of application of the dose is specified in Field P. ) Ad libitum administration. (Consult the Key for a discussion of the use of Symbol 2. ) 3 Repeated doses at intervals more frequent than specified below. (Duration of treatment specified in Field P. ) 4 Hourly administration of the dose in Field M and/or N. (Duration of treatment specified in Field P. ) 5 Three-times-daily administration of the dose in Field M and/or N. (Duration of treatment specified in Field P. ) 6 Twice-daily administration of the dose in Field M and/or N. (Duration of treatment specified in Field P. ) 7 Daily administration of the dose in Field M and/or N. (Duration of treatment specified in Field P. ) 8 Every-other-day administration of the dose in Field M and/or N. (Duration of treatment specified in Field P. ) 9 Every-three-days, or less frequent, administration of the dose in Field M and/or N. (Duration of treatment specified in Field P. ) II 0 Test compound given before the secondary compound. (The time period is specified in Field P and the secondary compound is specified in Field D. ) # Test compound given after the secondary compound. (The time period is specified in Field P and the secondary compound is specified in Field D. ) * Test compound given simultaneously with the secondary compound. (The secondary compound is specified in Field D. No entry is made in Field P, unless one of Symbols 1 through 9 is also coded in Field O, in which case Field P is coded with the duration of treatment with the test compound. ) 132 DURATION OF TREATMENT -or- TIME BETWEEN ADMINISTRATION OF THE TEST COMPOUND AND A SECONDARY COMPOUND FIELD P Columns 50 and 51 Scale 1 Scale 2 Scale 3 1 < 0. 5 seconds 2 0. 5 thru 1. 3 > 1. thru 2. 4 >2. thru 4. 5 >4. thru 8. 6 >8. thru 16. 7 >I6. thru 32. 8 >32. thru 64. 9 >64. 1 <2 seconds 2 2 thru 4 3 >4 thru 8 4 >8 thru 16 5 > 16 thru 32 6 >32 thru 64 7 >64 thru 140 seconds 8 >140 thru 5 minutes 9 >5 minute IS Scale 6 16 thru < 16 seconds 32 3 >32 thru 64 4 > 64 thru 140 seconds 5 > 140 thru 5 minutes 6 > 5 thru 10 7 > 10 thru 20 8 >20 thru 45 9 > 45 minutes Scale 7 Scale 8 1 <45 minutes 2 45 thru 90 minutes 3 > 90 thru 3 hours 4 >3 thru 6 5 >6 thru 12 6 > 12 thru 24 7 >24 thru 48 8 >2 thru 4 days 9 >4 days 1 <6 hours 2 6 thru 12 3 > 12 thru 24 4 >24 thru 48 5 >2 thru 4 days 6 >4 thru 8 7 >8 thru 16 8 >16 thru 32 9 >32 days 1 <24 hours 2 24 thru 2 days 3 >2 thru 4 days 4 >4 thru 8 5 >8 thru 16 6 >16 thru 32 7 >32 thru 2 months 8 >2 thru 4 months 9 >4 months < 64 seconds 2 64 thru 140 seconds 3 > 140 thru 5 minutes 4 >5 thru 10 Scale 4 5 > 10 thru 20 6 >20 thru 45 7 >45 thru 90 8 >90 thru 3 hours 9 >3 hours 1 < 10 minutes 2 10 thru 20 3 >20 thru 45 4 >45 thru 90 minutes Scale 5 5 >90 thru 3 hours 6 >3 thru 6 7 >6 thru 12 8 >12 thru 24 9 >24 hours Scale 9 Scale A 8 thru <8 days 16 3 > 16 thru 32 days 4 >32 thru 2 months 5 >2 thru 4 6 >4 thru 8 7 >8 thru 16 8 >16 thru 32 9 > 32 months 1 Several seconds 2 Several minutes 3 Several hours 4 Several days 5 Several months 133 FIELD Q Column 52 SIZE OF INOCULUM OR IMPLANT Number of cells -or- number of larvae or number of individuals of any parasitic stage of the implanted test organism Number of cells Symbol or individuals 1 <10 2 10 thru 10^ 3 >102 thru 10^ 4 >103 thru 104 5 >104 thru 10^ 6 >10^ thru 10^ 7 > 106 thru lO'^ 8 > lo'^ thru 108 9 >108 1 < 10 2 10 thru 100 3 > 100 thru 1, 000 4 > 1, 000 thru 10, 000 5 > 10, 000 thru 100, 000 6 > 100, 000 thru. . . 1, 000, 000 7 > 1, 000, 000 thru. . 10, 000, 000 8 > 10, 000, 000 thru. 100, 000, 000 9 > 100, 000, 000 134 - FIELD R Column 53 TIME OF TREATMENT RELATIVE TO: (1) INOCULATION (2) TUMOR IMPLANTATION (3) SENSITIZATION (4) INCITATION OF NON- INFECTIOUS PATHOLOGY Administration of the test compound occurs (single dose) or begins (multiple or continuous dose[s]): 1 at the same time as infection, tumor implantation, inoculation, sensitization, or initiation of a test. (This includes any time up to [but not including] one hour after infection, etc. ) 2 1 thru 24 hours after Infection, etc. 3 >24 thru 48 hours after infection, etc. 4 >2 thru 3 days after infection, etc. 5 > 3 thru 4 days after infection, etc. 6 >4 thru 5 days after infection, etc. 7 > 5 thru 6 days after infection, etc. 8 >6 thru 7 days after infection, etc. 9 >7 thru 8 days after infection, etc. A >8 days after infection, etc. B after infection, etc. , but time not specified in the data. Administration of the test compound is discontinued after infection and occurs (single dose) or ends (multiple or continuous dose[s]): 1 at the same time as infection, tumor implantation, inoculation, sensitization, or initiation of a test. (This includes any time up to [but not including] one hour before infection, etc. ) C 1 thru 24 hours prior to infection, etc. D >24 thru 48 hours prior to infection, etc. E >2 thru 3 days prior to infection, etc. F >3 thru 4 days prior to infection, etc. G >4 thru 5 days prior to Infection, etc. H > 5 thru 6 days prior to infection, etc. I >6 thru 7 days prior to infection, etc. J >7 thru 8 days prior to infection, etc. K >8 days prior to infection, etc. L prior to infection, etc. , but time not specified in the data. Administration of the compound occurs or begins: M prior to infection and continues after infection, etc. (The time prior to and after infection is not further considered with this symbol. ) 135 FIELD S-1 FIELD S-2 FIELD S-3 Columns 54, 55, and 56 ROUTE AND MANNER OF ADMINISTRATION OF: (1 ) INOCULUM OR IMPLANT (FIELD S- 1 ) (2) SECONDARY COMPOUND (FIELD S-2) (3) TEST COMPOUND (FIELD S-3) Any symbol of this list not otherwise marked may be used for coding Field S-1, Field S-2, or Field S-3. Certain symbol definitions relate in a specific manner to Fields S-2 and S-3 and those are designated in each case by a separate definition for Field S-1 (Symbols 8, B, E, G, J, and R) or by a notation that the symbol as it is defined is not applicable to Field S-1 (Symbols C and M). FIELD S-3 ONLY: Certain of the items of this list can employ Field H-2 to indicate more speci- fically the route of the test compound. In the case of each of these items with which Field H-2 is used, this is indicated at the end of that definition. (There is no similar way by which the manner of admin- istration can be more specifically coded, except that the information about the state of the test compound coded in Field A often contributes to an understanding of the coded manner of administration. However, none of the symbols of Field S-3 make special reference to coding in Field A. This is discussed in Division 4 of the section on Specific Directions and Explanations for Field S-3, in the Key. ) Note that certain of the symbols (0, 1 through 9, A through I, P and Q, and S through Z) represent routes and methods of application directly to the organism or some part of the organism. Symbols J through 0 and Symbol R represent methods by which application is to the environment as well as, or instead of, to the organism so that the organism receives- -or may receive- -all or part of the material from the environment (with the possible exception of Symbol L, since the organism in that case is removed from the treated environment). This latter method most frequently permits less control of the quantity the organism receives, but often represents a more natural method for evaluation of the chemical for use in practical field application. When the words "dose" and "compound" (or "chemical") appear in these definitions, they should be interpreted, for Field S-2, as "dose of the secondary compound" and, for Field S-3, as "dose of the test compound"; for Field S-1, however, substitute "quantity of" and "inoculum" for the expressions "dose of" and "compound". Parenteral. (Any manner of administration by parenteral route. ) This symbol is to be used only when the parenteral route is not more specific, such as intravenous, subcutaneous, etc. (Opposed to parenteral are the enteral [alimentary tract] routes. Symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, and T. ) Oral route, method unspecified. (For specific methods of oral administration, see Symbols 2 and 4. For other enteral routes, use Symbol 3 or T. ) Oral route, administration of a measured dose by feeding or placing in the oral cavity the free compound, undiluted or mixed with food or other materials. (For administration techniques whereby the compound is not free to contact the oral parts, use Symbol 3. For unmeasured doses by either oral method, use Symbol 4. ) Postoral enteral route by which is administered a measured dose by by-passing the oral cavity; examples; stomach tube, capsule (even when the capsule is taken orally and voluntarily swallowed), duodenal tube, or other means (including surgical) of introduction into a specific part of the alimentary lumen (except by anal approach, Symbol T). (Use Symbol 3 also for injection of a measured dose into the lumen of an exteriorized intestinal loop. ) (For unmeasured doses, use Symbol 4. ) Field S-3: Field H-2 may be used to specify the part of the alimentary 136 - FIELDS S-1. S-2, and S-3 Columns 54, 55, and 56 tract into which administration of the test compound is directly made, if it is not the specifically responding part coded in Field H-1. Oral route or postoral route, administration of an unmeasured dose (uncontrolled feeding, for example). Use Symbol 4 for ad libitum feeding, but only when no final measure of the intake is made; when a measure of the intake is made after ad libitum feeding, use Symbol 2. Use Symbol N when a treated environment is consumed (or potentially consumed) by the test organ- ism (e.g., cloth impregnated against moth larvae). Field S-3: Almost without exception admin- istration of an unmeasured dose of a test compound is oral, but if it is postoral. Field H-2 can be used with Symbol 4 as it is used with Symbol 3. Intravascular injection, unspecified or specified as intravenous, intra- arterial, intraportal, or intracardial. (Use Symbol 5 for injections into closed vascular systems. Use Symbol 6 for invertebrate, "open" vascular systems [e. g. , insect vessels]. ) Field S-3: With Symbol 5, Field H-2 can be used to distinguish the intravascular injections by coding In it the vein, artery, portal vessel, heart, or other specific vessel to which injection is made, unless that vessel is also the organ specifically responding to the test compound and coded in Field H-1. Intraperitoneal injection. Also, injection into an invertebrate body cavity (e. g. , insect body cavity) or into an invertebrate "open" vascular system. Coelomic injection. Intramuscular injection. Field S-3: Field H-2 can be used to specify the body area or specific muscle into which the test compound was injected, if this is not the anatomical part specifically responding coded in Field H-1. Subcutaneous injection; intradermal, intracutaneous injection. Use Symbol 8 for iontophoresis and for injection into lymph sacs of frogs. Field S-1: Use Symbol 8 for exposure to active cutaneous penetration of parasites (larval nematodes, trematodes, insects, etc. ) Field S-3: Field H-2 can be used to specify the body area into which the test compound was injected, if this is not the anatomical part specifically responding, coded in Field H-1. Tracheal injection. Intracellular injection. Injection in--or topical application on--or dipping of--an EXPOSED OR ISOLATED ORGAN OR TISSUE (when application is single or repeated, but not when it is continuous for which use Symbol C). I. e. , use Symbol B for applications which do not assure exposures (of the isolated or exposed organ or tissue) to a constant level of the test compound. If administration is made by single, non-continuous injection into a vessel of an exposed (but not isolated) organ, use Symbol 5 rather than Symbol B. Also, a single or repeated "injection" into a flowing, but non-circulating liquid perfusing an EXPOSED OR ISOLATED ORGAN OR TISSUE (but not into a static or circulating [i. e. , a closed-system] bathing liquid for which use Symbol C). (Use Symbol C for administration by which the organ or tissue is exposed to a relatively constant quantity--e. g. , administration to a static bath or a closed-system, circulating perfusate [coded in Field J, if the isolated part is of a test organism, or written in Field J, if the isolated part is of a host]. ) Field S-1: Use Symbol B to code an injection of, or topical application of, an inoculum into an exposed or isolated organ or tissue. Field S-3: A specific, exposed (but not isolated) organ to which single or repeated (but not continuous) application is made can be coded in Field H-2, if that organ is not the organ specifically responding to the test compound and coded in Field H-1. Application as (or as a constituent of) a perfusion or bath (circulating or non-circulating, open or closed flowing system) of an ISOLATED OR SURGICALLY EXPOSED ORGAN OR TISSUE, thereby providing a relatively constant concentration and continuous exposure. This includes the Warburg technique for an organ, tissue, homogenate, or any enzyme preparation. Symbol C is also used for topical applications to isolated or surgically exposed organs or tissues, such as a salve, smear, ointment, etc. , which provides a constant coat and exposure. (For single or repeated injections to an isolated or surgically exposed organ or tissue, which do not provide a constant dose level, use Symbol B. For topical application to the intact organism, use Symbol G. For immersion of the intact organism use Symbol E (brief immersion) or Symbol N 137 FIELDS S-1, S-2, and S-3 Columns 54, 55, and 56 (continuous immersion). When the perfusion or bath is not the pure chemical, treat the bathing or perfusing medium (e. g. , normal saline, glucose solution, etc. ) as a host of the organ or tissue: if the organ or tissue is of a test organism, code this medium in Field J, but if the organ or tissue is of a host organism, the medium can only be written in the abstract for Field J. Field S-1: Symbol C as it is defined here is applicable only for Fields S-2 and S-3 and is not intended for use in Field S-1. Application of an inoculum to an exposed or isolated organ or tissue is coded by Symbol B. Field S-3: A specific, exposed (but not isolated) organ to which continuous (but not single or repeated) application is made can be coded in Field H-2, if that organ is not the organ specifically responding to the test compound and coded in Field H-1. If the bath or perfusing medium is coded in Field J, the concentration of the test compound should be coded in Field M with Symbol # in Column 46 (or in Field N, if the dosage is expressed in "units", with Symbol # in Column 48). D Administration to a relatively INTACT PLANT by adding the compound to (or substituting the compound, if a liquid, for) water, nutrient medium, or soil, so that it is carried through the (Plants root, stem, and other parts. Also, use Symbol D for "injection" into plants (ordinarily a only) continuous administration, from a reservoir, through a fixed injection tube or needle). Field S-3: The specific plant organ through which the test compound enters or is injected can be coded in Field H-2, if that part is not the part specifically responding coded in Field H-1. E Brief, direct exposure to the surface or part of the surface of the intact organism; for example, dipping (i. e. , essentially a surface exposure by relatively brief immersion) of the whole, intact organism or of a specific surface (an organ or tissue forming part of the body surface) of the intact organism. Also, a wash of brief duration, such as eye or nose drops which are rather quickly washed from the mucosal surfaces. (If an organ or tissue is isolated or an internal organ or tissue has been surgically exposed, use Symbol B, rather than Symbol E, to code its being given only brief surface exposure, e. g. , dipping. Symbol E is opposed also to Symbols N and G in that N is used to code prolonged, continuous immersion and perfusion and G is used to code a more or less prolonged exposure to a material applied to the surface as a smear, oint- ment, salve, etc. , even if that surface coating which provides a continuous exposure is applied by dipping. Symbol E also differs from Symbols K and L in that K and L are ordinarily for coding mass applications to a group of organisms [i. e. , to a population]; in any case, K and L are not used to code specific controlled treatment of a single individual organism. ) The dipping medium or wash (solvent or carrier)is never considered to be a host and is not coded in Field J. Field S-1: Use Symbol E to code the introduction of the test organism to the surface of the intact host by relatively brief exposure of the host, such as dipping or washing with the inoculum. If the test organism actually actively penetrates the skin rather than attaches locally, use Symbol 8 rather than Symbol E or G. Field S-3; If brief exposure (e. g. , dipping) is restricted to only a specific part (organ or tissue) of the intact organism. Field H-2 can be used to code that specific part, if it is not the part specifically responding coded in Field H-1. G Prolonged, continuous exposure by direct application to the surface- -or to some specific part of the surface--of the intact individual organism. Such direct surface applications are referred to as topical, local, percutaneous, etc. Examples: inunction, ointment applications, application by lanolin paste, screw worm smears, etc. For such application to excised organs (e. g. , an orange, considering the fruit as an organ), use Symbol B. Symbol G is not used to code immersion of the intact organism for continuous exposure (e. g. , for administration as part of the liquid environment of the organism) for which there is the special Symbol N. Field S-1: Use Symbol G to code the introduction of the test organism to the surface of the intact host by relatively protracted exposure of the host, --for example, by forcing the host to stand partly submerged in the inoculum. If the test organism actually actively penetrates the skin rather than attaches locally, use Symbol 8 rather than Symbol E or G. Field S-3: In the case of Symbol G, the application is usually restricted to the area coded in Field H-1 rather than to the entire surface of the organism. However, if application is to the entire body surface (Symbol A of Field H) or to a restricted area other than the area coded in Field H-1, that area (organ or body region) should be coded in Field H-2. I Administration through respiratory organs. Field S-3: If the test compound is administered to a specific part of the respiratory tract, that part should be coded in Field H-2 if it is not the organ specifically responding in Field H-1. - 138 - FIELDS S-1, S-2. and S-3 Columns 54, 55, and 56 J Fumigation (i. e. , administration as a gas, aerosol, or mist) of the HABITAT with the organism present. Under the conditions for which Symbol J should be used, the administration is not implicitly by inhalation (Symbol I), nor does the administration involve determined direct application to the surface of the organism (Symbols K and L), nor is the administration to an environment prior to the organism's contact with the surface of the habitat (Symbol M). The administration to a habitat in which the administered material is absorbed or mixed, i. e. , a habitat through which it is dispersed and therefore diluted, is coded by Symbol N, except that if this is accomplished by the process of fumigation and the organism is present at the time of fumigation. Symbol J should be used. Field S-1: It is possible that administration of the test organism (microorganisms) might be made by a process of dispersing a suspension of the organ- ism in a mist, etc. (i. e. , by a dispersion analogous to "fumigation" with a test compound or secondary compound). For such an administration of the test organism. Symbol J should be used. K Direct application to both the surface of an organism (implying the total surface, not any specific part of the surface) and its environment when the dose per individual is not controlled and the organism is not removed from the treated environment. For example, spraying of PLANTS and the soil and other environmental components of the plants, or spraying of INSECTS and the plants on which the insects are as well as other environmental components of the insects, etc. , when the organisms are not removed from the treated environment. Use Symbol L for this application method, when the treated organism is removed from the environment. See the definitions for Symbols G, J, and N to further distinguish the uses of Symbol K. L Application as defined for Symbol K, but the treated organism is removed from the environment after the treatment. Examples: Peet-Grady fly spray technique, certain settling tower methods, etc. See the definitions for Symbols E and J to further distinguish the uses of Symbol L. M Application to the habitat prior to the organism's contact with the SURFACE of that environment. (The application may be either to the surface only [a glass plate, e. g. ]--or to an absorbent environmental material [paper, e. g. , ] which nevertheless retains on its surface some of the applied compound. ) Examples (Fields S-2 and S-3): the panel test for house flies, an appli- cation to foliage or other surface for residue tests, impregnated paper barriers for rodent repellency (also other similar repellency tests), the apple-plug technique, a pre-emergency herbicide test, etc. (Use Symbol N or J when the application is to an environment throughout which the applied material is dispersed and IN which (not on which) the organism is, or will be, living and which the organism may consume as food. Use Symbols K or L when the application is to the surface [or mixed with] the environment with the organism present. ) (Note: For Field S-1, it is so improbable that an inoculum would be administered to a host by such a circuitous route as that described by Symbol M, the symbol is considered as inapplicable to Field S-1. ) N Application to the habitat throughout which the applied material is dispersed and diluted (i. e. , impregnation of, mixing with, diffusion in, saturation of the habitat), in which the intact organism is, or will be, living (mosquito larvae in water or nematodes or plant seeds in soil) and which it may consume (moth larvae in cloth). Examples: wood impregnation as protection against or treatment for infesting organisms (termites, fungi, marine borers, etc. ), treatment of flour or grain for action against weevils or other infesting organisms (except by fumigation for which Symbol J is specially provided), addition to water in which aquatic organisms are living, addition to media hi which are microorganisms, etc. (If the organism contacts only the surface of the habitat subsequent to application, use Symbol M. Symbol M is always used for repellency studies involving such applications. If the application as described for Symbol N is by fumigation and the organism is present at the time of application, use Symbol J which is specially provided for this. Symbol N differs from Symbol K in that Symbol K refers to appli- cations which are essentially to the test organism and Incidentally to whatever structures and materials of the habitat on which the applied material falls (there is implication that the environment has the applied material evenly distributed in it by diffusion, saturation, or impregnation), whereas Symbol N refers to applications essentially to the habitat through which the applied material is diffused to reach the organism. If the applied material is added to a liquid and this mixture Is applied only briefly as a dip or wash, use Symbol E. ) 0 Administration to a parent organism containing- -or to which is attached- -its developing young, when the test is for effects on the embryo and/or offspring. (If administration is directly to 139 FIELDS S-1, S-Z, and S-3 Columns 54, 55, and 56 the developing offspring rather than indirectly through its parent, use an appropriate symbol other than Symbol 0. If administration is by injection directly to the embryonic membranes, use Symbol S. ) Field S-3: The parental structure to which the test compound is administered (if known) should be coded in Field H-2, the developmental stage of the offspring at the time of application should be coded in Field F, and the dose given to the parent should be coded in Fields M and N (unless the dose to which the embryo is exposed is determined, in which case that dose should be coded in Fields M and N with Symbol # in Columns 46 and/or 48). See Field F, Key, Specific Directions and Explanations, Division 3, paragraph 3. P Administration to and through meninges and to the central nervous system, manner unspecified (ordinarily by injection). Examples: intramedullary, subdural, intraspinal, intracranial, intrathecal, intracisternal. For intracerebral application, use special Symbol V. Field S-3: The specific structure to which the test compound is applied should be coded in Field H-2 if that organ is not the organ specifically responding coded in Field H- 1. Q Administration intra-sinusoidal to paranasal sinuses, manner unspecified R Application to a single point on or in an environmental medium through which the applied chemical diffuses to establish a diffusion gradient to which the test organism (present at the time of application or introduced subsequent to application) is exposed. Example: Oxford Plate Technique. (When such an application results in no gradient [i. e. , results in complete mixing with the medium], only Symbol N can be used. ) Field S-1: Application of the inoculum to a single restricted area on a culture medium over or through which it subsequently grows. S Injection directly into embryonic membranes of the developing organism. Example: injection into allantois of chick embryo. Field S-3: The specific embryonic membrane to which the test compound is applied can be coded in Field H-2, if that membrane is not the specifically responding structure coded in Field H-1. T Rectal or colonic administration. Example: colonic lavage. F Intra-osseous injection. Field S-3: The specific bone structure to which the test compound is applied can be coded in Field H-2, if that structure is not the specifically responding structure coded in Field H-1. H Intra-pleural injection U Vaginal administration V Intra- cerebral administration W Intra- testicular X Intra-ocular Y Intra- tumoral Z Intra-organal (organ other than specified above and other than introduction directly into any part of the alimentary lumen [Symbols 3 or T]). Field S-3: Use Field H-2 to name the specific organ to which the test compound was applied if that organ is not the specifically responding structure coded in Field H-1. 140 FIELD T-1 Column 57 SPECIFIC ACTION OF THE TEST COMPOUND ON THE BIOLOGICAL STATE, QUALITY, OR PROCESS CODED IN FIELD T-2 The test compound: 1 Increases, stimulates, facilitates, lowers threshold (for the physiological phenomenon of Field T-2), enlarges. Speeds, accelerates, increases rate or progress (of the physiological process or pathological condition of Field T-2). 2 Decreases, depresses, raises threshold (for the physiological phenomenon of Field T-2), reduces, partially inhibits, partially blocks, partially stops, partially prevents. Slows, retards, delays, decreases rate or progress (of the physiological process or pathological condition of Field T-2). (Note; When the test compound causes complete stoppage or completely inhibits or prevents the physiological process or pathological condition of Field T-2, use Symbol 3. ) 3 Stops, blocks, inhibits (completely), prevents, abolishes, cures. (Note: This symbol indicates complete stoppage of a process. However, Symbol 3 can never be used to indicate the complete kill of a group of organisms, i. e. , the complete reduction of the number of organisms; the test compound's causing death is indicated in Field T-1 only by Symbol 7 and the fact that the compound caused 100% kill is indicated only by appropriate coding in Field Y. ) 4 Increases, speeds, etc. (see Symbol 1) and subsequently decreases, slows, etc. (see Symbol 2). I. e. , the biological condition or process of Field T-2 is first increased or speeded then is reversed to be decreased or slowed, as a complex response to a single administration of the test compound. 5 Decreases, slows, etc. (see Symbol 2) and subsequently increases, speeds, etc. (see Symbol 1). I. e. , the biological condition or process of Field T-2 is first decreased or slowed then is reversed to be increased or speeded, as a complex response to a single administration of the test compound. 6 Makes irregular, arrythmic, acyclic, fluctuating. (Note: Symbol 6 suggests disruption of control, due to the test compound, causing the biological process or behavior to proceed in a fashion more irregular than can be described by Symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6. Use Symbol 6 also when the test compound effect is to disrupt a balanced biological system or process [e. g. , acid-base balance, blood cell proportion, nitrogen balance]; Symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 would not appropriately express the balance disruption. ) 7 Produces, causes, does, initiates, induces, brings about (also, stimulates, in the sense of initiating, not in the sense of accelerating for which Symbol 1 is used). (Note: Use Symbol 7 in the passive sense, when the test compound "undergoes" some alteration [Field T-2 Symbol series FE--] and when the test compound "is" excreted, synthesized, stored, absorbed, etc. [Field T-2 Symbols FF-B, FAB, FBB, FOB, and FIB]. Use Symbol 7 also when the test compound "permits" or "initiates" a secondary compound's alteration, excretion, uptake as a nutrient, synthesis, etc. [Field T-2 Symbols FE--, FF--, F6--, etc. ]. ) 8 Synergizes or potentiates the biological response (identified only as a biological condition or process in Field T-2) to the secondary compound (coded in Field D). Use Symbol 8 also to indicate that the test compound is essential for (permits or initiates) the action of a secondary compound (coded in Field D). However, when the test compound permits or is essential for the synthesis, alteration, or metabolism of a secondary compound (Field T-2 Symbols FE--, FF--, F6-, F8-, etc.), use Symbol 7 instead of Symbol 8. (Note: When Symbol 8 is used. Field T-1 can not indicate the synergized action of the secondary compound; always include the secondary compound's action synergized in the written abstract portion of Field T-2. ) - 141 - FIELD T-1 Column 57 Antagonizes, antidotes, inhibits, neutralizes, decreases, blocks the biological response (identified only as a biological condition or process in Field T-2) to the secondary compound (coded in Field D). (Field T-2: Write the secondary compound's antagonized action. ) Simulates (replaces) the secondary compound's action on the biological condition or process in Field T-2; the secondary compound is coded in Field D. Has an additive effect with the secondary compound (coded in Field D) to produce or affect the biological response (coded as a biological condition or process in Field T-2). I. e. , the test compound and secondary compound summate (with a single, coincidental administration of both) to increase, decrease, stop, induce, or make irregular the biological condition or process coded in Field T-2; when Symbol C is used. Field T-1 can not indicate which of these effects is the result of the summative action of the two compounds (write the action in Field T-2). Inhibition of nerve action on its end organ, when the nerve is an accelerator or initiates the end organ's activity. (Reduces normal biological response to the action of the nerve indicated in Field H-1, as evidenced by the test compound's allowing the biological condition or physiological process [Field T-2] to be produced or increased by the stimulated and chemically treated nerve only to a degree less than that to which it is normally increased or caused by the stimulated but chemically untreated nerve. ) Inhibition of nerve action on its end organ, when the nerve is an inhibitor of the end organ's activity. (Reduces normal biological response to the action of the nerve indicated in Field H-1, as evidenced by the test compound's allowing the biological response or physiological process [Field T-2] to be decreased by the stimulated and chemically treated nerve only to a degree less than that to which it is normally depressed or prevented by the stimulated but chemically untreated nerve. ) Intensification of nerve action on its end organ, when the nerve is an accelerator or initiates the end organ's activity. (Intensifies the normal biological response to the action of the nerve indicated in Field H-1, as evidenced by increase of the biological condition or physiological process [Field T-2] by the stimulated and chemically treated nerve beyond the degree to which it is normally increased or caused by the stimulated but chemically untreated nerve. ) Intensification of nerve action on its end organ, when the nerve is an inhibitor of the end organ's activity. (Intensifies the normal biological response to the action of the nerve indi- cated in Field H-1, as evidenced by decrease of the biological condition or physiological process [Field T-2] by the stimulated and chemically treated nerve below the degree to which it is normally decreased by the stimulated but chemically untreated nerve. ) The following six symbols, J through R, can be used only when Field E is coded with a pathological state and when a symptom is coded in Field T-2 by a symbol whose definition represents a normal biological condition or process which, however, (1) has been made abnormal by the pathology coded in Field E and which (2) is specifically treated or affected by the test compound. If the Field T-2 entry (a pathology symptom) is a symbol whose definition identifies it specifically as a pathological condition or process and if it is tested or affected by the test compound. Symbol 3 must be used instead of Symbol J, K, or L; Symbol 2 instead of Symbol M, N, or P; or Symbol 1 instead of Symbol P, Q, or R. Consult the Key. Returns the subject to normal (i. e. , cures the host in Field J) by increasing or speeding the pathologically reduced or retarded biological condition or process coded in Field T-2. Symbol J implies complete relief from the pathological symptom coded in Field T-2; if only improvement but not cure is provided by the test compound, use Symbol M. Returns the subject to normal (i. e. , cures the host in Field J) by decreasing or slowing the pathologically intensified or accelerated biological condition or process coded in Field T-2. Symbol K implies complete relief from the pathological symptom coded in Field T-2; if only improvement but not cure is provided by the test compound, use Symbol N. 142 - FIELD T-1 Column 57 L Returns the subject to normal (i. e. , cures the host In Field J) by affecting the pathological biological condition or process coded in Field T-2, when restoration of normalcy is not a matter of correcting an abnormally intensified (or speeded) or decreased (or slowed) condition or process. For example, a disturbed nitrogen balance or specific behavior of the host of the disease can not properly be described as being returned to normal by "increasing" or "decreasing" the balance or behavior, but only by restoring its normalcy. Symbol L can also be used when the test compound re-initiates a normal physiological process stopped by the pathology coded in Field E and thereby restores the process to its normal state or rate (i. e. , when a cure is effected). Symbol L implies complete relief from (i. e. , cure of) the pathology symptom (e. g. , balance or behavior) coded in Field T-2; if only improvement but not cure is provided by the test compound or if a pathologically totally suspended process is re-initiated but not restored to the normal state, use Symbol 0. M Returns the subject toward normal (i. e. , improves but does not cure the host in Field J) by increasing or speeding the pathologically reduced or retarded biological condition or process coded in Field T-2. Symbol M implies only partial relief from the pathological symptom coded in Field T-2; if the test compound cures the host, use Symbol J. N Returns the subject toward normal (i. e. , improves but does not cure the host in Field J) by decreasing or slowing the pathologically intensified or accelerated biological condition or process coded in Field T-2. Symbol N implies only partial relief from the pathological symptom coded in Field T-2; if the test compound cures the host, use Symbol K. 0 Returns the subject toward normal (i. e. , improves but does not cure the host in Field J) by affecting the pathological biological condition or process coded in Field T-2, when restoration of normalcy is not a matter of correcting an abnormally increased (or speeded) or decreased (or slowed) condition or process. (See the examples with the definition of Symbol L. ) Symbol 0 is also used when the test compound initiates again a normal physiological process stopped by the pathology coded in Field E but does not thereby restore it to its fully normal state or rate. Symbol 0 implies only partial relief from the pathological symptom (e. g. , balance or behavior) coded in Field T-2; if the host is restored to normalcy or if a pathologically totally suspended process is re-initiated and thereby restored to normalcy, use Symbol L. P Exacerbates the subject's pathological state (i. e. , intensifies the pathological condition of the host in Field J) by further decreasing or slowing the depressed or slowed biological condition or process coded in Field T-2. 0 Exacerbates the subject's pathological state (i. e. , intensifies the pathological condition of the host in Field J) by further increasing or speeding the intensified or accelerated biological condition or process coded in Field T-2. R Exacerbates the subject's pathological state (i. e. , intensifies the pathological condition of the host in Field J) by making further deviant the pathological disbalance or behavior coded in Field T-2 (i. e. , when the exacerbation is not adequately expressed as "increasing" or "decreasing" the pathologically affected condition or process coded in Field T-2). (See the examples with the definition of Symbol L. ) Causes no effect. To be used only when the test compound was not tested for a specific action on any specific biological condition or process of Field T-2 and it did not produce any specific action. This symbol is used only with Symbol 1 of Field T-2 which is a symbol for a collective general term, in contrast to all other items of Field T-2 which are specific conditions or processes. Consult the Key. 143 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 BIOLOGICAL STATE, QUAUTY, OR PROCESS ACTED ON OR PRODUCED BY THE TEST COMPOUND OR SECONDARY COMPOUND Gross response. (Use Symbol 1 only with Symbol 0 of Field T-1; together, the symbols mean "does not cause response of any type". ) Death caused by the test compound (Sym- bols 11 and 111, below) when adminis- tration has been by a single dose (not continuous) or when the administration has been continuous or by repeated doses for a maximum of 24 hours or less. The time to death may be >24 hours, if the administration is by a single dose, but if administration is continuous or multiple, death must occur within 24 hours in order to be coded by Symbols 11 or 111. I I Death produced under the conditions described above, but only when the lethal dose has not been determined for the individual treated (or not determined for the individual of a group treated collectively). III Death produced under the conditions described above, but only when the lethal dose has been determined for the individual treated (or for the indi- vidual of a group treated collectively). ACUTE TOXICITY Death caused by the test compound (Sym- bol 112) when administration has been only by continuous or multiple doses for more than 24 hours and when the time to death is more than 24 hours. 112 Death produced under the conditions described immediately above, whether the lethal dose has or has not been determined for the individual treated (or for the individual of a group treated collectively). CHRONIC TOXICITY Note: Use of Symbols 11, 111, and 112 is restricted to coding death caused in larger organisms, including arthropods not infesting a living host. Death of parasitic, pathogenic, and all micro- organisms is coded by symbols of the 17-- and 18-- series. Death in a popu- lation of arthropods infesting a living host is coded by symbols of the 13-- series. Consult the Key. 113 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 113A 113B 114 1141 1142 115 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 9E 116 1161 1162 Local toxicity. (In addition to these states of toxic response, there are other pathological states listed through- out Field T-2, especially in the symbol series 4 . ) Irritation Inflammation Depilation Vesication Pruritus Scorching, burning Abscess Contact dermatitis (primary irritation) Allergic dermatitis (sensitization) Foreign body giant cell formation Water-soaking or water-logging (plant tissues or organs) Systemic toxicity Acute toxic symptoms General, non-acute toxic symptoms; "side effect" such as general malaise, lassitude, sleepiness, headache, dizziness, nausea, vomiting, etc. Paralysis Undefined paralysis; catalepsy. (Use this symbol for "knockdown" effect of insecticide tests. ) Flaccid paralysis Spastic paralysis Collapse; prostration Syncope Coma; stupor Convulsion Tonic convulsion Clonic convulsion 144 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 1163 Epileptiform convulsion 1164 Opisthotonos 117 Shock, unspecified 15 117 1 Shock, hemorrhagic. To code hemorrhage, use Symbol 87 1. 1172 Shock, anaphylactic. To code sensiti- zation, use Symbol 58. To code the anaphylactin-anaphylactogen combi- nation itself, use Symbol 8A1. Use Symbol 1172 to code the complex reactions of the organism resulting from the anaphylactin-anaphylactogen combination and known as anaphylactic shock. 1173 Photosensitive reaction 9A1 Motor coordination 12 Viability; ability to survive (resistance to death due to) environmental hazards to which the organism (coded in Field E), or the developmental stage of the organism (coded in Field F), is normally exposed; survival time, as a measure of viability described above. Note: Do not use Symbol 12 for an organism's ability to survive pathology (pathology in Field E and the host in Field J); instead use Symbol 1621, 1631, 1753, 16 or 1754. See the Key discussion of Symbol 12. 161 13 Reduction of the degree of arthropod infestation of living hosts, when general application is made to the host or hosts bearing the arthropod and the arthropod thereby receives the same application as the surface of the host. Use Symbol 131 or 132, according to the terms in which the results are 1611 expressed. 131 Reduction of the number of arthropods infesting a living host (one or many infested host individuals treated). Use Symbol 13 1 when results are expressed in terms of a percentage of arthropods affected. 132 Reduction of the degree of arthropod 1612 infestation of a living host (one or many infested host individuals treated). Use Symbol 132 when results are ex- pressed in terms of the degree of the host's relief from the infestation, rather 162 than in terms of the number or percent- age of arthropods disposed of. 14 A biological state or process indicated by the coding of the general type of action in Field T-3. (Use Symbol 14 only when the biological state or process is of a nature that can not be expressed as a single specific response, such as repulsion or attraction to the test compound and when the author describes the test compound effect only by a gen- eral term of Field T-3. See the Key. ) An unspecified process of the organ or tissue coded in Field H-1 or I. (Use Symbol 15 only when the author does not state the biological process responding more specifically than by reference to an anatomical structure's unspecified functions. See the Key. ) Symbols of the following two series, 16-- and 17--, are used for coding effects on any infectious or non-infectious pathol- ogy coded in Field E, EXCLUDING: (1) effects on tumors coded in Field E, for which Symbols 44 through 47 are used, (2) effects on infestation by any arthro- pod, for which ordinarily only Symbol 131 or 132 is used, and (3) effects on any pathogenic organism which is not on its living hosts; effects on pathogens or any microorganism on a non-living host are coded by symbols of the 18-- series. Exacerbation of (intensification of) the pathological condition in Field E. Increase in numbers of individuals of the pathogenic organism species coded in Field E. (See Symbol 1611 for a maxi- mum degree of increase of numbers and Symbol 1612 for an increase In numbers due to the test compound's causing a reduction of resistance of the host to the pathogen. ) Increase in number of individuals of the pathogenic organism species to the lethal level of the disease. Evaluation in Field Y is to be based on the dose of the compound needed or the time needed for the compound to bring about death, due to its influence in increasing the number of pathogen individuals. Increase in number of individuals of the pathogenic organism species due to the test compound's causing a reduction of resistance of the host to the pathogenic organism. Acceleration of the progress of the dis- ease (toward the normal peak of the disease). Note: Use Symbol 162 only for the exacerbation of diseases which are in themselves ordinarily not fatal; if the disease is also fatal in untreated con- trols, code the acceleration as a de- crease in survival time, Symbol 1621. Acceleration of the progress of a non- fatal disease (Symbol 162) must be eval- uated by a criterion other than 12 or 57. - 145 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 1621 Hastening of death due to the pathology 172 (in Field E) which is lethal to untreated controls; decrease in survival time. Acceleration of the progress of a fatal disease is ordinarily evaluated in Field Y by Criterion 12 or 57, coding the decrease in survival time in Field U. 163 Intensification of the disease by specifically increasing the disease beyond its normal peak intensity; i. e. , intensification by influencing the dis- ease to a greater intensity than that to which it would normally progress. 1631 Decrease of the number of survivors of the pathology (in Field E) which causes 1721 a known mean mortality rate when untreated; increase in the number of deaths due to such a pathology which is lethal to untreated controls. With Symbol 1631, evaluation in Field Y is based on the percentage decrease of survivors and the expression, decrease 173 of the number of survivors, should be in the written portion of Field T-2. 164 Increase in duration of the pathology; prolongation of the symptoms beyond the normal duration. 17 Relief (general or unspecified) from the pathology condition in Field E. (See the note prior to Symbol 16. ) Use other symbols of this 17-- series for specific degrees of alleviation of the pathology and for preventive actions. 174 171 Decrease in number of individuals of the pathogenic organism species coded in Field E. This symbol is used for effects on infectious diseases only. Evaluation in Field Y is to be based on the decrease of the number of pathogens. Criterion 62 or 01 (or 03 or 04). Use Symbol 171 if the reduction of pathogens is incomplete; when the reduction is complete, use Sym- bol 1711; when reduction is due to an increase in the resistance of the host to 175 the pathogen, use Symbol 1712. 1711 Biological cure (infectious diseases). Demonstrated, 100% decrease in the number of individuals of the pathogenic organism species coded in Field E; ster- ilization of the host coded in Field J. 1751 Evaluation in Field Y is to be based on the potency of the test compound for bringing about cure, not on the percent- age of decrease in individuals of the infecting pathogen. 1712 Decrease in the number of individuals of the pathogenic organism species due to the test compound's causing an increase in the resistance of the host to the pathogenic organism. Clinical cure (non-infectious diseases as well as infectious); permanent eradication of symptoms. (In the case of clinical cure of infectious diseases, use Symbol 172, if sterilization is not demonstrated but symptoms do not reappear. Use Symbol 1711, if sterili- zation is demonstrated. Use Symbol 1721, if the pathogen is demonstrated to persist in spite of clinical cure. Use Symbol 173, if the pathogen is demonstrated to persist after disap- pearance of symptoms and subsequently causes symptoms again. ) Carrier state (infectious diseases). Use Symbol 1721 for clinical cures caused by the test compound in which the pathogenic organism remains demon- strable in the host but the symptoms prove to have been permanently eradicated. Temporary cure. (Non-infectious dis- eases: use Symbol 172, if the disease is demonstrated to be permanently clinically cured. Infectious diseases: use Symbol 1721, if the pathogen remains with its host but produces no symptoms thereafter, due to the test compound's effect; however, use Symbol 173, if the pathogen remains with its host but produces symptoms subsequent to a clinical cure. ) Prevention of the infectious or non- infectious pathology. If the test compound acts only after the disease has been contracted, use Symbol 176 or other symbols. If application results in the test compound's being a physical barrier on the skin or mucous membrane preventing penetration by pathogenic organisms, or preventing damage due to physical agents such as radiation, use Symbol 178. Repression of either an infectious or non-infectious existing pathology treated by the test compound. Use Symbols 1751 or 17 52, if the nature of repression is demonstrated and fits the description of one of those symbols. Retardation of progress of the infectious or non-infectious existing pathology. (Slowing of the development of the disease which nevertheless progresses to its normal peak. ) Note: Use Symbol 17 51 only for retardation of diseases which are in themselves ordinarily not fatal; if death is the ultimate result of the disease in untreated controls, the re- tarding effect should be coded as an - 146 FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 increase In survival time. Symbol 1753. 178 Slowing of progress of a non-fatal dis- ease must be evaluated by criteria other than 12 or 57. 1752 Restraint of the infectious or non- infectious existing pathology. (Re- striction of the disease intensity to a given level or to a given range of intensity indefinitely, not permitting it to progress to a normal peak or to cause death. ) 1753 Delay of death due to the pathology (in Field E) which is fatal to untreated 1781 controls; increase in survival time. If death is prevented in all individuals 1782 which are affected with the disease and to which the test compound is administered, use another symbol to describe the amelioration (Symbol 1711, 172, or 1752). Delay of death is ordinarily evaluated in Field Y by Criterion 12 or 57, coding the increase in survival time in Field U. 1754 Decrease in the number of deaths due to the pathology (in Field E) which is le- thal (or which causes a known mean mortality rate) to untreated controls; in- crease of the number of survivors of such a pathology. If all treated organ- isms are permitted to survive such a pathology or if the increased number of survivors is known to be also an in- crease of cure or restraint, use Symbol 18 1711, 172, or 1752, instead of Symbol 1754. If Symbol 1754 is used, evalu- ation in Field Y must be on the basis of per cent decrease of deaths and the ex- pression, decrease of the number of deaths, should be used in the written portion of Field T-2. 176 Abortion of early infection. Use Symbol 174 rather than 176 to code prevention 181 of an infection. 177 Decrease of the effect of a specific toxin of a pathogenic organism. (Administration of the test compound with the extract of, or killed cells of, a pathogenic organism. ) The toxin, which should have been given a specific code identity, should be coded in Field D. If the test compound antidotes the toxic action 100%, use Symbol 1771. 1771 Prevention of the effect of a specific 1812 toxin (coded in Field D) of a pathogenic organism. (If the effect of the toxin is only decreased less than 100%, use Symbol 177. ) Protection (for skin and mucous mem- branes, coded in Field H-1 or I). Pre- vention of damage due to physical agents such as radiation, temperature extremes, etc. Use Symbol 178 also for coding the chemical's prevention of penetration by pathogenic organisms such as trematode larvae, nematode larvae, or arthropod larvae. Use Symbol 1781 or 1782 only when the specific nature of the protection, as defined by those symbols, is known. Protection that is essentially mechanical in character. (See Symbol 178. ) Protection that is essentially chemical in character. (See Symbol 178. ) Symbols of the following series, 18--, are used generally only for indicating normal growth, reproduction, etc. , of pathogenic or non-pathogenic micro- organisms maintained on non-living hosts such as nutrient agar or broth. (Use symbols of the 17-- series for pathogenic microorganisms on living hosts. ) If, for any reason, a non- pathogenic microorganism were treated on a living host, this 18-- series might be used. Growth of the microorganism colony; number of individuals in a cultured colony. Symbol 181 or 1812 is always preferred to Symbol 18, except when the author does not distinguish an inhibitory chemical action as being lethal (1812) or merely repressive (181), in which case Symbol 18 may be used (with Symbol 3 of Field T-1). Growth of the microorganism colony; number of individuals in a cultured colony. Use Symbol 181 for either general decrease (stasis) or general increase in the microorganism on the non-living host; if the decrease is demonstrated to be specifically a lethal effect on all or any percentage of the microorganisms in the colony, use Symbol 1812. Use Symbol 1, 2, or 3 in Field T-1. Death of the microorganism. (Use only with Symbol 7 of Field T-1. ) Use Symbol 1812 if a lethal ('cldal) action has been demonstrated on any percent- age of the microorganism individuals or on any percentage of the colony. 147 - FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 19 Crop yield, unspecified as to whether it 23 is in terms of the number, size, or frequency of the units, or total mass of the substance, of the crop. 191 Number of crop units (number of fruits, number of flowers, number of leaves, etc. ). The organ is coded in Field H-1. 192 Size of crop units (size of fruits, size 231 of flowers, size of leaves, etc. ). Use Symbol 281, rather than Symbol 192, if the size is not in terms of a quality of a crop but in terms of the unit as an 23 11 organ or as the organism. 2312 193 Frequency of bearing of crop units 2313 (frequency of production of fruit, 2314 flowers, leaves, or other units) 2315 194 Total amount of crop yield (when the "crop" is produced as a mass of a 25 substance rather than as units such as in 191, 192, and 193) lA Change in flavor or odor of the organism 251 or of the product of the organism. 252 (Symbol 7 of Field T-1. ) Use Symbol 26 lA when the change is qualitative rather than quantitative or when the quanti- tative change is not expressed either as increase or decrease. lAl Intensification of flavor or odor (Symbol 261 7 of Field T-1) 262 1A2 blminution of flavor or odor (Symbol 7 of Field T-1) 2 Growth and differentiation 21 Cell division 211 Mitosis 2111 Prophase 2112 Metaphase 27 2113 Anaphase 2114 Telophase 2115 Spindle activity 212 Meiosis 271 22 Cell growth; growth and normal form of the cell and of its essential structures. 272 221 Ultimate size of the cell 2721 2211 Elongation of the cell. Plant "curvature": Symbol 2211 may be used to code 2722 curvature of plant parts due to elon- 2723 gation of cells of one side of the plant 2724 structure (stem, petiole, etc. ). 2725 222 Shape of the cell 2726 223 Formation of membranes of the cell 2231 Thickening of the cell wall 2727 2232 Sculpturing of the cell wall 2233 Chemical composition of the cell wall 28 224 Cytoplasmic volume of the cell 225 Nuclear size 226 Nuclear shape 227 Nuclear number 228 Nucleolar size 229 Nucleolar shape 281 22A Nucleolar number 2811 Cell differentiation. Use Symbol 23 for the process of differentiation of certain cell parts. Use Symbol 27 for general differentiation of a cell from a non- specific embryonic type to its mature form (e. g. , differentiation to become a unit of a specific type of tissue). Cell inclusion, unspecified. Symbols of the 231- series represent the character of certain cell parts differentiated within the cell during its development. Vacuole size Vacuole number Plastid size Plastid number Number (or activity) of mitochondria, Golgi bodies, etc. Spore germination (including pollen and megaspore "germination"). See Sym- bol AA2 for spore formation. Percentage of spore germination Length of germ tube Seed germination. (Use Symbol 26 only if it can not be determined whether the process affected is in terms of the germinative process or the total gross process ending with emergence. ) Seed germination, regardless of emergence Emergence of seeds from the soil or other material in which they were planted. Use Symbol 262 for the ac- tivity of germinating seeds in emerging from the soil, as well as for germination expressed in terms of the emerged seedlings. Tissue differentiation. For tissue degeneration, use Symbol 418D (histolysis) or a symbol of the atrophy series, 41 1-. Tissue formation (organization from embryonic origins) Tissue regeneration (e. g. , wound healing) Granulation; the formation of granulation tissue Organization of regenerative tissue Cicatrization Fibrosis, the formation of fibrous tissue Fibrosis specifically for adhesion Replacement fibrosis, specifically replacing fatty tissue Replacement fibrosis, tissue replaced unspecified Organ formation; organ growth; organ size. Use Symbol 28 only when the data do not clearly indicate whether it is the formation, growth process, or ultimate size of the organ that is affected. Organ size; ultimate dimension Organ weight 148 FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 282 Organ shape. (Use only with Symbol 6 of Field T-1. ) 283 Organ growth. (If the rate of growth is the aspect affected, use Symbol 2831. ) 2831 Rate of growth of the organ 284 Organ formation from undifferentiated tissues 29 Molting; metamorphosis; the process of an individual's change from any juvenile stage to another or to the adult. Consult the Key. 291 Ecdysis 2A Organism development, growth, size; (multicellular organisms only; for growth of individuals of unicellular Protozoa, Fungi, etc. , use symbols of series 22--; for growth of the mass or colony of individuals of a unicellular organism, use a symbol of the 17-- or 18-- series). Use Symbol 2A only when the data do not clearly indicate whether it is the development (structural organi- zation during growth, 2A2) or growth (in- crease in size in terms of linear measure or mass, 2A1; weight, 2A11 ; etc. ) that is affected. 2A1 Organism size (mass) and form; ultimate normal dimensions and shape 2A11 Organism weight 2A12 Organism surface area 2A13 Organism volume 2A14 Organism shape, normal proportions 2A2 Organism development (structural organization during growth, disregarding increase in mass) 2A3 Organism growth process; increase in mass in normal proportions 2A4 Regional growth of the entire plant; growth of specific anatomical areas of the plant. For plant growth expressed as weight, volume, etc. , use symbols of series 2A1 -. 2A41 Terminal growth of the entire plant (as opposed to lateral growth. Symbol 2A42). The "terminal" part includes all structures (leaf, stem, flower) at the apex of the plant and does not refer to any one of these parts such as terminal leaf; however. Symbol 2A41 can be used for coding terminal growth of the primary "stem" or "trunk". Use Field T-1 Symbol 1, 2, 3, etc. 2A42 Lateral growth of the entire plant (as opposed to terminal growth, Symbol 2A41). The "lateral" part includes all structures (leaf, branch, flower) growing below the apical region of the entire plant. Use Field T-1 Symbol 1, 2, 3, etc. 2B 2C 2D 2D1 2D2 2E 2F 2G 31 311 312 Maturing process of the organism; assumption of the mature adult charac- teristics, in animals and annual and biennial plants usually associated with maturing of reproductive organs, but in perennial plant individuals, it is more a matter of age and size limitations imposed by genetic constitution. For certain organisms (certain arthropods and amphibia), maturing may be coded by Symbol 29, if expressed specifically as "metamorphosis". Aging; the process of degeneration of both reproductive and somatic parts and activities, following maturation of the individual multicellular organism, ending in death. Inactive state, unspecified Dormancy, hibernation, estivation Diapause. (This term refers only to arrests of insect development. ) Hatching process Blooming process. Use Symbol 2F for the normal opening and functioning of the flower or flower crop of a plant. (Use a symbol of the 28-- series for the general development of the flower as an organ [size, weight, etc. ] and symbol F924, FA24, or 416 for color of the flower. ) Excystment process. Use Symbol 2G for successful emergence from a pro- tective coating, the cyst wall or cap- sule, of a quiescent stage (described as the "cyst" stage of certain organ- isms), at the beginning of a new active stage. Do not use Symbol 2G for the emergence of insects from the pupa case which would be more appropriately an Item under the 29-- series. Genetic change, unspecified. Symbols of the 3 series are concerned with modification of the material or struc- tures of cells which are genetic deter- miners, chromatin, chromosomes, genes. Included are (a) the specific modifi- cations, (b) the normal incidence of these modifications, and (c) specific changes in the anatomy or physiology of the organism (for which a chromo- some is the determiner) due to a known modification of the chromosome or gene. Structural change of the cellular elements which are determiners for the organism's characteristic structure and physiology. Polyploidy, haploidy Chromosome modification, unspecified, involving the normal number of chromo- somes 149 - FIELD T-2 Colum ns 58, 59, 60, and 61 3121 Translocation 415 3122 Inversion 3123 Deletion 3124 Fragmentation 3125 Gene mutation 32 Physiological change of the organism. unspecified, due to a specific genetic 4151 modification 416 33 Incidence of an unspecified genetic 34 35 41 411 4111 4112 4113 844 418D 412 413 414 change. (Use with Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T-1.) 4161 Somatic mutation 4165 Anatomical change of the organism, 4166 unspecified, due to a specific genetic mutation FA24 Pathological states involving abnormal 874 growth and differentiation or degen- 8771 eration 8781 Abnormal morphological states, exclusive of tumors and unspecified concrements 8531 and casts (see Symbols 421, 43, etc. ) FA24 Atrophy, including toxic atrophy. (Use 417 Symbol 411 only if the atrophy is not specified according to a general type indicated by Symbol 41 1 1, 4112, etc.) For abnormally diminutive morphological structures due to faulty development (e.g., hypoplasia), use symbols of the 28-- or 2A-- series. Simple atrophy Pyknosis Inflammatory atrophy Cytolysis Histolysis Hypertrophy (a process or state of the component cells' enlarging or being enlarged rather than an abnormal in- 418 crease in number of cells) 4181 Hyperplasia other than tumors (Symbol 418A 43--, 44--, etc. ). A process or state 418B of the component cells' increasing in 418J number, yet essentially retaining their 418K normal character. 4182 Altered form. Abnormal form of the 4183 organism or the structure in Field H or I, due to abnormal growth of some part 4185 or parts of the organism or structure. ) 4186 Monstrosity. Abnormal caste form (e. g. , abnormal body form of the indi- 4187 vidual of a bee or ant colony). Abnormal 4188 type of colony (fungal or bacterial 418F colony form, e.g.). Use Symbol 414 418G for abnormal form of plant parts, such 4189 as leaf roll, petal roll, abnormal leaf 418A or petal shape, or abnormal leaf or 418B petal pattern. If the change is a plant "curvature" due to unequal cell elon- gation, use Symbol 2211 rather than 418D 414. 844 418E Texture change, unspecified (abnormal thickness, stiffness, harshness, elas- ticity). For specific texture changes, use a specific symbol such as 4151 (abnormal hardness, abnormal softness, abnormal thickness, etc. ) Abnormal hardening; sclerosis Discoloration (different hue or intensity than normal to the individual or variety). See also Symbols 8771, FA24, etc. Russeting (of fruits) Chlorosis, unspecified as to cause Abnormal increase in depth of green color of plants Icterus (with bile coded in Field D) Cyanosis Flushing, erythema (skin) Pallor due to blood withdrawal from the skin Pallor due to anemia Melanosis Lesion (e. g. , a wound or mechanical in- jury or toxic lesion), destructive pro- cess or state other than those indicated by other symbols of the 4 series and by symbols of the 113- and 114- series. This symbol is generally used only for symptoms (of a disease coded in Field E) treated by the test compound, rather than injury caused by the test compound. Symbol 417 is used for destructive in- jury that is unspecified yet can not be indicated by Symbol 41 because the latter indicates only unspecified change including hypertrophy as well as des- tructive change. Degeneration, unspecified Necrosis, unspecified Necrosis, liquefactive Necrosis, coagulative Necrosis, hemorrhagic Necrosis, caseous Caries Cloudy swelling (parenchymatous degeneration) Hydropic degeneration Fatty degeneration and/or fatty infiltration Hyaline degeneration Amyloid degeneration Mucinoid degeneration Fibrinoid degeneration Cirrhosis Necrosis, liquefactive Necrosis, coagulative; infarction; throm- botic or embolic necrosis, unspecified. (See Symbol series 87--. ) Histolysis or unspecified autolysis Cytolysis Necrobiosis 150 - FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 845 Karyolysis or karyorrhexis 418F Muclnoid degeneration 418G Fibrinoid degeneration 46 418H Demyellnation 418J Necrosis, hemorrhagic 418K Necrosis, caseus 2724 Fibrosis; the formation of fibrous tissue 2725 Fibrosis specifically for adhesion 2726 Replacement fibrosis, specifically replacing fatty tissue 2727 Replacement fibrosis, tissue replaced unspecified 421 Casts, concretions, unspecified. Use Symbol 421 only if specific casts or concretions are not identified (Symbols 47 FA2-, FA3-, or FA4-, for mineral deposits, calcifications, urate or cholesterol deposits). 43 Neoplasia (the formation of a new, abnormal growth [neoplasm] the compo- nent cells increasing in number and being altered from a normal character though they may retain some similarity to the normal cells from which they are derived). Use Symbol 413 for hyperplasia 5 (enlargement of a part due to increase of cells which retain their normal character, not a neoplasm). Use 51 Symbol 43 only with Symbol 7 (or 8, 9, A, or C) in Field T-1 and identify the tumor or tumor type produced in Field E; i. e. , use Symbol 43 only when the test compound produces (or is tested to produce) a tumor (indicating carcino- genic action). If a pre-existing tumor is treated with the test compound, use Symbol 44, 45, or 46. 44 Tumor growth; size of a pre-existing tumor (treated by the test compound) or 511 rate of tumor growth. Use Symbol 44 only with Symbol 1, 2, or 3 (or 8, 9, A, or C) of Field T-1. Code Field E with the tumor identity, if known, or the tumor type or with Symbol S. (Use only 512 Symbol 43 for tumor production by the test compound. ) Acceleration or retar- dation of a lethal tumor is always evaluated in Field Y by Criterion 12 or 57, using Symbol 44 in Field T-2 and Symbol 1, 2, or 3 In Field T-1. 45 Tumor regression; reduction in size of a pre-existing tumor treated by the test 513 compound. Symbol 45 will ordinarily be reasonably used only with Symbol 7 (or 8, 9, A, or C) in Field T-1. Its use 5131 with Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T- I to code slowing or speeding of a naturally regressing tumor is improbable. Code Field E with the tumor identity, if known, or tumor type, or with Symbol S. (Use only Symbol 43^ for tumor production by the test compound. ) Tumor metastasis (process of); spread of a pre-existing tumor treated by the test compound (not the growth rate of any one secondary growth). Use Symbol 46 with Symbol 7, 1, 2, or 3 (or 8, 9, A, or C) in Field T-1. Code Field E with the tumor identity, if known, or tumor type, or with Symbol S. Code the primary site of the tumor in Field H-1; do not code the site of metastasizing. (Use only Symbol 43 for tumor produc- tion by the test compound. ) Tumor incidence; incidence of spontane- ously occurring tumors or incidence of tumors induced by physical factors other than the test compound. Use Symbol 47 only with Symbol 1 or 2 (or 8, 9, A, or C) of Field T-1. Code Field E with the tumor identity, if known, or tumor type, or with Symbol S. (Use only Symbol 43 for tumor production by the test compound. ) Adaptive effects. (Symbol 5 is of im- probable use; specific adaptive effects are indicated by 51, 511, 512, etc.) Tolerance; resistance; refractoriness; lack of sensitivity. Use Symbol 51 only when it is not known whether the phenomenon occurs in an individual of the test organism species during its lifetime (Symbol 512 or 513) or occurs to the species due to selection over several generations (Symbol 511). Consult the Key for an explanation of the use of Symbol 51 and the coding of Field T-1 when this symbol is in Field T-2. Inheritable tolerance; production of a race tolerant to the test compound due to exposure to the test compound. Con- sult the Key for an explanation of the use of Symbols 51, 511, and 512. Individual tolerance (physiological tolerance); increase in tolerance to the test compound during the lifetime of the individual of the test organism species due to administration of the test compound. Consult the Key for an explanation of the use of Symbols 51, 511, and 512. Tolerance by tachyphylaxis. Consult Key for an explanation of the use of Symbols 51, 511, 512, and 513. Cross -tachyphylaxis; tolerance to a secondary compound (Field D) due to tachyphylaxis by the test compound. Consult the Key. 151 - FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 514 5C 52 521 522 53 54 541 5411 5412 542 543 5431 5432 55 56 57 58 Cross-tolerance; tolerance to a secondary compound (Field D) due to administration of the test compound. (Consult the Key. ) Resistance (tolerance) of an organism (host) to a pathogen, parasite, non- infectious pathology, or tumor. (See Symbol Series 5C. For tolerance of the test compound or secondary compound, use Symbol 51, 511, 512, 513, 5131, or 514. ) Pathogenicity of the parasite; virulence. Use only Symbol 1 of Field T-2 with Symbol 52 to code the increase of viru- lence of the pathogen. Use Symbol 2 in Field T-1 with Symbol 52 to code attenuation (decrease of virulence) of the pathogen. Use Symbol 52 itself only if it is not known whether the effect is on the virulence of the indi- vidual of the species within its life- time (Symbol 522) or an inheritable effect on the virulence of the species (Symbol 521). Use Symbols 52, 521. and 522 to include all aspects of suc- cessful infection by the parasite, as well as ultimate intensity of symptoms it can cause, such as the ability to penetrate the host, the ability to estab- lish in the host, etc. Inheritable pathogenicity of the parasite. (See the definition of Symbol 52. ) Pathogenicity of the individual parasite. (See the definition of Symbol 52. ) Motility Tropistic response, unspecified Phototropism or phototaxis (unspecified as to whether negative or positive) Positive phototropism; positive phototaxis Negative phototropism; negative photo- taxis Photophobia Chemotropism or chemotaxis (unspecified as to whether negative or positive) Positive chemotropism or positive chemotaxis Negative chemotropism or negative chemotaxis Behavior of the individual. (Use Symbol 55 only with Symbol 6 [or L, O, or R] of Field T-1. ) Behavior of the group. (Use Symbol 56 only with Symbol 6 [or L, O, or R] of Field T-1. ) Abscission (e. g. , leaf or flower abscission) or autotomy (separation by an animal of one of its parts) Sensitization. Use Symbol 58 only for the phenomenon which results from the administration of certain test compounds (ordinarily non- toxic proteins), develops during an incubation period following administration, and which results in a characteristic and more or less violent reaction on a subsequent administration of the test compound. This sensitization is a process known to involve stimu- lating production of antibodies and the sensitive reaction (e. g. , anaphylactic) is due to the antigen- antibody combi- nation. For sensitivity increases not falling within the specific definition of sensitization, use symbols of the 51-- series. 581 Anaphylactic sensitization; stimulation of anaphylactin by anaphylactogen 1172 Anaphylactic shock 582 Photosensitization 59 Lag period (recovery period) following inoculation. Use Symbol 59 only to indicate the period between introduction of a microorganism into a nutrient medi- um and the time at which it begins to grow. Symbol 59 is not to be used for latent periods following muscle or nerve stimulation (Symbol Series 81-- and 9--). 5A Addiction, habituation, dependence 5B Photoperiodism. Use Symbol 5B only with Symbol 6 (or 8, 9, A, C, L, O, or R) of Field T-1. 5C Resistance (tolerance) of an organism (the host, coded in Field J) to a pathogen, parasite, tumor, or non- infectious disease (coded in Field E), unspecified as to cause. Do not use Symbol 5C itself with Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T-1. Use Symbol 5C only if the test compound causes resistance to the pathogen, tumor, or non-infectious pathology of Field E (Symbol 7 of Field T-1). Use Symbol 5C1, 5C2, or 5C3 for an effect of the test compound on a specific type of resistance to pathology. 5C1 Resistance of an organism to a pathogen, parasite, tumor, or non-infectious pathology, due to exposure to a vaccine or other chemical coded in Field D. (Use Symbol 5C1 only with Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T-1. ) 5C2 Resistance of an organism to a pathogen, parasite, tumor, or non-infectious pathology, due to exposure to the path- ogen, tumor, or pathology in Field E. (Use Symbol 5C2 only with Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T-1. ) 5C3 Natural resistance of an organism to a pathogen, parasite, tumor, or non- infectious pathology. (Use Symbol 5C3 only with Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T-1.) - 152 - FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 50, 60, and 61 Enzyme and enzyme action. (See the note below. ) Note: If the test compound affects, or is tested to affect, metabolic action of any enzyme (including any metabolic action for which there is a specific Field T-2 symbol). Field T-2 is always coded with the specific enzyme (see the special Enzyme Code of Field T-2) rather than the metabolic activity of the enzyme disturbed by the test compound. See the Key. 8 Tissues, cells, fluids (specific con- ditions or processes of tissues, cells, fluids). Symbol 8 is not intended particularly for use for coding even unspecified conditions or processes. It is intended here merely as a heading for this series dealing with the struc- tures indicated. 81 Muscle activity 811 Excitability 8111 Refractory period. Do not use Symbol 8111 for the normal latent period following muscle stimulation. 812 Conduction (transmission) 813 Contraction. Use Symbol 813 only for normal muscle contraction. Use other symbols for abnormal contraction (e. g. , contracture. Symbol 818; muscle spasm, Symbol 8136, and muscle rigor. Symbol 819). 8131 Force of normal contraction 8132 Rate of normal contraction 8133 Amplitude of normal contraction 8134 Peristalsis 8135 Spontaneous contraction other than peristalsis 8136 Muscle spasm (including muscle twitching) 814 Normal relaxation of muscle 815 Action of specific anatomical muscles or muscle groups, unspecified. (Use symbols of the 815- series to code a result of muscle contraction or of mus- cle relaxation, which may be caused or affected by the test compound. For example, flexions, extensions, con- strictions, dilations, etc. of the body of the animal or its parts. 8151 Vasoconstriction (of the vessel specified in Field H-1 or Field H-2). Contraction of the muscular coats of blood vessels. This is not tantamount to increase in blood pressure (Symbol 8211). 8152 Vasodilation (of the vessel specified in Field H-1 or Field H-2). Relaxation of the muscular coats of blood vessels. This is not tantamount to decrease in blood pressure (Symbol 8212). 8153 Extension of the invertebrate (e. g. , moUuscan) body from its encasement, shell, or tube. (Consult the Key. ) 817 Tonus 818 Contracture (prolonged contraction which is reversible; irreversible [permanent] contraction is not contracture but rigor. Symbol 819) 8 1 9 Rigor 81A Muscle fatigue 81B Tetany 81C Fibrillation of skeletal muscle. (For cardiac muscle fibrillations, see Symbol Series C . ) 9A3 Tremor 82 Body fluid pressure, unspecified as to which fluid. 821 Blood pressure, unspecified as to whether increased, decreased, venous, arterial, etc. Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T-1 may not be used with Symbol 821. Consult the Key. 8211 Increased blood pressure (above the pressure characteristic of the individual treated) due only to vasopressor action which causes the increase in pressure through vasomotor stimulation and vas- cular constriction. (Vasoconstriction, however, is not tantamount to an in- crease in blood pressure. Use Symbol 8151 for the specific state of vaso- constriction. ) Use Symbol 8211 for any vasopressor effect resulting in increased blood pressure and caused by the test compound (Symbol 7 of Field T- 1 ) or (as a symptom of a pathology) affected by the test compound (Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T-1). Do not use Symbol 821 1 for increased blood pressure due to any cause other than vasopressor effect (e. g. , do not use 821 1 for increased pressure due to increase in blood volume). Identify the vessel, artery or vein, in Field H-1. 8212 Decreased blood pressure (below the pressure characteristic of the indi- vidual treated) due only to vasode- pressor action which causes the de- crease in pressure through vasomotor depression and vascular dilation. (Vasodilation is not tantamount to de- crease in blood pressure. Use Symbol 8152 for the specific state of vaso- dilation. ) Use Symbol 8212 for any vasodepressor effect resulting in de- creased blood pressure and caused by the test compound (Symbol 7 of Field - 153 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 T-1) or (as a symptom of a pathology) 95 affected by the test compound (Symbol 844 1 or 2 of Field T-U. Do not use Sym- bol 8212 for decreased blood pressure due to any cause other than vasode- 845 pressor effect (e. g. , do not use 8212 4112 for decreased pressure due to a decrease 85 in blood volume). Identify the vessel, artery or vein, in Field H-1. 824 Spinal fluid pressure 825 Intraocular pressure 851 83 Protoplasmic state, protoplasmic processes, and general activity of the protoplasmic unit, the cell. Symbol 83 itself is not intended to be used for a state that can be affected by the test compound; only the symbols of this series, 831, 832, etc., indicate spe- 852 cific protoplasmic states or processes that may be caused or affected by the test compound. 853 831 Streaming of protoplasm 832 Viscosity of protoplasm 833 Sol-gel transformation 8531 834 Coagulation of protoplasm. (Coagulation 854 of blood is coded by Symbol 873. Coag- ulation precipitation of a precipitinogen 8541 is coded by Symbol 837. ) 8542 835 Agglutination of cells other than blood 855 cells. Use Symbol 854 rather than 835 86 for blood cell adherence. (Use only Symbol 7 [or 8, 9, A, or C] with Symbol 835.) 861 836 Phagocytic activity of cells 87 837 Precipitation by the production of precipitin by cells 838 Osmotic pressure of the cell 83 9 Spreading factor 83A Birefringence of protoplasm 83B X-ray diffraction of protoplasm 83C Opacity of protoplasm 83E Reactivation of cells (after inactivation, 871 by irradiation, e. g. ) 83E1 Photoreactivation (recovery [from 1171 irradiation damage] by exposure to 1154 white light) 84 Membrane character; membrane activity. 1155 (If the membrane is of a tissue or cell 872 of a multicellular test organism, specify the Ussue in Field I. ) 8721 841 Surface activity of membranes 8722 842 Permeability. (Use Symbol 842 when the 873 character of the membrane's permeability 8731 Is demonstrated to have been altered by 8732 the test compound. When the test 8733 compound effect is observed to be 8734 selectively on the passage of a partic- 8735 ular secondary compound across the 874 membrane, the effect should be coded 87 5 by use of Symbol FG-- rather than Sym- bol 842. ) Bioelectric (resting) potential Cytolysis. (Use Symbol 844 to code hemolysis, with red blood cell coded in Field H-1. ) Karyolysis; karyorrhexis Pyknosis Blood cells, unspecified. (Use only Symbol 851, 852, etc., for specific qualities of blood cells. Symbol 85 Itself has no particular use. ) Normal number of blood cells. (Use Symbol 851 for the normal blood cell number which may be affected by the test compound. Use Symbol 853 for any decreased number of blood cells, which condition may be relieved or exacerbated by the test compound. ) Normal proportion of blood cells. (Use Symbol 852 only with Symbol 6 of Field T-1. ) Anemia, unspecified as to being a de- crease in blood cells, or a decrease in hemoglobin, or both. Pallor of anemia Blood cell adherence (exclusive of thrombosis, embolism, and clotting) Rouleaux formation Blood cell clumping; blood sludging Blood cell fragility Cell-plasma ratio of blood, hematocrit. (Use Symbol 86 only with Symbol 6 of Field T-1. ) Sedimentation rate Blood, plasma, body fluid; state and activity of fluid tissues, unspecified. This symbol is not intended so much for use in coding as it is intended as a heading for a category of symbols. For example, for decrease in blood, use Symbol 871; for effects on blood clotting, use Symbol 87 3, etc. Decrease in blood volume; hemorrhage; bleeding; diminished blood volume Hemorrhagic shock Collapse (associated with depression and circulatory failure) Syncope Abnormal extravascular accumulation of body fluid, unspecified Edema, unspecified; dropsy, unspecified Ascites Clotting processes, unspecified Prothrombin time Clotting Ume Thrombosis Embolism Bleeding time Cyanosis Dehydration 154 FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 877 8771 878 8781 418B 87A 87B 88 881 882 883 884 89 891 8911 892 8A Hyperemia (active or passive); blood congestion of specific body parts (specify the body part in Field H-1), except skin; use Symbol 8771 speci- fically for blood congestion in skin. Flushing of skin; erythema; hyperemia of skin. (Do not use Symbol 8771 for the flash or temporary flushing of the skin due to vasodilation and increased blood flow, but only for actual blood congestion of some longer duration. ) Ischemia; temporary blood deficiency, chiefly due to local constriction of blood vessels (name the body part in Field H-1), except skin; use Symbol 8781 specifically for temporary blood deficiency of the skin. For permanent 8A1 blood deficiency (leading to infarction), use Symbol 418B. Pallor due to drainage of blood from the skin Obstruction of circulation (permanent blood deficiency of a specific body part), leading to necrosis of the affected part; infarction; coagulation necrosis; 581 thrombotic or embolic necrosis, 1172 unspecified. 8A2 Exudation Filtration of blood or lymph; selective filtration and removal of specific blood components or lymph components, 582 unspecified 1173 Normal chemical balance of protoplasm, 51 cells, tissues, and body fluids, unspecified SB PH Eh (oxidation-reduction potential) 8B1 Alkaline reserve Acid-base balance 9 Serum. (Note; The items listed under Symbol 89 describe and are related to serum and its components, their prop- 91 erties, and their normal and abnormal 911 states. Use symbols of the 8A-- 912 series for coding the phenomena 93 associated with specific serum compo- nents involved in immunological 931 activity. ) 932 Antibody production (except histamine- 933 specific antibody production, Symbol 934 8911) 94 Histamine- specific antibody production. 95 Use Symbol 8911 only with Symbol 1, 96 2, or 3 (or 8, 9, A, or C) of Field T-1. 97 Complement Immunity; immunological reactions (in- 971 volving specific substances of the 972 serum [as well as cells of the organism 98 in general], whose production is coded 981 by symbols of Series 89--), unspecified. 982 Note: The general processes of an organism's becoming more tolerant or more sensitive to the test compound, secondary compound, or other organisms or of being sensitized are coded as adaptive processes by symbols of the 5--- series (51--, 5C--, and 58). The complex of reactions resulting from administration of the test compound to an organism made sensitive or sensi- tized is generally mere suitably coded with special symbols of the 115-, 116-, or 117- series (e.g.. Symbol 1172). Use Symbols of the 8A series only for the reactions at the cellular/tissue level. Anaphylaxis. Use Symbol 8A1 only for the actual combination of anaphylactin- anaphylactogen. Use Symbol 581 for the particular sensitization process stimulating anaphylactin production. Use Symbol 1 172 for response to the anaphylactin-anaphylactogen combi- nation, anaphylactic shock. Anaphylactic sensitization Anaphylactic shock Allergic manifestations other than anaphylaxis, unspecified. See the notes accompanying Symbols 8A and 8A1. Photosensitization Photosensitive reaction Reduction of sensitivity. (See all sym- bols of the 51-- series. ) Organelle function, unspecified. (Function of special structure of a cell.) Trichocyst discharge; nematocyst discharge Function (normal or abnormal) of nerve tissue or of the nervous system, unspecified Psychic state, unspecified Disorientation, confusion Hallucination; hallucinosis Excitation and transmission in nerve tissue Threshold Accommodation, adaptation Refractory period of nerve Supernormal period Chronaxie Action potential and resting potential Brain wave Synaptic transmission, unspecified; ganglionic transmission, unspecified Presynaptic transmission Postsynaptic transmission Neuromuscular transmission End-plate potential Muscle potential - 155 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 983 99 991 992 993 994 995 996 9961 9962 997 998 9981 9982 9983 9984 9985 9986 9987 9988 9989 999 9991 99A 99B 99C 99D 99E 99F 99F1 99G 9A 9A1 9A2 9A3 9A4 9A5 9A6 9A7 9A8 9B 9B1 9B2 9B3 9B4 9B5 9B6 9B7 9871 9B72 Neuromuscular delay Reflex activity, unspecified Patellar reflex (knee jerk) Light reflex Crossed extension reflex Conditioned reflex, unspecified Flexor reflex Herring Breuer reflex Herring Breuer inflation reflex Herring Breuer deflation reflex Tonic neck reflex Pressoreceptor reflex (carotid sinus, aortic body) Carotid sinus reflex Aortic body reflex Aortic depressor reflex Cardiac reflex, left Cardiac reflex, right Bainbridge reflex Pulmonary depressor Coronary chemoreflex (Bezold-Jarisch effect) Pulmonary chemoreflex Respiratory chemoreceptor reflex Carotid body chemoreceptor reflex Righting reflex Swallowing reflex. Use Symbol FFA- for coding emesis (vomiting). Use Symbol 99F for the vomiting reflex. Clonus Corneal reflex (wink, lid reflex) Scratching reflex Vomiting reflex. Use Symbol FFA- for the process of vomiting as a method of elimination or loss of foreign materials from the organism. Retching movement Cough reflex Motor activity, unspecified. (Note that general motility is coded with Symbol 53.) Motor coordination Nystagmus Tremor Hyperactivity Asthenia, weakness, fatigue Lethargy, apathy Shivering Decerebrate rigidity Sensory activity, unspecified Perception of stimulus (irritability, excitability) Discrimination Photoreceptlon (vision) Hearing Equilibrium Vertigo Chemoreceptlon Gustatory chemoreceptlon Olfactory chemoreceptlon 9B8 Pain 9B9 Tactile sensation 9BA Temperature change perception 9BB Nausea 9BC Appetite 9C Proprioreception 9D Sedation 9E Coma, stupor 9F Hypnosis, sleep production 9G Stimulation, analepsis, insomnia A Reproductive process or activity. unspecified Al Gamete formation, unspecified All Spermatogenesis A12 Oogenesis A2 Gamete motility A3 Gamete release A31 Ovulation A4 Fertilization; gamete fusion A5 Oviposition, egg-laying A51 Implantation of ovum A6 Sexual activity, unspecified; function of gonads and accessory organs, unspecified A61 Abortion A62 Parturition A63 Menstruation A9 Self sterility (of monoecious or hermaphroditic organisms) AA Asexual reproduction AAl Vegetative reproduction; budding AA2 Spore formation AA3 Parthenogenesis AA4 Parthenocarpy B Ventilation process, unspecified Bl Gross respiratory activity, unspecified as to phase or quality BU Depth of intake B12 Minute volume B13 Rate B14 Cough B15 Dyspnea B16 Orthopnea B17 Hyperpnea B18 Cheyne-Stokes respiration B19 Sneeze BIA Hiccough B2 Spiracular movement B3 Gaseous diffusion C Cardiovascular activity CI Cardiac rate Cll Auricular functional abnormality, unspecified cm Auricular premature contraction C112 Auricular tachycardia C113 Auricular fibrillation C114 Auricular flutter C12 Ventricular functional abnormality, unspecified 156 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 C121 C122 C123 C13 C131 C132 C133 C134 C135 C136 0137 C2 C21 C22 C23 C4 C6 C8 C81 C811 C812 C9 C91 C92 F Fl Fll F12 F121 F122 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F171 FIB F19 F2 Ventricular premature contractions, extra systoles, idioventricular coupling, ectopic beats Ventricular tachycardia Ventricular fibrillation Pace maker and conduction abnormality, unspecified Sinus arrhythmia Sinus bradycardia F3 Sinus tachycardia Sino-auricular block Sinus arrest Auricular-ventricular block Nodal rhythm Amplitude of heart beat 9BC Force of contraction; systolic force F4 Cardiac output Ballistocardiogram Electric activity (electrocardiogram) Circulatory rate Circulation (specify the organ in Field H-1) Blood flow Acceleration of blood flow Retardation of blood flow Standstill, heart arrest Systolic standstill Diastolic standstill Metabolic activity, unspecified Respiration and fermentation, unspecified. Symbol Fl is used for metabolic F41 respiration; to code ventilation, breathing, etc. , use symbols of series B . If an enzyme is specified, use the symbol for the enzyme (Enzyme Code) rather than a symbol of the F series. F42 Enzyme and enzyme action. (See the note accompanying Symbol 7, follow- ing the 5 series. ) Oxygen uptake Carbon dioxide uptake Aerobic respiration Anaerobic respiration Respiratory quotient F5 Bioluminescence F7 Gas formation, unspecified F71 Acid production, unspecified F72 Nitrogen utilization FD Nitrogen balance. Use Symbol F171 only with Symbol 6 of Field T-1. Carbohydrate and phosphate utilization Fat utilization Function of a vitamin or mineral "trace element", unspecified. Use symbols of the F2-- series only for functions of those dietary components needed in relatively minute quantities and which frequently serve more as regulatory substances than as materials for growth and energy source. For functions of proteins, fats, carbohydrates, water, major minerals (elements, ions, salts) which serve as energy sources, as materials for structural growth, or as regulatory or osmotic and acid-base balance, etc. , use symbols of series F4--. Dietary intake; intake of all components of the diet; ingestion. (For coding the plant process of taking in materials from the soil, water, or other medium in which the plant grows, use Symbol F6-- rather than Symbol F3. ) Appetite Function of protein, carbohydrate, fat, water, or major salt, either as an energy source (catabolism) or as a material for growth (anabolism). Sym- bols of the F4-- series are generally for use only with Symbol A of Field T-1 to indicate that the test compound can replace the specific energy source (F41 -) or replace the material normally incorporated for growth (F42). (The compound replaced is identified in Field D. ) Symbol 7 of Field T-1 may be used with these symbols, however, to indicate that the test compound "has' the function as defined by F41- or F42-. Function of components of the biological organism as sources of energy (catabolism). (Protein, carbohydrate, or fat- -functioning as sources of energy. ) Unspecified. (See the definition for Symbol F4. ) Function of components of the biological organism, or of its diet, as materials for growth (anabolism). (Protein, carbohydrate, fat, salt, water, etc. , as materials eligible for incorporation for protoplasmic growth or specific deposit. ) Unspecified. (See the definition for Symbol F4. ) Basal metabolism Photosynthesis Photosynthetic CO^ uptake Photosynthetic O, output Body temperature. To code "fever" or hypothermia, use Field T-1 Symbols 1, K, N, or Q or Symbols 2, J, M, or P, respectively. - 157 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 The code symbols on this page. Symbols F6--, F8--, F9--, FA--, FB--, FC--, FG--, FH--, and FI--, require appending one of the code symbols of the opposing list (Symbols --1, --11, etc. ) to indicate the chemical whose metabolic handling is affected by the test compound. They are coded with Symbols 7, 1, 2, or 3 of Field T-1 (only Symbol 7, in the case of Symbol FH--), unless the test compound affects a secondary compound's effect on the metabolic handling of compounds of the oppos- ing list (Symbols 8, 9, A, or C of Field T-1). Symbol FA-- and FB-- (and, when a pathology is coded in Field E, Symbols F8-- and FI--) can be combined with Symbol --B (to make Symbols FAB, FBB, FSB, and FIB) and coded with Symbol 7 (never with Symbols 8, 9, A, or C) of Field T-1 to indicate that the test compound is stored, absorbed, synthesized, or withdrawn. Each of the nine symbols is defined only briefly here to permit all nine being on a single page for convenience in matching and combining them with the symbols of the opposing list. The Key continues the definition for each separately, indi- cating specifications and limitations of their use; reference must be made to those Key definitions and explanations to use the symbols correctly. In each case, identify in Field D the specific secondary compound (indicated in Field T-2 only by type, by the last two units of the symbol), if known, except when Field T-1 is coded with Symbol 8, 9, A, or C, when the secondary compound (whose effect on the metabolism of the compound indicated by one of the symbols of the following list is affected by the test compound) is coded in Field D and the specific identity of the compound whose metabolism is affected is only written, not coded, in Field T-2. F6-- Nutrient uptake; uptake of the type of nutrient indicated by the last two units of the symbol. F8-- Chemosynthesis; synthesis of the type of secondary compound indicated by the last two units of the symbol; synthesis of the test compound indicated by Symbol FSB (ONLY when synthesis of the test compound is a symptom of a pathology coded in Field E). F9-- Distribution of the type of secondary compound indicated by the last two units of the symbol. FA-- Storage, deposit, concentration, or tissue level of the type of secondary compound indicated by the last two units of the symbol; storage, deposit, or tissue level of the test compound. Indicated by Symbol FAB. FB-- Absorption of the type of secondary compound indicated by the last two units of the two units of the symbol; absorption of the test compound. Indi- cated by Symbol FBB. FC-- Excretion, secretion, guttation, or exu- dation (resulting in loss or with the objective of discard) of the type of normal secondary compound indicated by the last two units of the symbol. For endocrine secretion or other secre- tion not representing loss or discard, use symbols other than FC--. Consult the Key. (Use Symbol FC-- only for ex- cretion or secretion of compounds normal to any of the normal excretory or secre- tory organs or tissues. ) Use Symbol FF-- (defined after symbols of the FE-- series) to code excretion or secretion of the test compound or any other com- pound not normal to the excretory or secretory tissue or organ. FG-- Ability to permeate or penetrate; ability, of the type of secondary compound indicated by the last two units of the symbol, to permeate or penetrate cells, tissues, or membranes. FH-- Incorporation of the test compound per se into the type of secondary compound indicated by the last two units of the symbol. FI-- Withdrawal of the type of secondary compound indicated by the last two units of the symbol; withdrawal of the test compound indicated by Symbol FIB (ONLY when this withdrawal of the test compound is a symptom of a pathology coded in Field E). 158 FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 • 1 Carbohydrate ■ 11 Monosaccharide ■12 Glycoside ■13 Disaccharide ■ 14 Polysaccharide • 15 Glycogen ■16 Starch ■ 17 Uronic acids (glucuronides, etc. ) ■2 Nitrogenous material ■21 Protein ■22 Non-protein nitrogen (NPN) ■23 Respiratory pigment ■24 Pigment, other than respiratory pigment ■ 25 Amino acid ■26 Serum protein •27 Nucleic acid ■28 Purines and/or pyrimidines ■29 Peptides ■3 Lipid and/or steroid •31 Fatty acid ■32 Ketone body ■33 Phospholipids •34 Lipoproteins •35 Carotenoids (animals only) ■36 Plant sterols •37 Bile acid •4 Mineral •41 Apatite ■5 Hormone •51 Sex hormone, male • 52 Sex hormone, female •53 Cortical hormones •54 Plant hormones •6 Vitamin • 7 Enzyme • 71 Coenzyme ■ 8 Alkaloid ■9 Electrolytes other than HCO3- A Respiratory gases and HCO3- •B Test compound. Combine --B only with Symbol FA-- or FB--, or (when a pathology is coded in Field E and synthesis or withdrawal of the test compound is a symptom) with Symbol F8-- or FI--. •C Antibiotic •D Toxin ■E Water •F Miscellaneous chemicals not covered by other items •G Plant acids - 159 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 The following symbols of the FE-- series are to be used for coding specific alter- ations of the test compound. They are also used for coding specific alterations of secondary compounds when that alter- ation is affected (increased, decreased, stopped) by the test compound or when the test compound is essential for the secondary compound's alteration. Fi- nally, they are used for coding specific alterations of a third compound which are affected by a secondary compound when that effect of the secondary com- pound is affected (synergized, antagon- ized, etc. ) by the test compound. In the case of each of the last two uses of symbols of the FE-- series. Symbol * must be coded in Column 61. The spe- cific directions for the coding procedure when these symbols are used are very important. They are included only in the Key which must be consulted to assure coding Fields T- 1 and D correctly with these symbols. FE Alteration, unspecified. (Symbol FE can be used to indicate that the test compound is a precursor for [and altered to] a specific biological product coded in Field D. ) FEl Detoxification, unspecified FEZ Oxidation, unspecified (Symbol FEZ is not used for C-C bond cleavage. ) Use Symbol FEA for glucose oxidation, etc. FEZl Aliphatic hydrocarbon —^ alcohol FEZ2 Alcohol — ^ aldehyde or ketone FE23 Aldehyde — acid FEZ4 Alcohol — acid FE25 Dehydrogenation of an aliphatic chain or carbocyclic ring (unsaturation) FEZ6 Peroxidation FE27 Aromatic hydrocarbon — ^ phenol FEZ8 Phenol — - quinone FE29 Sulfhydryl -^ sulfide FEZJ S-O bond formation or oxidation (e. g. , SO4 from SO3, sulfone formation) FEZK Valence change (e.g., ++ to+++), for elements other than N, O, P, and S FEZL p-oxidation FEZM Omega oxidation FE3 Reduction, unspecified FE31 Alcohol aliphatic hydrocarbon FE3Z Aldehyde or ketone — ► alcohol FE33 Acid — ^ aldehyde FE34 Acid — alcohol FE35 Hydrogenation of an aliphatic chain (saturation) FE3 6 Hydrogenation of an aromatic ring (loss of aromaticlty) FE37 FE38 FE39 FE3J FE3K FE4 FE41 FE42 FE43 FE44 FE45 FE5 FE51 FE5Z FE53 FE6 FE61 FE6Z FE63 FE7 FE71 FE7Z FE73 FE7 4 FE7 5 FE76 FE77 FE78 FE7 9 FES FE81 FE8Z FE83 FE84 FE9 FE91 FE9Z FEA FEAl FEAZ FEA3 FEA4 FEA5 FEA6 FEA7 Quinone — ^ phenol Imino — - amino Sulfide — sulfhydryl Reduction of S-O compounds (e. g. , SO4 — SO3) Valence change (e.g. +++ to ++) for elements other than N, O, P, and S Conjugation, combination, unspecified Conjugation with glucuronic acid or other sugar acid Conjugation with glycine or other amino acid Conjugation with sulfate Formation of mercapturic acids Detoxification with glutamine Acylation, unspecified Acetylation Acylation with other aliphatic acids (e. g. , formylation) Acylation with aromatic acids (e. g. , benzoylation) Esterification, unspecified Esterification with phosphoric acid Esterification with ATP, ADP Esterification with CoA Hydrolysis, unspecified Hydrolysis of a simple ester Hydrolysis of a peptide bond Hydrolysis of a sulfur-carbon bond (e. g. , Acetyl coenzyme A) Deacylation (e.g. , hydrolysis of acetylcholine) Deconjugation (e.g. , hydrolysis of glucuronides) Hydrolysis of phosphate ester linkages; dephosphorylation (e. g. , Glucose-6- PO4) Hydrolysis of pyrophosphate linkages (e. g. , ATP, ADP) Hydrolysis of N-P linkages (e.g. , phosphocreatine) Hydrolysis of acetal linkages (e.g. , sucrose) Deamination, unspecified Oxidative deamination Transamination Deamidation Deamidination Binding Chelation Protein-binding Degradation, unspecified Degradation to unidentified products Carbon bond cleavage; loss of carbon atoms Decyclization, ring cleavage and opening Ring contraction Decarboxylation Oxidative decarboxylation Depolymerization 160 FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 FEA8 Fermentation FEB Alkylation FEBl Transmethylation FEB2 Demethylation FEB3 Alkylation, other than CH3 FEB4 Dealkylation, other than CH3 FEC Phosphorylation, unspecified FECI Phosphorylation with phosphoric acid FEC2 Phosphorylation with ATP, ADP FED Dehalogenation FEE Halogenation (e. g. , iodination of tyrosine) FEF Dehydration, unspecified FEFl Dehydration with production of a double bond FEF2 Dehydration with production of anhydride FEG Amination, unspecified FECI IminaUon FEG2 Peptidation FEG3 Amidation FEG4 Amidination FEG5 Transpeptidation FEH Condensation, unspecified FEHl Carboxylation, addition of CO2 FEH2 FormaUon of C-C bonds FEH3 Formation of C-S bonds (e. g. , Acetyl CoA) FEH4 Cyclization FEH 5 Ring expansion FEH6 Polymerization, polysaccharides FEH7 Polymerization, proteins FEH8 Polymerization, nucleic acids FEI Isomerization, unspecified FEII Optical isomerization; racemization FEI2 Cis-trans isomerization FED Keto-enol isomerization, tautomerization FEI4 Double bond shift FEI5 Molecular rearrangements, shift of entire functional groups (e. g. , mutase reactions) 161 FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 FF-- Excretion, secretion, guttation, exudation of the test compound or any other type of foreign compound (indicated by the last unit of the symbol) via the excretory or secretory path indi- cated by the third unit of the symbol. Symbol FF is never used alone (with no coding in Columns 60 and 61), but only as one of the FF- series (FFl, FF2, FF3, etc. ), combined with a symbol of a second series ( 1, 2, etc. ). Note that symbols of the FF-- series are used only when the material excreted or secreted is the test compound or when it is any material not normally excreted or secreted over the specific excretory or secretory path in- volved. (It may be a material normally excreted or secreted by the organism, but if it is over an abnormal path, It should be coded by a symbol of the FF-- series. ) If it is not the test compound whose excretion or secretion is being coded or if it is a material normally excreted or secreted over the secretory or excretory path, use Symbol FC-- instead of Symbol FF--. The two symbol series referred to above, by which symbols of the FF-- series are composed, are presented together, below, for convenience in referring to both. The items of each of the following two lists are represented by incomplete symbols. Any sym- bol of one list must be combined with one of the symbols of the other to form a complete symbol. In other words, any of the materials of the first list (the test compound, B, or any other foreign mate- rial, 1, — Z, etc. ) can be indicated as being excreted or secreted over any excretory or secretory path (FFl- [FFU, FF12, etc.], FF2- [FF21, FF22, etc.], etc.). See the preceding definiUon of FF--. If the foreign material secreted or excreted is not the test compound and if its specific identity is determined, code the specific material secreted or excreted in Field D. General types of materials foreign to the test organism (including the test compound); | materia s which may not be foreign to the test org anism, but are secreted or excreted over paths over which they are not normally excreted or secreted. If known, code the specific identity in Field D. (Use only Symbol FC-- for excretion or secretion of normal materials, excreted or secreted over normal paths. ) ---1 Carbohydrate ---2 Ketone body ---3 Lipid and/or steroid ---4 Mineral ---5 Hormone ---6 Vitamin Y Enzyme ---B Test compound ---E Water ---F Miscellaneous chemicals not covered by other items ---G Metabolite of the chemical specified in Field D ---H Metabolite of the test compound ---I Pigment (including protein pigment); dyes ---J Protein (other than pigments) ---K Amino acid ---L Non-protein nitrogen (NPN) Secretory or excretory path. The following items are anatomical structures, the products of structures, or processes, each of which represents a path over which the test compound or other material of the opposing list may be eliminated. Use of an item of this list does not supplant coding in Fields H-1 and/or I and the specific structure indicated by the symbol used from this list must be coded in Fields H-1 and/or I. Of this list. Symbol FFA- (vomiting) represents a rejective elimi- nation and not excretion or secretion. It is used in preference to any other symbol, however, to code such elimination of the test compound or other foreign material ingested. FFl- Urine FF2- Feces FF3- Lungs FF4- Sweat FF5- Bile FF6- Cuticle FF7- Milk FF8- Saliva FF9- Transpiration FFA- Emesis, vomiting FFB- Roots FFC- Tears FFD- Gastric juice - 162 ENZYME CODE FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 11 71 710 7101 7 102 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 710A 710B 7 IOC 710D 710E 710F 710G 71 OH 7101 710J 710L 710M 7 ION 710P 71 OR 71 OS 710T 710U 710V 711 7111 7112 7113 712 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 713 714 7141 715 716 7161 717 7171 718 719 7191 7192 Proteases Proteinases Peptidase, tobacco Polypeptidase, yeast Salmon pepsin Prolidase Prolinase Protaminase Renin Rennin Trypsin Solanain Streptokinase Thrombin Tabernamontanain Anti streptokinase Antifibrinolysin Profibrinolysin Prorennin Trypsinogen Antiprofibrinolysin Prothrombin Antlthrombin Thromboplastin Anti thromboplastin Fibrinokinase Venom thrombin Venom thromboplastin Platelet factors Ac-globulin Aminopolypeptidases Leucine aminopeptidase Am inotri peptidase Lymphopeptidase Arachain Aspergillus oryzae proteinase Streptococcus A proteinase Streptococcus A proteinase precursor Bacillus subtilis gelatinase Bacillus amyloliquefaciens proteinase Clostridium histolyticum collagenase Clostridium welchii collagenase Micrococcus lyscdeikticus gelatinase Bacillus pyocyaneus proteinase Asclepain m Asclepain £ Syriana asclepain Bromelin Bacterial peptidase Bacillus botulinus proteinase Carboxy peptidase Carboxypolypeptidase Cathepsin I Cathepsin II Cathepsin C Cathepsin V 71A Cathepsin III 71B Cathepsin IV 7 ID Chymotrypsins 71D1 a-Chymotrypsin 71D2 P-Chymotrypsin 71D3 Chymotrypslnogen 71D4 \-Chymotrypsin 71D5 A-Chymotrypsin 71D6 Pi-Chymotrypsin 71D7 B-Chymotrypsin 7 IDS Chymotrypslnogen- B 7 IE Dehydropeptidase I 71E1 Dehydropeptidase II 7 IF Dermopeptidase 7 1G Depeptidases 71G1 Glycylglycine dipeptidase 71G2 Glycyl-L-leucine dipeptidase 71G3 Carnosinase 71G4 Alanylglycine dipeptidase 71G5 Glutathionase 71G6 Cysteinylglycinase 71H Enterokinase 711 Erepsin 71J Euphorbain 71K Ficin 71L Fungi peptidase 71M Gelatinase 71M1 Collagenase 71M2 Elastase 71N Hurain 710 Hypertensinase 7 IP Keratlnase 71Q Leucoprotease 71R Mexicanain 718 Papain 7181 Papain peptidase I 7182 Papain peptidase II 71T Pepsin 71T1 Pepsinogen 71U D-Peptidase 71V L-Peptidase 71V^ Pinguinain 7 IX Fibrinolysin 71Y Papain a-trypsinase 71Z Papain P-trypsinase 72 72 Esterases 721 Acetylesterase 722 Renal acylase I 723 Acetanilide acylase 724 Meperidine esterase 725 Diisopropyl fluorophosphate esterase 726 Succinic daecylase 163 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 73 73 732 7321 733 7331 734 736 7361 737 7371 738 739 73A 73B 73C 73C1 73C2 73C3 73C4 73D 73D1 73E 73F 73G 73H 731 7311 7312 7313 7315 73J 73K 73L 73M 73N 73P 73Q 73R 73S 74 74 7401 7402 7403 7404 7405 7407 7409 740A 741 742 7421 7422 7423 7424 7425 Amidases Adenosine deaminase Adenase 5-Adenylic acid deaminase 3 -Adenylic acid deaminase AUantoicase Arginase Guanidodesimidase Asparaginase I Asparaginase II Benzamidase Canavanase Creatinase Cytidine deaminase Glutaminases Glutaminase I Glutaminase II Brain glutaminase Bacterial glutaminase Guanase Cytosine deaminase Guanosine deaminase Guanylic acid deaminase Hippuricase Histidase Phosphoaminase Kidney phosphoamidase Venom phosphoamidase Rice bran phosphoamidase DPN pyrophosphatase Urease Urocanase Creatininase Hydantoinase Glycocyaminase Acetamidase Histidine a-deaminase Formylisoglutaminase Isoglutaminase Glycosidases Protopectinase Prunase Seminase Stachyase Synthiase P-Thioglucosidase Trehalase Xylanase Amygdalase a-Amylases Hog pancreas a-amylase Human pancreas a-amylase Salivary a-amylase Malt a-amylase Bacillus subtills a-amylase 7426 Aspergillus oryzae a-amylase 7427 Muscle amylase 7428 Liver a-amylase 7429 Bee amylase 743 P-Amylases 7431 Barley P-amylase 7432 Wheat p-amylase 7433 Sweet potato (3-amylase 7434 Malt (3-amylase 7435 Rye P-amylase 7436 Rhizopus delemar (3-amylase 744 Bacillus macerans amylase 7441 Dextranase 7442 Isoamylase 745 Amylokinase 746 Arabanase 747 a-D-Arabinosidase 748 (3-D-Arabinosidase 74A Cellulase 74B Chitinase 74B1 Chitodextrinase 74B2 Chitobiase 740 Clarase 74D Cytases 74E Glucosaccharase 74E1 Invertase 74F Fructopyranosidase 74G a-D-Galactosidase 74H p-D-Galactosidases 74H1 Almond p-D-Galactosidase 74H2 Yeast (3-D-galactosidase 741 P-D-glucosidases 7411 Almond emulsin 7412 Yeast emulsin 7413 Animal P-glucosidase 74J (3-(N-acetyl)-GlycosamInidase 74K p-D-Glucosaminidase 74L a-D-Glucosidases 74L1 Yeast maltase 74L2 Barley maltase 74L3 Aspergillus oryzae maltase 74L4 Intestine mucosa maltase 74L5 Skeletal muscle maltase 74L6 Bacterial maltase 74L7 a-Methylglucosidase 74L8 Amylo-1, 6-glucosidase 74L9 Z enzyme 74M p-Glucuronidase 740 Mucases 74P Hyaluronidases 74P1 Bacterial hyaluronidase 74P2 Animal hyaluronidase 74P3 Hyaluronate mucodextrinase 74P4 Hyaluronic acid oligomucase 74P5 Bacterial sulfomucase 74P6 Heparinase 74P7 Sulfomucodextrinase 74P8 Oligosulfomucase 740 Inulase 74R Lichenase 164 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 74S Lysozyme 74T a-D-Mannosidase 74U Q-L-Mannosidase 74V P-D-Mannosidase 74W P-L-Mannosidase 74X Polygalacturonase 74Y Pectin depolymerase 74Z Polidase 7_5 ,75 Oxidases 751 Ascorbic acid oxidase 752 Butyric oxidase 753 Catalase 7 54 Cytochrome a 7 541 Cytochrome aj 7542 Cytochrome 32 7543 Cytochrome 34 755 Cytochrome b 7551 Cytochrome bj 7552 Cytochrome b^ *7501 Glutathione reductase 7553 Cytochrome f 756 Cytochrome c 757 Cytochrome c peroxidase 758 Cytochrome oxidase 759 Histaminase 75A Dioxymaleic acid oxidase 75B DOPA oxidase 7 5C Glutathione oxidase 75C1 Desulfinase 75C2 Cysteine oxidase A 75C3 Cysteine oxidase B 75C4 Cystine oxidase 75C5 Thiocyanate oxidase 75C6 Cystine disulfoxide decarboxylase 75C7 Cysteine sulfinic acid decarboxylase 75C8 Aliinase 76C9 Cystathionase 75D Laccase 7 5E Lipoxidases 75E1 Plant lipoxidase 75E2 Animal lipoxidase 7 5E3 Lipoxidase activator 75F Monoamine oxidase 7 5G Ortophenolase 75H Peroxidases 75H1 Plant peroxidase 75H2 Milk peroxidase 75H3 Myeloperoxidase 75H4 Paraperoxidase 7 5H5 Peroxidase 11 7 5H6 Salivary peroxidase 75H7 Tryptophan peroxidase 751 Tyrosinase 7 5J Monophenol oxidase 75K Polyphenol oxidase 75L Cytochrome system 75M Kidney laccase 7 5N Phenol dehydrase 75P Q-Hydroxacid oxidase, animal 75P1 Q-Hydroxacid oxidase, plant 75Q Indoleacetic acid oxidase 75R Inositol oxidase 75R1 Lactose oxidase 75S Choline oxidase 75SI Betalne aldehyde oxidase 7 5T GlycoUic acid oxidase 7 5U Succinoxidase system 7 5V Slater factor 7 5W Quinine oxidase 75X P-Hydroxybutyric acid dehydrogenase, bacterial 7 5Y Sarcosine oxidase 75Z Phenylalanine oxidase system 76 76 Nucleases 761 Desoxyribonucleases 7611 Thymus desoxyribonuclease 7612 Pancreas desoxyribonuclease 7613 Yeast desoxyribonuclease 7614 Streptococcal desoxyribonuclease 762 Nucleosidases 7621 Purine nucleosidase 7622 Pyrimidine nucleosidase 7623 Ribonucleic acid phosphorylase 7624 Nucleotide-N-ribosidase 7625 Coenzyme I nucleosidase 7626 Inosine phosphorylase 7627 Thymidine phosphorylase 7628 Uridine phosphorylase 7629 Uridine nucleosidase 764 Ribonuclease 77 77 Phosphorylases 771 a-1, 4- Phosphorylases 7711 Animal phosphorylase 7712 Plant phosphorylase 7713 Muscle phosphorylase a 7714 Muscle phosphorylase b 7715 PR enzyme 7716 Liver phosphorylase 772 p-1, 6- Phosphorylase 7721 P-1. 6- Phosphorylase, animal 7722 P-1, 6- Phosphorylase, plant 773 a-Glucosan phosphorylase 778 Sucrose phosphorylase 779 Maltose phosphorylase 77A Q enzyme, potato 77A1 Q enzyme, protozoan 77B Amylosucrase 77C Amylomaltase 77D Maltose transglucosidase 77E Transfructosidase 77F P enzyme - 165 - FIELD T-Z Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 77G Isomaltomaltase 77H Inulosucrase 771 Trans-N-glycosidase 77J Laminarinase 77K Transacetylase 77L CoA transphorase 77M CoA pyrophosphate transacetylase 77N Acetoacetate- synthesizing enzyme 770 Glutamo-transferase 77P Asparto-transferase 77Q Glutamo-transphorase 77R Phosphatidic acid transferase 78 Transphosphorylases 781 Creatine kinase 782 ADP-Creatine transphosphorylase 782A ATP-Argimne transphosphorylase 783 Phosphoglyceric phosphokinase 784 Pyruvic phosphokinase 785 TPN kinase 786 Phosphofructokinase I 787 Phosphofructokinase II 788 Glucokinase 789 Hexokinase 78A Myokinase 78B Acetokinase 78D Adenosine kinase 78E Acetyl kinase 78F Pyridoxal kinase 78G DPN kinase 78H Choline phosphokinase 781 Xylokinase 78J Triosekinase 78K CoA kinase 78L Flavokinase 78M FAD- synthesizing enzyme 78N Thiamine kinase 78P Galactokinase 78Q Mannokinase 78R Ribokinase 78S Arabokinase 78T Gluconokinase 78U Fructokinase, liver 78V Fructokinase, muscle 78W Phosphoglucokinase 78X Glutamine-synthesizing system 78Y Glycerol kinase 79 79 Hydrase or dehydrase 791 Aconitase 792 Aspartase I 7921 Aspartase II 793 Carbonic anhydrase 794 Cysteine desulfhydrase 795 Enolase 796 Fumarase 7 97 798 799 7 9A 79B 79C 7A 7A 7A1 7A2 7A3 7A4 7A7 7A8 7A9 7B 7B 7B1 7B2 7B3 7C 7C 7C1 7C2 7C4 7C5 7C6 7D 7D 7D1 7D2 7D3 7D4 7D5 7D6 7D7 7D8 7D9 7D91 7D92 7D93 7 DA 7DB 7DC 7DD 7DE 7DG 7DG1 7DH 7DH1 Glyoxalase Serine dehydrase Exocystine desulfhydrase Homocysteine desulfhydrase Threonine deaminase Maledse Mutase Aldehyde mutase Phosphoglucomutase Phosphoglyceromutase Pyruvic dismutase system Phosphofructomutase Phosphoribomutase Phosphodesoxyribomutase Lipases Castor bean lipase Gastric lipase Pancreatic lipase Isomerases Phosphohexoisomerase Phosphotrioseisomerase Phosphopentose isomerase Phosphomannose isomerase Phosphogalactose isomerase Desmolases Acetoacetic acid carboxylase Q-Acetolactic carboxylase L-Alanine decarboxylase Aspartic acid decarboxylase Pyruvic carboxylase Condensing enzyme Decarboxylase, animal Decarboxylase, plant Desoxyribose phosphate aldolase Hydrogenase Pyridine nucleotide transhydrogenase Ribose phosphate aldolase a-Ketoglutaric carboxylase Oxaloacetic carboxylase Oxalosuccinic carboxylase L-Arglnine decarboxylase Cysteic acid decarboxylase L-3, 4-Dihydroxyphenylalanine decarboxylase Phenylalanine decarboxylase L-Glutamic acid decarboxylase, bacterial L-Glutamic acid decarboxylase, plant 166 FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 7DH2 L-Glutamlc acid decarboxylase, animal 7D L-Histidine decarboxylase, bacterial 7DI1 L-Histidine decarboxylase, plant 7DJ L-Lysine decarboxylase 7DK L-Ornithine decarboxylase 7DL Pyruvate oxidase system 7DM L-Tyrosine decarboxylase, bacterial 7DM1 L-Tyrosine decarboxylase, animal 7DM2 p-Hydroxyphenylserine decarboxylase 7DN Tryptophan decarboxylase, bacterial 7DN1 Tryptophan decarboxylase, animal 7D0 Aldolase 7DP Carboligase, yeast 7DP1 Aerobacter aerogenes carboligase 7DP2 Animal carboligase 7DP3 Formaldehyde-pyruvate carboligase 7DP4 Succinic acid decarboxylase 7DQ Tryptophanase 7DR Tryptophan desmolase 7DS Kynureninase, bacterial 7DS1 Kynureninase, animal 7DT 6-Phosphogluconate oxidase system 7DU a-Ketoglutarate-isocitrate carboxylase system 7DU1 a-Ketoglutarate-isocitrate carboxylase system, yeast 7DV Glyoxylic acid carboxylase 7DW Lactic carboxylase 7DX Malic enzyme, liver 7DX1 Malic enzyme, bacterial 7E 7E Dehydrogenases 7E01 Xanthine oxidase 7E1 Alcohol dehydrogenase 7E11 Alcohol dehydrogenase, animal 7 El 2 Alcohol dehydrogenase, plant 7E13 Aldehyde dehydrogenase 7E14 Retlnene reductase 7E15 Acetaldehyde dehydrogenase 7E2 D-Amino acid oxidase 7E21 D-Amino acid oxidase, molds 7E22 D-Amino acid oxidase, bacterial 7E23 D-Aspartic acid oxidase 7E3 L-Amino acid oxidase 7E3I Ophio-L-amino acid oxidase 7E32 L-Amino acid oxidase, molds, insoluble 7E3 3 L-Amino acid oxidase, molds, soluble 7E34 L-Amino acid oxidase, bacterial 7E35 L-Proline oxidase 7E5 Citric acid dehydrogenase 7E51 Nitrate reductase 7E52 Nitro reductase 7E6 Cytochrome c reductase I 7E7 Cytochrome c reductase II 7E8 Diaphorase I 7E9 Diaphorase II 7EA Fatty acid dehydrogenase 7EB Formic acid dehydrogenase 7EB1 Formic dehydrogenase, bacterial 7EC Fumaric hydrogenase 7ED Glucose dehydrogenase 7ED1 Sorbitol dehydrogenase 7ED2 Glycerol dehydrogenase 7EE Glucose oxidase 7EF Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase 7EF1 Ribose-5-phosphate dehydrogenase 7EG Glutamic acid dehydrogenase, liver 7EG1 Glutamic acid dehydrogenase, yeast 7EG2 Glutamic acid dehydrogenase, animal 7EG3 L-Amino acid dehydrogenase 7EG4 Choline dehydrogenase 7EG5 Glyoxal dehydrogenase 7EG6 GlycoUic acid oxidase 7EH Glycine oxidase 7EI Q-Glycerophosphate dehydrogenase 7EJ a-Glycerophosphate dehydrogenase I 7EK a-Glycerophosphate dehydrogenase II 7EM P-Hydroxybutyric dehydrogenase 7EN Isocitric acid dehydrogenase 7EN1 Isocitric acid dehydrogenase, plant 7E0 a-Ketoglutarate oxidase system 7EP Lactic acid dehydrogenase 7EP1 Lactic acid dehydrogenase, animal 7EP2 Lactic dehydrogenase, yeast 7EQ Liver aldehyde oxidase 7ER Malic acid dehydrogenase I 7ES Malic dehydrogenase II 7ET New yellow enzyme 7EU Old yellow enzyme 7EV Phosphogluconic dehydrogenase 7EW Triosephosphate dehydrogenase, yeast 7EY Succinic dehydrogenase 7EZ Triosephosphate dehydrogenase, muscle 7F 7F Transaminases 7F1 Glutamic-alanine transaminase 7F2 Glutamic-aspartic transaminase 7F3 Ornithine-pyruvate transaminase 7F4 Ornithine-oxalacetic transaminase 7F5 Ornithine-a-ketoglutaric transminase 7F6 Pyridoxamine phosphate-pyruvate transaminase 7G 7G1 Antinvasin I 7G2 Antinvasin II 7G3 Dextransucrase 7G5 Lactic acid racemase 7G51 Alanine racemase 7G52 Glutamic acid racemase 7G6 Levansucrase 7G7 Luciferase 7G8 Nitrilase 7G9 Oxynitrilase 7GA Penicillinase 167 - FIELD T-2 Columns 58, 59, 60, and 61 7GB Pitocinase 7GC Proinvasin I 7GD Pyrocanase 7GE Rhodanase 7GF Saturase 7GG Thlaminase 7GH Transmethylases 7GJ Uricase 7GL Citrulline-arglnlne enzyme 7GM Cyanase 7GN Streptomycinase 7G0 Triacetic enzyme 7GP Pantothenic acid- synthesizing enzyme 7GQ Choline-homocysteine transmethylase 7GR Methionine-nicotinamide transmethylase 7GS Methionine-guanidoacetic transmethylase 7GT Methionine-ethanolamine transmethylase 7GU a-Methyltryptophan demethylase 7K 7K Phosphatases 7K01 Acid nucleotidase 7K02 Alkaline nucleotidase 7K05 Phosphomonoesterase III 7K06 Phosphomonoesterase IV 7K07 Ethyl phosphatase 7K08 2, 3-dlphosphoglycerate phosphatase 7K1 Adenosinediphosphatase 7K2 Adenosinetriphosphatases 7K2 1 Ophio-adenosinetriphosphatase 7K22 Apyrase 7K23 Brain adenosinetriphosphatase 7K24 Liver adenosinetriphosphatase 7K25 Muscle adenosinetriphosphatase 7K26 Yeast adenosinetriphosphatase 7K3 Amylophosphatase 7K4 Phospholipase D 7K5 Phospholipase C 7K6 Glucose-6-phosphatase 7K7 Metaphosphatases 7K71 Yeast metaphosphatase 7K72 Mold metaphosphatase 7K7 3 Yeast hexametaphosphatase 7K74 Erythrocyte hexametaphosphatase 7K75 Liver trimetaphosphatase 7K7 6 Yeast tetrametaphosphatase 7K9 Nucleotidases 7KA1 Phosphomonoesterase II 7KA2 Phosphomonoesterase I 7KA3 Hexose diphosphatase 7KA4 Glycerophosphatase 7KA5 5-Nucleotldase 7KA6 Dlphosphopyridine nucleotidase 7KA7 Nonphosphataslc diphospyridine nucleotidase 7KA8 Flavinadenine dinucleotidase 7KB Phosphoproteinphosphatase 7KC Phosphodiesterases 7KC1 Serum phosphodiesterase 7KC2 Liver phosphodiesterase 7KC3 Dialkylfluorophosphatase 7KD Phosphomonoesterases 7KE Phytase 7KF Pyrophosphatases (inorganic) 7KF1 Pyrophosphatase I 7KF2 Pyrophosphatase II 7KF3 Pyrophosphatase III 7KH Thiamine pyrophosphatase 7KJ Acetylphosphatase 7KK Polyphosphatases 7S 7S Phospholipases 751 Acetylmorphinesterase 752 Cholesterolesterase 753 Choline acetylase 754 Cholinesterases 7541 Cholinesterase, true 7542 Cholinesterase, pseudo 755 Chlorophyllase 756 Chondrosulfatase 757 Glucosulfatase 758 Phospholipase A 759 Phospholipase B 7SA Myrosulfatase 7SB Pectin-methylesterase 7SC Phenol sulfatase 7SD Tannase 7SE Procainesterase 7SF Tropacocainesterase 7SG Acetylsalicylate esterase 7SH Atropinesterase 7SI Cocainesterase 7SJ Succinyl deacylase 168 FIELD T-3 Columns 6Z, 63, and 64 CATEGORY OF THE TEST COMPOUND'S EFFECT REPRESENTING PRACTICAL USE Series 1-- Categories of agents candidate for practical use in controlling populations of the test organism (i. e. , in causing death, repulsion, or attraction of the test organism). 101 Air disinfecting agent 102 Water disinfecting agent 103 Anti-fouling agent 104 Anti-viral activity 105 Rickettsicide 106 Antibacterial agent; bactericide or bacteriostat 107 Antifungal (fungitoxic) agent; fungicide or fungi stat 108 Herbicide (referring to killing of higher plants only) 109 Antimalarial agent 110 Protozoacide (exclusive of antimalarial agents for which Symbol 109 is used) 111 Vermicide; anthelmintic 112 MoUuscacide 113 Insecticide 114 Acaricide 115 Rodenticide 116 Repellent 117 Attractant 118 Gametocide; spermatocide Series 2-- Categories of agents candidate for practical pharmacological use in controlling certain physiological processes or pathological conditions. 201 Analgesic; a compound which relieves pain without producing unconsciousness 202 Androgenic: a compound which promotes development of secondary sex organs of the male, spermatogenesis, descent of testes, etc. 203 Anesthetic, general: a compound which produces reversible loss of the sense of touch, pain, and other modalities of sensation and consciousness by action on the central nervous system 204 Anesthetic, local; a compound which reversibly blocks excitation and conduction in nerve tissue 205 Anti- arthritic; a compound which decreases signs and symptoms of arthritis 206 Anti-coagulant: a compound which prevents coagulation or gelation of plasma or other tissue fluid. (Use Symbol 238 to classify a compound as a blood coagulant. ) 207 Antl-convulsant: a compound which reduces or prevents convulsions (natural or drug induced); Anti- epileptic 208 Antl-histaminic: a compound which antagonizes any of histamine's actions; prevents allergic reaction 209 Anti-metabolite: a compound which prevents or abolishes effects of a normally occurring metabolite specified as the secondary compound in Field D 210 Anti-motion sickness; a compound which relieves or prevents syndromes of dizziness, vertigo, nausea, and vomiting due to rhythmic motion (e. g. , airplane, ship, swing) 211 Anti-rheumatic: a compound which decreases signs of rheumatic disease 212 Anti- spasmodic: a compound which reduces or prevents contractions of smooth muscle, whether natural or drug induced contractions (except acetylcholine and histamine induced contractions, the reduction or prevention of which is coded by Symbols 225 and 208 by priority) - 169 - FIELD T-3 Columns 62, 63, and 64 213 Anti-thyroid; a compound which increases the size of the thyroid, or causes hyperplasia, hypertrophy, or decreases the iodine content of the thyroid gland; a compound which decreases the activity of the thyroid gland 214 Anti-vitamin: a compound which prevents or abolishes effects of a vitamin specified as a secondary compound in Field D 215 Astringent: a compound which draws tissues together by precipitating protein 216 Blood substitute: a compound which restores blood volume (exclusive of cellular or formed elements) via osmotic properties such as those of plasma proteins for treatment of shock 217 Diuretic: a compound which increases formation of urine 218 Estrogenic: a compound that promotes development of secondary sex organs of the female, feminization of pubic hair distribution, growth of mammary glands, etc. 219 Fibrinolytic: a compound that destroys fibrin 220 Keratolytic: a compound that destroys the horny layer of the skin 221 Miotic: a compound which decreases the size of the pupil either by contracting circular muscles or relaxing radial muscles of the iris 222 Mydriatic: a compound that increases the size of the pupil either by contracting radial muscles or by relaxing circular muscles of the iris 223 Narcotic: a compound that produces relief from pain accompanied by sleep or stupor 224 Oxytocic: a compound that produces contraction of the uterus both in vivo and in vitro 225 Parasympatholytic; cholinergic blocking agent (an agent showing anti-muscarine-like activity): a compound which antagonizes muscarine-like effects of acetylcholine and cholinergic compounds and which prevents effects of post-ganglionlc stimulation of parasympathetic nerves. E. g. , atropine and atropine-like compounds. 226 Parasympathomimetic; cholinergic agent (an agent showing muscarine-like activity): a compound that simulates or synergizes acetylcholine's peripheral action; simulates the effect of post-ganglionic stimulation of parasympathetic nerves. E. g. , mecholyl. 227 Sympatholytic: a compound that antagonizes the effect of adrenaline (epinephrine) or noradrenaline (norepinephrine or arterenol) or other sympathomimetic drug; blocks the effects of sympathetic nerve stimulation. E. g. , dibenamine, priscoline. 228 Sympathomimetic: a compound that simulates or synergizes effects of adrenaline (epinephrine) or noradrenaline (norepinephrine or arterenol). Adrenergic drug; simulates the effects of sympathetic nerve stimulation. 229 Curariform: a compound that competitively blocks the motor-end plate or myoneural junction; simulates the effects of curare, d-tubocurarine, etc. 230 Antipyretic: a compound that produces a fall in temperature in fever; tends to return the body temperature of a hyperpyrexia animal to normal. E. g. , antipyrine. 231 Depressant of the central nervous system only; hypnotic; sedative: a compound that produces sedation and sleep (exclusive of narcotic type of effect, Symbol 223). E. g. , paraldehyde. 232 Analeptic: a compound that reverses the effects of hypnotics and narcotics; stimulates medullary centers of the brain. E. g. , picrotoxin, metrazol. 233 Cardiac: a compound that stimulates or depresses the heart directly; digitalis-like effect. E. g. , cardiac glycosides, khellin. 234 Gastro-intestinal drug: a compound that affects various functions of the gastro-intestinal system; anorexics; cathartics; emetics; constipating agents; and anti-emetics 235 Ganglionic blocking agent: a compound that antagonizes the nicotine-like action (ganglionic- stlmulating effects) of acetylcholine and cholinergic compounds; prevents the effects of preganglionic nerve stimulation. E. g. , TEAC (tetraethyl ammonium chloride). 236 Nicotine-like drug: a compound that simulates or synergizes nicotine actions of acetylcholine and cholinergic drugs; simulates the effects of pre-ganglionic nerve stimulation 237 Anti-anemic: a compound that prevents, or cures anemia or reduces the severity of the disease; returns the blood picture of an anemic organism to normal. 238 Coagulant: a compound that promotes blood coagulation; prevents, antagonizes, or reduces the actions of anti-coagulants 239 Thyroxin-like drug: a compound that simulates the effects of hormone(s) of the thyroid gland, such as a rise in B. M. R. , an increase in oxygen consumption, etc. E. g. , tri-iodothyronine. 240 Adrenal -corticoid: a compound that simulates effects of adrenal cortical hormones on electrolyte, carbohydrate, protein, and skin pigment metabolism; simulates effects on collagenous tissue 270 Carcinogenic agent; carcinogen: a compound that induces neoplastic growth, malignant or benign (exclusive of non- neoplastic hypertrophy). Use Symbol 270 only with Symbol 43 or 47 of Field T-2. 170 - FIELD T-3 Columns 62, 63, and 64 271 Co-carcinogenic: a compound that possesses no carcinogenicity of its own, but causes an increase in the carcinogenic action of another agent. Use Symbol 271 only with Symbol 8 coded in Field T- 1 with Symbol 43 or 47 coded in Field T-2 (or, if a virus is the cause of the neoplasm. Symbol 1 coded in Field T- 1 with Symbol 43 or 47 coded in Field T-2). 272 Carcinostatic: a compound that temporarily or permanently slows or halts the growth of a tumor, but does not cause its regression. Use Symbol 272 when Symbol 44, 46, or 47 of Field T-2 is coded with Symbol 2 of Field T-1; also, when Symbol 44 or 46 of Field T-2 is coded with Symbol 3 of Field T-1; and wtien Symbol 43 or 47 of Field T-2 is coded with Symbol 9 of Field T-1. Do not use Symbol 272 for compounds that cause a tumor to regress. 273 Carcinoclastic: a compound that produces a lasting destructive effect on a tumor as judged by regression (degeneration) attributable to the action of the test compound. Use Symbol 273 only when Field T-2 is coded with Symbol 45 and Field T-1 is coded with Symbol 1 or 7 (or when Field T-2 is coded with symbols of the 418- series and this degeneration coded in Field T-2 refers to the tumor coded in Field E). Series 3-- Categories of agents candidate for practical use in affecting growth and development and physiological processes of plants. (For control of plant populations, see symbols of series 1--, Symbols 104, 107, and 108.) 301 Plant growth-affecting agent; stimulant or depressant of plant growth. Use Symbol 301 in Field T-3 when any of the following specific processes or qualities (Field T-2) are increased or decreased above or below the normal (Symbol 1 or 2 of Field T-1): Field T-2 symbols, inclusive Infection; infestation 18-181 Crop yield 19-194 Cell division 21 - 212 Cell growth 22-227 Spore germination 25 - 252 Seed germination 26 - 262 Growth of plant organ 28 - 2831 Growth of the entire plant 2A - 2A42 Also use Symbol 301 for growth-influencing agents which are essential for (Symbol 7 of Field T-1) or decrease or prevent (Symbol 2 or 3 of Field T-1) any of the following specific processes or qualities (Field T-2): Cell differentiation 23-2315 Tissue differentiation 27 - 272 Organ formation 284 Abnormal tissue or organ formation, except tumors 412 - 4151 Neoplasia or incidence of tumors 43, 44, 47 302 Maturation agent. Use Symbol 302 for agents which promote, decrease, or prevent (Symbol 1, 2, or 3 of Field T-1) any of the following specific processes of Field T-2. (For agents affecting flower formation or formation of any other specific organ's development and maturation, use Symbol 301; for agents affecting reproductive maturation of the organism, use Symbol 305. ) Field T-2 symbols, inclusive Ripening, maturing process 2B Aging symptoms 2C Normal pigmentation and coloring as indication of maturation F824 and FA24 - 171 FIELD T-3 Columns 62, 63, and 64 303 Agents affecting normal distribution and translocation within plants. Use Symbol 303 for agents which promote, decrease, or prevent (Symbol 1, 2, or 3 of Field T-1) any of the following processes or qualities of Field T-2: Field T-2 symbols, inclusive Nutrient uptake F6-- Distribution F9-- Storage, concentration FA-- Absorption FB-- Loss via secretion FC-- Loss via cuticle FF6- and FC-- Loss via transpiration FF9- and FC-- Loss via roots FFB-andFC-- Permeability 842 DehydraUon 87 5 304 Agents affecting normal chemosynthesis by plants. Use Symbol 304 for agents which increase, decrease, or prevent (Field T-1, Symbol 1, 2, or 3) any of the following chemical processes of plants: Field T-2 symbols, inclusive Photosynthesis F7 - F72 Chemosynthesis F8-- Alteration FE - FEI 305 Agents affecting reproductive processes of plants. Use Symbol 305 for agents which increase, decrease, or prevent (Symbols 1, 2, or 3 of Field T-1) any of the following Field T-2 reproductive functions: Field T-2 symbols, inclusive Reproductive activities Al - AA4 172 FIELD U Columns 65 and 66 MISCELLANEOUS TIME VALUES A. Duration of response (time after response begins) 1. Duration of response , 2. Duration of delay of death (alteration of survival time) B. Duration of the period preceding response 3. Time to response: 3a. Time to any response other than death 3b. Time to death (killing time) C. Duration of a compound's ability to produce response 4. Persistence of the activity of a residue of the test compound Place the Symbol * in Column 66 when the data deal with persistence of activity of a residue of the test compound. Scale 1 Scale 2 Scale 3 1 <0. 5 seconds 2 0. 5 thru 1. 3 >1. thru 2. 4 >2. thru 4. 5 >4. thru 8. 6 >8. thru 16. 7 >16. thru 32. 8 >32. thru 64. 9 >64. 1 <2 seconds 2 2 thru 4 3 >4 thru 8 4 >8 thru 16 5 >16 thru 32 6 >32 thru 64 7 > 64 thru 140 seconds 8 >140 thru 5 minutes 9 >6 minutes 1 < 16 seconds 2 16 thru 32 3 >32 thru 64 4 >64 thru 140 seconds 5 > 140 thru 5 minutes 6 >5 thru 10 7 >10 thru 20 8 >20 thru 45 9 >45 minutes Scale 4 Scale 5 Scale 6 I <64 seconds 2 64 thru 140 seconds 3 >140 thru 5 minutes 4 >5 thru 10 5 > 1 0 thru 20 6 >20 thru 45 7 >45 thru 90 8 >90 thru 3 hours 9 >3 hours 1 < 10 minutes 2 10 thru 20 3 >20 thru 45 4 >45 thru 90 minutes 5 >90 thru 3 hours 6 >3 thru 6 7 > 6 thru 12 8 >12 thru 24 9 >24 hours 1 <45 minutes 2 45 thru 90 minutes 3 > 90 thru 3 hours 4 >3 thru 6 5 >6 thru 12 6 >12 thru 24 7 >24 thru 48 8 >2 thru 4 days 9 >4 days 173 FIELD U Columns 65 and 66 MISCELLANEOUS TIME VALUES (Continued) 1 <6 hours 2 6 thru 12 3 > 12 thru 24 4 >24 thru 48 Scale 7 5 >2 thru 4 days 6 >4 thru 8 7 >8 thru 16 8 > 1 6 thru 32 9 >32 days 1 <24 hours 2 24 thru 2 days 3 >2 thru 4 days 4 >4 thru 8 Scale 8 5 >8 thru 16 6 > 16 thru 32 7 >32 thru 2 months 8 >2 thru 4 months 9 >4 month s <8 days Scale 9 2 8 thru 16 3 > 1 6 thru 32 days 4 >32 thru 2 months 5 >2 thru 4 6 >4 thru 8 7 >8 thru 16 8 9 > 16 thru >32 months 32 174 FIELD V Column 67 TIME TO EVALUATION Group 1 1 < 0. 5 seconds 2 0. 5 thru 1 3 > 1 thru 2 4 >2 thru 4 5 >4 thru 8 6 >8 thru 16 7 >16 thru 3 2 8 >32 thru 64 9 >64 thru 120 seconds Group 2 A >2 thru 5 minutes B >5 thru 10 C >10 thru 20 D >20 thru 45 E >45 thru 90 minutes F >90 thru 3 hours G >3 thru 6 H >6 thru 12 I >12 thru Group 3 24 hours J >1 thru 2 days K >2 thru 4 L >4 thru 8 M >8 thru 16 N >16 thru 31 days 0 >1 thru 2 months P >2 thru 4 Q >4 thru 8 R >8 thru 16 months Group 4 S > 16 thru 32 months T > 32 months Indefinite time expressions: U Several seconds V Several minutes W Several hours X Several days Y Several months Z Immediately after treatment (no quantitative time measure given) 175 FIELD W Column 68 A. QUAUFICATION OF THE NEGATIVE AND POSITIVE CHARACTER OF TEST RESULTS AND QUAUFICATION OF THE CODED DOSE B. INFORMATION ABOUT SLOPE OF THE DOSAGE-RESPONSE CURVE Introduction to Field W Symbols J through Q and * A. The basic objective of the symbols of Field W, with the exception of Symbol *, is to classify the character of the negative or positive biological response (whose quantitative measure or evaluation is coded in Field Y according to a criterion coded in Field X) and of the dose (coded in Fields M, N, O, and P) according to whether the test coded demonstrated: (1) Inability of the test compound to produce the response when administered to the test '-' organism at any level below a toxic level or below any level impractical to administer: !^ o Symbol K (Symbol J indicates that the test did not prove the test compound was unable ^"^ to produce the response even though the response did not occur at the dose administered); CM "? ^ ra (2) The maximum intensity of test organism response which the test compound is capable of O T) a inducing; Symbol M, N, or 0 (Symbols L and P indicate that the test did not prove that (3 * c the intensity of response was maximal, since a dose larger than the largest tested might J2 c 5 cause a higher response intensity); o (0 o •o . ^ !_ '^ ° (3) The minimum dose of test compound needed for the intensity of response produced in the " ^^ test organism, whether or not it is the maximum intensity of which the compound is cap- ^ . ■" able: Symbol P (if the intensity of response is threshold intensity or any intensity below 2 ^ maximum intensity or if the intensity is not known to be maximum intensity) or Symbol 0 •2 ■£ (if the intensity of response is known to be maximal). (Symbols L, M, and N indicate that the test did not prove that the coded dose was the minimal needed. ) The classification will be seen to be dependent at certain points (Symbols J, K, L, and M) on whether information is known about the toxic character of the chemical tested and the limitations placed on the chemical's application by that character. Whether the test compound has such limitations can ordinarily be determined only by having performed, prior to or contemporary with the test being coded, one or more other tests at different dose levels, the limiting toxic effect being revealed by one of the higher dose levels in one of the tests. Thus, incidentally. Field W conveys further information about the character of the dose coded in Fields M, N, O, and P as follows: (4) The dose coded in Fields M, N, O, and P is known to be the maximum tolerated or (if the test compound causes no toxic effect at any dose) the largest dose that can be administered, for any reason other than toxicity and limitation of availability: Symbol K or M and (only if Symbol 21 is in Field X) Symbol 0 or P; the use of Symbol N or 0 implies that the coded dose is known not to be the MTD, except when Symbol 21 is in Field X with Symbol 0 in Field W; (Symbol J, L, or P: the coded dose is not known either to be or not to be the MTD, unless Symbol 21 is in Field X with Symbol P in Field W). For sake of clarity, the definition for each of Symbols J through Q is presented as a set of brief state- ments, the statements collectively setting forth the conditions under which the symbol is used and the implications made by it. The definition and use of each of the symbols are discussed in more detail in the Key section on General Use of Fields W, X, and Y. B. One Field W symbol is also provided to be used when the data (of a journal article, laboratory report, etc. ) include Information on the slope of the dosage-response curve. This symbol (Symbol *) does not itself code information about the curve, but is only a key to the fact that the information exists with the data. The written abstract on the Code Sheet must be consulted to find the information or reference must be made to the original data. - 176 - FIELD W Column 68 A. QUAUFICATION OF THE NEGATIVE AND POSITIVE CHARACTER OF TEST RESULTS AND QUAUFICATION OF THE CODED DOSE B. INFORMATION ABOUT SLOPE OF THE DOSAGE-RESPONSE CURVE Negative Response The following two symbols, J and K, are used only when the response coded in Field T has not been produced by the test compound. Thus, when these symbols are used, Field X must be coded with Criterion 01, 02, or 62 and Field Y must be coded with Symbol 1. With any other coding in Fields X and Y, only Symbol L, M, N, 0, or P can be used in Field W. J The response does not occur at the coded dose. (When the response is "death", refer to the final statement in parentheses, below. ) The maximum tolerated dose level has not been determined; the coded dose is not known to be the MTD. The dose administered (the coded dose) has not been determined to be the largest dose that could be administered. The compound is not demonstrated to be inactive below the toxic level (or other level) that prohibits administration of larger doses. (If "death" is coded in Field T-2 and is not caused by any doses administered, use Symbol J if it seems that administration of a larger dose is possible and therefore death at a larger dose might be possible. I. e. , use Symbol J only if it seems not to have been demonstrated that the test compound could not cause death. When Criterion 21, maximum tolerated dose, is used in Field X, the dose coded is the dose not causing the toxic effect or death coded in Field T-2, for which reason there may be temptation to use Symbol J [or K] in Field W; do not use Symbol J [or K] when Criterion 21 is used, but use only Symbol 0 [or P] to indicate that the toxic effect or death has been demonstrated even though the dose coded is just below the threshold dose. ) K The response does not occur at the coded dose. (When the response is "death", refer to the final statement in parentheses, below. ) The maximum tolerated dose level has been determined; the coded dose is known to be the MTD. The dose administered (the coded dose) is demonstrated to be the largest that can be administered, for reasons of associated toxicity, e.g. The compound is demonstrated to be inactive below the toxic level (or other level) that prohibits administration of larger doses. (If "death" is coded in Field T-2 and is not caused by any doses administered, use Symbol K if it seems that administration of a larger dose is impractical or even impossible. I. e. , use Symbol K only if it seems to have been demonstrated that the test compound could not cause "death" under conditions of the test. When Criterion 21, maximum tolerated dose, is used in Field X, do not use Symbol K in Field W, for reasons explained in the definition for Symbol J. ) - 177 FIELD W Column 68 Positive Response The following five symbols, L, M, N, 0, and P, are used only when the response coded in Field T has been positively produced by the test compound. Thus, when one of these symbols is used in Field W, Field X must not be coded with Criterion 01, 02, or 62 with Symbol 1 in Field Y. With the latter coding in Fields X and Y, only Symbol J or K or possibly Q can be used in Field W. L Only one dose level has been tested (the coded dose). (When the response is "death", refer to the final statements in parentheses, below. ) The maximum tolerated dose level has not been determined; the coded dose is not known to be the MTD. The response intensity has not been demonstrated to be the maximum intensity of which the compound is capable. The dose tested has not been demonstrated to be the minimum dose needed to cause the response intensity produced. (When "death" [coded in Field T-2] is the response to the single dose level tested, Symbol L can not be used in Field W, unless [1] the single test dose level has been applied to a population, [2] the percent kill is less than 100%, and [3] the dose level is not, or is not known to be, the largest dose practical or possible to administer; if the dose level is known to be the largest dose practical or possible to administer and response is less than 100% kill, use Symbol M. When death is produced in the individual organism, when only a single organism is treated, or in 100% of the organisms of a population treated, when only a single dose level is tested [i. e. , the dose is not demonstrated to be the minimum needed], use Symbol M. ) M Only one dose level has been tested (the coded dose), but it is known from previous tests to be the maximum tolerated dose. (When the response is "death", refer to the final statements in parentheses, below. ) Because the dose administered is the MTD, the response intensity is the maximum possible, even though it is not known whether, barring its associated toxicity, the compound would not produce greater response with a larger dose. The coded dose has not been demonstrated to be the minimal needed to cause the response intensity produced in the test being coded. (When "death" [coded in Field T-2] is the response to the single dose level tested. Symbol M is used whether or not the dose level tested is known to be the largest dose that can be ad- ministered--if the death has been caused in a test using a single individual or if the death occurs in 100% of a population treated. However, if application is to a population and "death" [coded in Field T-2] occurs in less than 100% of the population. Symbol M is used only if the test compound was applied at the dose level known to be the largest practical or possible to administer; if this is not known or is known not to be the case. Symbol L must be used for less-than- 100% kill. ) N Two or more tests have been performed, each with a different dose level. (When the response is "death", refer to the final statements in parentheses, below. ) All those doses tested have produced the response and at the same intensity. Because all doses tested produce the same response intensity, the response intensity of the test being coded is maximal (barring a complex dosage-response curve which rises after a plateau on which the tested doses have fallen). The dose administered (the coded dose) is not demonstrated to be the minimum needed to cause the response intensity produced. 178 FIELD W Column 68 (If "death" [of the individual or of a percentage of a population] is the response for which the minimum dose needed has not been demonstrated [demonstrated by all of the two or more dose levels tested having caused death to the individual or caused death to the same percentage of a treated population], Symbol N is used in Field W, with some criterion other than Criterion 2 0 or 21 in Field X. ) 0 Three or more tests have been performed, each with a different dose level. (When the response is "death", refer to the final statement in parentheses, below. ) Two or more of the doses tested produce the same intensity of response and one or more of the doses tested produce a lower intensity of response. The maximum intensity of response of which the test compound is capable has been demon- strated (the intensity on which the coded evaluation is based). The minimum dose needed to cause the maximum intensity of response has been demonstrated (the coded dose). Do not use Symbol 0 when Criterion 20 is used in Field X, unless "death" (or other "all-or-none" response) is coded in Field T-2, as explained below. (If "death" [of the individual or of a percentage of a population] is the response for which the minimum dose needed has been demonstrated [demonstrated by one of the doses admin- istered not having caused death to the individual or not having caused any deaths when the next larger dose (the threshold dose) causes 100% kill in a treated population]. Symbol 0 is used in Field W and Criterion 20 or 21 may be used in Field X. If maximum response is 100% kill and the minimum dose for causing 100% kill is demonstrated, yet the threshold dose causes less than 100% kill, use of Criterion 20 or 21 demands a coded dose smaller than the minimum dose needed to cause maximum response and Symbol 0 can not be used in Field W, but only Symbol P. ) P Two or more tests have been performed, each with a different dose level. (When the response is "death", refer to the final statement in parentheses, below. ) All of the doses tested produce different response intensities (the larger the dose, the greater the response intensity). The maximum response intensity of which the test compound is capable has not been demon- strated; the intensity produced by the largest dose tested (the intensity on which code evaluation Is based) may or may not be the maximum intensity which the test compound is capable of producing. For each intensity produced in any of the tests, the dose producing it is the minimum needed (i.e. , for the test being coded, a reasonable relationship exists between the dose coded and the response intensity produced). When the threshold dose has been demonstrated and Symbol 20 is used in Field X, Symbol P must be used in Field W except under special con- ditions when "death" is coded in Field T-2, as explained in the final statements defining the use of Symbol 0. (When "death" is coded in Field T-2 and administration is to a population and each dosage level administered causes a different percentage kill, Symbol P is used in Field W and some criterion other than Criterion 20 or 21 must be used in Field X. [See the final statements below for the situation in which the threshold percentage kill by any dose administered to a population is determined, when Symbol P is used with Criterion 20 or 21. ] "Death" to a single treated individual or "death" to 100% of a treated population represent non-variable response intensities [they must either occur as totalities or do not occur at all, at any dose] and Symbol P can not be used to apply to them; use only Symbol N or 0 [or Symbol M, if the compound is tested at only one dose level, or Symbol J or K, if death did not occur]. Symbol P is used when Criterion 20 is coded in Field X and the response for which the dosage coded and shown by the test to be the threshold quantity is not death; Symbol P is used with Cri- terion 20 or 21 when the response is "death" but only when application of the chemical has been to a population, the threshold response is shown to be less than 100% kill, and in- creasingly larger doses cause increasingly greater percentages of kill, meaning that the coded dose is not the minimum causing the maximum response [for which Symbol 0 is used], - 179 - FIELD W Column 68 but is the dose causing minimum response [minimum kill. Criterion 20 with Symbol P] or the dose just lower than the dose causing any deaths [MTD, Criterion 21 with Symbol P]. Finally, Symbol P is used when Criterion 21 is used to evaluate a test compound on the basis of the dose level just below the threshold dose causing a toxic response other than "death" [re- garding MTD as the maximum dose tolerated without causing non-lethal toxic effects, as well as without causing death, prohibiting its use]. ) Questionable Response The occurrence or non- occurrence of the response coded in Field T (non-toxic response, non-lethal toxic response, or death), as reported by the author, is questionable, due to limiting factors of the test method and observation. This symbol should be used only rarely and ordinarily only when the author has expressed doubts and reasons for the doubts as to whether the evidence is valid for the response being positive or negative. Second use of Field W: Information about Slope of the Dosage-response Curve Information about the slope of the dosage-response curve is included with the original data. Reference to the Code Sheet should be made for this information. (When coding Symbol * In Field W, the written abstract of the field should include the information about the slope, as defined and discussed in the Key. ) 180 FIELD X Columns 69 and 70 FIELD Y Column 71 FIELD X: THE CRITERION FOR EVALUATION OF THE TEST COMPOUND'S BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY FIELD Y: THE EVALUATION OF THE TEST COMPOUND'S BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY (RELATIVE TO THE SPECIFIC BIOLOGICAL RESPONSE) Field X Columns 69 and 70 Field Y Column 71 Note: When the data are negative (when the test compound did not cause to any statistically significant degree the specific response coded in Field T), coding in Field X is limited to one of three criteria, 01, 02, or 62 (coded with Symbol 1 in Field Y). When the response coded in Field T is caused by the test compound, any appropriate criterion can be used (including any of 01, 02, or 62 used with Field Y symbols other than 1). Criterion code symbol and description of Evaluation scale (code symbols) and the criterion definitions of evaluation symbols for Field Y 01 Author's statement of evaluation (i. e. , author's verbal evaluation). Coder's general evaluation (in absence of any quantitative data and of author's state- ment of evaluation). Note: Do not use this criterion if quantitative data allow any other criterion of Field X to be used. 1 "Inactive": inactivity, including any measure which suggests activity but which the author does not interpret as actually being positive response due to the method of measurement being too coarse. (Refer to the Key. ) 3 "Slight activity"; used for demonstrated positive responses even though they may happen to be too low to be considered by the author as "significant" for a practical application. (Refer to the Key. ) 5 "Moderate", "Intermediate" (i. e. , more than "slight", but less than "fair", "good", "satisfactory", etc. ) 7 "Fair", "good", "satisfactory" (i. e. , more than "moderate", or "interm.ediate", but less than "severe", "high", etc. ) "Severe", "high", "intense", "excellent' etc. Positive response of unspecified degree. 181 FIELD X Columns 69 and 70 FIELD Y Column 71 Field X Field Y 02 Author's scoring system. (Two samples of 1 - - such scoring schemes are shown, with the author's scoring units assigned code 3 + symbols. ) 5 ++ + 7 +++ 9 ++ + + ++ -or- Evaluation according to an author's state- 1 0% response ment of an estimate expressed in terms 0 <1% thru 10% response of percentage of maximum response. (E. g. , A >10% thru 20% response "about half", "approximately a third". 2 >20% thru 30% response "nearly all", "in the neighborhood of 25%", 3 >30% thru 40% response etc. ) 4 >40% thru 50% response Note: When an exact measure or count 5 >50% thru 60% response is made, providing a precise percentage 6 >60% thru 70% response expression, use Criterion 62. 7 >70% thru 80% response 8 >80% thru 90% response 9 >90% thru 100% response 03 The degree of biological response caused 1 <. 05 thru . 05 (1/20 of the biological by the test compound- -compared to the respons e made to the degree of biological response caused by standard compound, or a specific standard compound, when the less) test compound is administered (in the test being evaluated) in the same quantity as 3 >. 05 thru 0. 5 (>l/20 thru 1/2) was the standard compound (tested separately). 5 >0. 5 thru 5 ( > 1/2 thru 5 times the bio- Note: The standard compound must be logical response made to named and coded in Field D and Symbol * the standard compound) must be coded in Column 17 of Field D. 7 >5. 0 thru 50 (> 5 times thru 50 times) Degree of response to the P test compound 9 >50 (>50 time s) Degree of response to the standard compound When the data are not sufficiently quan- titative to permit the calculation of the values of the scale above, but only general verbal comparisons are made, use the following scale: The biological response to the test compound was less than to an equal quantity of the standard compound. The biological response to the test compound was equal to the response to an equal quantity of the standard compound. The biological response to the test compound was greater than to an equal quantity of the standard compound. 182 - FIELD X Columns 69 and 70 FIELD Y Column 71 Field X Field Y 04 The quantity (preferably minimum) of test 1 <. 05 thru . 05 (20 times more, or more compound needed to cause the same de- than 20 times more, test gree of response as a standard compound compound than standard --compared to the quantity (preferably compound is needed to minimum) of standard compound causing cause the same degree of that degree of response. response as the standard Note: The standard compound must be compound) named and coded in Field D and Symbol * must be coded in Column 17 of Field D. 3 >. 05 thru 0. 5 (<20 thru 2 times more test compound than Dosage of standard compound causing standard compound) "X" degree of response 5 Dosage of test compound causing "X" > 0. 5 thru 5. 0 (<2 times as much thru 1/5 degree of response as much test compound as standard compound) 7 >5. 0 thru 50 (50 (4 thru 16 5 >16 thru 64 7 >64 thru 256 9 >256 15 Chemotherapeutic index: Minimum curative dose Minimum tolerated dose 1 >0.25 3 >0. 03 thru 0.25 5 >0. 0035 thru 0. 03 7 >0. 0004 thru 0. 0035 9 <0. 0004 thru 0. 0004 16 Chemotherapeutic index: Dose killing 50% of individuals to which it is administered 1 <4 thru 4 Dose therapeutically effective (to a given degree, curative or otherwise) in 50% of individuals to which it is administered L^50 E°50 3 > 4 thru 1 6 5 > 16 thru 64 7 >64 thru 256 9 >256 17 Repellency index: Note: This is a special criterion used for coding tests on rats only. The index and its description are included in the Key. 1 <80 thru 80 3 >80 thru 87 5 >87 thru 91 7 >91 thru 96 9 >96 thru 100 18 Tolerance increase ("tolerance production" or "sensitivity decrease"): Final tolerated dose (or, preferably, final maximum tolerated dose) 1 > 1 . 0 thru 1 . 5 2 >1. 5 thru 2. 0 3 >2. 0 thru 5.0 4 > 5. Othru 10.0 5 > 10. Othru 25.0 """"' Initial maximum tolerated dose Tolerance increase is indicated only when the above ratio value is more than 1.0. 6 >25. 0 thru 50. 0 7 > 50. Othru 75.0 8 >75. 0 thru 100. 0 9 >100. 0 - 185 - FIELD X Columns 69 and 70 FIELD Y Column 71 Field X Field Y 19 Sensitivity production ("sensitivity increase" or "tolerance decrease"): Final dose not producing the toxic Ratio- symptom 1 2 <1. 0 thru 0. 9 Initial maximum dose not producing < 0. 9 thru 0. 8 the toxic symptom 3 < 0. 8 thru 0. 7 4 <0. 7 thru 0. 6 -or- 5 <0. 6 thru 0. 5 6 <0. 5 thru 0. 2 5 Final threshold dose producing the 7 <0. 25 thru 0. 1 toxic symptom 8 9 <0. 1 thru 0. 01 Initial threshold dose producing the <0. 01 toxic symptom Sensitivity production is indicated only when the above ratio value is less than 1.0. 20 Threshold dose size. Minimum effective The sma Her the quantity of test compound dose size. Evaluations according to: needed to cause a given intensity of (a) threshold concentration, Field M, or response (threshold response, in this (b) threshold quantity, Field N, or (c) case), the greater is the potency of the threshold duration of administration, test compound. Therefore, code Field Y Field P. with the reciprocal of the symbol coding Note: If the data reveal the variation the dose (Column 46 of Field M or in and distribution of the threshold of Column 48 of Field N or Column 51 of response in a group of individuals (i. e. , Field P). several threshold doses and the percentage of organisms showing threshold response If Column 46 (or 48 --code Field Y with each), use Criterion 51, 52, or 51) is coded with: with Symbol: or 53. When Criterion 20 is used, only Symbol 1 9 P or, when "death" is coded in Field T-2 2 8 (and then only under certain circumstances). 3 7 Symbol 0 is coded in Field W. Consult 4 6 the Code definitions and instructions for 5 5 Symbols 0 and P of Field W. 6 4 7 8 9 3 2 1 - 186 - FIELD X Columns 69 and 70 FIELD Y Column 71 Field X Field Y 21 Maximum tolerated dose (abbreviation: MTD). Most frequently this is understood to be the greatest quantity that can be adminis- tered without causing death (Field T-2, Symbol U, 111, or 1 12) of the test organ- ism; i. e. , the dose just smaller than the minimum lethal dose. (Consult the Key's discussion of Criterion 21. ) The maximum tolerated dose (coded in the dosage fields, M, N, and P) can be more specifically defined as: (a) maximum tolerated concentration. Field M, (b) maxi- mum tolerated quantity, Field N, (c) maxi- mum tolerated duration of administration. Field P. Note: If, in a group of individuals, test data demonstrate the variation in and dis- tribution of the individuals' maximum toler- ances for the test compound (i. e. , several MTD levels for each of which is determined the percentage of individuals for which it represents the MTD), use Criterion 51, 52, or 53. When Criterion 21 is used, only Symbol P or, when "death" is coded in Field T-2 (and then only under certain circumstances), Symbol 0 is used in Field W. Consult the Code definitions and instructions for Sym- bols 0 and P of Field W. The greater the quantity of test compound tolerated, the greater is the test compound's rating as a safe therapeutic agent. Therefore, code Field Y with the same symbol coding the dose (Column 46 of Field M, Column 48 of Field N, or Column 51 of Field P). If Column 46 (or 48 --code Field Y or 51) is coded with: with Symbol: 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 22 Antagonism of the biological action of a secondary compound. In other words, dosage of the test compound needed to prevent the test organism's demonstrated response to the secondary compound alone, when both compounds are administered together. Note: Evaluation by Criterion 22 of a test compound's ability as an antagonist of the specific action of a given secondary compound is not modified by the degree of antagonism (i. e. , partial reduction of the response to the secondary compound). Criterion 22 should be used only when an- tagonism of the secondary compound's action has been totally prevented (100% reduction of response to the secondary compound). If, in a group of individuals, the data reveal the variation and distribution of antagonism ratio (see the evaluation of antagonism. Field Y), use Criterion 55. Ratio: Evaluation of antagonism with Cri- terion 22 is on the basis of the amount of secondary compound antagonized per unit of test compound. The greater the amount of secondary compound antagonized per unit quantity of test compound, the greater is the test compound's potency for antag- onizing the action of that secondary compound. Amount of secondary compound whose effect is antagonized 100% (i.e., prevented) Minimum amount of test compound (antagonist) needed to antagonize the secondary compound's effect 100% The value from the calculation above Is used to derive a code evaluation for Field Y according to the following scale: 1 <0. 05 thru 0. 05 3 > 0. 05 thru 0. 5 5 > 0. 5 thru 5 7 > 5 thru 50 9 >50 187 - FIELD X Columns 69 and 7 0 FIELD Y Column 71 Field X Field Y 30 Weight of the thyroid gland, expressed in terms of milligrams of thyroid gland per 100 grams of body weight. The evaluation with Criterion 3 0 is based on the ability of the test compound to decrease the thyroid activity, as indi- cated by the gland's hypertrophy. Thus, the greater the gland's hypertrophy, the greater should be the test compound code evaluation. <8 thru 8 >8 thru 16 > 16 thru 24 >24 thru 32 >32 31 Iodine content of the thyroid gland, ex- pressed in terms of milligrams of iodine per 100 grams of thyroid gland. The evaluation with Criterion 31 is based on the ability of the test compound to decrease iodine in the thyroid. Therefore, the smaller the quantity of iodine in the gland, the more is the test compound's anti-thyroid ability. 1 >40 3 >20 thru 40 5 > 10 thru 20 7 >5 thru 10 9 <5 thru 5 Note: Criteria 51, 52, 53, 54, 57, 58, 59, and 55 are used only when the data include information on the percentage of individuals responding to each dose level of test compound (Criteria 51, 52, 53, and 55) or to each duration of response, increase of survival time, etc. (Criteria 54, 57, 58, and 59). For evaluations by these eight criteria, the Log-Probit Grid must be used. 51 52 53 Concentration expressed in Field M vs. cumulative percentage of individuals responding. Quantity expressed in Field N vs. cumula- tive percentage of individuals responding. Duration of administration expressed in Field P vs. cumulative percentage of organisms responding. Consult the Key for the explanation of the use of the Grid and the use of these three criteria with which Field Y is coded with one of five symbols: 1 These five symbols represent positive response from "low" (large dose and/or few individuals responding) to "high" (small dose and/or most or all individuals responding), regardless of the intensity of response in the individual (e. g. , per- centage increase of heart rate, percentage change of rate of development). Criteria 51, 52, and 53 are used mostly for eval- uating the test compound's lethal activity on a group of individuals of the test organism. 188 FIELD X Columns 69 and 70 FIELD Y Column 71 Field X Field Y 54 Note: In the case of Criteria 54 and 57, below, the reciprocal of the symbol used in Column 66 of Field U is used on the abscissa scale of the Grid. (In essence, this means merely that that abscissa scale of the Grid is reversed. ) This is because a long duration of re- sponse or long survival time increase or decrease rep- resents a high level of chemical activity; for this same reason, when basing evaluation on the time alone (Criteria 13 and 12), the symbol coded in Field U is used in Field Y rather than the reciprocal of that Field U symbol. Duration of response (the time period coded in Field U) vs. the cumulative per- centage of individuals in which the re- sponse endures the period coded in Field U. With Criterion 54, the evaluation to be coded in Field Y is based on the point at which the response has ended for any given percentage of individuals. (Study the example given in the Key, Specific Directions and Explanations for Fields W, X, and Y, Division 20. ) Evaluation sym- bols: 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to the Grid area involved. 57 Survival time increase or survival time decrease (the time period coded in Field U, representing the time differential between the survival times of treated and untreated organisms) vs. the cumulative percentage of individuals whose survival time was affected to the degree indicated in Field U. With Criterion 57, evaluation is based on the cumulative percentage of individuals whose survival time has been increased (or decreased) a given period. (Study the example given in the Key, Specific Directions and Explanations for Fields W, X, and Y, Division 20. ) Evaluation sym- bols: 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to the Grid area involved. Note: In the case of Criteria 58 and 59, below, the symbol used in Column 66 of Field U is used on the abscissa of the Grid. This is because a short time to the specific action represents a high level of chemical activity; for this same reason, when basing evaluation on the time alone (Criteria 10 and 11), the reciprocal of the symbol coded in Field U is used in Field Y as an evaluation. 58 Time to specific action other than death (the time period from beginning of admin- istration to the first appearance of the response, coded in Field U), vs. the cumulative percentage of individuals responding within the time period coded in Field U. With Criterion 58, evaluation is based on the cumulative percentage of individuals responding (other than by dying) after a given period of time. (Study the example given in the Key, Specific Directions and Explanations for Fields W, X, and Y, Division 20. ) Evaluation symbols: 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to the Grid area involved. 189 FIELD X Columns 69 and 70 FIELD Y Column 71 Field X Field Y 59 Killing time (the time period from beginning of administration to the point of death, coded in Field U), vs. the cumulative per- centage of individuals killed within the time period coded in Field U. With Criterion 59, evaluation is based on the percentage of individuals killed after a given period of time. (Study the example given in the Key, Specific Directions and Explanations for Fields W, X, and Y, Divi- sion 20. ) Evaluation symbols: 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to the Grid area involved. 55 Antagonism dosage vs. Incidence of antag- onism in a group of individuals. Dosage (concentration, quantity, or duration of administration) of test compound causing antagonism of the biological action of the secondary compound vs. the cumulative percentage of individuals in which that dosage causes antagonism. Note: Evaluation by Criterion 55, of a test compound's ability as an antagonist of the specific action of a given secondary compound is not modified by the degree of antagonism (i.e., partial reduction of the response to the secondary compound). Criterion 55, as well as Criterion 22, should be used only when the secondary compound's action has been prevented (100% reduction of the response to the secondary compound). If antagonism is demonstrated only in an individual (the test not demonstrating inci- dence of antagonism in a group of individ- uals), use Criterion 22. Ratio: For Criterion 55, the two quantitative dosage values are related by the following ratio: Minimum amount of test compound (antagonist) needed to antagonize the secondary compound's action lOoy., Amount of secondary compound whose effect is antagonized 100% (i.e., prevented) The value derived from the above calcu- lation is placed on the abscissa of the Grid with the assistance of the following table of ranges: Grid abscissa segment Ranges of minimum test com- pound quantities needed to antagonize one unit of the secondary compound 1 <0. 05 thru 0. 05 2 >0. 05 thru 0.15 3 >0. 15 thru 0. 5 4 >0. 5 thru 1.5 5 >1.5 thru 5 6 >5 thru 15 7 >15 thru 50 8 >50 thru 150 9 >150 Each of the nine ranges above represents one of the nine equal segments of the scale of the abscissa of the Grid. The dosage ratio value should be located on the abscissa scale at the appropriate point within the range (i. e. , within the abscissa scale segment) indicated in the table above. Evaluation symbols: 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to the Grid area involved. 190 - FIELD X Columns 69 and 70 FIELD Y Column 71 Field X Field Y 61 Degree of response greater than 100%; intensity of response; percentage of re- sponse. Criterion 61 is used principally to evaluate on the basis of the degree (percentage) of increase of a pre-existing condition (i. e. , percent increase of a normal physiological function or a patho- logical state) in response to the test compound. The criterion is also used to evaluate synergistic responses, the percentage increase (> 100% ) of response to a secondary compound due to the presence of (the action of) the test compound. Use Criterion 61 only for evaluating the intensity of response in the organism and only when that response is over 100%. For responses of 100% or under 100%, use Criterion 62. Code Field Y according to the ranges of the following table: Symbol for Field Y Ranges of percentage responses 3 >100% thru 400% 5 >400% thru 7 00% 7 >700% thru 1000% 9 >1000% 62 Degree of response 0% through 100%; intensity of response; percentage of response. Criterion 62 is intended for evaluation on the basis of the degree (percentage) of increase (or decrease) of a pre-existing condition (a normal physiological function or a pathological state) in response to the test compound. The criterion is also used to evaluate synergistic responses, the percentage increase (0% through 100%) of response to a secondary compound due to the presence of (the action of) the test compound. In addition to using Criterion 62 for evaluating on the basis of degree of re- sponse of the organism, this criterion is used to record intensity of response ex- pressed as a percentage of individuals responding to the test compound (admin- istered to a group of individuals) at a given level of intensity of response of the Individual. Code Field Y according to the ranges of the following table: Symbol for Field Y Ranges of percentage response 1 0% 0 >0% thru 10% A >10% thru 20% 2 >20% thru 30% 3 >30% thru 40% 4 >40% thru 50% 5 >50% thru 60% 6 >60% thru 7 0% 7 >7 0% thru 80% 8 >80% thru 90% 9 >90% thru 100% 191 DOSAGE VALUES 193 - APPENDIXES The contents of these Appendixes represent an extension of the descriptions of the Introduction. The Introduction deals particularly with the background and description of the Biology Code, while in Appendix A are described the CBCC procedures related to the use of the Biology Code, including the procedures of the Center for collecting information for coding, organization for administration of the coding process, and handling of the coded and IBM-punched information. Finally, in Appendix B, some general observations are made about the Code and Key and the significance of the Center's activities. 195 a23456 7890U12 ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR STUVWXYZ lllllllll lllllllll 0000 00000|000000 00 DOOOOOOOOO 000000 00000 0||||||||00 000000 000 00000 00 00 00 00000 000 00 , 2 J ( 5 t, I 8 9 10 II 12 IJ U II 16 I' IB 19 M ;i W :JM n a ?Iffl« M Jl W It J* K J6 3? M 39 «4I 4? IH4 4S *6 t? «« MSI 5?SJ A 5S S6 iJ 58 59 M 61 63 &3 M £b « 67 68 69 TO n 12 U '4 7i 16 n 18 '9 80 |innnMiMiinini|iinMii|iiininiiMMintiMiiiiMMiiiMiiiiiniiniiii 2|22222222222222222222|22222222|22222222|222222222222222222222222222222222222222 33|33333333333333333333|33333333|33333333|33333333333333333333333333333333333333 444|44444444444444444444|44444444|44444444|4444444444444444444444444444444444444 55 55|555555 55555 5 55 55 55 55| 55 555 5 55| 5 5 5 555 5 5| 5 5 5 5 5 55 5 5 5 55 55 5 55 5 5 5 5 55 5 5 555 55 55 5 5 55 eE666|66666G;66EEBG6G6666G|66GG8G6e|66EG6666|G6ri 06666666660666666666666668666666 mnHmnimmnnn mn mmiiiinintini mnnimimimnmT mil e888e8e|88e8a8888883888e8o88|8»888886|8888S888|3ED83888888888e88888888S888888883 99999999|939S9993999999909993|99999999|99999999|999999999999S993399999999S999999 , ; 3 4 5 s J a " ID II 12 1] 14 IS 16 11 18 19 20 21 2- 23 24 :i 76 2T 28 79" 31 32 33 24 35 36 3T 38 " 40 41 43 43 44 49 46 41 i! 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 55 51 SB 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 61 6S 69 70 M 72 73 14 75 76 77 18 79 80 Figure 1 --Standard IBM Punched Card SHEET NUMBtft "Ll^E NO.|riLE| SERIAL NUMBER PRI.OftGANblWCIW SPfCIMC scon GF9H»t «C7»M EFE. SECONDARY CHEIilCAL 47[ SEC. ORGAN TISSUE 0 0 0 0 0 o;o 0 2 3 4 5 6| 7 8 M 1 1 1 nil I 22 222212 2 I 333 3 3 313 3 I 4 44 44 4144 I 5 5 5 5 5 5|5 5 0000 13 14 15 16 Mil 2 22 2 3 3 3 3 4444 55 55 00 00 18 19 20 1 I 1 222 3 33 444 5 55 0 0 0 0 0{0|0|0|0 0 OlO 0 010 010 0 0 0 0 OIOIOIO 010 OiOlO 0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0 0 0 0 21 22 23 24 ?5[26l27|28|29 30 3l|32 33 34^5 36J37 38 39 40 41 42|43[44[45 46[4? 4b|49|50 5l[52J53[54J55|s6|57|sa 59 60 61 I 1 1 22 2 3 3 3 444 0 0 010 0 62 63 64 65 66 FILE TAXONOMY SPECIFIC ACTION GENERAL ACTION PRIMARY ORGAN TISSUE SEC024DARY CHEMICAL CHANGES m COLOR STRIPE RED SALMON YELLOW GREEN VIOLET BROWN 1 1 1 2 2 2 33333 44444 5555 55 555 55 55 00 0 72 73 74, 1 I I 222 33 3 444 0 00 ,75 76 77 1 1 1 I 2 22 13 3 3 I |4 4 4 I 5 5 5|5 5 5 TAXONOMY SERIAL NUMBER 99 9999I9999 DOSAGES 9999999999999599999999999999999999999999999 9 5 99999999999999999 9i9 99 20 21 22 21 21 2) 26 27l28b9 30 31 37 33 34 35 36l37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 5J54 :J56 57158 59 60 61 6? 63 64 65 E6 5Tlb? 69 2ll|71 72 71 74|75 76 77 iL RESEARCH COUNC IL , CHEMICAL. - B10L00IC AL COORDINI ATION CENTER ACTION RESPONSE SHEET NUMBER Figure 2 --Biology IBM Punched Card 'Ql n M. 00000 0 00 3 4 5 6*7 8 ti n 1 i]i 1 I 2222 2 2|2 2 3 33333133 I 444 44 4144 I 555 55 5'5 5 SERIAL NUMBER X 9999 91)9 I J 4 5 (IT I IBM SI033B BNZ C0O DPI E02 FR3 111 u) J KW8 LX9 JH JH M [H JIL J] ^ BrfH ACafoKHpRerbrb m m 0000 13 14 15 18 I M I 0000 17 IS 19 20 MM 0000 71 27 73 24 MM 0000 75 26 77 28 1 I I 0000 7t 30 31 32 MM 0000 33 34 35 38 MM 0000 37 38 39 40 MM 0000 41 47 43 44 MM 0000 45 46 r 48 MM OOOO 49 50 51 52 1 n I Q 000 n It 0000 00 ^r SB M 60 61 U 1111 FILE NUMBER FILE SERIAL NUMBER ROTATED -GROUP ROTATED- SERIAL SCREENING COMPOUNDS □ □ □ □ COLOR STRIPE ROSE GRAY BLUE NONE CHEMICAL CODE 123456789 10 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 33 34 35 38] 13 31 19 40 99 99 9 999 47 43 44|4S 4S 42 4« 9999 49 50 SI s; 11 9999 S3 54 55 56 12 9999 57 SB S9 GO 1 I 55 22 3 3 Ir.W na/si MbfelfrkllKkh ilCeCdbfaHuhSi AsCoHllgPd5cI{ AlCr/kDh/hSeFm MsHlMoPrSilJ casA . BcOflhllllMnll CMPIItlCAL rOftUULA (1.1 JA iduiiH.Ma r T NATiOIMAL RESEARCH COUNCIL. CHEMICAL-BIOLOGICAL COORDINATION CENTER 000 75 76 77 000 T8 19 BO 1 1 1 222 333 444 555 999 25 78 71 999 Figure 3 --Chemistry IBM Punched Card - 196 APPENDIX A I. THE BIOLOGY IBM PUNCHED CARD It will be noted that the standard IBM card (Figure 1) is divided into 80 columns in each of which are printed the numbers 1 through 9 and, at the top of the column, 0. Thus, it may be immediately ap- parent that in each column there are at least ten positions for perforation, representing ten available sym- bols. The machines can make two additional perforations at the top of the columns beyond the 0 position. These are referred to as the II and 12 positions on the column. Therefore, in all, there are actually twelve basic punching positions in each column, representing twelve available symbols. It is possible to multiply the number of symbols available in any one column by using the three upper positions of the column (0, 11, and 12) as designators for combination with any one of the remain- ing number positions. This permits the 26 combinations which are assigned the letters of the alphabet as symbols. Figure 1 illustrates each punch and punching combination which can subsequently be dis- tinguished and interpreted as a symbol. While any or all of these may be used in any one column of the card, each is illustrated in a separate column in the figure, with the interpretation at the top of the col- umn. In each of the first twelve columns, the card in Figure 1 is punched with only a single punch, the punching being interpreted, at the top of the card, as numerical symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, 11, and 12. In Columns 22 through 39 and 41 through 48, the punching illustrates combinations of po- sition 12, 11, or 0 with position 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9, this punching being interpreted, at the top of the card, as letters A through Z. It will be noted that the combination of punches in positions 0 and 1 is not made, due to the proximity of the two perforations in the same column; punching in adjacent positions in the same column is never recommended, to prevent any possible confusion in machine inter- pretation and sorting. The three topmost punching positions (12, 1), and 0) are commonly referred to as "zone punches", the remaining ("low") positions in the column being the "digit punches". The former are sometimes re- ferred to as the "first", "second", and "third" zone punches, but throughout the Code and Key they are referred to as the "12", "11", and "0" zone punches, respectively. In addition to using the zone punches in combination with digit punches for 26 alphabetical sym- bols, it is possible to assign definitions to each of the zone punches alone; in other words, the 0, II, or 12 position could be punched, uncombined with any numerical punch, to indicate a specific meaning assigned to that single punch, as well as being used in combination with digit punches to indicate a specific meaning assigned to that combination. In that case, the number of available symbols in any one column would be 38 (1 through 9, A through Z, and the 3 zone punches used alone). The CBCC, however, has never used any zone punch alone as a symbol when it has been used already as a desig- nator for letter symbols. Therefore, in the case of the CBCC Biology Code, any one IBM punched card column may be considered to be limited to a maximum of 3 5 symbols each. Reference to the following list will make clear the number of symbols available to the CBCC in any one column, according to the use made of the zone punches. Number of symbols available in one Symbols used column 1 through 9 and A through Z (no zone punches used alone) 35 1 through 9, A through R, and the 0 zone punch used alone 28 1 through 9, J through Z, and the 12 zone punch used alone 27 1 through 9, A through I, S through Z, and the 1 1 zone punch used alone ... 27 1 through 9, A through I, and the 1 1 and 0 zone punches used alone 20 1 through 9, S through Z, and the 12 and 11 zone punches used alone .... 19 1 through 9 and the 12, 11, and 0 zone punches used alone 12 Some types of information need fewer symbols than others. Consequently, the pattern of zone punch combinations with digit punches (one of the seven above) varies from column to column, according to the information category, though it can not vary within a given column once it is established. The first of the seven possible combinations might be appropriate for information coded in one column (because more than 28 symbols are needed for the category of information coded in that column), while the second or third or any other of the last six possible combinations could be established for informa- tion coded in another column (if 28 or fewer symbols are adequate for that particular information category). When a zone punch is not used for combinations with the numerical punches (any of the last six possibilities of the seven listed above), the CBCC has considered it to be available for a specific definition, if needed. However, if a special meaning is assigned to a zone punch, the CBCC considers 197 that zone punch unavailable (and not needed) for combination with the numerical punches. For example, if a given column appears to need fewer than 29 symbols and a special meaning is assigned to the 12 zone punch (see the third, sixth, and seventh items of the list above), the letters A through I are never used for symbols in that particular column. In the same column in which the 12 zone punch has been used for a unique meaning, however, if the 11 and 0 zone punches have not also been assigned special meaning (see the third possibility of the list above), the letters J through R and S through Z would be available as symbols. In cases where the CBCC has assigned specific meanings to zone punches used alone (any of the last six possibilities listed above, when the major category of information coded in the column needs only 28 or fewer symbols), that specific meaning is of a different category of information than is coded by the remaining symbols of the column. For example, the information category, stage of development of the test organism, has been found to be adequately classified by nine items (nine developmental stages), needing only the nine numeric symbols; thus, a different category of information (sex) has been assigned to zone punches 12 and 11 used alone, the 12 zone punch designating the male sex and the 1 1 zone punch the female. The 12 and 11 zone punches used alone are never written on the Code Sheet as Symbol "12" and Symbol "1 1", since it can be confusing to have a symbol with two digits to be written in one column. Instead, the CBCC always uses the two symbols, "*" and "#", respectively. The written Symbol "*" is therefore always represented on the IBM card by a perforation at position 12 (the 12 zone punch) and Symbol "#" by a perforation at position 11 (the 11 zone punch). The 0 zone punch, however, is always written literally as Symbol "0". As has been explained above, for each column of the punched card, 35 symbols are potentially available. If, instead of using only one column for a given type of information, two columns are used, the number of symbols available is greatly increased. For example, the CBCC has reserved both of Columns 23 and 24 for indicating the genera belonging to the family indicated by Columns 21 and 22. Thus, each genus and each family has a symbol of two units. This means that each of the 35 avail- able symbols of one column can be combined with any of the 35 symbols of the second column so that 1225 symbols are available for that number of genera (Columns 23 and 24) or families (Columns 21 and 22) of test organisms. If three columns were used, the number of symbols available for any given type of information would be correspondingly greater. The biology IBM punched card (Figure 2) differs from the ordinary card of Figure 1 only in the special CBCC designaUons printed on the card. The top of the biology punched card is divided into areas in which the IBM Interpreter can enter the code symbols represented by perforations in certain of the columns. All the punched informaUon of the card is not included, but only the serial number of the chemical tested and symbols for the test organism, sex and stage of the test organism, state of the test organism, primary organ, action of the chemical, effectiveness, criterion of effectiveness, secondary chemical, host, sex and stage of the host, state of the host, secondary organ, and tissue. Since room at the top of the card is limited, only that coded information to which reference is most frequently made is included. It will be noted that the interpretation of a punched column need not be directly above the column, but the IBM Interpreter can be wired to inscribe the interpretation at another position. For example, the criterion for evaluation is punched in Columns 69 and 70 (see the lower part of the card), yet the Interpreter can print the interpretation at the top of the card in a position fixed above Columns 54-57. The printing which appears horizontally across the 6, 7, and 8 punching positions of the biology card represents a guide to anyone attempting to interpret directly the punching on the card; it shows the division of the card into 31 punching "fields" of information about the biology test and four addi- tional punching "fields" which are for other information categories (Chemical Serial Number, Code Sheet Number, Code Line Number, and File Number). The central area of the card is occupied with reference to the several special files of the IBM cards (files supplementary to the principal file of IBM cards arranged by Chemical Serial Number). Since the last revision of these entries on the card, two addiUonal files were established, the Host File and the Supplementary Taxonomy File. These files and the Code Sheet are described later. The file to which a given card belongs is indicated by a colored strip at the upper edge, a necessary means of distinction, since cards punched identically will be in three of the files and may be in all of the files. When removed from its file, the manual refiling of the card into its proper cabinet is assured by the color identification. The cards of the principal file, the "Serial File", are distinguished by being entirely blue. The clipping of the upper right corner of the biology punched card is merely to distinguish the punched card as containing biology information. CBCC chemistry punched cards are clipped in the opposite corner. - 198 - II. THE BIOLOGY CODE SHEET The earliest CBCC coding was on special 8-1/2" x 11" sheets referred to as "work sheets". The sheets were redesigned to fit the final pattern of the Code (the fifth edition) and have since been termed "Code Sheets". On these Code Sheets, coders translate the information into code symbols, accompanying the coding with a written abstract. The Code Sheets bear reference to the source of in- formation and the identity of the specific test compound, as well as a reference to themselves, a num- ber which is assigned to each Code Sheet after it is coded and which facilitates its retrieval after being filed in a special Code Sheet File. The Code Sheets are 17" x U". For filing and ease in handling, they are folded once to become 8-1/2" x 11". A Code Sheet is illustrated on the following pages. On the inner side of the Code Sheet (Figure 5), sixty-five of the eighty columns of the IBM punched card are depicted (Columns 9 through 71, 78 and 79). These are organized into several areas or "fields", each of which represents a distinct type of information commonly associated with tests for biological responses to chemicals. A description of the type of information assigned to each field is printed at the top of the Code Sheet, as a "title" of the field. Below this area naming the coding fields (regarding the lower long edge of the Sheet as the bottom edge), the Sheet is divided into four equal areas by horizontal rulings. The areas are labelled as I, 11, III, and IV on the Code Sheet illustration. Considering only one of these areas, it will be seen to consist of two bands across the Sheet (labelled as A and B in the illustration), the broader of which is divided by vertical rulings according to coding fields and the narrower of which is divided according to the sixty-five IBM columns. In the broader band is written the information about the test; for example, the name of the test organism, tumor, or pathology is written in Field E, a description of the response is written in Fields T- 1 and T-2, the exact dose administered is written in Fields M and/or N, etc. This, then, represents a written abstract of the test, to be filed and to which reference is made from the IBM punched card index. The area is referred to throughout the Code and Key as the "written abstract" portion of the code line or sometimes as the "language" portion. In the narrow band, the information is coded, placing the code symbols from the Biology Code in the appropriate "code boxes", in other words, in the places representing the appro- priate IBM punched card columns. Completed, this written abstract and the coding of the information represents one "code line". On each Sheet, then, space is provided for four code lines, each repre- senting one action of a given chemical tested (i. e. , one response of an organism) as shown by any one test from any given source of information. As a reference from the IBM punched card to the code line, each line is numbered (at the right end of the line) and this reference number ("Line No. ") is punched in Columns 78 and 79 of the IBM card. As indicated previously, each Code Sheet is assigned a reference number (the Code Sheet Number) which is placed at the upper right corner of the inner surface of the Code Sheet and is punched in Columns 72 through 77 of the IBM card. This Code Sheet Number has no significance other than a reference number. It is used in filing (see the description of the Code Sheet Files) and it assists in keeping records of the Sheets as they are checked, processed by chemists, punched, etc. The Numbers are assigned strictly by the sequence of the Code Sheets being returned from the coder. In referring to them, the term "serial" has never been applied in order to avoid confusion with the number designations assigned to chemicals which the CBCC commonly refers to as the "CBCC Serial Number". The "CBCC Chemical Serial Number" referred to above (which has been abbreviated to "CBC Number") is placed in the upper left corner of the inner side of the Biology Code Sheet. This number is a reference to the identity of the chemical tested and will be explained in the next section, dis- cussing the coding of chemical information. Because one compound may be reported from a single information source as having been dem- strated to have caused several responses or it may have been tested in several ways, four code lines are frequently not sufficient. The coder then uses a second Code Sheet (a "continuation Sheet") or as many Sheets as are necessary to record all information about that one compound from that one infor- mation source; all of these Code Sheets, the first and all the continuation Sheets, are assigned the same Code Sheet Number. At the top of the Sheet and to the right of the center, the coder indicates the total number of Code Sheets used for this purpose (note the designation, "of Total") and, of that total, the sequential number which the Code Sheet represents ("Sheet No. "), the initial Sheet being Sheet No. 1, the first continuation Sheet being Sheet No. 2, etc. Finally, a space is provided at the top of the Sheet in which the coder and the person checking the coding enter their identifying initials ("Coded by" and "Checked by"). If it proves that coding 199 difficulties make necessary a resident staff member's reviewing the coder's and checker's work, this "arbitrator's" initials are also entered here ("Arbitrated by"). As the illustration of the Code Sheet indicates, this side of the Code Sheet on which the actual coding is entered is considered to be the "inside" of the Sheet. When folded for mailing or filing, then, this coding is on the inner surface and the reverse side (the outer surface) forms a "front" and "back" of the Code Sheet. The front side (Figure 6) is generally self explanatory of entries to be made identifying the chemical tested, the information source, and the Code Sheet Number. In the space in which coders are instructed not to make an entry, only the CBCC resident chemists enter the name of the chemical tested, using, for consistency, the name by which the chemical has been filed in the CBCC Chemistry Files, generally conforming to Chemical Abstracts nomenclature. The back side of the folded Code Sheet (Figure 4) is also generally self explanatory, being for the coders' recording of properties of the test compound, whenever such information is given by the information source. All completed Code Sheets, after being assigned Code Sheet Numbers, checked, arbitrated, and processed by the chemists and IBM punch operators, are filed in a Code Sheet File which serves as a master file of the information collected by the CBCC. This file is described later. III. RECORDING OF INFORMATION ABOUT CHEMICALS AND CODING OF CHEMICAL STRUCTURES Space does not permit more than an outline of the procedures the Center used for handling information about chemicals used in chemical-biological tests. The Chemistry Code was published in 1950. By this Code, the CBCC recorded on IBM punched cards the structures of compounds tested for their biological effects. The actual process of coding the chemical information paralleled that of coding biological data. For each compound, every effort was made to determine its molecular structure, all its properties, and the name by which it is indexed in the most universally used reference to current chemical literature, Chemical Abstracts. In addition, the chemists recorded all information given about alternate chemical names, proprietary names, common names, commercial sources, and natural sources. Also, a reference was recorded to the literature article or other source of chemical-biological information in which the chemical was first encountered by the CBCC. Each identified chemical was assigned a reference number at the time of recording the infor- mation about it. The reference number must be understood to be distinct from the coding of chemicals' specific structures; the number represents essentially only the sequence in which the chemical was recorded and coded by the CBCC. The numbers are referred to as the CBCC Chemical Serial Numbers (abbreviated to "CBC Numbers"). This Serial Number is basically of six units; an additional two units can be appended (separated by a dash from the sixth unit) to the basic Serial Number to indicate the compound's various salts, solvates, and isotopes used in biological tests. All information about a single compound was written on a special sheet, the Chemistry Code Sheet, including the compound's Serial Number and its structure, both as a structural formula diagram and as a coded molecular formula. The Chemistry Code Sheet, front and back, is illustrated by Figures 7 and 8. The coded structure of each compound and its Serial Number were punched on IBM cards (occasionally, two IBM cards were needed for a compound of especially large molecular structure). The specially printed IBM card used for punching chemical structures is illustrated in Figure 3. The files of chemistry IBM punched cards and of the Chemistry Code Sheets are described later. A Method for Coding Chemicals for Correlation and Classification (1950): $1. 50. National Research Council, Washington, D. C. 200 - o -< o ;o p OD 2 -o m T3 -H -n o T3 ^ o > > (/I T3 r- -H P :^ O z —1 o > m —1 X o z z 1 o o Q z ~o -o > — 1 c 73 m o > I -< ;o n > r— c — { > 1 — on o o z — 1 c uo > o o X -< (/) o > o > Z > -< CO Figure 4 BIOLOGY CODE SHEET Back side of outer surface, when folded 201 - CBC No. Coded by Arbitrated by < « c >« o -a u < c -D S Taxonomy Host So !l ^ 1 -S i S E Test Organism, Tumor, or Pathology (Biological System Specifically TrealecJ or Responding) 11 li .si la tJi °-'o - 1 ■; ? cO 1 S E ? 1 1 1 ° 11 Host or Host Environ- ment of the Test Organism, lumor, or Pathology < m u a lu ■1. 6 6 z z - -» 9 10 II 12 13 14 j 15 16 17 18 19 20 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3D 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 - I - A } B ^ ' II 1 ^ > III -X > IV BI OL I 1 OG nnt wh "igu Y C< 2r SI en f re 5 DDE SHEI irface, olded :t 9 10 II 12 13 14 IS 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3.1 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 - 202 ol Total Code Sheet No. Dosage E O "o |"e 1 ? a. 11 J o. ,= -i J' < 3 "o 3 a> O ^•3 s 1 o g c J c .•^ O "o ^ Ol ■5 0 a Action Response S c il 01 1 § — c II c o I 0 u o 1 ^ ~ a- .SI u Duration of Treat- ment; Interval be- tween Admin, of Test Cpd. and 2ndary Cpd. 'o-o II Biological Stale, Quality, or Process Acted on or Produced by the Test Cpd. or Secondary Cpd,; Alteration or AAefabolic Fate of a Compound ". i ?- I t, 0 at 0 -5 Duration of Response. Survival Time Alter'n; Time to Spec. Effect; Residue Persislance " s E ^ E 3 < 5 s£ «- c at 0 ,E - = s .0 to ^ — S'o S ill 3|e 1 > It si E'o Q- (i irt || "o ae ^ 2 z o a. o- te (A A ~ 1^ 3 > » K >- 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 |SI 52 53 54 S5 56 i7 58 59 60 6, 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 78 79 LINE NO .INE NO -INE NO. 66 LINE NO- 42 43 44 45 41> 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 67 68 69 70 71 78 79 203 OO z —1 TO > c 2 O m n —1 S <= n S ^ o :» m CD in m CD z O CD 3 o O -< ° 9 o i »" =3 - 3. -< z •< I o ^-§ > ^ O =1 m =J - CD 3 o 3_ :<^ on on o yo o O m Tl (^ c: D m O 73 n m m X3 m -H m Z cz o o m o — ) m -p O — 1 O o z o Q- o z m CD 2 p o 0) 3 cz z ^ o o -D •<^ Fi gure 6 BIOLOGY CO DE SHEET Front side ( 3f outer c urface, whe n folded o O o JO 2 O —I m XI Z CZ 2 O o 5" O Z 3". ^ -^ O O Z O o o • 3 O z «/» O '^ So 204 Q O u < I Csl •O O LD o Figure 7 CHEMISTRY CODE SHEET Front 1 I I 205 - 0 0 0 ■ m m ~z. -D -D 2 o Z o 0 > — ) 70 > m > 0 I 0 > I— 00 n 0 I m 0 z — t c on > n m en 73 m — ( m > r~ Z -n 0 :^ > 0 Z z n Figure 8 CHEMISTRY CODE SHEET Back 206 In addition to the Chemistry IBM Punched Card File and the Chemistry Code Sheet File, Informa- tion about each chemical was recorded in a third way, on 3" x 5" index cards. A card was prepared for each chemical, giving its Serial Number, its molecular formula, the name by which it is indexed in Chemical Abstracts, and, whenever known, its structural formula. A typical Chemistry Index Card is illustrated by Figure 9. The CBCC maintained three complete files of these index cards; arrangement was by Chemical Serial Number (CBC Number) in one, by Chemical Abstracts name in the second, and molecular formula in the third. Duplication of each card (for the three files and for other purposes) was by typing the information originally on a 3" x 5" Ditto master; all Ditto masters were kept in a fourth file for any future duplication needs. 106,991 Butyrophenone, Z-ethyl- Sz"l6° // w COCHIC^H^)^ Figure 9 Chemistry Index Card IV. THE CBCC FILES Although the Center's activities have been terminated, the information files, at the date of this publication, have not been destroyed nor placed in permanent storage. On the basis of their being still available and on the assumption that even as static files they will have value for a period of time, the following descriptions imply their current existence. Code Sheet Files: It has been explained that all the biological information recorded by the CBCC is on the Biology Code Sheets and the information on specific chemicals is on the Chemistry Code Sheets. These were the prime sources of information at the Center, just as books are the basic sources of information in a library. The Biology Code Sheets and Chemistry Code Sheets are both filed according to CBCC Chemical Serial Numbers in the same cabinets. Inasmuch as information from tests on any one compound may be derived from several sources, a compound may be represented in the file by many Biology Code Sheets. Under any one Chemical Serial Number, therefore, all Biology Code Sheets bearing that Serial Number are filed according to the Biology Code Sheet Numbers. Each chemical for which there are biological test data in the file is represented by only a single Chemistry Code Sheet, so the total Chemical Code Sheet File is of con- siderably smaller proportions than the Biology Code Sheet File. Regarding the Code Sheet File independently (i. e. , without the Biology IBM Punched Card Files), Sheets can be associated and retrieved only by the Chemical Serial Number under which they are filed. No index file of Code Sheet Numbers was maintained for the Code Sheet File; therefore, a Sheet known only by its Sheet Number can not be retrieved. (This was occasionally an inconvenience and consider- ation was given to establishing this index file. ) Neither were Indexes maintained of authors or infor- mation sources (journals and other publications, CBCC Screening Program test reports, etc. ) by which Code Sheets might be reassembled to represent all information of a given article, a given screening laboratory, a given author, etc. These are not, however, regarded as deficiencies of the Code Sheet Files, since, operating within its specific objectives, the CBCC found little reason for associating the information in these ways. The only approach to the information on the Code Sheets, beyond the chemical identities by which they are organized, is through the index provided by the IBM Punched Card Files, described below. 207 Biology IBM Punched Card Files: The coded information of the Biology Code Sheets and Chemistry Code Sheets was placed on IBM punched cards and filed in standard IBM card cabinets. The coded and punched information on these cards may be regarded in two ways. First, the entries on the card serve to index the Biology Code Sheet File which contains the information about chemical-biological tests in detail as a written abstract. The advantages of this index (more correctly, a complex of indexes) have already been discussed in the Introduction and will be continued here and in a subsequent part of the Appendix. Secondarily, the CBCC considered the information of the Biology Code Sheet File to be coded to such detail that, for some purposes, the information of the Biology Punched Card Files might be regarded reasonably as an adequate substitute for the Code Sheet File. At the same time, it was recog- nized that the coded information on the punched cards was not adequate for all purposes. Details unique to special tests are often not coded for lack of a coding provision and certain information is abbreviated to code only by expressing it as an approximation; for example, the coded dosage would be known to lie somewhere within a coded range. Furthermore, since the CBCC IBM punched cards were actually designed having in mind only their use at the Center in conjunction with the Code Sheets, no provision was made for including the source of information on the cards. Thus, for final interpre- tation, it is often necessary to go to the Biology Code Sheet to which reference is made by the punched card. For reference to the original information source, it is always necessary to go to the Code Sheet. This suggests that a desirable eventual refinement would be the design of some means whereby the punched card would include the information source and even a reproduction of the related Code Sheet Line which the punched card represents. Nevertheless, the IBM Punched Card Files can be regarded, for some purposes, as bearing enough information in code to be used independently of the Code Sheets as a medium for transfer of information. Because the Punched Card Files and their use represents such an important aspect of the CBCC, it is appropriate to dwell on their arrangement and the reasons behind that arrangement, in an effort to make clear their significance and to give a general idea of the way they were used. However, it is not possible here to outline all the patterns for use of the punched card files in searching for specified information. The pattern varies according to the information requested and, except for certain more simple requests, some "programming" for sorting of punched cards is necessary. Reference has already been made to the Introduction's description of the punching of coded information on cards in terms of indexing the Code Sheet Files in which the information is deposited as a written abstract. The information in the Code Sheet File can be considered as being indexed, not merely by the order by which the punched cards are filed (according to chemicals tested, e. g. ), but according to every category of information coded and punched on the cards (i. e. , according to the chemical tested, organism, anatomy, host, response, etc. ). Furthermore, it has been pointed out in the Introduction that an advantage to using machines and punched cards is that it permits having all these indexes in a single file rather than having a duplicate set of cards for every index, each arranged according to that index classification. For example, even though the cards were arranged according to the chemical tested, if information were wanted about a given organism or group of organisms (e. g. , information on MoUusca), the speed of machines makes possible a rapid examination of the entire file and sorting out those cards punched to indicate MoUusca; the results of this machine sort is identical to the result that would be achieved by having a separate file of punched cards arranged according to code symbols for organisms, from which all the cards referring to MoUusca could be taken manually. These basic observations would lead to the assumption that the CBCC needed but a single file of IBM punched cards to index its information collection. Since the Center actually established several files of its IBM punched cards, differing only by the way they were arranged (according to organism, to response, etc. ), the above observations need modifying to explain, first, why a single file was inadequate for the CBCC and, secondly, that the advantages described above apply and are utilized even though the several card files are needed. For these explanations, two major factors should be considered, (1) the speed of the machines used and (2) the size of the information collection and the corresponding size of the file of IBM punched cards. Machine sorting for cards on which is punched a specified symbol, from a group of one hundred, or even five hundred, cards is one thing, but sorting by machine from a file of many thousands of cards is quite another. It is not a matter of the machines used by the CBCC not being able to accomplish this, but a matter of speed; compared to the speed by which cards for MoUusca, for example, can be taken manually from a file in which the cards are arranged according to organisms, the time for machine - 208 - sorting all cards of the file arranged according to chemicals is too great to be practical (again, speaking with respect to machines with the speed of those used by the CBCC). Another factor related to this can not be ignored, the vulnerability of the cards to a certain amount of damage with handling and the passage of time. Since their practical "life" is of limited duration even with minimal use, the frequent passage of all the cards of a single file through machines would inevitably demand frequent card replacement due to damage. The answer to this problem was to reduce to a practical minimum the number of cards to be machine handled in any given card sort. To do this, the CBCC established eight card files, supple- mentary to the principal file which was arranged according to the Serial Numbers of chemicals tested. For example, for the "Taxonomy Punched Card File", a duplicate was made of every card in the major file (i. e. , the "Serial File") and the cards were arranged according to the symbols coded in Field E (organism, tumor, or pathology tested); in six other files, the cards were arranged according to the coding in Field T-2 (the biological state, quality, or process affected), in Field T-3 (the category of effect of the test compound reflecting practical use), in Field H (the organ affected), in Field I (the tissue affected), in Field J (the host of the test organism), and in Field D (a chemical synergized, antagonized, or used as a standard for comparison in evaluating the effect). More recently, an additional (eighth) supplementary file was established which resembles the Taxonomy Punched Card File just described in that the cards are arranged according to symbols coded in Field E; it differs in that its arrangement is not on the basis of the finest classification unit (i. e. , species of test organ- isms), but on the basis of major classification units (e. g. , bacteria, dicotyledonous plants, arthropods, etc. ); under each of these major taxonomy classification units, all the cards are arranged by Chemical Serial Number, whereas in the principal Taxonomy Punched Card File, the cards are arranged by Chemical Serial Number under each species. Thus, in all, there are nine separate Biology Punched Card Files. The nine files are not all of equal size, because certain of the information categories are not represented on every card and, if a card is not punched in a field for which a special punched card file was established, that card is not included in that file. The Serial File and the two files arranged by entries in Field E and Field T-2 are all of equal size, each containing a card for every code line. On the other hand, the files arranged according to tissues and secondary compounds are small enough to be accommodated by a few cabinet drawers. It should be noted that, for most of the fields (i. e. , indexes), such as Field A (state of the chemical), Field G (experimental state of the organism), Fields M and N (dose size), and Field S-3 (path of administration of the chemical), no special punched card files were established. This is because of the improbability that the entire Serial File would ever need be sorted for that information. In other words, separate punched card files were maintained only for those categories of information most frequently sought and for which a machine sort of the entire punched card file arranged by Chemical Serial Number would be necessary but impractical. For example, if there were wanted all information about tests made on a specified organism or group of organisms, or on a specified organ, or for a specified response, the file search would begin with punched cards bearing the identifying symbol for the organism, organ, or response in question; the cards would be obtained by manual selection from the punched card file arranged according to test organisms, from the file arranged according to the organs responding, or from the file arranged according to specific responses. The type of question asked of the CBCC files was seldom so simple as the examples given above, but was most frequently qualified by stipulations of a second or more information categories. For example, a request might be for information about tests made for a specified response on a speci- fied organism; this might be further qualified by stipulating interest in only positive data and in chem- icals effective at doses lower than a specified maximum. No special files of IBM punched cards are maintained by the CBCC with cards arranged according to evaluation of effectiveness (negative or pos- itive or the degree of positive activity) and dose size. These are not categories of information for which a primary search through the entire card file would ever be likely. Therefore, the first step would not be to machine sort the entire punched card Serial File, but to go to the appropriate supple- mentary punched card file, in this case either the file arranged according to test organisms or the file arranged according to responses, or both. At that point, depending on the number of cards which had been found for the specified organism or for the specified response, the decision would be made as to whether the machines could be used to advantage in sorting for the cards meeting the other specifications (data which is positive and at doses lower than a given maximum). It is possible that the cards result- ing from the primary step may be so few that, for the secondary sort, reading and sorting the cards manually would take less time than it would take to carry the cards to the machines, make out specifi- cations for machine operators, etc. 209 The objective in having the eight supplementary punched card files is demonstrated by the foregoing example; the files permit an initial and efficient manual selection of cards from the total punched card file, resulting in a group of cards which is of a size practical for handling by machines, if necessary. With the preceding as background, it can now be explained how the CBCC used the machines to the advantage they have been described as offering. Though machines are not used by the CBCC to sort through the entire punched card file, the advantage of machines is not lost. It is merely transferred to the secondary step. The cards resulting from manual selection might be regarded as a temporary and specialized file of cards; regarded in this way, it is seen to be cross-indexed by punches according to every one of the information categories coded by the Biology Code. All the advantages described earlier for coding and machine handling in general apply to this special small file which results from the initial manual selection. To carry this idea to the example of cards selected from the punched card file arranged according to organisms, we can regard cards resulting from the selection as a special file, the "special" feature in this example being restriction of information to that on one or more specified organisms. If only the cards for one species of organism were selected, the cards in this specialized file resulting from that initial selection would be arranged according to Chemical Serial Numbers, since that is the way the cards are arranged secondarily under any one species in the punched card file. The remaining information punched on the card (i. e. , other than test organism identity) represents indexes which, however, can be efficiently used as indexes only by applications of machine sorting of all the cards (unless the cards are so few that inspection of the punches of the card or interpretation at the top of the card would be faster than machines). For example, if the initial manual selection results in five hundred cards (all punched with the symbols for the organism in question), the sorting of those cards for only those which are punched with symbols for a specified response or for a specified organ is made practical by use of machines. For practical retrieval of information by machines, using only a single file comparable to the CBCC Serial Punched Card File, machines used must have a far greater capacity for rapid selection, assembly, and reproduction from that single file than the IBM equipment used by the CBCC. Chemistry IBM Punched Card Files: The major file of Chemistry IBM Punched Cards is arranged according to the CBCC Chemical Serial Number and is referred to as the "Chemical Serial File". This single file is not sufficient for the most practical retrieval of information about chemicals of specified structure and therefore a subsidiary file is maintained for these cards. This second file is arranged according to structural components instead of the Chemical Serial Number. For this particular file, the coding of each compound is in most cases necessarily punched on more than one card, the number of cards for any compound being equal to the number of types of structural groups which are contained in the molecule and which are given a distinct code symbol. (The Chemistry Code should be examined to understand the specific structural groups assigned unique symbols. ) On these two or more punched cards representing one chemical compound, the punching of the coded structural groups is "rotated". To explain this "rotation" requires first explaining that the punching of code symbols for structural groups of a compound is not fixed to a definite area of the Chemistry Punched Card in the way that a given type of biology information (e. g. , the test organism identity) is fixed to one area of the Biology Punched Card (e. g. , only Columns 18 through 25 of the Biology Punched Card, for test organisms); instead, on the Chemistry Punched Card, the coding for one structural group can be punched in Columns 13 through 16, or punched in Columns 17 through 20, or 21 through 24, etc. (Coding of any structural group requires only four IBM punched card columns, three columns for the code identity of the group and a fourth column to indicate the number of times the structural group occurs in the molecule. ) Therefore, the punched sequence of the coded structural groups can be varied on the cards for any one compound so that each group appears in turn at the beginning (i. e. , at the left of the Chemistry Punched Card, Columns 13 through 16). For example, a compound with three structural components (for which there are three distinct, four-unit code symbols) would occupy Columns 13 through 16, 17 through 20, and 21 through 24 on any punched card (refer to the illustration of the Chemistry Punched Card, Figure 3), but in this special "rotated" file, three cards would be punched, differing only in that the coding for each structural group appears on one of these cards in Columns 13 through 16. This file is referred to as the "Chemistry Rotated File" and it permits manual selection of all compounds containing any given structural group, because the file is arranged according to the coded structural group punched in Columns 13 through 16. Two other files of Chemistry IBM Punched Cards, indicated on the card illustrated in Figure 3, are special files maintained more for CBCC internal convenience than for actual retrieval or correlation 210 - of Information on Code Sheets. In one of these, a duplicate of each of the cards of the Chemistry Rotated File (described immediately above) is filed according to Chemistry Serial Numbers. The fourth file contains the punched cards for only the compounds obtained and distributed for testing by the special CBCC Screening Program and was useful mostly for reference to that program. Miscellaneous Files: The process of collecting chemical-biological information (selecting, coding, checking, and otherwise processing it) demanded keeping careful records at the Center and there were several files needed for this. The files maintained for all this processing cannot be described in detail here. One example is the file maintained for each of the journals reviewed for information, to avoid duplication of review and coding and to provide a current record of the segment of literature covered by the collec- tion in the CBCC files. Another example was the file of authors and articles coded, though this was used solely for assistance in maintaining Sets of Code Sheets as they were coded, checked, arbitrated, processed by chemists, etc. Neither of these two files was referenced through Chemical Serial Number to the Biology Code Sheet File and they could not (nor were they intended) to be used for reassembling coded information from a given journal or article or by a given author, after the Code Sheets were filed. The Chemistry 3" x 6" Index Card Files have already been described in the preceding section dealing with the recording and coding of chemicals. The Center maintained limited files of original data which had been coded and punched. One file contained miscellaneous publications or unpublished compilations of test results, retained for practical reasons of reference. Also, a file was maintained of the reports from the Center's own Screening Program. The Center did not purchase and maintain any of the many periodical publications from which data was selected, but depended solely on libraries available to its non-resident coders and those of the Washington, D. C. , area. V. CBCC PROCEDURES FOR SELECTION, CODING, PROCESSING. AND FILING CHEMICAL- BIOLOGICAL INFORMATION The following will be limited to descriptions of procedures used by the CBCC in collecting and storing information. The methods for handling the coded and punched information, once it was integrated into the CBCC files, is dealt with elsewhere in the Appendixes and in the Introduction. In Appendix B, time needed for the procedures described below is discussed under the heading. Currency of the CBCC Files. Selection of Chemical-Biological Information: The quantity of information of chemical effects on biological systems is so vast that the CBCC, with its limited staff and means, could not pretend to be able to collect but a part of it. In view of this, emphasis was placed on obtaining information known not to have been published or to have been published obscurely and which is therefore less apt to be indexed in other places. On the other hand, a serious effort was made by the CBCC, within the limits of its means, to review the current literature for all appropriate data. This review regularly included the journals determined by a preliminary survey to be most rewarding in terms of the quantity of information on chemical-biological tests included in them. A restriction in this selection was that of omitting clinical data on responses to chemotherapy. While this policy was not followed slavishly to the total exclusion of any data that can be conceivably regarded as being clinical, it was adhered to generally. This was not because clinical data were regarded as without value, but because they so frequently lack the experimental control typical of laboratory-conducted tests and tend to be repetitious. Had adequate facilities and staff been avail- able, the CBCC would have collected all clinical data and included them in its coded files. In 1951, when the procedures for selection of information were established, it was decided to attempt to review back to 1946 all issues of the journals selected for routine review while, at the same time, reviewing current issues. For most of those journals, this was successfully accomplished. All review of the literature and selection of information from other sources was made by the resident biology staff of the Center. Each staff member assumed responsibility for a quota of scien- tific journals, including those specialized journals of his own field of scientific interest and training. 211 Selection of chemical-biological information from the literature is rarely a task which persons with little or no academic background in the biological sciences can do adequately. This is perhaps best realized only through experience. Examination of the literature for appropriate information amounts to considerably more than a rapid and superficial scanning. While a considerable proportion of the data are revealed by the titles of journal articles, they are by no means always apparent thereby and to select data, it is never enough merely to examine a journal's table of contents. Having found data from chemical-biological tests in the literature, it was necessary for the CBCC reviewer to be able to evaluate it, to note any special problems that might be encountered in coding it and make provision for them, and to omit the data representing information which he happened to recognize as having been placed in the CBCC files already. In this process of selecting articles from the literature, the staff member recorded any selection on a form especially designed for the purpose, referred to as an Assignment Sheet. A separate Assign- ment Sheet was used for each journal (and frequently, for each issue), in order to be able to file the Sheets later according to the name of the journal. All articles selected for assignment to coders were entered on an Assignment Sheet, indicating the name of the journal, volume and issue numbers, and date of issue; for each article selected, the Sheet carried the name of the author or authors, pages on which the article appears, and any special instructions or admonitions for the article's coding. The Assignment Sheets were used also for any data other than that selected from the literature, such as data from the Center's Screening Program which were assigned to coders for coding. Each Assignment Sheet was typed in triplicate, one copy being retained in a permanent file, described in the previous section, under Miscellaneous Files. Assignment and Coding of Information: Most coding of information was done by persons not resident at the Center. Each applicant for CBCC coding (as well as each prospective resident member of the professional staff) was required to study the Biology Code and Key, perform some basic coding according to a set of typical coding problems devised by the Center as a "Primer", and finally to submit a set of approximately 100 lines of coded data from the literature. The applicant's suitability for CBCC coding was determined by the results of the coding of the Primer problems and his first 100 lines. Many applicants were discouraged by finding the analysis of data and its conversion to code a more difficult task than they had supposed, others found that it required more concentrated periods of time than their schedules permitted, and possibly some found the type of work not to their particular disposition. Most of the applicants and many of those who coded regularly for the Center could contribute only part of their professional time to the activity. All coders were persons with considerable biological academic backgrounds, many of them possessing doctorates in their special biological fields. Of most significance, however, were a basic interest in their particular field of biology, their familiarity with experimental methods and statistics, and their ability to find coding a satisfying occupation. Compensation for coding was made on the basis of the number of code lines submitted; at least fifty lines per month, as a practical minimum, was requested from each coder. If coding fell below this minimum regularly, the coder's accuracy and CBCC efficiency was found to be also below a practical level. It should be said also that, beyond the monetary compensation, many CBCC coders found not a little incentive for their work in the knowledge that they were contributing to the Center as a project with no precise precedent whose objectives they believed to be important. Further obser- vations on the coders and the CBCC operational procedures are made in Appendix B. Every month, each coder received from the Center a coding assignment, selected from the accumulated Assignment Sheets; the selection was tailored to the coder's special biological interests, whether botanical, pharmacological, bacteriological, etc. This policy often needed modification for reasons of inaccessibility of certain journals to a coder particularly qualified to code from them; furthermore, because the scope of certain journals is very broad and because it was impractical to complicate assignments further by making them on the basis of an article as an assignment unit rather than an entire journal issue, the assignment of an entire issue of such a journal often confronted one coder with articles of widely varied nature. Duplicates of the Assignment Sheets were retained at the Center for a record. It was the coder's responsibility to obtain the journals containing the articles assigned for coding. Being located geographically where journals are not readily available on loan was unfortunately a situation ordinarily disqualifying a candidate for coding. - 212 - At the end of every month, each coder mailed to the Center the Code Sheets representing completely coded journal articles (preferably, completely coded journal issues), completely coded sets of Screening Program test reports, etc. , accompanied with a record of the number of lines coded and time spent. Also accompanying the Code Sheets were special "Coder's Comment Sheets" on which the coder explained any problems encountered in coding the particular data, etc. These Comment Sheets are discussed later in Appendix B. Checking of Coding; Arbitrating between Checker and Coder: The Center treated a shipment of Biology Code Sheets from the coder as a "Set", for convenience in maintaining records. The Set was given a number which, however, was solely for purposes of main- taining its integrity through the several processing steps prior to final filing. Each Code Sheet was at this point assigned its Code Sheet Number and other records were made for it. The Set of Code Sheets was then ready to be checked. It was discovered that errors made in interpretation and coding were far too frequent and serious ever to permit coding being punched and the Code Sheets filed without having first been checked once by a second person. Ordinarily, those coders who had developed the most skill and who had demon- strated superior accuracy and comprehension of coding procedures were regularly assigned coding from other coders for checking. However, none of the persons did only checking, but each was always given some coding assignment which was subsequently checked by another of the more experienced coders. Checked coding was returned from its checker at the end of each month, accompanied by a record of the number of code lines checked, the number of code lines prepared by the coder which the checker had deleted, the number of code lines added by the checker, and coded Sheets added by the checker. Also accompanying the work were comments (on special Checker's Comment Sheets); these were addressed by the checker to the coder of the Set and pointed out errors made in coding, reasons for deletions and additions, etc. Finally, the checker sent with the Set an explanation of any coding problems he was unable to solve, items that needed to be added to the Code or Key, and questions about procedure for which the Key had no explanation. Upon receipt of the checker's work at the Center, the Checker's Comment Sheets were recorded and mailed to the coder of the Set and the Set was processed (any added Code Sheets were given Code Sheet Numbers, etc. ). Each Set was assigned then to one of the resident biology staff members. It was the policy of the Center that a resident staff member examine at least superficially each Set of checked coding. If the checker had sent comments indicating difficulties or disagreement with the coder, these comments were studied with the Set. Frequently, it was necessary to obtain the original data in order to arrive at a solution of the difficulty or to make a special coding provision. This examination and correction of the coder's and checker's work the Center referred to as "arbitrating". While this might possibly seem to require a minimum of time, it actually was a very tedious and time- consuming task; the results of any decisions needed to be transmitted to both the checker and coder who pointed out the difficulty (or who erred in coding) and, if additions and changes in the Code and/or Key were necessary, all coders had to be advised of them. An accumulation of such changes was largely responsible for the regular Supplements to the Code and Key, issued to the coders. Each Code Sheet was initialed by the coder, checker, and arbitrator. When the staff member completed his arbitration of the Set, it was returned to the clerical staff for notation of its having been arbitrated. Processing of Biology Code Sheets by Chemists: The arbitrated Code Sheets had all the information about the test compound which the author gave, but only that information. None of the biologists (the coder, checker, or arbitrator) had iden- tified the test compounds with their CBCC Chemical Serial Numbers; the coders and checkers, being non-resident, did not have access to the CBCC chemistry files and the arbitrators, though resident biologists, had no reason to develop the proficiencies in identifying chemicals which the chemical staff was specialized to do. Therefore, the Set of arbitrated Biology Code Sheets was submitted to the Center's chemistry staff. There all the chemical information recorded on the Code Sheets by the biology coder was used to determine the test compound's identity with one of the compounds already entered in the CBCC chemistry files. If the information on the Biology Code Sheet were inadequate to ascertain the identity, the chemists frequently wrote to the author for more information. If the chemical were new to the CBCC chemistry files, it was coded on a Chemistry Code Sheet and index cards were made for it. - 213 - On the Biology Code Sheets, the chemists entered the compound's Serial Number and the name by which it is indexed by Chemical Abstracts. When all of an entire Set of Biology Code Sheets had been processed by the chemists, it was again returned to the clerical staff which recorded the Set's progress toward the final file. Transfer of Coded Information to IBM Punched Cards: After being released from both the biology and chemistry staffs, each Set of Biology Code Sheets was submitted to the IBM staff. Special operators, familiar with the CBCC biology and chemistry coding, punched onto IBM cards the code symbols which had been written on the Biology Code Sheets. Each code line on the Biology Code Sheets was punched on a separate IBM card and on each card was also punched the Chemical Serial Number (which the chemists had written on the Biology Code Sheet), the Code Sheet Number (which was assigned to the Code Sheet immediately after coding), and the Line Number (which was written at the end of each line by the coder). When the punching operation was complete, the Set of Biology Code Sheets was returned to the clerical staff once more. Final Filing of the Biology Code Sheets and Biology IBM Punched Cards: After the coding of the Biology Code Sheets was punched onto IBM cards and the Set of Sheets was returned, the Set was released to the person responsible for the Code Sheet Files who filed each Code Sheet under the correct CBCC Chemical Serial Number. The filing of IBM punched cards was done by the IBM staff. Correction after Final Filing: Whenever a change was made in the Biology Code which involved information already coded, it was necessary to retrieve all the Biology Code Sheets and IBM punched cards on which that coding being altered appeared. Such corrections were always made by the resident staff. The IBM staff subsequently re-punched the corrected coding on new IBM cards; the Biology Code Sheets and the new IBM cards were then re-filed. VI. ADVANTAGES OF THE CBCC SYSTEM FOR CODING AND MACHINE HANDLING OF CHEMICAL- BIOLOGICAL INFORMATION The Introduction has described the coding fields in terms of indexes to the information collected by the CBCC and a preceding section of the Appendix (the description of the Biology IBM Punched Card Files) has described the use of the punched cards for the multiple indexing of information in the Biology Code Sheet File. The following attempts to clarify the specific advantages of the multiple indexes as the means to the ultimate objectives of the Center. The CBCC was not unique in indexing chemical-biological information in more than one way. Indexing and abstracting services such as Chemical Abstracts, Biological Abstracts, Helminthological Abstracts, etc. , include in their coverage information of this type as it occurs in the published litera- ture and they subject-index it by chemical name and organism name; In some cases, it may be indexed even by response. The ability to prepare and publish subject indexes by indexing and abstracting services has limitations, however, and a few comparative observations on this subject will be appropriate here, as an introduction to the explanation of the advantages for the multiple indexing attempted by the CBCC. Published subject index entries (chemical, organism, or response) are necessarily brief and not always or even frequently satisfactorily cross-referenced. Thus, the chemical entry does not necessarily indicate any or all organisms treated or responses produced; the organism entry does not necessarily indicate any or all of the chemicals administered or the organism's responses; the response entry does not necessarily indicate any or all of the chemicals and organisms tested for the response. The entries, of course, do refer directly to a published abstract and subsequently to the original published data. Most frequently, these published indexes are prepared from the published abstracts which the index accompanies or follows, rather than being prepared from the original data. It is - 214 appropriate, then, to consider the thoroughness of published abstracts with regard to the chemical- biological data with which the Center was concerned. However high the quality of the published abstract, it yet remains by definition a condensation of the original data, frequently omitting most experimental details; for practical reasons, a published abstract is restrained to the briefest summary of test data. It can not be expected to describe all the information comparable to that coded by the CBCC, partly because of the limitations in publication space and partly because abstracters do not prepare abstracts according to fixed rules comparable in detail to those for CBCC abstracting. There is often no real assurance that an abstract identifies all the organisms used or all the chemicals tested, or all the responses demonstrated in a given article, not to speak of doses, paths of administration, evaluation details, etc. It would be expected that an agency whose efforts were concentrated on a given type of infor- mation would collect that information more assiduously and in greater detail than would an agency whose literature coverage is either far greater in scope or of a different specialization. Thus, in the case of the CBCC, having established exactly the details wanted for its purposes, chemical-biological test data was abstracted to include meticulously all organisms, all compounds, and all responses from any given chemical-biological information source (to restrict the observation for the moment to those three more commonly published subject indexes). This factor of thoroughness is not implied here to be an advantage offered by the CBCC system or procedure precisely, so much as an advantage resulting from the CBCC's specialization. Sometimes observations of biological responses are reported incidentally in an article. In other words, there occasionally occur, and are mentioned in passing, responses not further discussed or explored by the author nor are they included in the article's summary. Whatever the reasons may be, the fact remains that it is not unusual for such "incidental" observations to be made obscurely in liter- ature articles. Many examples will come to mind of "discoveries" made, such as the inhibitory action of penicillin or the herbicidal action of chlordane, effects which had been observed and more than once noted incidentally in the literature- -to be overlooked until favorable circumstances brought about the recognition of the practical significance of the observations. It is not to be expected that published abstracts and indexes would unfailingly include all such incidental observations from each article, nor could the Center claim infallibility in recording all incidental effects in its files. The abstracting policy of the CBCC, however, intended that chemical-biological information from the literature (as well as from other sources) should be thoroughly examined and all effects, including those defined as "incidental" should be included, as the previous paragraph has implied. The fact that the Center frequently omitted coding specifically the many subjective effects described as common "side effects" caused by therapeutic administration of test compounds (headache, nausea, dizziness, etc. ) should not be interpreted to mean that there are ever omitted observations made in the literature representing specific biological responses to test compounds, however incidental they may be to the original intent of the tests. The comparative observations of the preceding paragraphs are based essentially on the three criteria by which chemical-biological information is frequently indexed and to some degree cross- indexed by subject in published indexes to literature. There is a practical limit to cross-indexing in a published index as well as a limit to cross - indexing in index card files. Indeed, there is a practical limit to all cross-indexing, including that done by a center such as the CBCC which concentrates on a given type of Information. The practical extent of the cross -indexing depends on many factors and is not identical for all purposes, all systems, or all types of data. In the case of the CBCC, it has already been explained that every coding field of the Biology Code represents essentially a distinct indexing criterion. Beyond indexing according to the chemical affecting the biological system, the biological system affected, and the response, all test information is indexed according to any hosts (of non-infectious pathology, parasitic organisms, or tumors) involved, any organs, any tissues, the quantities of test compounds needed for given effects, any compounds whose biological effects test compounds influence, developmental stages and the sexes of organisms affected, routes of administration, and so on. Experience with published indexes provides the most convincing evidence of the time necessary to search through volume after volume of the published abstracts to literature or through volumes of the literature itself (to which the published indexes have given reference) to find specific chemical- biological information. When cumulative indexes are not prepared, the task includes searching through consecutive volumes of the index. Compared to the use of published indexes to find information about 215 specific chemicals, organisms, and responses, a search in the CBCC punched card files (where chemicals, organisms, and responses, as well as other Index subjects, are all cross-indexed) is far more rapid and, with regard to that chemical-biological literature covered by the CBCC, more thorough. That it may not be as thorough as certain published indexes, with respect to the total number of journals covered, must be regarded as reflecting only the limitations of the Center during its developing years for covering that quantity of published information. The preceding observations have been concerned in general with abstracting published infor- mation and indexing it according to chemical, organism, and response, for sake of comparison with published abstracts and indexes. It should be recalled, however, that the CBCC made efforts to collect information that had not been published or that was in more obscure or irregular publications and reports given limited distribution. Many tests of a screening nature remain unpublished because of the low priority ordinarily given to such masses of data under circumstances of high costs of publication and the large volume of technical information competing for publication. One reason for the reluctance to publish data of this type is the general disregard for "negative" data which characterizes much of the information from routine screening tests. In summary, the multiple- indexing, coupled with the speed afforded by machines for selection of desired index combinations, represents the basic advantage offered by the CBCC system. Added to this are the two further advantages, (1) the fact that the CBCC attempted to collect unpublished or obscurely published information not apt to be covered by publi^ed indexes and (2) thoroughness in abstracting and indexing original chemical-biological data, whether published or unpublished, resulting from the Center's concentration on that specific area of information. ^ By these means and policies, the Center attempted to develop a system of handling chemical- biological information whereby, having collected the data as thoroughly and carefully as possible, it could be retrieved and correlated as efficiently as possible, by as many subject indexes as that particular information is apt ever to be approached. A particularly fine description of the CBCC, presented against the background of a dissertation on discoveries of therapeutic properties of chemicals, will be found in an article by J. R. M. Innes, The Work of the Chemical- Biological Coordination Center in Relation to Chemotherapy in Veterinary Medicine, J. Am. Vet. Assoc, 116(874) 1950. 216 - APPENDIX B MISCELLANEOUS OBSERVATIONS ON THE BIOLOGY CODE AND KEY AND THE CBCC PROCEDURES Specificity and Adaptability of the Biology Code: The CBCC Biology Code makes no pretense at being complete in terms of the categories of infor- mation nor of the items of any one category. Furthermore, the classification schemes or organization of items within any one information category (e.g. , the organization of biological states, qualities, and processes in Field T-2) may not be entirely satisfactory for coding every type of biological data. For example, if there were wanted to be established a file of information about certain plants, not especially for information about their responses to chemicals, but about their geographical origins, their products, their diseases, and their cultivation requirements, the CBCC Biology Code would hardly be expected to be used in its entirety; moreover, entire new categories of information, such as factors of cultivation, would need to be organized and assigned symbols. Similarly, a file of clinical infor- mation on pathology would demand a code for describing pathological conditions far in excess of the Pathology Code of the Biology Code's Field E which needs to include only those pathologies apt to be experimentally treated with chemicals. At the same time that the Code is not complete in the sense of the foregoing examples, some of the information categories and items within the categories would not be applicable or necessary for coding certain other types of biological data. For example, a file of information restricted to toxic effects on humans would need but a fraction of the terms now included in the Code's Fields T-1 and T-2, nor would a Taxonomy Code and several others of the CBCC Code's fields be needed. On the other hand, in meeting the objectives of the Center, the CBCC Biology Code is no longer regarded as an experimental code for chemical-biological information, except that any of the existing individual sections is candidate for additions, deletions, or rearrangements of items, or of being omitted entirely, if further experience indicates these changes are appropriate. Establishing in the CBCC system provisions for coding new categories of biological information is not impossible, though it would require deleting present fields of the Code to provide room on the IBM punched card for any new fields, or expanding into a second IBM punched card for each code line, or converting to another mechanical system, such as electronic tape. Therefore, the CBCC Biology Code must be examined and evaluated in the light of its specialized intent, the coding of information from tests for effects of chemicals on biological systems. However, at the same time that the Code as a whole has been developed, each of its parts has always been regarded as capable of being used independently and, to that extent, being applicable or adaptable for coding many types of biological information. Thus, beyond the specific use for which the total CBCC Biology Code was developed, it should be regarded as a series of coding patterns which this project has found adequate, any of which might be the basis for elaboration or simplification to fit other coding and indexing needs. Coding of Physical Properties of Chemicals: The CBCC had intended to expand its files to include the coding of physical properties of chemicals tested for biological effects, with the objective of making that information on physical properties available for correlation with biological responses. Regrettably, the design of a physical properties code was never accomplished for the CBCC use, though a number of conferences were held to discuss and plan it. Beyond the significance of physical properties of chemicals as a correlative with biological responses, the CBCC recognized the need for a central reference depository for information on physical properties. The importance of this is reflected in the fact that there has been recently established a center whose objectives are precisely the collection of this information and developing both a code for thermophysical properties of chemicals and a procedure for storing the coded information for mechan- ical retrieval. In January of 1957, by coincidence the date immediately subsequent to the closing of the CBCC, the Thermophysical Properties Research Center was established at Purdue University, within the University's School of Mechanical Engineering, cooperatively financed by a large number of industrial organizations and governmental research agencies. This center was conceived quite 217 Independently of the activities of the CBCC, Its objectives having genesis in needs differing from those which the CBCC was established to satisfy. The TPRC has a vigorous program and has developed a coding system for thirty thermophysical properties of all matter. Information about this coding system and the procedures and objectives of the Thermophysical Properties Research Center should be addressed to the Director of the Center, School of Mechanical Engineering, Purdue University, Lafayette, Indiana. CBCC Experience in Correlation: The Introduction explained the objectives of the Center, the ultimate objective being the correlation of chemical structures (and, eventually, physical properties of chemicals) with responses of biological systems. The CBCC staff earnestly looked forward to seeing correlation studies attempted by investigators, using the information collected by the CBCC. It is a disappointment that, to date, no correlative studies of the scale originally envisioned have been performed with the file of information collected since 1951. The immense task of creating the information file has not permitted the CBCC biologists themselves to use the files for original correlative investigations and, for reasons not all of which are understood, application has not been made to the Center for such studies by other persons and agencies. It has been suggested that, for any intensive correlative study, a special project should be established for coding into the CBCC files all data of the type to be correlated. Neither did time permit accomplishing another important aspect, the study and compilation of specific patterns of retrieval of CBCC coded information, based on coding and machine handling patterns. Requests to the Center for information from its files mostly require simple machine sorting or even only manual selection, but a certain percentage have involved making associations which required more broad programming of retrieval and collation. Qualifications of Coders; Residence vs. Non-residence of Coders: This particular aspect is to be discussed, because it has played an important role in the Center's efficient functioning and because the Center's experience Is expected to be of some value in the deliberations for establishing other coding projects. The Center experimented at one time with employing students of local universities for coding at the Center under supervision. It also tried persons who had had less training and experience than did the coders the Center finally used. These experiments were comparatively short lived. In each case, the quality of coding was such that the arrangement was obviously impractical. All the coders of the Center's last five or six years were professionally trained biologists, most of whom were not residents of the Washington, D. C. area and who found it convenient to spend part or all of their time coding for the Center. Since 1952, the number of non-resident coders remained fairly constant, somewhere between ten and fifteen, each submitting monthly a Set of coding varying In quantity according to their schedules. The procedures for acceptance as a coder have been described in the section discussing selec- tion and coding of information (Appendix A, CBCC Procedures). From the CBCC experience, two ob- servations about finding and training of coders are especially worth mentioning. First, persons with qualifications for being good coders and who coincidentally have access to the literature and can discipline themselves to a regular schedule are not legion. The CBCC had the good fortune to have a number of such persons who remained generally consistent in their work for the Center till its close. It is not to be taken for granted, in establishing a coding program demanding special coders, that finding satisfactory coders, training them, and holding them, as non-resident personnel, is always a simple matter. Secondly, the CBCC experience has been that a minimum period of six months to a year is needed for adequate training of a coder to a point of reasonable efficiency and dependability in coding chemical-biological test data. The problems inherent in non-residence of coders demand some consideration. Many factors must be balanced in deciding which procedure a project can best support- - non-resident coders, demanding a full complement of resident clerical staff to maintain records and a professional staff member's time corresponding with them, as opposed to salaried resident coders. It is impossible here to suggest all the determining factors for this for any given program, but some of the difficulties encountered in the CBCC system and described in the following paragraphs might be enlightening. - 218 - It must be pointed out that non-resident coding of chemical -biological test Information by the CBCC Biology Code can not be strictly compared to the usual non-resident abstracting and indexing which does not involve coding. This is not to say that a simple coding program involving only organisms' identities, or only specific effects, or only specific chemicals might not be comparable to ordinary indexing. However, the extraction and coding of all aspects of a chemical-biological test is another and more complex matter. Communication between coder, checker, arbitrator, and the Center was without a doubt, one of the more trying aspects of the Center's procedures and if any one factor would influence a decision about the residence of coders, this would probably be the most convincing. Errors in interpretation of literature data, in coding, and in interpretation of the Key to the Code could only be avoided by advis- ing the coder of errors he had already made; an error could only be discovered by the checker and communicated to the Center. Repeated efforts to establish a system of "comment sheets" for this communication was never very successful, partly because of the unavoidable gaps of time between the material leaving the coder's hands and his receipt of comments about his errors. Furthermore, once the coder or checker received the notification of his errors, he never had the coded Sheets on which the errors occurred so that frequently the comments, unless they were extraordinarily thorough explan- ations, conveyed little. As a result, when it was finally discovered that a coder was consistently making a coding error, a special letter had most frequently to be prepared to point out and discuss the matter. Remuneration for coders on a regular basis, considering its problems, was organized to a satisfactory level of efficiency, but never was free of flaws, partly because of the complex system which demanded that payment not be made for code lines which the checker or Center had deleted as unjustifiable or erroneous. A problem to be considered with resident coders is that of efficiency in an unbroken routine of coding. The staff members' own experience has been that it is not possible to restrict professional activity to coding without eventually arriving at a point of ennui and consequent inefficiency. Thus, although the CBCC never arrived at a totally satisfactory answer to the matter of coding personnel, it would be strongly recommended that, for thorough and complex coding comparable to that done by the CBCC, an arrangement using resident coders whose routine can be varied might be far preferable to attempting establishment of a system for a staff of non-resident coders. Checking of Abstracting and Coding: It seems impossible to overemphasize the importance of coding information correctly and according to a standardized procedure. Errors in coding and punching can only mean information that is lost to retrieval or retrieval of unwanted information. It must be recognized that this process of information "in-put" is dependent on human intelligence and subject to human error; the success of the result of retrieval and correlation depends on holding that error to a minimum. To assure that information entering the files was coded (indexed) accurately, the CBCC found no alternative to having the coding checked and arbitrated. (See the descriptions of these procedures in Appendix A. ) In establishing any new project in which information is coded, the question of checking the accuracy of coders' "translations" into code is apt to be weighed carefully. Checking has been viewed variously by persons contemplating such a program; frequently, the attitude is expressed that checking is desirable but impractical, or even that it is superfluous. Others concede checking to be essential. It would be unreasonable to attempt to formulate, for all prospective coding projects, a fixed recommendation about the extent of checking, since so many variables are involved. Neverthe- less, the CBCC experience would discourage any idea that checking in some form and for some period of time can be avoided, except perhaps in building coded information collections in which the material coded has very little variation and the coding is extremely brief and all done by the same coder or a continuous coding staff. In spite of the care exercised in coding and checking, the Center not infrequently discovered major coding errors on Code Sheets, even after the coding had been punched and filed. Nevertheless, the CBCC felt it had arrived at the point of diminishing returns in the process of checking the coded data entering its files. A certain small number of coding errors had to be accepted as unavoidable within its coding system, just as some factor of error must be established for any suchsystem. 219 - Speed of Processing Information into the CBCC Files; Currency and Content of the Files: Frequently, in an effort to understand the Center and evaluate it as a source of chemical- biological information, the Center was asked how quickly after issuance published data was incorpor- ated into its files, as well as how completely the published literature was represented by the infor- mation in the files. This inquiry had the general objective of evaluating the Center's files primarily on the basis of comparison with currency and coverage of published abstracts and indexes, a more obvious criterion perhaps than evaluation on the basis of the other advantages which the Center felt were its multiple indexing and use of machines. Certainly the factors of currency and completeness of coverage were Important ones. To consider the factor of completeness of the literature coverage by the CBCC files first, it should be recognized that the present CBCC information collection only began in late 1951 and 1952, prior to which most of the Center's efforts were spent in developing and testing codes and procedures. Starting from essentially nothing, it took a year or so to establish a steady flow of coded information. From early 1953 to the end of 1956 when the Center was closed, the volume of flow of coded information into the files remained generally at the same level. The fact that the volume rate did not increase to any marked degree can be accounted for in part by the fact that the number of the Center's resident staff and its non-resident coding staff remained at about the same level; it is also evidence that the speed of information flow (discussed in the following paragraph) was perhaps near the speed possible for the system at a given staff level. During those initial years, the coverage of the literature, even considering the limitation to specifically chemical -biological data, could not pretend to be complete and, regarded in strict comparison, the coverage in terms of number of journals reviewed, could hardly compete with the old established abstracting and indexing publications. As was pointed out in another place, the CBCC, realizing its initial limited capacities for covering the literature, concen- trated on the forty of fifty journals that proved by a preliminary survey to be most productive of chemical-biological information. Also, it attempted especially to include certain information which it knew was not apt to be covered routinely by published abstracts and indexes. With regard to currency of the files, the Center estimated the average lapse of one year from the date published information was selected for the files to the date the coded and punched information was actually incorporated into the files and thereby made available by the routine CBCC retrieval processes. The several steps in selecting and processing data are described in Appendix A. Certain of these steps may be seen to take a month (or be separated by a month) or longer; by reviewing all the steps, it will be understood why the speed of processing data was not much less than a year for any given unit. The preceding time value expresses the speed by which any given information unit progressed from the date of its selection to the date of its entry into the files. It does not indicate actual time which the coders, checkers, arbitrators, chemists, IBM punch operators, and clerical staff spent on a given unit. From records submitted by coders, checkers, and other staff members involved, the Center estimated that each code line entered into the files took a total of one hour for all steps of its preparation and entry into the files. This included the coder's time in studying the information and constructing the code line, the checking and arbitrating time, a propoition of the clerical time spent on an average Set, a proportion of the chemists' time spent on the average Sheet, the IBM operators' punching time, and a proportion of the time for filing Code Sheets and IBM punched cards. The Center believed that by enlarging the size of its biology staff to perhaps twice the number of members (i. e. , to approximately eight or ten resident biologists with a corresponding increase in biology coders), the coverage of the published general chemical-biological literature, in addition to the acquisition of unpublished data, could have been more satisfactorily complete and review of this literature made more promptly after its issuance. If, in addition, the system was altered so that coding might have been done by resident coders, the speed of selecting and processing, as well as the volume, might have been increased to give the files an increased currency of published data. Though abstracts of the literature may be published relatively quickly, the indexes of chemical- biological literature are at present published only after periods of well over a year after the literature's issuance. Therefore, the Center's ability to have the information coded and incorporated into its files within a year or less, even though it would be desirable to have it entered even more quickly, repre- sents an advantage in currency over most published indexes. 220 - Use of the Center's Coded Chemical- Biological Information: The CBCC collection of chemical-biological information organized on a mechanical system was offered, as an information source, to any interested scientist or scientific agency. In particular, it was offered as a means for original academic studies in correlations, especially those which have practical scientific and industrial significance. The Center had perhaps as many requests for the special information of its files as it was capable of handling, carrying on all other activities simultaneously and adequately. This, however, is not equivalent to saying that the Center's files were used sufficiently or that they were used in ways exploiting their greatest potential. It goes without saying that the CBCC files had first to be known to exist before they could be consulted. But awareness of the Center's existence, without understanding its specific activities and their scope and limitations, could not stimulate the most efficient use of the files. As a repository for chemical-biological test information, the Center might be compared to a young library whose existence and specialization had gradually to be learned by the scientific community. Paradoxically, the failure of scientists to use the Center frequently and to exploit the system of organization fully has occasionally been regarded as evidence that the information collection had not actually been needed and that the system failed to provide correlation of any significance. During the first years following 1951, the Center was torn between feeling compelled to provide justifying evidence of its scientific and industrial value and the apprehension that its being consulted before its collection had grown to a significant size would result in dissatisfied users. A considerable effort was made to advertise the Center at meetings of appropriate professional societies and through published articles, activities which in themselves impeded progress by occupying appreciable pro- fessional time of staff members. The results of these efforts were gratifying, but inadequate. While the Center received many requests, the response did not represent the greater magnitude of use which the CBCC was certain exists as a potential. The Center has not been convinced that lack of education to the Center's files and their values is not primarily the reason they were not more frequently consulted and it was equally convinced that the growth of the files, their continued use, and the spread of information about the results of their use would eventually establish the reputation the files deserved as the single center for data of their nature and the most fully adequate means for correlative studies of either a broad or limited scope. A related aspect to be considered is that of reliability. A scientist does not place his confi- dence easily on information sources of unproved reliability and the scientifically trained staff of the CBCC were fully appreciative of this. The degree to which the information coded by the CBCC staff could be relied on for accuracy might only have been learned gradually; it was not enough for the CBCC to claim its own virtue of accuracy. The CBCC felt that its procedures for checking its coding provided accuracy to the greatest degree apt to be possible for information of such a complex nature as that in its files. It can not be predicted at what point confidence of the scientific community would have been placed on the accuracy of CBCC coding. Until that confidence had been won, the coded information files of the CBCC would not have been used by every investigator to his greatest advantage. The response to information received from the CBCC as a result of a search of its files was generally favorable. If, during the first years, the results of an information search in the CBCC files could not have the quality of completeness, the Center felt the retrieved information did have other qualities fully justifying the effort. Especially, if among the data retrieved from the files and applying to a given inquiry, there were some which would not have been included in published abstracts and indexes, it was felt that the Center's files had contributed valuable information to the requester. Secondly, what data was included in the CBCC files that was also indexed by published indexes could be approached in many ways other than by the two or three subject index criteria of published Indexes and the possibility therefore existed that chemical- biological test data relevant to the specific infor- mation request would be retrieved from the CBCC files which could not have been found in the published index. Like many other possible studies, no comparative studies were made to determine the actual incidence of this. Aspirations of the Center: The Center was occasionally inspired to considerations of activities collateral with its principal goals, reflecting its broadest concept of the role such a center might play in its specialized scientific community. Three examples of these might be mentioned before summarizing the major aims. - 221 - One idea grew from the encountering of coding difficulties due, for example, to the frequent omission of details of test technique or to the obscurity of details needed for the CBCC code line (including adequate identification of chemicals and organisms used) or to the omission of test measure- ments leading to an author's evaluation. It seemed possible that the preparation and distribution of a set of recommendations for preparing chemical-biological data for publication might be eventually a logical undertaking of the Center. Possibly merely the general use of the Center would have demon- strated the necessity of including details of tests which might permit subsequent correlation with infor- mation from other tests of similar or diverse natures. The CBCC might have served as a depository and reference center for methods of testing for, and evaluation of, chemical actions on biological systems and, further, might have been influential thereby in standardization of testing methods, for which a need is generally felt today. This activity could conceivably and logically have grown out of the CBCC experience with its own diversified Screening Program and from its general information collection. It seems likely that an increasing number of specialized biological and chemical information collections will be established in the near future, many needing classification and coding schemes for categories of information not needed for chemical- biological test data. Uses, activities, geo- graphical distributions and origins, diets, and requirements of organisms, as well as physical prop- erties of chemicals and processes and reagents used in chemicals' syntheses are examples of such categories, any one of which might be needed for more than one information collection. The develop- ment, assistance in development, or the collection of these classification and coding schemes for information categories accessory to the categories needed specifically by the CBCC might reasonably have been a function of the Center and a function of considerable value, judging from inquiries re- ceived by the Center about schemes for these categories. The major and more concretely defined aspirations of the Center were implicit in its name. It hoped to serve as a coordinator for development of methods for handling chemical- biological information- - to be able, as a result of its pioneering efforts, to serve as a consultant to programs anywhere con- cerned with related information-handling problems. It also hoped to be coordinative of testing programs in the sense of making available chemical-biological information by collecting and exhaustively indexing unpublished as well as published data falling within that definition, the objective being to prevent, to the extent possible, duplication of effort and to suggest new directions of testing. Related to this, it aspired to studies of a correlative nature (chemical structure and biological response), using data from its coded information collection. Its Screening Program's objective was coordinative in that the Program served as a clearing house for untested chemicals and biological testing facilities. Finally, it regarded as possible even coordination for, or assistance in, related activities of which the sponsoring of sym- posia and the collection of standard testing methods might be named as examples. While these aspirations were never to be fully or, in some cases, even partially realized, it can now at least be hoped that the Biology Code and Key and the observations made here on the Center's functioning and use of the Codes will be found useful guides for future efforts in coding biological and chemical-biological information. The published Codes, both Chemical and Biology, may perhaps prove the distillate of, and only memorial to, the effort and ambitions of the CBCC. 222